•^•'■; 
 
 *i. 
 
 'M 
 
 
 ?;■?.': 
 
 ■ s 
 
 
 .U'l': 
 
 fc'r.i*' 
 
 
 
 ^■f.5•/.:/!T.;,^■-■,:•,'l ■ 
 [iv*^- ■■:*/;;'■•■ • 
 
 a'... . :,v:., • 
 
 
 
 
<- N4 
 
 PRKSENTi:n BY 
 
 /?^ 54 
 
■7 
 
 -m 
 ^ 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
EXERCISES 
 
 ON 
 
 THE SYNTAX 
 
 OP THE 
 
 GREEK LANGUAGE 
 
 BY 
 
 THE REV. WILLIAM NEILSON, D. D. 
 
 A NEW EDITION, CORRECTED AND ENLARGED. 
 
 TO WHICH ARE SUBJOINED,' 
 
 EXERCISES IN METAPHRASIS, PARAPHRASI^ 
 DIALECTS, AND PROSODY. 
 
 TOGETHER WITH 
 
 AN HISTORICAL SKETCH OF THE DIALECTS ; THE DOCTRINE Of 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE, WITH EXPLANATORY EXAMPLES ; 
 
 A STATEMENT OF OPINIONS RESPECTING THE 
 
 GREEK ACCENTS ; AND 
 
 TWO APPENDICES, 
 
 ILLUSTRATIVE OF THE LEADING PRINCIPLES OP tHE, 
 GREEK SYNTAX. 
 
 CHARLES ANTHON, 
 
 ADTONCT PROrESSOR OF LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW-TOtt' 
 
 NEW-YORK: 
 
 SWORDS, STANFORD, AND Co. 
 
 152 Broadway. 
 
 Stereotyped by J. Conner 
 
 1834 
 
•?N' 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 
 Southern Disirid of New- York, ss. 
 
 Be it remembered, that on the ninth day of March, A. D. 1825, in the 
 49th year of the Independence of the Ur.itod States of America, T. tf« J. 
 Swords, of the said District, have deposited in tliis Office the title of a 
 book, the right whereof they claim as Proprietors, in the worde following, 
 to wii : 
 
 '• Exercises on the Syntax of the Greek Language. By the Rev. Wil- 
 liam Neilson, D. D. Corrected and enlarged. To which are subjoined. 
 Exercises in Metaphrasis, ParaphrasLs, Dialects, and Prosody : together 
 with an historical Sketch of the Dialects; the Doctrine cf "the Middle 
 Voice, with explanatory Examples; a Statement of Opinions res|)ectiRg 
 the Greek Accents ; and two Appendices, illustrative of the leading Prin- 
 ciples of the Greek Syntax. By Charles Anthon. Adjunct Professor of 
 Languages in Columbia College, New-York. 
 
 In conformity to the Act of the Congress of the United States, entitled 
 " An Act for the Encourage m.eut of Learning, by securing the Copies cf 
 Maps, Charts, and Books, to the Authors ^andJProprietors of such Copies, 
 during the time therein mentioned.-' And also to an Act. entitled " An 
 Act, supplementary to an Act, entitled An Act for the Encouragement of 
 Leanaing, by securing the Copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, to the Au- 
 thors and Proprietors of such Copies, during the times therein mentioned, 
 and extending the benefits thereof to the Arts of Designing, Engraving, 
 and Etching Historical and other Prints." .. . -?- 
 
 JAMES DILL, 
 Clerk of the Southern District of Ncip- Turk. 
 Qtll 
 W T.. •'^'-oo-nakQr 
 
 7 S '06 
 
TO 
 
 THE REV. WILLIAM HARRIS, D.D. 
 
 FKXSIDSNT OF COLiJHBlA COU.EGS, ]7XW>T0IUL 
 
 Rev. and dear Sir, 
 
 As a feeble return for numerous acts of kindness, 
 allow me the privilege of inscribing to you this little 
 volume, and of indulging, at the same time, the flatter- 
 ing hope that it may not prove altogether unworthy of 
 your notice. I shall esteem myself peculiarly fortunate, 
 if my humble labours can secure the approbation of one 
 in whom private and public worth are so intimately 
 blended, and under whose fostering care our Institution 
 has made so rapid a progress in the career of improve- 
 ment. 
 
 The work which I take the liberty of presenting, 
 must, of course, stand or fall by its own merits ; yet I 
 cannot omit the present opportunity of Irespassing a lit- 
 tle on your kind attention, while I state a few particulars 
 respecting the plan which has been pursued in it. The 
 Greek Exercises of Dr. Neilson, long and advantageously 
 known in this country and in Great Britain, had come 
 into very general use, when, by an occurrence tmfortn- 
 nately but too common in the case of some of our most 
 valuable school-books, a blow was inflicted ;^hich ren- 
 dered the work perfectly useless. From a s^irange mis- 
 conception of the true mode of education, an edition of 
 a2 
 
( vi ) 
 
 the Exercises made its appearance in this country some 
 -years back, with a key actually annexed, and thus the 
 good effect»of a work which would otherwise have proved 
 so useful an auxiliary to the student, became in an in- 
 stant completely neutralized. The consequence has been, 
 that the Greek Exercises of Dr. Neilson have gradually 
 been disused, and are, it is believed, retained at the pre- 
 sent day by few of our preceptors. The peculiar and 
 lasting advantages which result from the practice of 
 Greek and Latin composition, in giving a closer and 
 more accurate view of the grammatical forms of these 
 languages, must be conceded by all ; and it is therefore 
 a subject of deep regret, that a most valuable branch of 
 classical instruction should have been for a long time ren- 
 dered so utterly unproductive. 
 
 The object of the present work is to supply, if pos- 
 sible, the place of the former edition of Dr. Neilson's 
 Exercises ; in order to accomplish which end, such al- 
 terations and additions have been made as must render 
 the key to the previous edition of no value whatever. 
 The general outline las been indeed retained, but the 
 materials of which the volume is composed will be found 
 to be more than two-thirds entirel}^ new. While the 
 old selections have been pretty generally thrown out^ 
 others have been called in to supply their places from 
 the best ancient writers, and not a few have been taken 
 from the Greek Exercises of Bishop Huntingford and 
 Professor Dunbar. It has been my endeavour to select 
 from the two works h^t mentioned all that appeared use- 
 ful, and at the same time to procure whatever was valu- 
 able from every other accessible quarter. The second 
 pait of the volume, commencing Avith the Exercises in 
 Met^phrasis, is all new. Here the plan of Dr. Neilson 
 apperred radically defective, in annexing poetical instead 
 of pro5e translations to the Exercises in Metaphrasis, 
 &c. wUch his work contained. I have added to my se- 
 lections a prose version, " korrida quidem el barbara" 
 yet necessarily so, in order to be of any real use to the 
 student The Exercises on the Greek Dialects, and also 
 those in Prosody, have been all taken from the best wri- 
 
( vh) 
 
 tera of antiquity ; and it is hoped that the History of the 
 Dialects will not prove uninstructive. The Doctrine of 
 the Middle Verb, which is next in the order of the vo- 
 lume, will, I trust, not be unacceptable to the pupil, since 
 it will serve to explain what might otherwise appear to 
 him a strange and unaccountable anomaly. The gram- 
 marians of the present day have thought fit to attack the 
 doctrine of the Middle Voice, and have been led to view 
 it merely as another form for the Passive. The Perfect 
 Middle in like manner they have dignified with the ap- 
 pellation of the Second Perfect Active, insisting that its 
 meaning is never a middle one. I may be unfortunate 
 in not possessing the same degree of critical acumen 
 with those who imagine that they have discovered what 
 has hitherto escaped the observation of the ablest scho- 
 lars, and yet I cannot but think that attempts such as 
 these, to remove the very landmarks of a language, and 
 introduce confusion and disorder on the ruins of a most 
 beautiful system, are at once unnecessary and uncalled 
 for. The Doctrine of the Middle Voice, and the Re- 
 marks on the Middle Perfect, as they are given in the 
 present work, must speak for themselves. Should the 
 student feel desirous of any farther information on the 
 subject, he is referred to the admirable Treatise of Kiis- 
 ter. 
 
 The Statement of Opinions respecting the Greek Ac- 
 cents presents, in a small compass, the collected opinions 
 of some of the ablest scholars on this long-agitated to- 
 pic. The student is left to draw his own conclusions. 
 No accents have been given in the present work, because 
 it is my misfortune to consider them as " mute and un- 
 mcaniiig marks ;" and until we are taught in what way 
 they were used and applied by the ancients, I shall 
 always consider it the height of classical affectation to 
 talk and argue learnedly of things, respecting the true 
 nature of which the best among us profess to be pro- 
 foundly ignorant. 
 
 The Appendices whicli are annexed to the volume, 
 will account for the absence from the present edition of 
 
( viii ) 
 
 the chapter on Ellipses. The doctrine of Ellipses, in 
 itself very plausible and captivating, has been pushed so 
 far by its advocates, as to exhibit a complete tissue of 
 the most egregious trifling. That there are Ellipses in 
 Greek as well as in every other language, no one will 
 deny. The very effect of the gradual improving of a 
 language is to produce them. But that they exist in eve- 
 ry sentence, nay, in almost every clause or phrase of 
 that sentence, is what can never be assented to. Such 
 a doctrine as this, while it serves to exclude from the 
 view of the student the simple and beautiful principles 
 which regulate the operations of one of the noblest of 
 languages, cannot fail to narrow his views of language 
 in general, and keep him continually groping after some 
 visionary ellipsis. It is on this account that so little will 
 be found in the present work on this subject. In stating 
 the rules indeed, as they have been handed down by suc- 
 cessive grammarians, I have been necessarily led to adopt 
 their language, but in the first Appendix have claimed 
 the privilege of giving a more liberal view of the doc- 
 trine from the best writers. 
 
 In the Rules of Syntax, an asterisk has been affixed 
 to the new rules which are added in this edition, and 
 to those of the old ones which have been altered in 
 their phraseology. This mark vv'as affixed in the pre- 
 vious editions, to those rules which were supposed to 
 differ from Latin construction. In many instances, how^- 
 ever, it was necessarily a very fallacious expedient, 
 since often w^hen the idioms of the two languages ap- 
 pear at first view widely remote, they may be found, 
 on a closer examination, to have numerous points of 
 resemblance. 
 
 Each chapter of the Exercises is divided into three 
 parts. The first contains plain and easy sentences, 
 which should be rendered into correct Greek before the 
 other parts of the chapters are attempted. The second 
 embraces more variety of expression, and exemplifies 
 the rules promiscuously, as well as the particular one 
 prefixed to each chapter : this part extends from the 
 mark ^ to the end of the English sentences. The third 
 
(ix) 
 
 portion is small, and consists of Latin sentences, which 
 are to be rendered into Greek. These would have been 
 given in English, and been made more numerous, had 
 we possessed an English-Greek Lexicon for schools. 
 
 In order to occasion as little trouble as possible to the 
 pupil, the Greek forms of the verbs have in general been 
 given according to the Lexicon of Schrevelius. This 
 will be particularly apparent in the verbs sru, Si6su, and 
 si5u. To the first of these sjttov has been assigned as a 
 
 sond aorist, when it properly should be formed from 
 the Ionic jj^w ; and sictw is used with the meaning of " to 
 know," and si5:: with that of " to see," when in fact they 
 are one and the same verb, enJsw contracted stt^w, signify- 
 ing " to know," and having in the second aorist the mean- 
 ing '• to see." 
 
 But I have trespassed too long, I fear, upon your at- 
 tention. Permit me, in conclusion, to entertain the hope 
 that my labours, in the present instance, may not pi-ove 
 wholly useless, and that they may serve in some little 
 deofrce to aid tiic knowledge of a lan^i^uaoje " which has 
 the highest claims on the attention of mankind, as be- 
 ing the fountain of all the blessings that enrich and 
 adorn society, and more especially as the sacred deposi- 
 tory of that revelation which is the fairest gift of God 
 to man." 
 
 1 have the honour to remain. 
 Very respectfully, 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 
 CHARLES ANTHON. 
 
To Charles Anthon, Esq., Adjunct Professor of 
 Languages in Columbia College, New-York. 
 
 Columbia College, March 4, 1825. 
 
 Dear Sir, 
 
 When first you intimated to me your intention of 
 editing the Greek Exercises of Dr. Neilson, I had httle 
 doubt, from my knowledge of your perfect competency 
 to execute the work, that it would prove %Vorthy of public 
 patronage ; but since I have been favoured w4th the 
 perusal 6f it, in justice to you I must acknow^ledge that 
 it greatly exceeds all the expectations I had entertained 
 of its utility. In writing Greek or Latin exercises, the 
 student is benefited cliiefiy by the' use of his powers of 
 judgment, of discrimination, and of taste; but when 
 recourse can be had to a translation or a key, these most 
 important ends are entirely defeated. Your book is a 
 complete remedy for this evil, and, with many and great 
 additional advantages, supplies the place of the former 
 edition of Dr. Neilson's Exercises. 
 
 Permit me. Sir, to congratulate you on the completion 
 of the work, and to express my earnest desire that it may 
 speedily be adopted in all our classical schools. 
 
 That you may experience this satisfaction from your 
 useful labours, and may long be continued to benefit, by 
 your able and faithful instructions, the youth of this city, 
 and particularly the students of Columbia College, is, 
 dear Sir, the sincere wish of 
 
 Your obliged and faithful friend, 
 
 WILLIAM HARRIS. 
 
( a ) 
 
 REMARKS NECESSARY TO BE OBSERVED IN 
 WRITING GREEK. 
 
 1. The final letter is generally cut off (except in verbs) 
 from words ending in a, s, /, o, a», or ci, when the following 
 word begins with a vowel ; as, rtavr' sXsyov. 
 
 2. Most words ending in tfi, and all verbs in s and f, take 
 V, when the following word begins with a vowel ; as, Eixotfjv 
 
 3. N is changed into 7, in compounds, before x, 7, p^, and 
 into f*, before ir, /3, cp, 4^ ; as, Ey^^'w, (f~vi).(p\syu. 
 
 4. When the following word begins with an aspirated 
 vowel, the tenuis, or intermediate consonant preceding, is 
 changed into an aspirate ; as, A(p' ov. 
 
 5. Ex is used before a consonant, £| before a vowel, Ov is 
 used before a consonant, ovx before a soft vowel, oup( before an 
 aspirated one. 
 
 6. The Attics use all contractions. 
 
 The order of the sentences, in each voice, in the first chapter 
 of the Exercises, is as follows : Present, Imperfect, 1st Future, 
 2d Future, 1st Aorist, 2d Aorist, Perfect, Pluperfect, and in 
 the passive, Paulo post future. 
 
 The manner of expression, in which each tense is trans- 
 lated in the first chapter, is retained, in general, throuchout 
 the work : but as this could not be always done, and as there 
 are many varieties of expression, which the most literal trans- 
 lation could not ascertain, small English letters and figures are 
 afiixed to such Greek words as might probably be rendered 
 improperly. 
 
 After a Verb — 
 
 " denotes Active. 
 ™ - - Middle. 
 P - - Passive. 
 
( ^ ) 
 
 ^ denotes 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 • 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 - 
 
 1st Future. 
 
 
 - 
 
 2d Future. 
 
 
 - 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 
 - 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 
 . 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 
 - 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 
 - 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 
 - 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 
 . 
 
 Optative. 
 
 
 - 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 s 
 
 - . - 
 
 Participle. 
 
 I 
 
 After a Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, or ParticipU 
 
 m 
 
 denot 
 
 83 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 f 
 
 
 . 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 ne 
 
 
 - 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 » 
 
 
 - 
 
 Singular. 
 
 (lU 
 
 
 . 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Pl 
 
 
 - 
 
 Plural* 
 
 n 
 
 
 - 
 
 Nominative. 
 
 { 
 
 
 - 
 
 Genitive. 
 
 d 
 
 
 - 
 
 , Dative. 
 
 & 
 
 
 - 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 ' * In the early part of the volume, P^ is used to denote the plural, afloT" 
 wards the letter p alone is retained. 
 
RULES 
 
 OP 
 
 GREEK SYNTAX. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The article is used to mark a distinction or emphasis. 
 With the infinitive it supplies the place of nouns, gerunds, 
 and supines. With a participle, it is translated by the relative 
 and indicative. With fi-ev and 6s it signifies partly ; and it is 
 often used for ornament : as, 
 
 Ai(f-)(yXog 6 'r^a7W(5oj. iEschylus the tragedian. 
 
 Kaxwv Twv cr^jv /xvsiav ej^siv. .To remember former evils. 
 
 Ta s^oj. The things without. 
 
 Ev T60 cppcvsiv. In wisdom. 
 
 'O B^-/p\t<zws. He that cometh. 
 
 T' av^^w^rsjov ysvog rrj fjisv aya- Mankind are partly good, and 
 
 (9ov, Tj] 5s (pauXov. partly bad. 
 
 'H vixv] >) vix^jo'afl'a rov xorf/xov rj Faith, the victory which oveis 
 
 "eKfltg, comes the world. 
 
 CONCORD. 
 
 ADJECTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 *2. Adjectives, adjective pronouns, and participles, agret 
 with their respective substantives in gender, number, a^d 
 case ; as, 
 
 Av6^sg ayadoi. Good men. 
 
 AuTTj •n'oXfj. This city. 
 
 Ila^ov /Asvos. Present courage. 
 
 A 
 
2 CONCORD. 
 
 *3. An adjective is often put absolutely In the neuter gen- 
 der, xf'Jf*") commonly, xrrjfxa, cr^ayaa, and £^yov, sometimes 
 being understood ; as, . 
 
 O^^ov ^ aX-ri&nct asi. Truth is always a right thing. 
 
 'H <aT|is (piXrarov (S^oroig, To men their country is most 
 
 dear. 
 
 *4. The adjective is often fomid ^vithout any substantive 
 with which it agrees, the latter having been omitted, or being 
 easy to be supplied by the mind ; as, 
 
 *0 (focpos- The wise man. 
 
 'H oPdri, • The straight road. 
 
 Ta s^a. My property. 
 
 5. An adjective is sometimes put in a different gender frona 
 the substantive with which it stands, as agreeing with some 
 other substantive understood ; as, 
 
 Adr]VYi Aios tsxos ar^uTwvTj. Minerva, invincible daughter 
 
 of Jove. 
 
 f! 4'yX'*' *^ f**^^' ■^^^*i^* O '• 20^1 "^v^o ^^s^ ^0^ heen 
 
 gratified. 
 
 6. Participles and adjectives are often put, by attraction, 
 in the same case with, the noun or pronoun to which they 
 refer; as, 
 
 OwfASvwv e«va» tfocpuTarwv av^^w- Thinking themselves to be the 
 <wv, wisest of men. 
 
 VERB AND NOMINATIVE. 
 
 7. A verb agrees with its nominative, in number and per- 
 son ; as, 
 
 Zsu|ig sy^a-]>s, Zeuxis painted. 
 
 Oip^a\aoj XaiAffSrov, His eyes shine. 
 
 KaTfl;dou(3'«v o^vj^s^. Birds sing. 
 
 8. Neuters in the plural have commonly verbs singular ; 
 as, 
 
 Ta jSeXii exifivlei. The darts fall out. 
 
 Tw a^yuficj us'orarffl'eTat flravra. All things are subject to mo-, 
 
 ney. 
 
 *9. Nouns of multitude take either a singular or plural 
 verb or participle, and sometimes both in the same sentence ; 
 
CONCORD. 3 
 
 2'n'ou(5i7 5' k^sro Xao?, B^rirokv And the people sat down in 
 (for c^/jTu^ijCav) 6s xa^sJ^aj. haste and kept their seats. 
 
 10. .Substantive verbs, verbs passive of naming, and verbs 
 of gesture, have a nominative both before and after them, ber 
 longing to the same thing ; as, 
 
 Tjxsic: ssls TO (pug tou '/.(nffiov. Ye are the light of the world. 
 Krxxoov S'TfixoKviiiia zgIiv 6 -rXou- Wealth is the cloak of e\ils. 
 
 11. The infinitives of substantive verbs, such as sivai, 
 yiv£3'5af, &c. have the same case after them that goes before 
 them ; as, 
 
 Touc (x?v £i5o<raj Taura -Jj/siro He thoLight that those who 
 -otXous 5<a» a^/adouj £jva<, <rouj knew these things were 
 a ayvooovTaj av5^a'7ro5w5si^ good and honourable ; but 
 av ^ixajwff jcsxXiifl'^aj. that those who were igno- 
 
 rant of them should be 
 justly called slavish. 
 
 12. The infinitive mood has an accusative before it, when 
 its agent or subject is different fi-om thEPt of the preceding 
 verb ; but a nominative, when they are the same ; as, 
 
 Ti l^^Q-ovs (p^ovsiv Xsyou^'i ; Why do they say that mortal 
 
 men are wise ? 
 E5c{|£ 'rfoXsiuog simi fSccfiXsi, He showed that he himself 
 
 was an enemy to the king. 
 
 *13. When the preceding verb and the infinitive relate to 
 the same person, the pronoun, unless emphatical, is omitted 
 before the latter ; but when they relate to different persons, 
 the pronoun must be expressed ; as, 
 
 E(|5r) j7]T£jv. He said he was seeking. 
 
 Asyu tf? SiSsvai tolmto., I say that thou knowest these 
 
 things. 
 
 RELATIVE AND ANTECEDENT. 
 
 14. The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and 
 number. If there come no nominative between the relative 
 and the verb, the relative is the nominative to the verb ; but 
 if there do, the relative is governed by some word expressed 
 or understood ; as, 
 
 Av5^£j oj sicfovTai. Men who will know. 
 
 *0 Xoyos ov ejcrs. The word which he spoke. 
 
• CONCORD. 
 
 15. The Attics and Ionics often put the relative, by attrac- 
 tion, in the same case with the antecedent ; q,nd sometimes 
 the antecedent in the same case with the relative ; as, 
 n^oj Tourojff oi^ Xsysi SBvo(pm. In addition to the things which 
 
 Xenophon saj's. 
 OvTos sdriv 6v "Ksysig oM&^uirov, This is the man of whom thou 
 
 speakest. 
 
 *16. The relative with its clause often stands, as in Latin, 
 before its antecedent, when the leading idea of the whole 
 period is contained in it ; as, 
 
 'A crcisiv aid-x^^ovj ravta, vo^a/^s Think that it is not even be- 
 fj-'/jJc Xs-yuv sivai xaXov. coming to mention what it 
 
 is disgraceful to perform. 
 
 *17. When the relative, by means of a verb like " ^(yj;^,'' 
 " to name" " to belkve^^' is joined with a noun in the same case, 
 it conforms itself, in gender and number, to this noun, and not 
 to that which is its proper antecedent ; as, 
 
 Ua^sCTiv aucw (po§oc:, *jv a»5w He has a fear which we call 
 xaXou/;<ev. • shame. 
 
 •GENERAL RULES. 
 
 18, A noun of the dual number may have a verb, adjective, 
 or relative plural ; but a plural noun can only have a verb, 
 adjective, or relative dual, when it signifies two ; as, 
 
 Afxq;« eXsyov. They both said. 
 
 'Q^ av£|Xo» ouo o^ivE-Tov. As two winds excite. 
 
 ^i\cf.s TSfj ■)(^sip /3aXw/x£v. Let us put our hands around. 
 
 19. Two or more substantives singular have a verb, adjec- 
 tive, or relative plural. If they be of different persons or gen- 
 ders, the verb or adjective will agree v.-ith the most worth}- ; 
 if they signify things without life, the adjective -is commonly 
 in the neuter ; as, 
 
 Eav aSsKipos r, a(5sXq)7j yviJ.voi ^ If a brother or sister be 
 
 xiitoL^udi. naked. 
 
 Aj 6\)va.cf]s\cu xctj 6 "TrXouToj (5<a Power and riches are desir- 
 
 ^-j^v TifXTjv srfljv a'l^sra. able for the sake of honour. 
 
 Eyw xai (Tu <tol Sixoaa. croirjo'o- Thou and I will do the things 
 
 fAev. wliich are just. 
 
 *20. Two singular nouns connected by a conjunction^ 
 when expressing, not two distinct things, but different shades 
 
CONCORD. 5 
 
 of the same idea, require the verb to be in the singular num- 
 ber; as, 
 
 nr^uvg iisns xai ^ufxoj ay»]vw^, His spirit and manly soul in- 
 cited him. 
 
 *21, Two or more nouns singular have also the correspond- 
 ing verb often in the singular agreeing with that which is 
 nearest; as, 
 
 *Eug av ira^skQvi 6 ou^avo^ xai rj Until the heaven and the earth 
 y*|. shall pass away. 
 
 22. When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the no- 
 minative to a verb, or substantive to an adjective, the verb is in 
 the third person singular, and the adjective in the neuter gen- 
 der; as. 
 
 To 'Tfa/fiv a^stfai dvda^sdlccTov It is very hard to please all. 
 sail. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE AND SUBSTANTIVE, 
 
 i 
 
 23. One substantive agrees with another, signifying the 
 same thing, in case ; as, 
 
 Kuafa^>3g o 'ffaig rou Atfrvayov, Cyaxares thesonof Astyages. 
 
 AuToXuxou ^uyoLTri^ fASyaXriro^off, Anticlca, the daughter of the 
 
 AvTixXsia. magnanimous Autolycus. 
 
 *24. Nouns connected with other nouns to limit their sig- 
 nification, are converted into adjectives ; as, 
 
 rXwcTtfav *EXXa5a s§i5ol^6. He taught the Greek lan- 
 
 guage. 
 OXufwna5s5 Movtfai. "Olympian Muses. 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 25. One substantive governs another, signifying a diflfereni 
 thing, in the genitive ; as, 
 
 Tw ©eou fjt,axgo5ufxia. The long suffering of God. 
 
 A2 ^ 
 
6 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 26. An adjective in the neuter gender, without a substan- 
 tive, governs the genitive ; as, 
 
 To Xoi-jrov ms rjiLS^ag. The rest of the da}'. 
 
 To x^a.rt(flov ttjj (piXo3'o(piaff. The best part of philosophy. 
 
 27. The primitive pronoun is used in the genitive, instead 
 of the possessive pronoun ; as, 
 
 JlaTYi^ fAou, for ifurr]^ sfxoj. My father. 
 
 *28. But when q.n emphasis is required, the possessive 
 alone can be used ; and to this sometimes, by a species of ap- 
 position, is added a genitive case ; as, 
 
 Aia^':foi^QV(ft tu gfxa, tou xaxo- They plunder the property of 
 Jatjxovoff. me, the miserable. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 *29. Adjectives Bigmfying plenty, loorih, condemnation, povjer, 
 difference, desire, memory, knoivledge, and their opposites. require 
 the genitive ; as, 
 
 E^a <?rXsio'Tou a^ia. Works worthy of the highest 
 
 value. 
 rufJLvatfjpt astfTa av5^wv. Places of exercise full of 
 
 men. 
 'f2v cr^od-Jiioj -/jtf^' asi. Of which you were always 
 
 desirous. 
 
 *30. Verbals compounded with the privative a, and those 
 ending in \wg, govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 Avajrio^ a^porfuvi^j. Not blameable for impru- 
 
 dence. 
 
 Ilo^ia'Tixoj STTiT^^Sicov. Capable of providing neces- 
 
 saries. 
 
 *31, Partitives, and words used partitively, comparatives, 
 superlatives, indefinites, interrogatives, and ^bme numerals, 
 take after them the genitive plural ; as, 
 
 'Oi "ffaXatoi Tcov -TfoniTwv. The ancient poets. 
 
 Movoff ^^oTWv. ' The only one of mortals. 
 
 *Oi veWTS^ot av^iwffwvi The younger of the men. 
 
 KaXXio^og 'n'oTa/xwv. The most beautiful of rivers. 
 
 Exatfrog rwv cra^ovTwv eXsyg. Each of those who were pre* 
 
 sent said. 
 
GOVERNMENT. 7 
 
 32. The comparative degree governs the genitive, when it 
 is translated by than ; as, 
 
 BouXrjs cu^sv ealiv sp^^joy xux^g. Nothing is more odious than 
 
 bad counsel. 
 
 *33. The adjective pronouns aXkog and hrspog are some- 
 times used as comparatives, and construed with the genitive ; 
 
 as, 
 
 AXka Tuv §ixai(^v. Things other than those which 
 
 are just. 
 'Ets^ov rouTou. Different from this. 
 
 *34. The comparative is sometimes followed by the geni- 
 tive of the reciprocal pronouns, and the same subject is com- 
 pared to itself with regard to its different circimistances at 
 different times ; as, 
 
 nXoutficoTc^oj lauTwv. Richer than they were before. 
 
 AiffXi^tfjo^ lauTou. As great again as it was. 
 
 35. Adjectives signifying profit likeness, obedience, fitness, 
 trust, clearness, decencij, facility, and their contraries, and those 
 compounded loith Cuv and 6fj-ou, govern the dative ; as, 
 
 'HpLiv £(r7aj ;)(^7]a'i;xov. It will be useful to us. 
 
 2uvT^o(pog TTj (xtXottjtj, Accustomed to simplicity. 
 
 EXsude^w avS^i suxTov. To be wished for by a liberal 
 
 man. 
 Tojj ysvmioig to ajo'x^ov £X^|ov. To the generous, a base thing 
 
 is detestable. 
 
 *36. Comparatives and superlatives govern the measure 
 of excess most commonly in the dative, sometimes also in the 
 accusative; as, 
 
 Av^^oj-ycov ixax^(j a^itfTo^. By far the best of men. 
 
 Jlar^os -roXXov a|x£jvwv. Much braver than his father. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 37. When ej<x» and ^ivojuitxi signify possession, property, or 
 duty^ they govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 'O flTi'B'gafl'xofijSvos ksgou yivsTai. He who is sold becomes the 
 
 property of another. 
 
 ♦38. Verbs of leginning, admiring, wanting^ rememherrn^^ 
 
8 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 accusing, valuing, sharing, and the like, with their contraries 
 govern the genitive . as, 
 
 IlavTwv 7UV xaXwv jj^a. He loved all that were virtu- 
 
 ous. 
 
 OvSs TouToy (5i>5jxa^75. Neither did he fail of having 
 
 this. 
 
 A/xsXsjff Twv (pjXwv. You neglect your friends. 
 
 AflToXausi Twv cra^ovTWV. He enjoys things present. 
 
 *39. Verbs expressive of any of the senses, except that of 
 sight, govern thj genitive ; as, 
 
 At(f&a.voiJ.a.t 4'0(pou. I hear a noise. 
 
 Av(f-xs^iS +ausjv vo(fovv7os avo^og. It is dangerous to touch a dis- 
 eased person. 
 
 *40. Verbs derived from comparatives, or in which the idea 
 of comparison is involved, together with many verbs coming 
 from nouns, and equivalent in meaning to the primitive with 
 the substantive verb, require the genitive ; as, 
 
 ^H.TT0L(f6at Tivog. To be inferior to any one. 
 
 *T(fT£^-ti(!s TTis ixap^^j. He arrived after the battle. 
 
 ns^i£i3'T( aXXwv yvmixuv. She excels other women. 
 
 Erv^avvsus Ko^jv^ou. He was king of Corinth. 
 
 *41. The genitive is put w4th verbs of all kinds, even wuth 
 those which govern the accusative, when the action does not 
 refer to the whole object, but only to a. pari; as, 
 
 E5wxa dot <ruv p^^yj/jiaTwv. I gave thee of my wealth. 
 
 ErsfAov Trig yrig. They laid waste a part of the 
 
 country. 
 MavTixvig sp^wv rs^Qirig. Possessing a portion of the art 
 
 of di\ination. 
 
 42. Etfri, taken for £X"j ^^ ^^^^j governs the dative ; as, 
 Etfri fji-oi p^^ptara, I have riches. 
 
 43. All verbs put acquisitively, i. e. verbs of serving, giving, 
 using, rejoicing, obeying, trusting, discoursing, fighting, and the 
 like, with their contraries, govern the dative ; as, 
 
 Bo»]dsiv TrfsfaT^iSh To help his country. 
 
 Eix£«v xaxQig. To yield to misfortunes. 
 
 Maj^eff^ai roig flroXsfxjoiff. To encounter with the enemy., 
 
 Xlag avij^ auT^ crovsj. Every man labours for him- 
 
 self. 
 
GOVERNMENT. 9 
 
 *44. The verbs sivaj and yiyvso'^aj are often accompanied 
 by a participle of the verb " to ivish" " to hope'' &c. in the 
 dative ; in which case the participle only, as the leading idea, 
 is translated by the finite verb ; as, 
 
 BfSi r,So^svot<tiv Yj^iv ol Xoj'oi Since we were pleased with 
 
 /eyovctc'jv. thy discourse. 
 
 Ntxia 'jr^oods-x^o^sv'^ tjv <rau<ra. Nicias expected these things. 
 
 45. A verb signifying actively governs the accusative ; as, 
 
 TouTov tfu wj ayadov avj^a ri- Thou honourest him as a good 
 iictg. man. 
 
 *46. The Attics frequently make verbs of hearing, and 
 sometimes those which denote the operations of the other 
 senses, govern the accusative ; as, 
 
 A^iouw Taora. I hear these things. 
 
 47. Every verb may take an accusative of a correspond- 
 ing noun ; as, 
 
 AouXsujiv 5o'jXtjav ajCp^Pav. To serve a base slaver}'. 
 
 IIoXsjxov croXif.tii^sjv. To wage war. 
 
 *48. Verbs of accusing, condemning, and acqi'Mting, with 
 their contraries, take after them the accusative of the person 
 with the genitive of the thing ; as, 
 
 Tourou Swx^arr/v 6 ncArriyoPos The accuser blames Socrates 
 
 aiTiarai. for this. 
 
 r^a9o[AKi (fs Touro'j. 1 accuse thee of this. 
 
 *49. Some verbs of accusing and condemning have, on 
 account of the nature of their composition, the person in the 
 genitive, and the crime or the punishment in the accusative; as, 
 
 loj fxwPiav xai'/jyoPcj. I accuse thee of folly — 
 
 (Charge folly against thee.) 
 
 *50. Verbs of comparing, giving, promising, declaring, and 
 taking aicay, govern the dative with the accusative ; as, 
 
 Aoj jxoi raura. Give me these things. 
 
 ^Ti:i^-)(yz^xa.i tfci ozxa. <raXav-a. I promise thee ten talents. 
 
 51. Verbs of asking, teaching, doing well ox ill, speaking 
 v:dl or ill, taking away, putting on or off, concealing, and the 
 
10 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 like, are joined with two accusatives, the one of the person, 
 the other of the thing ; or with one accusative and an adverb ; 
 as, 
 
 Xp»j airsjv rovg dsovg ayaSa. We should ask good things 
 
 from the gods. 
 
 A-n-avra tfs (5j(5a^op-ai. I will teach thee all things. 
 
 AirotfTS^ei fAe p^^rjjxara. He deprives me of my pro- 
 
 perty. ^ 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 52. Passive verbs take a genitive, of the agent, after them, 
 wliich is governed by a preposition understood or expressed ; 
 as, 
 
 Ka» crpo^ u/xwv Xsjip^/'.o'o.aai ; Shall I be left by you also ? 
 <I>»Xwv vixwv-ai (piXoi. Fiicnds are prevailed upon by 
 
 friends. 
 n^os &su)v w^(xy|{j!,svo5. Impelled by the gods. 
 
 53. Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the agent 
 after them ; as, 
 
 To y^t-ysdog sxcivu) Tojv its-rr^rty. The greatness of his actions, 
 
 fXSVWV. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 54. An impersonal verb governs the dative ; as, 
 
 Msyig-Tov a-jTuj eSolsv sivat. It seemed greatest to him. 
 
 *55. X^y] and 5ej, signifying it behoveih, are followed by the 
 accusative with the infinitive ; as, . " 
 
 Xpv) cTe raura 'xoisiv. It behoveth thee to do these 
 
 things. 
 
 *56. Affj, signifying necessity or loant, {is\si, /j^s-Tc^rTi, cr-potfTjicsj, 
 ojacpspsj, eXXsiTc J, fxsrafxsXfi, frequently govern the dative of the 
 person with the genitive of the thing ; as, 
 Ast aiiTw -x^^TiiiaTuv. He has need of money. 
 
 Exfivwv 701$ (pavXoig |ji,?-7£fl'r/. The wicked have a share of 
 
 those things. 
 
GOVERNMENT. 11 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 *57. The infinitive mood is governed by verbs, participleSf 
 and adjectives ; as, 
 
 'OCt»^ ^i^v S'jri&viusi 'T^Si^ad&u vi- Whoever * desires to live, let 
 
 xay. him try to conquer. 
 
 2ff£u5wv ■n'XouTfiv. Desiring to be rich. 
 
 Asms o^av. Frightful to behold. 
 
 *5S. The infinitive, with the accusative frequently before 
 it, is often put absolutely, being preceded by the particles ug, 
 oi(f7S, "a-piv, ax^'j M-^'j and some others, either expressed or 
 understood ; as, 
 
 'nj S'irog ensiv. So to speak, 
 
 n^jv 5-/]Xov sivaj. Before it is evident. 
 
 *59. The infinitive is often used elliptically, 6^a, /SXe-n^, 
 (^xo^rsi, Jcj:, ^iXw, xsXsuw, or su^^Ojaai, being understood to govern 
 
 AuToj £vi tt^wtok/j ixa-)(s;!h.i. Do thou thj'self fight among 
 
 the first. 
 
 60. The Greeks use jxsXXw, with an infijiitive, to express 
 the future, both active and passive,' which in Latin would be 
 rendered by a participle of the future and the verb sum ; as, 
 
 Jle^i wv Cjxsij iisKkSTS x^ivejv.. Of which things ye are about 
 
 to judge — {Judicaturi estis.) 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 61. Participles govern the case of their own verbs ; as, 
 
 Toug vfoj<rf|ouj Tojaura ii^y] cra(- Instructing the younger men 
 devovTeg. in such manners. 
 
 *62. The verbs ?i|x»j rv^Q^avw, i-ifa?y^u, ymiiai, xu^w, S)(OJy 
 p^avu, Xavflavw, and some others, are used with participles 
 after them, which require to be rendered, in Latin, by the 
 mood and tense of the verb annexed, while the verbs them- 
 selves are most generally rendered by adverbs ; as, 
 
 Sux^arris rxiy^ccvsi vis^ifaruv. Socrates happens to be walk- 
 ing— (For^e ambiilat So- 
 crates.) 
 
12 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 63. Participles are often used, instead of the infinitive, after 
 verbs signifying an emotion of the mind ; as, 
 
 AycLiruv |X£ SiaTsXsh He continues to love me. 
 
 Mf/i,v>5/xai '!roiri(fc(s. I remember that I did it, 
 
 *64. The participle is used after the adjectives (favs^og, 
 Srikos, and their compounds, after acpavT;^, s-rjipavrj?, &c. ; and 
 the adjective is commonly rendered in English by its adverb ; 
 as, 
 
 AijXoj'-yjv gTri^ujAwv f/,Ev <»'Xourou [He was evidently very de- 
 Kf-Xy^us. sii'ous of riches. 
 
 THE SUPPLYING OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 
 
 65. The infinitive mood, or a participle, is used to supply 
 the place of gerunds and supines ; as, 
 
 Eig TO (fleaTK^rctg (^vmyaysiv. To gather the soldiers toge- 
 
 t;^ ther, 
 
 EuspySTwv avToug S"/CT*)Cafi.7)v. I acquired them by doing 
 
 kindly. 
 IToisiv a.id-x^pov. % ' Shameful to be done. 
 
 *66. Verbal adjectives in tsoc, are frequently used by the 
 Greeks when any tiecessity is" implied, in the same way as 
 the future participles passive, and gerunds, in Latin, and 
 govern the dative of the agent, with the cases of their own 
 verbs; as, 
 
 r^acTTSov fAOJ S'7r'i3''roXr,v, I must write a letter. 
 
 E'^Hisk'Tirsov Coj TouToy. Thou must take cai'e of this. 
 
 THE CONSTRUCTION OFCIRCUMSTANCES. 
 
 67. The cause, manner, or instrument, is put in the dative ; 
 as, 
 
 Kjarfi fxi)p(ava{?. He conquers hy stratagems 
 
 A^yv^saig Xoyva.idi /xaxo") ''^■' Fight with silver weapons, 
 iravTa xparriffeis. " and thou wait conquer all 
 
 things 
 
 68. The question whither ? is commonly answered by eig 
 or ir^ojwith the accusative: where? by £v with the dative. 
 
GOVERNMENT. iS 
 
 whence ? by sx or a^o with the genitive ; and by or through 
 what place ? by 5»a with the genitive ; as, 
 
 Ev 'PwfjLTj. In Rome. 
 
 E15 T">]v AvTia-yBiav, To Antioch. 
 
 Ex, or oL'Xo T>]g flToXgw?. From the city. 
 
 A<a yyj?. By land. 
 
 69. Adverbs in &i and tfi are used to signify at a place ; in 
 6s, (fSy or ^s, /o « j»/ace ; and in kv and ^s, fro?n a place ; 6s is 
 also added to accusatives, to signify to a place ; as, 
 
 'Ko^ivMi oixia vaiwv. Inhabiting houses at Corinth. 
 
 KkKii7}kv DivsiXslo p^aXxsov sy. He took the brazen spear from 
 
 •Xps. the tent. 
 
 Ejf/4 <'^^inv6s, I will go to Phthia. 
 
 70. The distance of one place from another, is put in the 
 
 accusative ; as, 
 
 Eostfoj curtz-xzij T^iwv rj|A£^wv o(5ov. Ephesus is distant three days 
 
 journey. 
 
 71. The time lohen is comm.only put in the genitive, some- 
 times in the dative ; how long, in the accusative ; as, 
 
 'Hjxe^aj xai vuxroj. By day and night. 
 
 'H{A£pa ,aja. On one day. 
 
 Oi^fi (piXcuvrcjv oXi^'ov tcly}m The anger of those who love 
 ^(Povov. prevails but a short time. 
 
 *72. The matter of which any thing is made is put in the 
 genitive ; as, 
 
 Tov ojcp^ov S'T'otrjtJ'sv iC^upcov gu- He made the chariot of strong 
 Xwv. wood. 
 
 *73. The price or measure of any thing is put in the ge- 
 nitive ; as, 
 
 Acs auTov Tjfxiv S^axmS' Give him to us for a drachma. 
 
 AvS^tas 6u6sx(x. "TTip^swv. A statue of twelve cubits. 
 
 B 
 
1 i GOVERNMENT. 
 
 ABSOLUTE CASES. 
 
 *74. The genitive case of a substantive is often put abso- 
 lutely, the former substantive being understood ; as, 
 
 Ta nXarwvog. The works of Plato. 
 
 0>.-j/wriaj t} AXs|flftf5^ou. Olympias the mother of Alex- 
 
 ander. 
 
 *75. The Greek writers frequently use the article with a 
 p-oun in the genitive, governed by a substantive understood, 
 by way of periphrasis for the noun itself; as, 
 
 Ta T»jff o^yris. Anger. 
 
 Ta TTij ejjwrgi^iafT. . Experience. 
 
 *76. The genitive case is often put absolutely, kvsxa^ X'*^^ 
 or 3ome case of ns or £«<: being understood ; as, 
 
 Y.^aivu ri/is (piXofxoutTia^. I commend thee for thy love 
 
 of music. 
 AgiXais <rou vcu. Wretched on account of thy 
 
 temper. 
 TooTwv yivov fAot. Become one of these for me. 
 
 H/Tav 7UV dTOL'j^v, There were some of the 
 
 stakes. 
 
 *77. Exclamations of grief or surprise are commonly put 
 in the genitive sometimes in the accusative ; as, 
 
 Ttjs fjiw^jaj. What folly ! 
 
 A« Tov Aowvjv. Alas 1 Adonis ! 
 
 78. The dative is often put absolutely, especially aftw 
 owoj, tfuv being understood ; as, 
 
 Twv aurwv e^wv cxjjvo.c:. Of the same works vrith. them. 
 
 j 79. Tlie accusative is ofien put absolutely, xara being 
 anderstood ; as, 
 
 Tlar^iSa 'Pwfxaio?. By country a Roman. 
 
 MaXa dufAov exo^"^'!- ^^ ^^s much enraged in his 
 
 mind. 
 
 *80. The neuter o often stands absolutely at the begin- 
 ning of a clause, ^\^th the sense of gttod aUinet ad id^ quod^ as 
 ihe Latio quod ; as, 
 
GOVERNMENT, 15 
 
 'O 6' i^rfKutfag rjjxaff. With regard to that, on a<!- 
 
 count of which thou enviest 
 us. 
 
 O Ss (f\j sgwra^ With respect to the subject" 
 
 of your inquiry. 
 
 *81 . A participle is used absolutely with a noun or pronoun, 
 most commonly in the genitive, sometimes in the dative, and 
 often in the accusative, especiallj'- if it be an impersonal ; in 
 the nominative rarely ; as, 
 
 E(*ou foL^ovros. While I M^as present. 
 
 TLa^mri sviauTW. At the close of the year. 
 
 Aji.(poj 5' s^ou^svu. Both sitting. 
 
 Aeov hs^a. When other things agreed. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 *82. Adverbs are joined to substantives, adjectives, verbe, 
 participles, and other adverbs ; as?, 
 
 HoXvys TjTrov, Far less indeed. 
 
 BoT^u(Jov ire-Tovrat. They fly in swarms. 
 
 *S3. Adverbs govern the same case as the adjectives, 
 
 verbs, &c. whence they are derived ; as, 
 
 A^icj^ Xoycu. Worthy of mention. 
 
 E<jra^xouvTW5 (xo<. Sufficiently for me, 
 
 S4. Adverbs of time^ place, guantity, order^ exception^ and the 
 like, govern the genitive ; as, - 
 
 E7/UJ (xXo^. Near the sea, 
 
 Ilf/'a 5j)c7]f . Contrary to justice, 
 
 85. Nr], and aa, govern the accusative ; ajAa, and o|*ftu, tite 
 dative ; as, 
 
 Ma Aia. By Jupiter. 
 
 '.4/xa 'T'ji vSari. Together with the Water. 
 
 86. Two or more negatives strengthen the negation ; as^ 
 
 Ov 6v\>azov ovSs'K'oi'tfoTS ou^tv Tou- It is impossible ever to do any 
 Twv 'TTPurTSiv. of these things. 
 
 *87. But if the two negatives belong to two different 
 verbs, they form an affirmative ; as, 
 
16 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 OuSev f^cjv in oux u':fS(fx£ro. He promised every thing. 
 
 Ov SvvafMi fLti fAS,u.vrjfxa» aurov. I cannot but remember him. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 88. The prepositions avn, arro, b-k or e^, and •jt'^o, govern 
 the genitive ; sv, and tfyv, the dative ; sij or f^, and ava, the 
 accusative ; as, 
 
 £5 ArliXTjcr. from Attica. 
 
 Ev cixw. In a house. 
 
 E(5 e>6. To me. 
 
 "^69. In the Ionic and Doric posts, ava sometimes governs 
 a lalive case, denoting elevation or upon ; as, 
 
 }^'jtf£w ava (fxr^'K'r^oj. Upon a golden sceptre. 
 
 y.^vdiai; a-j' Irrrcjj. Upon golden horses. 
 
 *9Q. The particle wj: is often put with the accusative, 
 generally with living objects, very seldom with inanimate 
 things, the preposition stg being understood : as, 
 *Qs Tcv ^adiXza.. To the king. 
 
 91. Aia and ijr'c|P govern the genitive or accusative; a.u^j, 
 f^j, TS^i, and i/co, the genitive, dative, or accusative ; as, 
 
 Aja tfrofxaro^, or 5/a <//o|Jia. In the mouth. 
 
 Tj^i ^^ovou. Upon a throne. 
 
 Etj 6^ovovs. Upon thrones. 
 
 Ka>' kcrw. "• Upon horseback. 
 
 92. Kara, from or against, commonly governs the genitive ; 
 ai or according to, the accusative. Msror, ^t'zYA, the genitive, or 
 dative ; to or aftei', the accusative, ITapa and or^oc:, /row, the 
 genitive ; at or irzVA., the dative ; to, beside, or against, the 
 accusative: as, 
 
 Kara <;i'sr^wv. From the rocks. 
 
 Kara 5yvafxjv. According to my power. 
 
 Msra (piXwv. With friends. 
 
 Ila^a xufioy. From the Lord, 
 
 n^og yjfAvaCiov. To school. 
 
 *93. Prepositions are often used as adverbs, without a case ; 
 especially sv in the Ionic, and t^og in the Attic dialect • as, 
 
gover?hMENt. VT 
 
 E» 6s As(f^i'i'os £jXs. Among others, he made pri- 
 
 soners of the Lesbians. 
 n|05 Ss xai ov (Jjxaiov. Besides, it is also unjust. 
 
 *94. In Ionic writers, prepositions are often put twice; 
 once without a case adverbially, and again with a case or in 
 composition with a verb ; as, 
 
 Ev 6e xa.\ 9v M;|ji.9», At the same time in Memphis 
 
 also. 
 Av' 5' OouCsuj avjo'Taro. Up arose Ulysses. 
 
 *95. Prepositions are often put after the case they govern, 
 particularly in Ionic and Doric writers, and in the Attic 
 poets ; but in the Attic prose writers, only cre^j with the 
 genitive ; as, 
 
 H aXo^ 7] S'ffi yris. Either upon sea or upon land. 
 
 96. A preposition often governs the same case, in compo- 
 sition, that it does without it ; as, 
 
 A':f7jyy}c sxxiikivSsrai. He is tossed from his chariot. 
 
 *97. Prepositions, in composition, have in general their 
 original signification. The compounds of avr«, however, have 
 mostly the signification of against ; those of ava, io ascend^ and 
 those of xttTtt, io descend : as, 
 
 AvTiTarrsjv. To array against, 
 
 AvTiXsysiv. To contradict. 
 
 AvaBaivsiv. To ascend. 
 
 KaTa/3ajvejv. To descend. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 98. The conjunctions xaj, ts, Ss^ aXXa, f^ev, outs, and the 
 like, will have the same case; and, commonly, the same 
 mood and tense after them, that goes before them ; as, 
 
 Ilafjt.'jroXXoi; op^Xou ovtoj, xai /xv^ The multitude being very 
 g^ovTwv <ri (paywo*!. great, and they having 
 
 nothing to eat. 
 *Ecj^axa xai jxe/xa^TuPiixa. I have seen and borne wit- 
 
 ness. 
 
 99. Av, sav, sirstSav, Jva, 6(pjja, h'xus, oTav, o^orav, xa\^, xsv, and 
 wff, are, for the most part, joined with the subjunctive mood ;_ 
 as, 
 
 B2 
 
\B GOVERNMENT. 
 
 "ha /vWTf. That ye may know. 
 
 Kccw a^eivov a/wvio'wfii.ai. Though I should fight bettor. 
 
 100. Av, xo^v, and xev, are often used to give a 
 
 •ubjunctive or optative meaning to the other moods ; as, 
 
 A» xcM Twyp^ttvsi ^atfiXeuff wv. Although he were a king. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Jl verb agrees with its nominative in number and person. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 1 . I AM willing, thou writest, he 
 honours, ye ^ two send, they two 
 say, we strike, ye give, they bring, 
 he wonders, we hear, thou sufFer- 
 est, ye two hinder, they two plun- 
 der, th^y rejoice. 
 
 2. I was digging, thou wast 
 laughing, he was hoping, we were 
 singing, they were building, ye 
 .were seeing, they two were weep- 
 ing, I was conjecturing, ye two 
 were finding, he was coming, they 
 were taking away, thou wast car- 
 rying out, I was celebrating a fes- 
 tival, they were pushing. 
 
 3. Ye two shall sow, I shall 
 nourish, they shall run, he shall 
 breathe, thou shalt break, we shall 
 cut, 1 shall kindle, they two shall 
 .praise, ye shall suffice, they shall 
 neglect, he shall cause to wander, 
 they shall sail, I shall accomplish, 
 thou shalt liye, we shall swim, ye 
 shall tremble, they two shall cry 
 aloud, it shall fit, ye shall bum, 
 thou shalt spin, we shall bind. 
 
 tfrsXXw, Xsyw, TU'jr'TW, di' 
 flraCp^w, xwXuw, a^o^w, 
 
 ^w, a5w, oixo^ojxsw, o^aw, 
 5ax^uoj, ajxtti^w, svpicfxUj 
 ixavw, a(pai^sw, sx^e^w, so^ 
 
 Ttti^w, wdew 
 
 2irsi^w, r^scpUf ''f*X'^ 
 
 ffXa^w, irksuy avuTW, ^aw> 
 xaiw, vew, 6eu. 
 
20 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 4. Thou wilt honour, they will 
 show, it will burn, we will hide, 
 they will dig, ye two will leave, he 
 will run, they two will fold, they 
 will eat, I will cause to cease, thou 
 wilt owe, we will seize, they will 
 do, ye will say. 
 
 5. I feared, they taught, he pro- ' 
 phesied, ye two turned, he show- 
 ed, they gave, I brought, ye pol- 
 luted, they two sent, we remained, 
 he judged, I conjectured, ye built, 
 they placed, he assigned, we sig- 
 nified, it broke, ye two permitted, 
 I entertained, he consumed, I 
 troubled, we encamped, they were 
 unfortunate, we were well pleased, 
 thou wast offended, he condemned. 
 
 6. I did run, they two did strike, • 
 he did come, ye did receive, they 
 did learn, he did cause to cease, 
 we did injure, they died, ye two 
 did give, he did see, I did cast, 
 they two did hury, thou didst say, 
 we did flee, he did eat,>ye two did 
 fold, they did show. 
 
 7. Ye have laboured, they have' 
 taken, I have guarded, thou hast 
 signified, he has sworn falsely, ye 
 two have seen, thou hast got, ye 
 two have honoured, we have 
 spoken, thou hast shown, I have 
 feared. 
 
 8. He had struck, ye two had 
 composed, we had known, they 
 had overcome, they two had writ- 
 ten, I had taken. 
 
 T/w, (paivw, xaiu, xpvv- 
 •jrXsxw, T^w^GJ, -jrauw, 0951- 
 
 <r£uw, T^S';rw, (pajvcj, ^idwfAi, 
 
 X^IVW, SiXOL^Uj 0»)Co5ojJl£W, 
 
 SOLU, stfrtaw, avakidxu, £vo- 
 <ru^ew, S'ja^stf-ew, 6\)<faP6<f- 
 
 *r^£)^w, TU'TTrw, E^ofxaj, 
 Xa,apavcj^, fxavdavcj, ffauw; 
 .SXaiTTU, ci'Tjo^vrjrfxcjj 5i5o> 
 
 (p|a(^w, (ps-j^w, T^o}yu, tX*- 
 
 rtovcw, ai^ew, (pyXaCfl'w, * 
 
 cuv^^avw, T»w, Xcrw, <pa»-. 
 vw, (Jsj^w. 
 
 BaXXw, flfoiffw, yjvwtfxcj, 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 1. Thou appearest, he turns 
 himself, we cease, ye contend to- 
 gether, they fear, I go, they two 
 arise, ye two taste, we answer. 
 
 $ajvw, T^siru, 
 
 flTOOM, 
 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 n 
 
 2. I was enduring', ye two were 
 hurting yourselves, he was accus- 
 ing, thou wast obeying, ye were 
 standing, they were on their guard, 
 \ve ^vere departing, yc were deli-, 
 berating.. 
 
 3. He shall receive-, thou -shalt 
 mourn, ye shall reverence, the\' 
 shall touch, J* sheull he ^doAvn, .we 
 shall prepare ourselves, thou shalt 
 endure. 
 
 4.^ Ye two will turn yourselve?, 
 I will drink, the}^ will strike them-* 
 selvQs, he vaU hin't himself. 
 
 5. They desired, he h^ng him- 
 scK", 3-^e mourned, we bathed, I 
 used, they consulted together, I 
 began, they inspected the entrails, 
 he borrowed, ye tv/o remembered, 
 , they two clothed themselves. 
 
 €. We two did place ourselves, 
 ye two did fight together, I did 
 givej'ye were. 
 
 •7. I have confided, we have 
 escaped, yft have appeared, they 
 have sown, thou hast lain con- 
 cealed, he Jias suffered, they have 
 struek themselves, I have hurt my- 
 self. 
 
 * 8. He had heard, I had come, 
 they had left, we had said, ye had 
 tried aloud. 
 
 (pw,. •s-fci^w, iuTT^ai, (puXacf- 
 
 Tw, ocn-Tw, x£»f;-aj, taoatJ- 
 
 xz\ja^(j), c.vs^w. 
 
 
 fii, yivo^JMi, 
 
 Ilej^w, (psu^w, paivoj, 
 <ri;ffrw, /SXa-s'TW. 
 
 Axouw, s^-)(pii,at, Xgjirw, 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 1 . They are ri&!med, he is main- 
 tained, we are pleased, they two 
 are hindered, thou art admired, I 
 am called. ^ 
 
 ^ 2. They were assembled, I was 
 compelled, he was struck, we were 
 driven, yc two were opposed, they 
 were drawn up. 
 
 vw, xwXuw, daufjiai^w, xa- 
 Xfw. 
 
 T-uTTGJ, sXauvw, avTwaTTW, 
 CiivraTcw, 
 
22 
 
 • GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3. I shall be reverenced, it shall 
 be locked, they shall be praised, 
 thou shalt be loved, he shall be 
 sent, we shall be honoured, it shall 
 be completed, thev shall be found, 
 
 t ye shall be punished. 
 
 4. Ye will be hurt,»he will be 
 beaten, we will be delivered, thou 
 wilt be turned. 
 
 5. I was blinded, he was lulled 
 to sleep, they \y;ere found, we were 
 persuaded, ye two were sent, it 
 was said, they were strengthened, 
 they two were loved, thou wast 
 delighted. ^ 
 
 6. 1 was glad, he was corrupt- 
 ed, they. were struck with fecir, we 
 
 .were sent, ye were dismissed, they 
 two were buried. » 
 
 7. I have- been persuaded, it has 
 been written, thou hast been main- 
 tained, ye two have bsen struck, 
 1 possess, it has been decreed, we 
 have been cast out, it has been 
 consulted, he has been bruised. 
 
 8. He had been prepared, it had • 
 been '.one, they had been judged, 
 he had been honoured, I was dis- 
 turbed, he w^as buried. 
 
 9. He shall remain enrolled, it 
 will be mixed, thou shalt possess, 
 it shall instantly be done, they shall 
 instantly be buried. 
 
 
 BXafli'TW, <rX'>](r(j'w, airaX- 
 Xao'Cw, r^scrw. 
 
 Tu©Xow, xoifxauj sti^icf- 
 
 rr\rj(f(f:,}j CreXXw, acraX- 
 XaCrfw, dw/TTu. 
 
 IIsj^w, y^cL^Ui rgS(pbiy 
 
 daffTW. « 
 
 E/y^^a^cj, jXJTvyjuii, x<ra- 
 
 rRCtllSCUOUS EXA3irLES. 
 
 1 . We convict, let him remain, I EXs7;;(w, fxsvw, 'ia.a-'/yi 
 was suffering, about to put to death, 
 he should have been found, they 
 made an incursion, having left, to be 
 about to announce, thou hast pro- 
 tected and dost still protect, let ' avax^a^w, -nricr^atfxw, q;u 
 me see, thou mayest become, they Xaa'fl'w. 
 might wage war, I will get myself 
 instructed, having persuaded, to 
 call out, ye had sold, we may guard. 
 
 /SaXXw,^ Xei'TTw,^ a77£XXw, 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 23 
 
 2. Thou hast heard, having said, 
 L about to say, they had learned, he 
 I was teaching, he may be saved, I 
 ; .wrote, I have written, the plaintiff, 
 j the defendant, the}^ two may wish, 
 we have admired and do still ad- 
 I mire, to be about to announce, he 
 ! may send, having been accustom- 
 I ed, we left, I would be ashamed, 
 j begone ye, let us fight, may they 
 I perish. 
 
 j 3. Thou shouldest have distin- 
 ! guished, they may have been slan- 
 I dered, let us save ourselves, to have 
 announced, they should choose, 
 being about to find, I might have 
 been remembered, he shall in- 
 stantly be punished, let them be 
 cast away, to have sinned, they 
 had been maintained, they were 
 contented, he will be taken, about 
 to descend, they were broken, to 
 have been hurt, they should choose, 
 having perceived, he Vv ant up, they 
 were advancing. 
 
 4. To conquer, they were rush- 
 *-ihg, loving, do #it)u speak out, I 
 sliould hunt, they were seen, we 
 ma}^ acquire, being about to ac- 
 cuse, they wore praising, thou 
 mayest crown, they give, think 
 yourself deserving, having been 
 consecrated, thou may est be op- 
 posed, they would fill, let him re- 
 i^tore, ihey have suffered a loss. 
 ; 5. Fie lives, they were rich, ye 
 sail away, they dismissed, he might 
 say, they know, ye two blame, do 
 ihou let me go, it was broken open, 
 let us attack, he would be able, 
 they m.ay know, do thou buy, to 
 be filled, to gird themselves, we 
 would yield, he points out thou 
 hast placed, we have stood. 
 
 Azouw, \syu, "ksyu, 
 a'S'oXXu/JL».«"dG 
 
 AiKx^jvw/ (5ia§aXXw, 
 
 (pw, apxsu, (xXjo'xw, xara- 
 ai^Ew, aKf^avo/jiai,^ ava^ai- 
 
 Nixaw, o||aaw, ayairau, 
 xTao|j.aj, syxaXsu, a«v£w, 
 ^ow, £vav<r;ow, atXtj^ow, 
 
 ZaWjcrXoyrew, a-n'oifXfw, 
 a^ivjjxr, (p7];xi, j(r7jjuii, airia.- 
 
 STTKfTaixai, <3r^ia/Ji-a/, s/xtit- 
 
24 
 
 GREEK EXERCjtSES. 
 
 6. Xerxes was departing, Xe- Ss^ln^ aift-xu^eu, Be- 
 
 nias and Pasion have left us, Ilium v»ag xa» naCjwv airoXfj- 
 
 was taken, Joseph was greatly tw,'" Ikiwv ctXidxuf IwCTiqj 
 
 moved and wept, let the men go, Ta^atfCw^ xaj xkaiu,^ avrj^ 
 
 Philip had conquered, Mucins oropeuw,"" 'tiXi-n'-roj vixaw, 
 
 confessed who he was, Darius was Mo-oxiog ojxoXo/sw os Tjg 
 
 besieging, the king was sick, hear ej/xi, Aa^ejoj croXio^xcw, /3a- 
 me my friends. 
 
 7. And God said, Let there be 
 light ; Take, eat, this is my body ; 
 and Virtue having interrupted her, 
 said; be thou well assured that 
 they have escaped ; I should be 
 reluctant and afraid ; Cyrus was 
 in great perplexity. 
 
 GiXsvs aC^evEw, xXufAi cpi- 
 Xoff. 
 
 Kai Z'jfu ©eog yivoy^on^ 
 (pwj, XotiA^avw^ cpayu ox>- 
 7oe sijjj 6 ejxoj Cw/xa, xai o 
 A^ST'o u7roXa(Ji/3avw° cjrw, 
 eu idviixi oTj tt'S'ocpeuy&d, ox- 
 vsw av xoLi (pofBsu,"^ 6 56 
 Ku^-og acro^Ew. 
 
 8. Scribebam, noverunt, pugnabo, timere,™ sede, amaveram, 
 percutietur, cecidere, cun^ebam,' venisti, accipiat, pugnarem, 
 magnificetur, absuraptus erat, uritut, existimabat, cecinere, 
 revocabo, lecti sunt, convocantur, potent, veniamus, vivere, 
 parantur, fugiebant, ceperunt. 
 
 9. Grfeci pervenerunt, milites profecti sunt, castra locan- 
 tur, lex erit, nonnulli aiunt, Aristides interrogabat, Medea 
 abiit, currus ferebantur, hostes aderant, avis a.volat, majoreg 
 videntur. filius stabat, corona abjicitur, vos nitimini, abeat 
 pater. . 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Adjectives, adjective pronouns and participles, agree with their 
 respective substantives, in gender, number, and case, 
 
 \ 
 
 1 . Narrow roads, cities over- 2*vo5 65o?, croXj^ avaC- 
 tumed, very high mountains, these 'ra;rog, o^ng uTS^-j-vj^i^Xof, ou- 
 jiations, a handsome youth, good ihs shog, vsavias xaXoj,* 
 men, of flying soldiers, O unfor- avr,^ aya.kc,^ (^s-oywv d-^c- 
 tunate Adonis ! of swift steeds, to cjwTrjs, A5wvij ^uC-rorfxog, 
 insolent men, ye injured children, wxucrou? Uifog, avd^u^o^ 
 all these things, whatever bene- u^^id-'ng, a^rxoufxsvo? tbx- 
 fectress. vov, sxsivog craj, ocj'tis sve^- 
 
GREEK ESEBCISES. 
 
 S$ 
 
 2. Martial songs, the dark night, 
 happier men, sweet solitude, two 
 morose men, the twelfth woman, 
 the tenth hour, to a greater man, 
 
 .of a laughing woman, to a right 
 hand, swift ships, to us two still 
 alive, of the bravest soldiers, two 
 most graceful virgins. 
 
 3. Common temples, two worthy 
 men, of a holy day, an useful man, 
 to two black eyes, of an honourable 
 fortune, every way, true horns, to 
 a tender heart, more persuasive 
 arguments, they two being young, 
 to you being wise, unfading thanks, 
 a more simple way. 
 
 • 4. Of a golden sword, a double 
 cottage, to another ship, of a great- 
 er father, to illiberal men, two 
 beautiful women, O immortal vir- 
 tue ! the easiest way, of senseless 
 animals, with winged words, ruin- 
 ous schemes, mglorious securit}'-. 
 
 5. ^ Thou wilt be a very happy 
 man ; good men profit, but bad 
 men hurt ; the Thebans being per- 
 suaded, put them to flight; the 
 soldiers raising a shout, cheerfully 
 followed ; all having laughed, took 
 courage ; in a short time all were 
 gone. 
 
 6. The boat was already crowd- 
 ed ; they will be laughed at ; the 
 ranks lately raised were moving 
 on 5 an undisciplined tongue is a 9-a^i^, axoXatfToj y\u}(f(fa 
 
 S\)(jXoXog avd^wiroj, 5w(5exo- 
 Tos yvvri, Ssxarog u^a, fxi' 
 yag avrj^, yeXawv yuv^), 6e- 
 
 |«o5 X^'f » °i^^ ^^^^i ^7^ ^^^ 
 ^awv, aycL&og (fr^ariUTrig, 
 
 Tilis^a, ay log, x^'^^^^S av>)^,» 
 
 \£og ojv auTof, <i\) wv Cotpog", 
 X'^i^i a7''3^w5, acrXouj oJof . 
 
 X^utfco J fjsaxai^a, ^i-rXous 
 xaXu€r), vrtuj aXXo^, ifoLT-r]^ 
 l^syag, ecJsXsu&s^og av^^w- 
 cro?, xaKog yuvr], a^avaTog 
 a^£Tr)j ^aSiog hdog, a^^wv 
 ^wov, crcc^osij sitog, oXoog 
 ^fvXr,, a:fcpaXsia a5o^oj. 
 
 EvdoLiiiuv avS^uirog £<fjt,j 
 6 ayuoog w(peXsw 6 8s xccxog 
 /SXa-JfTCj, @r)^aiog "ffSKT^gjg 
 T^sifo},^ 6 (f-T^aTiuTTig aXa- 
 Xa^wv I-Tojuiai "ff^o^u/xof , ifag 
 yzkadag Su^ufASw, ^^ctxyg 
 p(^ovog'^ -ffaj a-jraXXatfcfw.™ 
 
 H^r] ffXi^^iig Si/xj TO flr'o^d- 
 jut.e»cv, xarays'ka(f'rog s»jx», 
 vcov tfuvo^ivojxevoj xivufxj™ 
 
 ejfjLi oLi(fx^% votfoff, aSixov^LS- 
 vog av^^wjroff jxaXXov opyr- 
 
 most baneful pest; men, when 
 treated unjustly, are more angry 
 liian when compelled by force. 
 
 7. Capita multa, rectae rationi, humanam speciem, maximaj 
 parti, cranium virile, rex potentissimus, pars decima, milites 
 ledeuntes, acies instructa, urbs opulenta et magna, insidif 
 manifestae, hortus amcenus et maximus, mancipia dirept**, 
 aisieos fideles, venientes discipuli, cogitantes poetae. 
 
 O 
 
GRSEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 j9 verb signifying actively governs the accusative. 
 
 Evtoi fii-gvroi vom\os xon 
 
 1. Some indeed buy in. preference, 
 those corselets which are variegated, 
 and those which are overlaid with 
 gold. 
 
 2. Fear the Deity , honour your 
 parents, reverence your friends. 
 
 3. Two certain causes seem to 
 have given birth to poetry. 
 
 4. O wretched creature, ivhat 
 good thing hasve you in your pos- 
 session, or vjkat pleasure do you 
 knovj ? 
 
 5. Hate those Oiat flatter as those 
 that deceive ; for \)oth, when tmst- 
 ed, injure these who trust them. 
 
 6. Do you not know, that the 
 unjust shall not inherit the king- 
 dom ? 
 
 7. For either tune cons'umes or 
 disease impairs beauty. 
 
 8. The poets knoxo that this is 
 so, and the difference. 
 
 9. For ye have the poor always, 
 but ye have not me always. 
 
 10. I did one ivork^ and ye all 
 wonder. 
 
 11. TT For it has not shoes by 
 the smith, nor ar7ns by the shoe- 
 jiiaker. 
 
 12. They all had brazen helmets 
 and purple tunics, and greaves, and 
 their shields well polished. 
 
 13. And thinkest thou this, O 
 man, ihdljudgest them who do such 
 things, and dost the same, that 
 
 thou shaU escape the judgment of 6tj tfu owpeuyw™ o x^i/xa 4 
 God ? esoff ; 
 
 s-rip^PuCoj dw^af f^aXXov 
 covsojxat. 
 
 yovsuj Ti/xaw, o 5s (piXog 
 EiKw"™" 5e yavvaw^ o -rom- 
 
 TJX7] aiTia 5uo TJJ. 
 
 MiCsw xoXaxeuWjS wC- 
 
 a^ixecj. 
 
 H o'jx sj^sw,™" on adixo^ 
 ^■OLdxkUd ou xXi^iovcixcw ; 
 
 KaXXoj fxev ya^ ->] %^ovoj 
 
 avaXia'xo;^ 75 vocJ'og fxa^aivw.* 
 
 'Oti ouToff ouTw? £;(;w, xcu 
 
 5»a p^aXxeyj,* ouJs orXa 
 d»a tfxuTSuj.* 
 
 E;!(M 5e Taj x^avo? X**^' 
 xsoj, xa» }(iTwv (po<v/xof, xa» 
 xvi^fxif , xai adKig sxxsxa- 
 
 Aoyi(^o/*oy 5e outoj, w av- 
 
 ^^OJTOj:, X^IVWe 6 TOfOVTOg 
 
GREBK EXERCISES. 
 
 87 
 
 iaojJt.ai,^ votfsw,^? a'no&vriG- 
 xw,^ 6 Xa\5ot.iog ifokvg 6a- 
 vo,Tog ir^oayo^EvUy^ siru xa» 
 avTog 6 irsir^u^Bvov xara- 
 
 Ilof/^-jrii'iof, xai Ta'iog Kaj- 
 tfcj", oXoj 'xoktg a?OT)v <rc- 
 Oaxjraxig avai^eu,^^ xcci sv 
 Ta^ara^i^ ToXyj jxu^jag icr- 
 
 6 jSiog. 
 15. Jusserunt eos, habebunt currus, mitlebant nuncios, 
 dicens haec, addiixisse obsides, socios metiiere, reliquerat nul- 
 lum, vera locutus, eosdem honoravisti, quos tu vides, bene- 
 
 14. Hippocrates having cured 
 many diseases, fell sick and died ; 
 the Chaldeans foretold the deaths 
 of man}'", then fate took them off 
 also ; Alexander, and Pompey, and 
 Caius Caesar, having entirely de- 
 stroijed whole cities so often, and 
 having cut off many myriads of horse 
 and foot in battle, at last departed 
 from life themselves. 
 
 volentiam 
 habitus. 
 
 habe, videns filmm, dimittes nuncios, mutavisse 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 7%e prepositions avri, aero, sx or £|, and if^ag., govern the genitiPt ; 
 fv, and tfuv, the dative ; E\g or sg, and ava, the accusative. ^—Jn 
 the Ionic and Doric poets, omol is joined with a dative. 
 
 1 . He shall reign instead of him. 
 
 2. We ought to choose glory 
 before riches. 
 
 3. The king alone is worth ten 
 thousand men. 
 
 4. It is a fine thing to receive 
 immortal glory, in exchangeybr a 
 mortal body. 
 
 5. I say that they are equally 
 distant/;-om the canti'e. 
 
 6. To appoint magistrates by 
 the bean. > 
 
 7. I did proceed, and I am come 
 fro?n God; for I have not come 
 from myself, but he sent me. 
 
 BatfiXsuw avri Dtfivof. 
 
 AvTi fxu^iw (fT^cLTiurns 
 Sifu (Saifi'hcug, 
 
 Kakr^i avTi 6r^TQg tfwjLta, 
 a^avATo^ 5o^a avrixacaX- 
 
 XAO'tfW.'n^f 
 
 Asyu on itfov a'ies)(u^ asro 
 
 6 xsvr^ov. 
 
 Eyw ex Qsog s^e^o/wu 
 xai rjxw ou ya^ airo f/xauroy 
 f^ofjiai, aXXa fxfjvof 5yw 
 a-ffofl'TsXXw. 
 
23 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 8. Night intervened, and on the 
 next day we came to the assembly. 
 
 9. I did catch in the cave, having 
 returned from the feeding of my 
 cattle, many fellows. 
 
 10. For the issue of this was in 
 the Deity, not in me. 
 
 11. Pleasure is rather in rest, 
 than in motion. 
 
 12. He was a manslayer from 
 the beginning, and he has not stood 
 in the truUh ; because the truth is 
 jaot in him. 
 
 13. When he went to the Per- 
 sians. 
 
 14. The just man shall live by 
 faith. 
 
 15. And some were Grecians, 
 of those who luent up, that ihey 
 might worship in the festival 
 
 16. IT It contributes much to 
 their learning to be temperate, that 
 they see the older men also living 
 temperately, through every day. 
 
 - 17. I think it the duty of a good 
 citizen, to choose the safely of af- 
 fairs, before grace in speaking. 
 
 18. They found the loud thun- 
 dering son of Saturn sitting vpon 
 the summit of Gargarus. 
 
 19. Having vz his hands the fillet 
 of the far-darting Apollo, upon a 
 golden sceptre. 
 
 20. Alii vero, constructo rogo ante tumulos, et efFossa fovea, 
 quadam, adolentque sumptuosas illas cobnas, et infundunt 
 vinum, mulsumque in foveas. 
 
 21. Ego meis posteris generis princeps ero, meumque a m^ 
 genus incipiet, tuum vero in te dosinet. 
 
 udrs^atos^ Sig 6 gxxXrjtfia. 
 
 KaraXttfJiSavw ev o a»- 
 
 TPov, affo vo/tif] avatfrps- 
 
 Ev ycf.p 6 &SQS h ouro; 
 TsT^og sjjxi, oux £v e^w. 
 
 'Hdovrj jjwxXXov £v 7j^?jjii»i 
 £</Ai, 1^ ev xivrjtfjg. 
 
 'Exiivog avfl^w^roxTovo^ eijuu 
 uiro 0.^7], xaj sv 6 oCkridsKt 
 ov^^ ](iT7]lir on aXri&sia oux 
 sii^i £v o.vros. 
 
 'Ore SIS Us^iiris arEijXi."' 
 
 'O Jjxaicj £x irjtfng ?aw.* 
 
 Eija» 6s Tig 'EXXrjv, rx o 
 ava€ajvw,'& iva 'Ti'poc'xbvew^ 
 
 E« koPTT]. 
 
 Ms/a (5s fl'jjj.§aXXw'° Sis 
 
 Tog, on xa» 6 -r^str^ug o^aw, 
 ava ^ag ^|X£Pa tfoj^povw^ 
 5iayw. 
 
 Aixaiog croXiTijgS x^ivw, 
 6 c^a^jxa CwTr^Pia, avTi 
 6 cv 6 Xeyo/ X'^^i'^' ^'*" 
 
 Eu^ifl'xw^ o' £ll^U04' K^6- 
 vi(5i5g ava Ta^aPog ax^og 
 yjlJ'Svos. 
 
 2<r£jx/xa r£ sx^^ ^ X^*? 
 IxvjooXog AffoXXwv, x^y<J'£o; 
 ava (fXTTTTT^ov. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 29 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 Ata and vits^ govern the genitive, or accusative ; ofAqji, £*«, ATf^i, 
 and uffo, the genitive, dative, or accusative. 
 
 GENITIVE. , 
 
 1. To deliberate hy night and 
 day. 
 
 2. For us the Deity assumed 
 human nature. 
 
 3. On the third day sitting upon 
 his chariot, he was prosecuting his 
 march. 
 
 4. Begin therefore from small 
 things; never say of any thing, 
 that I lost it, but that I restored it. 
 
 6. For a good work we stone 
 thee not. 
 
 6. Your forgetfulness, about all 
 things^ is near ; and the forgetflil- 
 ness of all, about you, is near also. 
 
 7. He was always discoursing 
 about the affairs of men ; consider- 
 ing what was pious, what impious ; 
 what honourable, what shameful ; 
 what just, what unjust. 
 
 8. Concerning the poioer of let- 
 ters and syllables, and harmony and 
 rhythm. 
 
 9. Not to be corrupted by riches., 
 by pleasures, or by fear. 
 
 Xxoifsu (5»a vu| xai ^^ut' 
 |a. 
 
 Aia, Byu av&^uitrorrig o 
 Qsog v(pKiTyi}J^i.^ 
 
 a.^/*a xa^rjfxai o iro^Sia, *»<- 
 su, 
 
 (JLix^oj' ixrjSsiroTS szi fjt,»3- 
 6sis siru,^ 6-Ti aTToXXufxi au- 
 ros, aXXrt on a<iro6iSuiJ,i, 
 Hs^i xaXos e^/ov ou Xj. 
 
 AvTos Ss TTS^i 6 avQ^u- 
 wsios ast ^(aXsyo/xar tfxo- 
 
 €>]j* Tig xaXog, Tif atdy^^oi' 
 tis Sixaiog, rts a^ixof. 
 
 ns^j TS y^cL^\ka Suva^is 
 xcci (f<jXka^r}, xai a^jxovia, 
 xai ^u^ju-og. 
 
 AvaXwToj u^o Xfil|X«, 
 xa» u'TT'o Tj^ovYj, xai i5<o (p«» 
 
 §Off. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 1. Until they reduced Thessaiy 
 vnder Philip. 
 
 2. Dancing to flutes and pipes, 
 and /a the somwc? of all kinds of 
 instruments, 
 
 C2 
 
 Xb^uw uflTo t£ auXoff, xai 
 tfu^iyg, xai •jravTO^CMtof »;-. 
 2'avow *);(of. 
 
30 
 
 Creek exercises. 
 
 co.aai ya^ iroXvg, xai ys. 
 
 XOJOJ, Cto JjULttTlOV XPU'T- 
 
 AiduPaa§og MsXavi-nrTiSriff 
 effi 02 T^a/o;o<a 2o(poxX'/)f, 
 ET'i 5s Av^Piavro'TTni'ia IIo- 
 XuxXerrof, sen (Js 2w)/pa(pia 
 
 Kai Xsyw a^icfT^a. 
 6 ya^ roiros S'jri 6j vuv liflr^. 
 
 f.M, ST"! aUTOg,^ (XyjOg SjfAI. 
 
 6. And they were astonished ai Kai extXtiCCw^ scrj o 
 
 3. Strip this man also ; for thou 
 shalt see many, and ridiculous 
 things, lying hid under his garment. 
 
 4. In epic poeti-y then, I, for my 
 part, admire Homer most ; in di- 
 thyramhic verse, Melanippides ; in 
 tragedy, Sophocles ; in statuary, 
 Poiyclitus ; in painting, Zeuxis. 
 
 5. And the general oF the Lord 
 says to Joshua, loose the shoe off 
 thy feet, for the place upon which 
 thou hast now stood, on it, is holy. 
 
 hm doctrine, for he was teaching 
 them, as one having power, not as 
 the scribes. 
 
 7. They have the horses tied by 
 the feet to the stalls; and if any 
 one would go against them., it is a 
 labour to loose the horses at night, 
 a labour to put on the bit, a labour 
 to put on the saddle, a labour to 
 put on the coat of mail : and it is 
 entirely impossible, that they hav- 
 ing mounted on the horses, could 
 drive through the camp 
 
 Sc/Mko), uvrog, us S^ovifio. 
 ^X^i °^X ^ ° y^aiJ^iia- 
 <r£uc. 
 
 UoSi^OiV^S ya^ S'xyi o 
 
 Tig fC« auTcg^ siiii,'^ s^yov 
 
 yov (5s p^aXivow, s^^ov de 
 
 j^rcrog? sXauvw^f Oia. 6 ff7^a. 
 <ro<7re5ov,& Travracratfiv adu- 
 
 VKTCf. 
 
 I ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 1. For they now suspected that 
 they were going against the king, 
 
 2, And immediately he was un- 
 able to contain himself, but having 
 said, I see the man, he rushed upon 
 him. 
 
 S. •Oyi-us sometimes invited a 
 ■wliole comptny to supper, with the 
 captain. 
 
 (BadikEvs sjjxi. 
 
 Ka» ev&ug oux .ave;)^w,™® 
 aXX' STtu), o^w coir^, Wr 
 jjLi"^ sir I oMTog. 
 
 Ku^Off oXog "TOTE Ta|»j, tfuv 
 Tafia^off. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 31 
 
 4. For he knew that the chief 
 priests had delivered him through 
 envy. 
 
 5. They came, not on account of 
 Jesus alone^ but that they might 
 also see Lazarus. 
 
 6. But, as I think, you did not 
 come the most beautiful person, 
 under the earth. 
 
 7. Priam and Panihous and Thy- 
 moetes. 
 
 S. Many of the Jews had come 
 to Martha and Maria. 
 
 9. He also goes out to assist, 
 with those that are about hiin. 
 
 10. The hunters, those ivho stu- 
 dy philosophy, the things which 
 belong to war, the occurrences at 
 Lampsacus. 
 
 1 1 . The greater number at last 
 were spent by weakness ; for the 
 disorder first seated in the head, 
 having begun from alcove, went 
 througJwut the whole body. 
 
 12. IT Timon shall do no such 
 thing about you any more, for the 
 spade has completely taught him, 
 that he ought to choose you to 
 himself, before poverty. 
 
 13. But tell thou me, how the 
 things upon earth are, and what 
 they do in the city. 
 
 14. And the others who fought 
 v.'ith Dariua- against the Scythians ; 
 because the whole Persian army 
 was in their poioer, to destroy, or to 
 save it. 
 
 rivutfxw^ ya.^ on 5ia 
 (pdovog 6 A^i£^sus auroff 
 
 tfoug (xovoj, aXXa Iva xai o 
 Aa(^a^oj £»(5w.^'= 
 
 AXXa ov)(i xai xtifa yza^ 
 us oi|xai, xaXos £^;(OfAa». 
 
 'Op* ds aiicpi n^ia/jbog xau 
 
 llav6oog riSs ©u/xoiriig. 
 
 IIoXuj sx 6 lovSoLiog £^0- 
 fxaj -r^og oPi^^ irs^t Maf&a. 
 xat Ma^ja. 
 
 Ex^orj^sw xai auroc, (fuv 
 'ffs^i avTog. 
 
 'O irs^i 6 5>]^a, 6 "jrs^i 
 (piXoo'ocp;a, 6 a/x(p< 6 croXf- 
 li.og, 6 "Tc^i Aaix-^axos. 
 
 'O 9roXu^ vdls^ov dtcc o 
 a(j &s\isia diu^&siPW^ 6is^- 
 fifj.i"^^ ^a^ (5ia crag o CwfAa,? 
 avw^cv a^^o,aa»,^ 6"^ Sv 6 
 xc^paX'Ji "T^ajrov iJ^uwP^S xa- 
 xoj. 
 
 Ou^s;^ STi TOiovros 6 Ti- 
 
 ■ravu ^a^ auroj 6 SixsWa 
 'n'aKh.yuyBu, us y^l'f? Cu, 
 avTi -^revja, c'^oai^ew. 
 
 Arap f-TTw gj^w, ttwj 6 
 •or.zi yiaZ zyu^ xai tjj 
 
 ■aOJ^W £V 'ToXfJ. 
 
 Kai CuCr^arEuw"^? 
 Aa^siog^ aXXoj S-ttj 2xu^rig-a 
 cTi s-rrj ou70g<* 6 ttO-S IIs^. 
 tfixoj CTPa-Tia yivo|xa»,^ 5<a(p- 
 
 xai T'^fl'TOJeW. 
 
 15. Si vero nonnunquam invitatus ad coenoM vellet acce- 
 dere, quod operosissimum est plurimis, cavere scilicet, ne se 
 lepleant ultra satietatem^ hoc perquam facile cavebat. 
 
31i 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 16. Sic enim vivis, quo pacto qui vis eervus sub domino 
 rictitans, non maneret. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Kara, from or against, commonly governs the genitive; at, or 
 according to, the accusative. Msra, with, the genitive or 
 dative ; to, or after, the accusative. Ua^a and 'jr^os, from, ih4 
 genitive ; at, or with, the dative ; to, beside, or against, the 
 accusative. 
 
 1. And in no long time the 
 malady descended to the breast, 
 Vfith a severe cough. 
 
 2. For I was returning home 
 possessing great praise f?'om you, 
 and possessing, through you also, 
 glory from the other Greeks. 
 
 3. His venerable mother heard 
 him as she was sitting iviih her 
 
 fathe?'. 
 
 4. He went to Egypt to A7nasis, 
 and also to Sardis to Crassus. 
 
 5. As two are to four, so are 
 four to eight. 
 
 6. Of not fewer than five hun- 
 dred, who sailed in the ship, three 
 with (and) thirty only were saved. 
 
 7. It was terrible, not according 
 to one only of the circumstances. 
 
 8. The article stands loith a 
 noun, and the pronoun, for a noun. 
 
 9. The way to be filled is much 
 more simple and straight with us, 
 than with you. 
 
 10. IF Jlfter the reyfew, desert- 
 ers having come from the great 
 
 Kai ev ou 'ji'oXuj X?^^°^ 
 xaTabttJvw^ fg <jTif\dog « 
 
 E^w jui-cv ya^ iyjj) ctoci. 
 vo^ 'TToXug "TT^oj Cu aTcn'o- 
 ^suw"" (ojxa(5s,) £p^w Js (5ta 
 CUj xai i-rro o aXkog 'EXXtjv 
 £uxXe»a. 
 
 *05s xXuw -TTOTVJOJ fAr^T^JP 
 
 ^/xajg' 's'a^a iru7ri^ ye^wv. 
 
 « 
 
 Eg Ai^uTToff a-jrrxvfoju-ai 
 flTa^a AfxaCig, xai 5r) xai sg 
 Jla^Sig trapo. KPoi(fog. 
 
 *r2g o"^ 6vo 'jf^og rsC- 
 (fa^sg, ovru xa» 6 TSO'o'afsg 
 
 ff^Og OXTW. 
 
 'O ffXsw'fi^ £v vaujr, 
 oux £Xa;)(ug ii "rsvraxoo'joi, 
 
 TPtIg "TT^Og T^iaxovTa 1*0- 
 vov (Jjao'wi^w.^ 
 
 Asivog £j,ai, ou xara ^ig 
 jxovog 6 <!f^a.y[ia..Z 
 
 'O a^^pov iui£?a ovofAa, 
 xai 6 avTwvufAia, avri ovc- 
 fxa. 
 
 IIoXu tt'TrXoog xai eudug 
 wa^a syw 6 oJcg £j,a» fcri 
 0? £jjwrXrj^w,^^ •>) Ta^a tfu. 
 
 M£Ta (J£ £^tra(rig, av- 
 TOjxoXog v/xw ffctPa fxeyo^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 33 
 
 king, gave information respecting 
 the king's army. 
 
 1 1 . He thought that those who 
 inquired such things from the gods, 
 did impious things. 
 
 12. And after them, all the other 
 arts are the third rank, thus ar- 
 ranged, according to their parts, but 
 they all look to the God, obeying 
 the common command //-om hi?n. 
 
 padiksvg a.ira.yysKKu rs^ 
 jSatfiXsuc: tfT^ana. 
 
 Kaj fASra auToj"" Ss, o 
 TPiTog 'To.^ig Xojffoj te^^ii 
 crac, y.uTCL jxs^oj fxsv, ourw 
 
 6 ©£0^ a-rooXscrco, xoivoj i 
 
 Kara o ca?a auroj eflof, 
 tfi/V-l/O^ew oirXov xai tfy- 
 vaXaXtti^c*),^ 6^,aaw gri g 
 <n'&X?/j.icj.a 
 
 13. According to the customs with 
 themselves, they made a noise all 
 together, ^vith their arms ; and, 
 having shouted together, they 
 rushed against the enemies. 
 
 14. And perhaps Cjnrus was too 
 talkative, because he was oblige?, 
 b}'^ his master to give an account 
 of the things which he did, and to 
 receive it from others, when he 
 judged. 
 
 15. Cum his et Cyi'um contemplabere, et Priamrurn et 
 Dionysium. 
 
 16. Ex his igitur cupiebat aliquid jam negotiorum adversus 
 hostes gerere. 
 
 17. Ego vero fretus venio, primurn equidem deis, deinde 
 legibus ac vobis, existimans nullum apparatum valere apud 
 vos, plus quam leges atque jura. 
 
 Ka» £<,aj |X£v Kfug o Ku- 
 ^og 'b'oX'jXovo^,^ ot< avay. 
 xa^u) iiTTo 6 6iia(fy.a\og xut 
 ^((5w,aj Xoyog hgS -roisu,^ xou 
 Xajx§avw ita^cx, aXkog i-a'OTS 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 Om substantive agrees with another, signifying the same thing, 
 in case. 
 
 1 . We the unworthy servants. Eyu 6 SouXog ava^iog. 
 
 2. O friends, Grecian heroes, ser- CI (piXog, t,^ug Aavoo^, 
 vants of Mars. ^t^a-rrwv Apt)?. 
 
 3. Hath one Calchas a vrophet KaXyag Tig e^ef*a<* 
 come 1 fjuxvrif ; 
 
34 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 4. I am a relation to you, being 
 also myself a cur, 
 
 5. Of God the Father and the 
 Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 6. IT And a certain Pharisee of 
 the council rising up, named Ga- 
 maliel, a doctor of laiv, ordered them 
 to put out the men a little while. 
 
 7. And all the other men pro- 
 claiming him their benefactor^ a ?nan 
 of worth. 
 
 S. You m.ay teach the son of 
 Croesus ; for I -wish to be a talker, 
 and not a statue. 
 
 9. For Homer, relating the 
 wounds, dissensions, revenges, 
 tears, chains, and sufferings of 
 every kind, of the gods, t'ems to 
 me, as much a.-; in his power, to 
 
 have made the ?nen who fought 
 Troy, gods, and the gods, men. 
 
 at 
 
 ^vyysv'/is si^u <fv,^ xi>wv 
 xai auTos eip. 
 
 0£og craTY)^ xai xu^joj 
 Iridovs X^KJ'ro.C. 
 
 AvitfTrjjxi^ 6e rig SK 
 tfuvco^jov ^a^itfajo.c, ovojxa 
 rajxaXirjX, vo,ao'5<oa(fxa- 
 
 Ktti 6 aWog rrag av^^w- 
 •xog avoLxakeu o fcjc^ysr'/if, 
 
 (fradig, tijuiw^iov, oax^y, 
 6 /x£v fT» 6 IXiaxogP^^ av. 
 
 , 'Od£ 6 rskfoTYi, u Ex^- 
 x^arriSj • STtti^og syu^ yi- 
 
 vo.aai,^ av>5^ a.ya&og, xat 
 
 10, This was the end, O Eche- 
 crates, of our friend, a man^ the 
 best and wisest and most just. 
 
 11. Venia, O Ajax, ei debetur, si, cum esset homo, ap- 
 petivit gloriam, rem dulcissimam, propter quam et nostrum 
 unusquisque periclitari sustinet ; quandoquidem ©tiam vicit 
 le, et hsEC apud judices Trojanos. 
 
 CHAP. VIIL 
 
 The conjunctio7is, xaj, rs, 5s, aXXa, (uisv, oure, and the like, wiU, 
 have the same case ; and, commonly, the same mood and tense 
 after them, that goes before them. 
 
 1 . Ye have loved me, and have Eyu (pjXscj, xai mtfTSiju 
 believed that I came forth fi'om on syu cra^a o 0soj eff^- 
 
 Xoii.ai 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 35 
 
 2. Having heard these things, 
 and having given and received pledg- 
 es^ they departed. 
 
 3. I both see and know that 
 thou makest, both racers, and lurest- 
 lers, and boxers, andpancratiasts. 
 
 4. Deliberate slowly, but execute 
 promptly, the things which have 
 appeared unto thee proper to be 
 done. 
 
 5. Love, not the immoderate acqui- 
 sition, but the moderate enjoyment^ of 
 present good. 
 
 6. IT Cyrus then first reviewed 
 the Barbarians, (but they marched 
 by, marshalled by troops and by 
 coinpanies,) and next the Greeks. 
 
 7. For I am persuaded, that 
 neither death nor life, nor angels nor 
 principalities, nor things present nor 
 things to come, nor poiaers, nor heighth, 
 nor depth, nor any thing created, can 
 separate us from the love of God, 
 which is in Christ Jesus. 
 
 12. For he said that he saw 
 them both carefully acquiring houses 
 and lands, and slaves and herds, and 
 striving 
 posses- 
 
 Axouw^ ouro^, xat Ss^ia 
 
 Xauvw. 
 
 jcai iraXaKjTV]gy xai 'ffuycr'/ig, 
 xai ffayx^arjafl'T'TiJ, opw re 
 xai siSsu.^'^ 
 
 sriTsXsoj 6a Ta^swg 60' 
 xsw.^ff 
 
 y.ry\(iig^ aXka o fisr^ioj 
 a.Tro'ka.vifis* 
 
 cTPw-ov psv Bap^aPQg, (& 
 ^5 "rra^sXauvoj' <rfTayjut,svog 
 xar' iX'/]^ xa» xara 7af«g^) 
 fjTa o« 6 *EXX")]V. 
 
 Iltj^w ya^, o7» OUTS 4a- 
 varog, ours <^w'-i; cure ay- 
 ysXog, ou7e a^X^' **'^"^ 
 svs(fTug, ou-rs jXsXXwv, outs 
 ouvajajj, OUTS u4/W|xa, ours 
 /Sa^oj, OUTS TJj xTiffig srs- 
 ^oc:, Juva,a«» s^'w X^i?'"^" 
 c/.-ffo aj/a-ff'/) 0eo^, 6 sv 
 
 OiXia yft^, xai a^'Pocr, 
 x«j av5^aTo(5ov, xai /3o(r. 
 xigj/a, xai ij-Kf-vog, xTao/xaie 
 <rs £7ri|j.s>.6J^ c^cw ®*iiu.j, xai 
 6 wv Cwj^w ffsi^aw."'? 
 
 articles of furniture, and 
 to preserve their present 
 sions. 
 
 13. But now, the finest trag-e- 
 dies are composed respoctiof^ a few 
 families, as, for example, respecting 
 AlcmcBon, and Oedipus, and Orestes, 
 and Meleager, and Thijestes, and 
 Telephiis. 
 
 14. In his enim solis silentio rnelior est oratio ; in aHis vero 
 iaeerg satius est guam loqui. 
 
 Nuv ^z <rs^i oXj^'oj oixia 
 xaCKog T^ajuSia tfijvri^Tj- 
 fti, o;ov crs^i AXxp^aiwv,* 
 xai OtSi-xovgy xai 0^s(fT7^, 
 xat MsXeaj'-^oj, xai ©uetf- 
 Tyig, xai TriKsapcg. 
 
30 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 15. Clui proximi sunt Deo, ct circa eum ordine instnicti, 
 geometrcBf aritkmeiici, philosophic medici, astronomic ei grammaiicL 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 Av, foev, SflTfi^av, Jva, o^^a, oirug, orav, ocfoTav, xav, xsv, wg, arCj 
 /or the most part, joined ivith the subjunctive mood. 
 
 — Av, xav, and xsv, are often used to give a subjunctive or optative 
 meanins: to the other moods. 
 
 1. Whom we announce, teach- 
 ing every man in all wisdom, that 
 we may render every man perfect in 
 Christ Jesus. 
 
 2. I advise thee to buy of me 
 gold tried by fire, in order that thou 
 may est be rich, and white garments, 
 in order that thou mayest clothe thy- 
 self, and that the shame of thy 
 nakedness may not be made apparent. 
 
 3. For if either loe live, we live 
 unto the Lord, or if we die, we die 
 unto the Lord. 
 
 4. When then, O Athenians, 
 when will ye do the things which 
 it behoves you to do? whenever 
 any thing may have haj^ened 1 when- 
 ever any necessity may exist ? 
 
 6. Hear, ye Trojans, Dardans, 
 and allies, that I may utter what 
 things my soul in my Ijosom 
 prompts me (to say.) 
 
 6. Whenever, O Critobulus, thou 
 mayest wish to become a friend to 
 any one, wilt thou permit me to 
 speak against thee unto him 1 
 
 7. Do thou tell me, in order 
 thai I, having returned home, may 
 gladden the old blind monarch. 
 
 8. But if they should not give 
 
 'O^ syu xarc(.yysKKu, 
 Oi8a(fxu itctg avd^wroj tv 
 "jrag tfocpja, Iva ira^Kfrtiiu^ 
 'Kag av&PWJTog rsksiog sv 
 X^Kfrog l7i(fo-og. 
 
 2ujx§ouXsuw (fu** ayo- 
 
 'ffS'Tv^uiisvog ix cru^, Iva 
 crXouTSw,^ xaj i/xa<rjov Xsm- 
 xo?, Iva -rg^i^aXXw,™^ xca 
 fjoi] (pavs^ow^ ajcfp^uvrj » 
 
 2'U/XVO-T75J tfU. 
 
 Eav T£ ya.^ ^aw, o Ku- 
 ctoc,^ ZoLu, eav 7S acrodvTjtf- 
 xw, 6 Kv^icg^ a'rro&vri<fxu. 
 
 IIot' ouv, w avr]^ A6r,- 
 va.iog, croTS hg -x^ri ff^afl'- 
 (Tw ; sirsiSav rig yivofi^ai f 
 STiSidw uMuyxri <ng ejfjw ; 
 
 . KXu.ai, T^wj, xa/ Aa^da- 
 vcc, riS^ STTjxou^oj, o(p^' e^t}, 
 
 xsXsvu. 
 
 'Orav u K^iTo^ouXoff (pi- 
 Xoff Tiff yivofji/tti^ /3ouXo|xai, 
 
 auTog ; 
 
 Aeyw,^ yfi^wv TiipXoff wg 
 xara CTsy^jPi* s^oiiat" rsf- 
 
 El 5e xs f'-»i 5i5w/*i,*« 
 
6KEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 37 
 
 one, I in person will take one away 
 for mjself. 
 
 9. ^ Why then do I say these 
 things 1 In order that you may 
 perceive, O Athenians, that nothing 
 is to be dreaded by you, if you re- 
 main upon your guard, nor, if you 
 be negligent, proves such as you 
 may ivish it to be. 
 
 10. These are the things which 
 we, O Athenians, have been able 
 to devise. When then you may 
 have decided upon the opinions 
 which have been offered, decree 
 whatsoever things may please you, 
 in order that you may wage icar 
 with Philip, not only in your de- 
 crees and your letters, but also in 
 youi actions. 
 
 1 1 . For if we had then promptly 
 sent our assistance thither, as we 
 decreed, Philip uiould not now he 
 disturbing us. 
 
 12. If Phcebus Apollo had not 
 sent forth the noble Agenor, the 
 sons of the Greeks would then have 
 taken lofty -walled Troy. 
 
 13. As the statuaries now-a- 
 days say that Daedalus woidd he 
 kmghed at. 
 
 14. But, said he, if thou per- 
 ceivest any mode of obtaining sup- 
 plies that coidd even originate with 
 me. 
 
 15. Lord, hadst thou been here, 
 
 Bytti 6s xgv auTog aj^s«- 
 
 Tig? ouv Ivfxa oiiTos Xsyu ; 
 *Iva ?»5w w avrj^ A^rjvajof, 
 oTiovSsig, ourscpuXaT-rojxsvof 
 ifv^ sdTi cpo^s^QS, OUTS av oX*- 
 
 'Oct jXcv £yod w av»)^ A^r^- 
 vaio? Som^ai sv^idxu,^ ou<ro$ 
 £i/xr sirsiSc/.v 6s stri-^si^orb- 
 vsw yvwfjLrj,* 6g av tfu^ 
 a^ctfxw p(t«^oTov£6d,^ iva /**} 
 fjuovov fv •v]-'7](T;j(j'fxa xai o 
 S'^^iffToXr, •ToXspt-sw *»Xi9r- 
 •jrog, aXXa xa< 6 s^/cv. 
 
 E/ ya^ TOTS sxskjS ^oTf- 
 
 ^•j|xw<r, oux av svop^Xsw^t* vu» 
 syw^ 6 ^jXicf'n'og. 
 
 Ev^a xsv u-vj^i'TTuXoff Tfojt) 
 ojpsu^^ vlsvg Ap^aioj, £< |xij 
 A'ToXXwv ^Qi^og Ayr^vw^ 
 5ioj avnfjjjLi.* 
 
 'ncire^ xai o Aaj^aXo^ 
 <p'/),aj 6 avJ^iavro'irojog vyv 
 ■KOLiayskudrog av sifjii/* 
 
 Ara^, (pr]|xi, tfu £i svo^au 
 7ig iro^og xai aff' syu a* 
 ff^otfyivofAai/e: 
 
 Ku^JCg SI £lfJL/2 (Jj^ffj owt 
 
 av ^vrjCxw^b ^ a(5£X(poff. 
 
 my brother ?f om/^ not have died. 
 
 16. Idcirco et legislator primum hoc posuit in judicum 
 -jurejurando, " Sententiam feram secundum leges ;" illud nimi- 
 rum bene sciens, quod, cum conserv^arentur civitati IegeS| 
 servatur etiam democratia. 
 
 D 
 
ss 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 Substantive verbs, verbs passive o/" naming, and verbs of gesture, 
 have a nomnative both before and after them, belonging to the 
 same thin^. 
 
 1. Wealth is the minister of \dce 
 rather than of virtue. 
 
 2. Leave thou public employ- 
 ments, not richer^ but more honoured. 
 
 3. Small changes have been of- 
 tentimes the causes of great evil. 
 
 4. The form of government is 
 the nurse of men ; a good forjn, 
 ^f virtuous men ; but the contrary 
 form, of \vicked men. 
 
 5. What then can one saj", when 
 such old persons are lovers of life 1 
 
 6. Be such to thy parents, as 
 thou wouldst wish thine own chil- 
 dren to be to thee. 
 
 7. I wish it would come to pass, 
 said Araspas, that / could be useful. 
 
 3. Gordian icas 'proclaimed em- 
 ptror^ beino: about ihlrteen years 
 old. 
 
 9. IT Virtue as it seems, must be 
 both a certain sanity, and beauty^ 
 and good habit of the soul ; but 
 vice, both a disease, and turpitude^ 
 and infirmity. 
 
 10. And then to leave all those 
 tilings, that thou mayest not be 
 cast in bound, like sheep. 
 
 1 1 . Am I not free ? am I not 
 an apostle ? have I not seen Jesus 
 our Lord ? If / am not an apostle 
 to others, yet doubtless I am to 
 you; for ye are the seal of mine 
 
 nXouTos xaxja jxaXXov v\ 
 
 KoCKoxa.'ya&\ct. vT^YiPsrrjg £i(ai. 
 
 Ex xomg e-TrijxsXsia aTaX- 
 
 XaTTw,»» jXT] ifXoutfios, aXX* 
 
 TLoXkaxig (xix^off fAe<ratf- 
 Tatfig lisyas xaxog aiTia 
 yivofiaij 
 
 UoXirsicL <r^o(j)y] avfi^ws'oj 
 siixr xaXos M-sv, aya&os' o 
 6' svuvTiog, xoLxog, 
 
 T<^ ouv av ng Xsyw,*^ oiro- 
 
 TS 7Yi\lX0VT0S 9jXo^WOJ 
 
 s.^.i ; 
 
 Toiouro^ yiMoiiai 'rrs^i o 
 
 -TTt^i (fsavTov yivou.a.1 o tf^aw- 
 Tou 'Jr'aij. 
 
 El ya^ yivooai,^ ®>]|jt,i o 
 A^atfirag, on £yw av yivo- 
 
 roP^iavoc <:r£Pi £<ro5^ -Coy 
 yjvojut-aj'S" T^irfxai^Fxa auro- 
 x^aTw^ ava5t{xvu,y,i.^ 
 
 vyisia. <rs ti^ av f»|J.i,*i xai 
 xaXXo^, xa< sut^ia 4'iiX'^" 
 xaxia Ss, vo(fog rs, xai aicr- 
 X^ff, xai atf^fvsia. 
 
 Ka« To-TS -rag sxsrjoc a(pjv]- 
 |x», jva iXTj 56w'''& £|x§aXXwj* 
 wj 6 T^obarov. 
 
 Ovx £<|x» s'Ksv&s^og ; oux 
 
 £<jX» ttTOO'ToXo? ; 0U)(» I')5tfODJ 
 
 6 Ku^joj f^w o^aw ; E» aX- 
 Xoj ovx eiffci a-roCroXo?, aX- 
 Xa y£ (Tu sjfxr 6 ya^ ff(p^ay% 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 39 
 
 apostleship ; are not ye my work in 6 e/xog aflfotfToXii tfu fifw* ou 
 the Lord ? o s^/ov syoj? tfu sifj^i sv Ku- 
 
 12. Hie familiaris mens erat ab juventute. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 The mfiniiives of substantive verbs, suck as s»va», yivstf&cu, ^c. 
 have the same case after them that goes before them. 
 
 1. Dost thou think that Phi- 
 dias is a bad artist ? 
 
 2. Do not such persons as these, 
 seem to thee to be troublesome 
 friends ? 
 
 3. You see how nothing hinders 
 the Scythian Anacharsis to be ad- 
 mired, and called a loise man. 
 
 4. The name " boaster" appears 
 to me, to lie upon those loho pre- 
 tend to he richer than they are, and 
 more valiant, and who promise to do 
 those things which they are not fit 
 to do. 
 
 5. IT Thej^ entreated Cyrus to 
 be as eager as possible for the war. 
 
 6. The shortest, and safest, and 
 most honourable way, is, in what- 
 ever thing thou wishest to seem to 
 be good, to endeavoiu" to be good 
 
 Ou dox.sw Cu ToiouTos j(a- 
 "ksvog cpiXog £;/x( ; 
 
 2xu^7]j Ava-)(a.P(jts xai 6a\i- 
 |xa(^oj,r£ xat Copoj ovo/xa^w. 
 'O |X£v aX«<^wv syu^ yi 
 Soxsu ovoaa, xsijxai^ e-ttj o'' 
 c^oCTroicw^^S^ xai ffXcutfioj 
 Si,ai 7} £i/x<, xai ayS^sio^f xui 
 
 TOJtw' Og jL!,11 ixaVOj £lfA< 
 
 Ku^cggr Ssop.cn,^ ug -tt^o^u- 
 jxo;; ff^c^ 6 "roXgjxo^ ^jvofAaj.* 
 
 2uv-70|ut-of Tc, xai acffpaXiif:, 
 xaj xaXo^ 65og 6, <n (rfu) av 
 /SouXojxai ooxcw ayoJos sj/ai, 
 co'jro xai (tfs) yjvo/xai^ aya- 
 5o^ crfi^aw.'^^ 
 
 in It. 
 
 7. Mihi videtur injustus esse, a quocnnque qiiispiam bene- 
 ficiis affectus, sive amico sive hoste, referre gratiam non eni- 
 titur. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 Jt preposition often governs the same case in composition^ thai 
 it does without it. 
 
 \. 1^\\\ substitute hh.Q^ instead Tliv'Kag Xsuxo? jXfXaf 
 6f white robes. avi-aXXaTTw.™ 
 
40 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 2. Or I will dismiss you both 
 from the feast. 
 
 3. Now I, the same person, am 
 driven from my country^ dishonoured, 
 and miserable. 
 
 4. Then thinldng herself wor- 
 thy to comtnand the rest, (stand 
 before.) 
 
 5. But I associate loith gods, I 
 associate loith men that are good. 
 
 6. Having rM?z through pleasures 
 in their jouth, and having hoard- 
 ed up miseries for their old age. 
 
 7. Remember, that if you abide 
 in the same things, those who laugh 
 against you at first, shall admire 
 you at last ; but if you be over- 
 come by them, you shall receive 
 double ridicule. 
 
 8. There is also another virtue 
 nearly related to the former ones, 
 which they call Amphfication. 
 
 9. Kis venerable mother stood by 
 him as he groaned heavily. 
 
 10. ^ He himself, among the 
 rest, put on his shining armour, 
 exulting that he excelled among all 
 the hei'oes. 
 
 11. The island extending itself 
 just over against the harbour, and 
 lying near it makes it safe. 
 
 12. Those who are ignorant of 
 "wisdom and virtue, but spend their 
 whole time in revels and the like, 
 sink downv.'^ards, and err through 
 life. 
 
 13. If two consonants chance to 
 be added to a short vowel, they will 
 make the syllable long. 
 
 14. Folly, and with it inconti- 
 nence, are joined to riches and poiv- 
 erSf foiA follow with them. 
 
 •rw™ (fufjwr'ocfjov. 
 
 Nuv ari^oj auroff, oixr^oi 
 efsXauvw x^w*** 
 
 Tore 5b a^iow™ -t^oiC'tti- 
 (xi^ 6 aXXog". 
 
 Eyw 5c tfuvciai ju,£v &£oi, 
 tfuvsifjy OS uM^'^uiros aya- 
 6os. 
 
 *0 (isv r,5vg £v Vcorrjj 
 5\(LrPByjj},^ 6 6t ■xa.Xs'ffog eif 
 
 HvaojxaijP''' 6t» 6av ju<s» 
 £/x|ji£vw^ avrog, 6 xarays- 
 Xaw& tfu cr^oTS^ov, outo^ (fu 
 utfrs^ov flauaa(^w f av oe ijT- 
 <raw^ auToj, 5»tXoo» ^r^ofl'- 
 Xa/Xoav6j™ xara^'eXws. 
 
 Ev (5' auTog (5iiw»"^ voj^o-v^ 
 ^aXxoj, xu5jow 5ti -rag (XE- 
 
 'O V7;'3'o^ 6 Xi,a7]v 'rra^a- 
 TSivw, xa» s^yug £-mx£ijt;.aj, 
 
 *0 (p^ov7]G'»se xai a^tTr,5 
 acijpog, svu-xio- OS xa< o 
 <roioi/Tog as» Cuveiai,? xa-rw 
 (pspu,^ xai irXavaw"™ 5ia 
 
 (pyvv;sic; <5uo (fu/JXpwvog''* E-rt- 
 95^w,^ [i^a'/.^os -roiew o tfuX- 
 XaSr). 
 
 Suvratftfw,'' xaj rfuvcowv- 
 Xou^ew 6 fxsv crXourog xai I 
 ^uvatfTEia avoia, xai ^tSTd 
 ourof, axoXao'ia. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 41 
 
 15. First then, I am right to 
 answer to the first falsehoods, lohich 
 have been spoken against me, and to 
 the first accusers ; and then, to 
 the latter falsehoods, and the latter 
 accusers. 
 
 16. When thou art about to con- 
 sult with amj one about thine own 
 affairs, consider fii'st, how he ma- 
 naged for his own. For he who 
 plans his own business ill, wnM ne- 
 ver advise well about another's. 
 
 , my 
 loith 
 
 17. You need not wonder 
 friend, for having heen lately 
 Homer and Euripides, I know not 
 how I was filled with their words, 
 and the verses come of their own 
 accord into my mouth. 
 
 18. Socrates taught his associ- 
 ates to refrain from things impious, 
 unjust, and shameful, not only when 
 they might be seen by men, bat 
 also when they might be in soli- 
 tude. 
 
 19. Ajax, if you, being mad, 
 killed yourself, why do you blame 
 Ulysses 1 And lately you did not 
 even look towards him, when he 
 came to consult the prophet, nor 
 did you deign to speak to a man 
 that was your fellow-soldier and 
 
 n^WTOV /XeV CUV, ^IXttJOg 
 
 xaT^rtyo^og' s^sira 5t, cr^og 
 6 vd-TS^ov^ xai 6 urfTePog. 
 
 lJ.sk\Ui^ 7 IS CufA^ouXs'JW,™ 
 
 kfxvrov Sioixcu.^ 'O ya.^ 
 
 «OJo?,P ov6sirors xakus (3ov- 
 Xeuw™^ iTtPi aXXoT^Jog.i* 
 
 ^og, vswo'ti ya^ Ev^iridris 
 xai '0/A»)^og (jvyyivQiion,^ 
 ovx sj(56W™^ o'Tug avairXrj^w* 
 6 siroSyS xoA auTo/xaroj eyc»/* 
 
 Ai^at^xw 2wx^a-Ta55 o 
 
 tfuVWV, OU (XOVOV OTOTS jJii'o 
 
 avocfjoj, «r£ xai a(5»xoc:, xai 
 ai-f )(^Pog J aXXa xou otTots ew 
 
 Ej tfu ,aaivw,p6 w Aiag, 
 c'sa-jTou (povguw, T15 a»Tiaw 6 
 06v()(jSvg ; Kai T^wrjv oori 
 flT^orf^Xc'rrcu^ aiiTog, o'TtoTS 
 ^xw^ /xav7£uofAa»,"S ours 
 
 •r^a-rjwTTjj xai hai^cg. 
 
 companion. 
 
 20. Sibimet ipsi multa deesse ; prcepositum vero civitati, si 
 non omnia perficiat, quse civitatis velit, ob id poense subjectum 
 esse, nonne hoc ingens est amentia ? 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 Neuters in the plural, have commonlyverhs^singular. 
 
 1. The courts are silent. The '0 ixsXaQ^ov (fiyau, 
 stars are moved. aarm xivfofjwz/, 
 
 D2 
 
42 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 2. The chariots were borne along ^ 
 some through the midst of the 
 enemy themselves. 
 
 3. After he had bathed, his child- 
 rm were brought unto him. 
 
 4. In the level and low places 
 there are groves^ and streams flow in. 
 
 5. Bodies appear larger in a mist. 
 
 6. The good things which you 
 promised to do to us, when you 
 received the money, have been ac- 
 complished by you aheady. 
 
 7. The sheep folloio him, because 
 they know his voice. 
 
 8. How are the things not good, 
 "which men receive from fortune ? 
 or again, how are the contrary things 
 not bad ? 
 
 9. IT Objects themselves do not 
 distract men, but opinions about 
 them. 
 
 10. And these present things show 
 that the multitude are able to in- 
 fiict not the least of evils, but al- 
 most the greatest, should one have 
 Ibeen accused among them. 
 
 11. Riches, honours, titles, 
 crowns, and whatever other things 
 have much external splendour, 
 cannot to a wise man seem ex- 
 ceeding good things, the very de- 
 iBpising of which is no moderate 
 excellence. 
 
 12. Let silence generally pre- 
 Tail, or let necessary things be spoken^ 
 and in few words. 
 
 13. Ye reckon as your cover- 
 ings, not all the wool that sheep 
 produce^ but ail the bushes that 
 the mountains and the plains send 
 forth. 
 
 *0 Ss a^fjLct (pspu^ fji^ 
 5i' Kuroc,' ifoXsi^tos.S 
 
 Ev 5s Xsioff xai xaAr). 
 jxsvoc:, aXtfoj sj,ai, xa» £vi^- 
 
 yas (paivoj. 
 
 aya^oj eyw, ore Xa/x^avw" 
 Xi'^l^'^r^ a-TToTSXeoJ Cv >j5t,. 
 
 'O flr^oottTcv auTog axc- 
 Xou^fw, 0T» siSsu^"^ (pUVY, 
 a\jrog. 
 
 IIwj oux si[JA ara^og, orfof 
 Xaf;-§avoj o av^PWTog cra^a 
 6 T'j)^'/) ; r) TToJkiv, SvoLv-ics 
 "ffw^ ojx £ia« xaxo^ ; 
 
 Ta^atfCw avfl^oj-roj os 
 'it^a.yy.a, aXXa 6 "jrs^i « 
 'T'^a.yyM 5oyju,a. 
 
 AuToj 5s ^TjXow craPwt 
 vuvi, oTj oiog TS £j,aj ToXuc; 
 ou (fij-upog xaxoj ^^-l"/^- 
 (^ofiLai, aXXa o';)/s5ov 6 |X£- 
 yaj, £av -J5 £v auro^ (5ia- 
 §aXXoj.P'c 
 
 IIXoiiTog, Tj.aT],. 5o|a, tu- 
 ^avvj^jicai oo'oj^vjaXXog r/u 
 
 5£w,P^ oux av o^s (p^ovi.aoj 
 
 Xw,& og& o.uTog^'"- 6"« crs^j- 
 (ppovsw^ ayaJog"^ ou [s-ST^iog. 
 
 ^luirri ffoXu ti/JtJ, ■>) Xa. 
 Xsw 6 avayxajoj, xai 5»a 
 oXiyoff.? 
 
 2T^w/xa 5c vof/-i(^w oup^ 
 Wotfoj 'a'Po§aTov qjuw £^«ov, 
 aXXa oirotfoj (pguyavov o^oj 
 TS xai crg^iov avirjf/it. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 43 
 
 14. My children falling about 
 my knees, lament their mother. 
 
 15. And it shall be, when ye 
 
 yox 
 
 Texvov, 5' ajjupi 
 flnir-Tw, xXaicj f/'r;T»)^. 
 
 TOfxaco^.o TEi^o^ •n'oXif. 
 
 shall have sounded with the trum- 
 pet, let all the people shout toge- 
 ther, and the walls of the city shall 
 ^all of their own accord. 
 
 16. Domus quidem tibi bene habet, et mancipia omnia, et 
 equi sane, et canes, et praedia, et qusecunque possides pulchre 
 disposita sunt. 
 
 17. O Stulti, nescient es quantis term.inis negotia mortuonim 
 et virorum diso'eta sunt^ et qualia sunt apud nos. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 One substantive governs another^ signifying a different thing, 
 in the genitive. 
 
 1. Take ye the helmet of salva- 
 tion and the sword of the Spirit. 
 
 2. His countenance presents it- 
 self unto me, and the sound of his 
 voice remains in my ears. 
 
 3. The commencement of his re- 
 marks was praise of Gi-eece, and of 
 the men at Athens. 
 
 4. Of how many evils is igno- 
 rance the cause unto men. 
 
 5. But indeed the moon makes 
 manifest unto us, not only the di- 
 visions of the monih^ but also those 
 of the day. 
 
 6. There is, as it seems, no re- 
 medy for anger but the serious con- 
 versation of a fi'ian our friend. 
 
 7. A little time breaks the con- 
 nexions of the wicked ; but no length 
 of time can destroy the friendships 
 of the good. 
 
 8. Nightly visions are not only 
 the echoes of daily accidents and 
 conversations, but also the produc- 
 tions of a remiss habit. 
 
 'O <rs^ix£(paXaia o tfcjTi^- 
 
 ^a 6 Ilvsuffca. 
 
 'O T^oj'wTrov auTog (pcu- 
 vw,™ xa» 6 tpwvn] 'OXoj fiv S 
 
 'O fjL£v a^)(7i 6 Xoyog 
 
 Ad'ovi^rfiv av()^w7roj. 
 
 OcTog xaxoj, a;T»a o a^- 
 
 AXXa |xr;V, 6 ys CgXrjvTj 
 ou |x&vov 6 vu|, aXXa xa» o 
 (xirjv 6 [).iP(j£ (pavs^oj syw 
 
 Oux £j|x» o^yii Jjg fixw"*' 
 (po.Piiaxov aXX' t] Xoyog 
 
 'O /J.SV (pauXog Cuvri^eja 
 oXjvog ^^ovos 5iaXuw^ o 5s 
 tf-rou^ajoj (piX»a ov6s av i. 
 
 'O vuxTS^jvog (pavratfia 91 
 
 /XCVOV |X£^7]/J.5^(V0J £»|X| CW- 
 
 aXXa xai 6 |a5u|xoj tfuvi)- 
 
44 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 came to Heraclea, a Grecian city, 
 a colony of Megareans^ being in 
 the country of the JMariandyni. 
 
 14. The end of tragedy and of 
 history is not the same, but oppo- 
 site ; in the former yon must strike 
 and captivate the hearers, at pre- 
 sent, by the most persuasive words ; 
 in the latter, by real facts and nar- 
 rations, you must, always, instruct 
 and persuade those who wish to 
 learn. 
 
 15. A resemblance differs from 
 a symbol ; inasmuch as the resem- 
 blance aims, as much as possible, 
 to represent the very nature of the 
 thing, and it is not in our power to 
 vary it ; but the symbol is v/holly 
 in our power, as existing by our 
 imagination aJone. 
 
 cros, /caj lar^og 6 cra^o?, 6 63 
 oXog"^ aX-i^dsia xai cra^l/jC/a 
 crM<p'/]TV]j sjaj /3ouXo|xa». 
 
 <r^'j| 6 'jfi&og. 
 
 'fif/crs^ ya^ hrav (psyy og sv 
 vu| ira^si^iy 'jTc/.g 'X^oduyu a 
 o/xjxa, oOtw xai 6 AutoXuxo? 
 xaXXog -TTaj SipsXxw o4''S 
 
 'iforaiMS ffTon-w 7r^o)Tcv 
 
 'AXuj, jULS-ra ^s ojror,™ 6 
 na|^eyio5' craf'aTrXsw,^ a©(- 
 xveoaai^ 
 
 9. I am a deliverer of ??ie/2, and 
 an /jcfl/er of passions, but, upon the 
 whole, I desire to be' the prophet of 
 iritth arA freedom. 
 
 10. He will easily find his lea- 
 thern coat again, and his spade, in 
 the lees of his cask. 
 
 1 1 . For as when a light is pre- 
 sent at night, it draws the eijes of 
 all to itself, so the beauty of Au- 
 tolycus attracts the regards of all to 
 itself 
 
 12. The Jiowing of rivers, the 
 swelling tides of the sea, the bud- 
 ding of trees, the ripeness oi fruits. 
 
 13. IT And sailing by, they be- 
 held the mouths of the nvers, first 
 of the Thermodon, next of the 
 i/a/z/s, and after this of the Par- 
 thenius ; having sailed by, they 
 
 ^ sig 'H^axXiia, <jro- 
 X»^ 'EXX'rjvig, Msya^Eu.c 
 
 WffOiXOC, £11. 
 
 6vvog X^^a 
 
 'O TsXcg T^ay^Sia vMt \<f- 
 To^in. ou 6 o.\)Tog, aXha o 
 svavrjoj' sxti jXtv ya^ 8zi Siu 
 6 'T/^avoc: Xo^'ojjS sy.'ffXr,(f' 
 
 6 Ta^sifjij,? 6 axouw' sv^aos 
 §c, 6ia aX-j^^ivoj SP^ov xai 
 Xo/of, sjj flraj 6 x^ovo?, 
 ^iJafrxw^ xai TEj^w' 6 91X0- 
 
 Aia^s^oj 5e o/JLoiw/xa 6 
 (yu]x§oXov& xa^otfov 6 fAfv 
 o/xojwjxa 6 (puCi^ auTog 6 
 •jr^a^fxa, xara (Juvaro^,"® 
 affsixovji^w™ /?ojXo/xaj, xa» 
 
 OUX SJfJLI g-TfJ SJ'W^ aUTOj fAS-TO- 
 
 ■rXaCfrw' Js ^s Cu/jl^oXo* 
 6 0X05"^ STTj syw s;)(w, are 
 
 T/ixsTS^og £*ivo»a, 
 16. Socrates, Homerus, Hippocrates, Plato, ecnmque admi 
 
 snJA ev Ma^jav- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 45 
 
 raiores, quos etiam aeque ac deos colimus, tanquam prizfccti 
 quidam, atque Dei ministri. 
 
 gj-'w y.ui 'Ka.TTi? ffv, xa» 05oj 
 £j'w xai 0SO5 Cu. 
 
 iva gyw Xa-rPJuw^ E< jxsv p-ij 
 jSouXoixai s^aTTotfTsXXoj^ au- 
 To^, oPaw c-jVj sytti a-ffoxreivw 
 6 uio^ tfu TPWToroxoj. 
 
 ej'fcj, xai 64'Ou aurocr. 
 
 Et« (Ji) eX<rj<^w^ o irarr,^ 
 
 s'hrrt^u^ 
 
 XttJ ^uw 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 7%e primitive pronoun is tised^ in the genitive^ instead of the pos- 
 sessive pronoun. 
 
 But lohenever any emphasis is required^ the possessive alone can bs 
 used. 
 
 1. I ascend unto wiy Father and 
 your Father, and niT/ God and your 
 God. 
 
 2. Send forth my people, that 
 they may seiTe me ; if thou be not 
 inclined to send them forth, see 
 then, I vvill slay thy son, which is 
 the first born. 
 
 3. This is 7ny God, and I will 
 glorify him ; my father's God, and 
 I \vill exalt him. 
 
 4. In thee our fathers trusted, 
 they trusted and thou didst always 
 deliver them. Thou art my God 
 from my mother's womb. 
 
 5. And upon their heads were 
 golden crowns, and their counte- 
 nances were as countenances of 
 men, and their teeth as teeth of 
 lions. 
 
 6. Never as yet hast thou be- 
 held a virtuous action of thitie own. 
 
 7. It is enough if every one 
 perform his own dut3^ 
 
 S. But now Philip has triumphed 
 over your indolence and careless- 
 ness. 
 
 ^ 9. And not to think that thy 
 sight can extend over many stadia, 
 but that it is impossible for the eye 
 of the Deity to see all things at the 
 same moment. 
 
 10. Does it appear that our na- 
 val armament will be inferior to 
 that of these men % 
 
 To.c. Ex xoiXja .ai^n)^ syu 
 ©sec £^w sijjij tfu. 
 
 Ka» 5'Ti 6 x£©aX7) a-jroj 
 tfTcg^avo? p^putfsoc, xai 6 itpo- 
 Cwcrov euros w? VioCwtcv 
 
 0\}h\z ffwroTt tfiaurow 
 
 ^Ixavog he soiv ^xatfrog 
 excrXTi^ow^ 6 sa-jrov s^yov. 
 
 Nuv 8Sj 6 iiSD |ou)uu.ja& o 
 ijjXSTS^os xai ajJ-eXsia x^arsw 
 <E><Xi7r'7r'os. 
 
 Kai (x?) ojojxaj o (fos |xev 
 ofJL,aa dova.aai s-ri oroXug 
 (froLOiov E^jxvEo.aaj, 6 5* • 
 ^soj o<pdaXaoj uSuvaros sifu 
 aiJja 'Ka.g 6 Paw. 
 
 "I'aivoj*^^ vayrixcf (^'''"fct- 
 T£ufxa) ^{;.£7fPos Xei'Tw" 
 of sxsivoc ; 
 
46 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES 
 
 11. IT And thou shalt rejoice 
 before the Lord thy God, thou and 
 tliij son, and thy daughter, thy man- 
 servant and thy maid-servant, 
 
 12. In order that his heart maj' 
 not be elevated from his bretiiren, 
 in order that he may not turn away 
 from these commandments, so that 
 he may continue long over his 
 kingdom, he himself and his sons, 
 among the sons of Israel. 
 
 13. Num major es patre nostro 1 
 
 14. Filius tuus \'ivit. 
 
 Ku^iog? 6 Geo; <Soy (fu xat o 
 m\% (fv, xa» 6 6uya.rr,^ tfu,: 
 
 avTos OLto 6 a^sXcpoj auro^, 
 ha. \Lr[ "TTaPabajvw^ a-rro 6^ 
 av-roX?], c'?ro.'j av |xax^op(;^o- 1 
 
 auToj xaj 6 UJ05 ai/Toj fv 6 , 
 uloj Icr^arjX. 
 
 CHAP. XVI. 
 
 An adjective in the neuter gender, loithont a substantive, governs 
 
 th6 genitive. 
 
 1. He came to that degree of 
 insolence. 
 
 2. For I will never proceed to 
 such a misfortune. 
 
 3. The Athenians were in this 
 degree of preparatiGn. 
 
 4. The greatest part of the Gre- 
 cian army was thus persuaded. 
 
 5. And it was now the 7niddle of 
 the day, and the enemy w^ere not 
 yet \isible. 
 
 6. Dost thou see the afFaii's of 
 the Persians, to what a pitch of 
 poxoer they have advanced ? 
 
 7. TF Cy the things that are good 
 and honourable, the gods give none 
 without labour and care. 
 
 8. Thou desirest nothing of a 
 difficidt matter, wishing to know 
 what the law might be. 
 
 9. Having come to this country, 
 I became herdsman to a stranger, 
 and I have preserved this family 
 to this day. 
 
 10. And they themselves even 
 
 Eyw ya^ ou'^or' tig o5ff 
 
 'O fxsv A&T,vaiog sv ro-'4 
 
 'O ju-sv rroXvs 6 'EXXo^vj^fo^ j 
 
 Kai sip.i riSri (XjCoj ajfAe^a 
 xc/.! ouTw xctracpcivrig siy.1 o 
 
 'TToXS/.f.lOf. 
 
 *0^aw ITc^'C'/iS -r^jyfWt f 
 *0 fxsv fi'jLi? cyrx&og xai 
 
 EfX°M'«'^ 5' SI? 7««a 
 65=, /8oua)op§£w- |svoc:, xai 
 65s Cw^w" OIXOJ £<b c ' 
 
 Kaj auTog sg 6 e-rsiri 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 47 
 
 had something of a delusive hope, 
 that for the lime to come they 
 would not be afflicted by any other 
 disorder. 
 
 11. The unseasonable advice. 
 The iinseasonahleness of the ad- 
 vice. His celebrated wife. The 
 celebrity of his ii^ife. The fluctu- 
 ating sea. The Jluctuation of the 
 sea. His most honoured freemen. 
 The most honoured part of his 
 
 \ freemen.. A chosen army. The 
 I choice part of his ar?ny. 
 
 12, Ova parit in terra excluditque 
 Lsicco agit. 
 
 <r,(tg fA»]o' av uiro aXXoj 
 
 *0 axtti^og jSo'jXo). 'O 
 av.cfAipg 6 f3ovKyi. *0 crs^i- 
 
 9-0 J yuvvj. 'O xviJ.cf.Tu5r,g 
 
 &oCka(f(ja. 'O sv-rj,(xog sX^u- 
 &GPog. 'O evT/jxoj sXsu.'^fi- 
 jpos-. E'ff'jXe>c<ros (fr^uTia, 
 
 et pl&'umque diei in 
 
 CHAP. XVII. 
 
 TRe relative agrees vjith its antecedent in gender and number. If 
 there come no nominative betweeyi the relative and the verb, the 
 relative is the nominative to the verb ; but if there do.^ the relaiive 
 is governed by some word expressed or understood. 
 
 1. There was one Xcnophon, 
 ivho followed. 
 
 2. Liberty, which above all things 
 leads t.o happiness. 
 
 3. They cause the stars to ap- 
 pear above our heads in the night, 
 which indicate unto us the hours of 
 the night. 
 
 4. The great Jupiter is in haaven, 
 who inspects all things. 
 
 5. Do those things which will 
 not hurt thee, and reflect before 
 action. 
 
 6. Thence he advances to the 
 river Sarus, whose breadth was 
 three plethra. 
 
 7. Having seen the chariots which 
 Joseph sent, the spirit of our father 
 Jacob revived. 
 
 Ei^j rig Hevotpwv 6j (fx/v- 
 KXoXou^cw.^ 
 
 EKsv^sPia, hdTTBP jxaXiC- 
 
 (po-jvwj^ oj zyu 6 C)^i% 6 vu^ 
 
 Ei,aj is.Byag s\i oi'f«.vo£ 
 Zsuj, oc scpopoiu ifa.g. 
 n^aj'o'w Oc axjrog hg Cm 
 
 T^o s^yov. 
 
 EvTSu^cv g^sXauvoj s-jri 6 
 2aPog corafxoj og si^i o 
 sv^og r^Cig cXs^^ov. 
 
 E»5w dtxa^a. of ws'otf. 
 
 crvsuffca Iaxw§ o crar»)^» 
 
4S 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 8. Ti This is better, to respect 
 equality^ luhkJi always binds friends 
 with friends, and cities with cities,^ 
 and allies with allies. 
 
 9. Such also are hyperboles and 
 plurals ; but we shall show in the 
 sequel, the danger which they seem 
 to have. 
 
 10. The first person^ is that in 
 which the speaker speaks of him- 
 self; the second; in which of him 
 to whom he speaks : the third, in 
 which of another. 
 
 11. "VVliy then, said Critobulus, 
 dost thou say this to me, as if it 
 did not depend upon thee to say of 
 me whatever thou mayest wish ? 
 
 Exeivos :taXo^, itfonig <fh 
 fxatj}, oj (piXog asi (piXoj, 
 
 TS Cui-tixap^oc ((wSsu. 
 
 Tc(ourog"« fus xai o 
 
 xog"^ (5gixvu|x» 8s ev oP effEi- 
 
 'jr'^os Is 6 Xo^og* T^iTog, 6j 
 
 T»g ouv, (p-j^/jLj K^iro- 
 §o'jXoff, £yw oyToj Xsyu, 
 Wfl'Te^ oux s-Tri tfu WV,"® 6(f- 
 <r»j av /HouXofAai, crsn syw' 
 
 Xb^w ; •, 
 
 croXjj vofJt-i^6j"^£o^/' ou vo- 
 
 12. Socrates acts unjustly, tohoni 
 the state considers gods, not con- 
 sidering. 
 
 13. Circumque ipsum omnes ordine instruct! sunt, locttm 
 \inusquisque, guem ille dedit, non relinquentes. 
 
 14. Diram quandam narras horninum stultitiam, qui tanlo 
 amore amant rem pallidam gravemque. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 The Attic and Ionic writers often put the relative^ by attraeiimiy in 
 the same case loith the antecedent, and sometimes the antecedent 
 in the same case icith the relative. 
 
 Participles and adjectives are often put, by attraction, in the soma 
 case with the noun or pronoun to which they refer. 
 
 RELATIVE ATTRACTED BY THE ANTECEDENT. 
 
 1. Being reproved by him for 
 mQ tht evil deeds which he commit- 
 ledL 
 
 
6REEK EXERCISES. 
 
 49 
 
 2. But examine separately each 
 of the things which the Deity men- 
 tioned, 
 
 3. With the treasures which my 
 fether left. 
 
 4. This then he sent unto thee, 
 and requests of thee to drink it 
 up this day with those whom thou 
 hvest best. 
 
 6. The first of men whom we 
 know. 
 
 6. That he might not then be 
 compelled to break any of the laws 
 which he estabHshed. 
 
 Tr]P xaroCkZiiit,),^ 
 
 OuTOg"^ OUV tfU IfSlMfUj^ 
 
 jULS^ov tfuv 6^ (xaXa (ptXew. 
 'Iva Jy; |X») T»j vo/xoff 
 
 (x« 
 
 DlG 
 
 ANTECEDENT ATTRACTED BY TPIE RELATIVE. 
 
 7. There is no public offi.ce which Oux u\}a hdtis itu^^r^ 
 he did not sustain. oux o^^x^^ ^^X^-^ 
 
 8. And some of the disciples Iwso-^oiim^ 5s xm (-rig) 
 from Csesarea came with us, bring- 6 jxa^i^ryjg a-rro KaicTa^eia 
 ing one JWnaso^ a Cyprian^ an old Cw syu^ ayu, nnxpa. % ^b- 
 disciple, with whom we should be v{^w,^c MvaCwv rig, Ki>- 
 lodged. ^^'o&> afX"'°^ jxa5*}Tr)f. 
 
 PARTICIPLE AND ADJECTIVE ATTRACTED BY THE SUBSTANTIVE OR PiiO- 
 NOUN TO WHICH THEY REFER. 
 
 9. In this, I will show, in the 
 first place, that I have been wise, in 
 the next place, prudent, and then 
 your best friend. 
 
 10. The gift of thee alone. 
 
 11. The fortune of wretched me, 
 
 12. It has been ordained by fate 
 for most men, when successful, never 
 to be wise. 
 
 Ev o(5s dsixvviii T^wra 
 f;.£v tfoqjog ysyug, S'xsira 
 
 (piXof. 
 
 j ' > PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 j 13. IT This is ike man whom you Outo^ sjfji-i 6g ej^w avij^^. 
 
 !, aaw. 
 
 I 14. iie sent for another army in MsTa^sjx's'w™ aXXoj tfr^o- 
 
 ; addition to the one which he had rsu/xa "Tr^og 65 'X^odhv sj^sk 
 
 E 
 
m 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 things she had, 
 
 15. He was a hrother-in-laio of 
 me, a shameless woman ; would that 
 he still were so ! — once indeed he 
 was.' 
 
 16. His eunuchs and servants 
 dug a gi'ave for him, when he 
 died ; and his wife sits on the 
 ground, having adorned her hus- 
 band loith whatever 
 and having his head 
 knees. 
 
 17. He desired him to come to 
 the army, that they might consult 
 about the castles ivhich they had 
 taken. 
 
 18. At everj'- disagreeable ap- 
 pearance accustom yourself to 
 sa}^, that it is an appearance, and 
 not at ail what it seems ; then 
 examine it, by these rules, luhich you 
 have. 
 
 19. That you should be mur- 
 derers, and pollute your hands 
 with royal blood — see that it be 
 not villanous at present, and dan- 
 gerous to 3'ou afterwards : for I 
 am not conscious to nnjself, that 
 I havf given you any cause of 
 uneasiness. 
 
 20. What then does the God 
 
 sr — tot' eijxj ys. 
 
 'O jtXEV eyVOU)(0f XOA 66- 
 
 ^airwv auTogS o^oCfl'cd ^'t\XTi\ 
 0^' TsXeuTavj"^? o 5e yxjvr^ 
 xadrii*Mi x^f'^'j xofl'^ew" og 
 £5(W avTiP, 5£S(paXTj ctuTof 
 
 upon her ep^w svi o yow: 
 
 E'TTirfrfXXw^ rjxw avTos 
 S'Xt (TT-jPaTSu.aa,* oifug flrs^i 
 6 (ppou^jov 6g Xauottvw ^om- 
 Xsuw.">^ 
 
 Has (^oMTOLdia.^ '^S'^'XyS 
 
 fXeXSTOLU STTlkSyUf 071 (pttV- 
 
 Tttoia ei;/,», xai ou "TavTWg 
 
 (^w, 6 xavwv o'JTcg, og s^w. 
 
 AuTog yjvo,aa»^ <poveyg^ 
 xai (Sa.^ftXsiiiS iJAunu' o 
 5c|ja alfjia, o^aw /xv) ff^oj 
 0°^ vuv avotfiog, xai vslspov 
 tf-j srjxiv^uvof £/|ui»' ou ya^ 
 <rjg SjxauTou Cuus/^fw™"^ Xu- 
 cr£w^= tfy. 
 
 jay 
 
 Tig ?roT£ Xcyw o Qeog ; 
 '? For indeoil I am not con- syu ya^ ^yj, ovrs (isya. 
 scious to myself ihat I am wise, out? (T/xix^ov, (fwsicsu^'' 
 much or li:tlc. Sftaurou (facpog sj/ii.e 
 
 21. Philosopliis erlicere, non fingere nova vocabula, neque 
 nugari de quibus non norunt. 
 
 22. Persamm quidem longe pulcherrimus est pater raeus, 
 Medorum vero quotquot ego vidiy longe hie meus avus pulcher- 
 rimus est. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 m 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 j A noun of the dual numher may have a verh^ adjective^ or relative 
 plural ; but a plural noun can only have a verb, adjective, or ro- 
 lative dual, when it signifies tvjo. 
 
 But they two quickly dreiu near, 
 urging on their swift steeds. 
 
 2. If the two hands should turn 
 themselves, or the two feet impede 
 each other. 
 
 3. We two sat thu.?, answering 
 each other. 
 
 4. We iu'o examining together, 
 shall perhaps discover it. 
 
 5. Why then are yon offended 
 against them ? for they both suffer 
 
 just punishment. 
 
 6. And ye rivers, and earth, and 
 ye who punish the dead men, be- 
 low. 
 
 7. But one thing vexed me not 
 a httlc ; Thesmopolis disturbing 
 me, and teaching me, that two ne- 
 gatives make one aflirmative. 
 
 8. IT As w^hen two torrents rush- 
 ing from the mountains, discharge 
 their impetuous streams together 
 into one gulf. 
 
 9. Can you tell unto us two 
 w'here Pluto lives here 1 For ive 
 are both strangers lately arrived. 
 
 10. And let these two themselves 
 he witnesses to this, before the eter- 
 nal gods, and mortal m.en. 
 
 11. They two went reluctant 
 along the shore of the barren sea, 
 and came to the tents and ships 
 of the Myrmidons : and Xhey found 
 
 *0 (5e ^ay^ eyyvSsv €?. 
 ;^o,y-a«,^ sXauvw ux-js Ic- 
 
 '■zq-jS s'^K'srodi^Ct) aXXiijXwv. 
 
 Tig b'ov o.yavaKrsu xara 
 avTog ; 5»(5w|jn ya^ aiji(j:u 
 xaXog SixY^. 
 
 Kai croTajxc?, xai yaaa, 
 
 IlXr^v aXXa ei^ evw au- 
 
 ':roXij evop^Xscj, %an p[6a(i- 
 ycu, ug 6 juo CL<Xo;pr'ifigy s\g 
 
 raacc:,? xar' o^sC^i ^sw, 
 f.c IxKfyayxsia cfufji^aXXw 
 
 nXouTwv oTou £v^a5e o/- 
 xsw ; pvoff ya^ £«/xj, a|. 
 rjw^ ttijxxvsojxai.'' 
 
 To ds avTog jma^r-JPogP 
 
 *0 OS asxwv /Saivw gcri 
 5jj aXj ar^u^SToCj Mu^- 
 |iM(5a:v iJs £Ti TS xXiO'ta 
 xa» VTjuj l;cvca;.^aJ.^ 'O ^c 
 
52 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 him at his tent and liis black sv^itfxu <ira^a rs xXitfia xm 
 ship. v/ivs iLsXas. 
 
 12. Q,uare vero et 7ios duo extruimus montes alios super 
 alios, ut habeamus accuratiorem prospectum. 
 
 13. Equi xm\afatigati sunt excitanti populum. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 »5n adjective is often put in the neuter gender, x^^M-"? commonly, 
 y.TTjjxa, T^a^/xa, and sf/ov, sometimes, being understood. 
 
 When an infinitive or a sentence is in place of the nominative to a 
 verb, or substantive to an adjective, the verb is in the third person 
 singular, and the adjective m the neuter gender. 
 
 1. The government of the many 
 is not a good thing. 
 
 2. Man is something so hard to 
 be pleased, and querulous, and mo- 
 rose. 
 
 3. Wealth is a cowardly and 
 pitiful thing, fond of life. 
 
 4. Wisdom alone of possessions 
 \s, immortal. 
 
 5. First then, do thou answer 
 this unto us, if we assert true things, 
 or things that are not true ? 
 
 6. Yes; for the hght was a 
 pleasant thing, and to die, dreadful, 
 and to be avoided. 
 
 7. It is not good that man be 
 alone. 
 
 8. To leajTi, is very pleasing, not 
 only to the lovers of wisdom, but 
 also to the rest of men. 
 
 9. ^ Or art thou so wise a man 
 that it has escaped thy observation, 
 that one's country is a thi?ig more 
 deserving of honour, and more to 
 be revered, and holier in its nature, 
 than both mother and father, and 
 the rest of one's progenitors 1 
 
 vr//. 
 
 xai dvdxokos. 
 
 AsiXog 6 ffXouToj, jcai 
 (piXo^/Uxo^ xaxos. 
 
 2o(pia jULovo^ XTr](i.(t 
 a&av(x.Tog, 
 
 IIpwtov ouv £yw oiros 
 
 ^w, r\ ovx aXridv]g, 
 
 Nar rj^vs ya^ fijxj e 
 (pus, xai o"^ Tffivyjfij, dnvog 
 xai (ptvxTSos. 
 
 Ou xakoSi si^i^ av. 
 d^wrog fAovog. 
 
 Mavdavw, on (xovov 6 qjj, 
 Xotfotpoff f/^ug, aXXa xcu » 
 aXXof. 
 
 H o'jTus eip.i (J'o90{: dxT- 
 <r£ Xav^avw'"''' tfu,* 07i (*»}. 
 <r»)^s <r£ xaj irciTr,^ xat » 
 aXXoj 'T^oyovog a^aj, ri- 
 fjt.»oj gi(;u 'jrar^tg, xat tfsiu^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 63 
 
 10. All the poets wdth one voice 
 sing, that both temperance is a 
 good things and justice, but a iking 
 difficult., and requiring labour. 
 
 11. To imitate, is natural unto 
 men from boyhood ; and in this 
 respect ihey differ from the rest 
 of animals, in that man is a most 
 imitative (animal), and acquires the 
 first rudiments of his knowledge 
 through imitation. 
 
 12. We received Oedipus, and 
 those with him, when unfortunate, 
 and we have done many other 
 friendly and honourable things to the 
 'Thebans. 
 
 13. I speak those things^ which 
 I have seen with my father, and 
 ye do the things which ye have seen 
 with your father. 
 
 14. That thing xohich a pilot is 
 in a ship, a charioteer in a chariot, 
 a leader in a chorus, law in a city, 
 a general in an army, the same 
 thing is God in the world. 
 
 cfw^Potfuvrj t£ xai 6 6i. 
 xai ovTog ^ja^spw o aXkag 
 
 'O Oi^jroi^f, xa« o /jt-sra 
 
 P(;o,aai,^ xai STe^o? 'jr'oXug 
 syw** y^a^j^w (piXav^^w-irog 
 
 Tarii^ s^'^^j ouroj XaXsw, 
 xai (fu ovv OS o^oij <R'a^a o 
 iraryp (fv, ouroj croiffw, 
 
 XjjT (5s vo,aoj, £V (fT^UTOirS. 
 
 60V ^S '/jy£^WV, OJTOg ©Sog 
 £V XOtfflOg. 
 
 'O 5£ £g av&^wrfoe aifs^. 
 oi'^£jj d£jvo5" xaxoj /a? (fv 
 
 0\jX 0.V "JTe^J^aXXw^ ■»] <5s £j 
 
 r<g°^ o'jx £1^1, >] ou /xfiXei 
 aurog^ 6 avd^wn^SiogjS rig 
 £^w ^aw £V xotfjtxog xgvoj 
 ^£og,8" '/5 •ff'^ovoias xsvog ; 
 
 •roXu o' £r/ p^aXs-jfog owo^ 
 oXog* cragP (Jg •/aCkS'Kas 
 
 ness. 
 
 17. Hi »M<//a quidem diciint aXque prceclara, sed wtA^intel- 
 ligunt. 
 
 15, To f/ej!?af^ from men is no- 
 thing dreadful, if there are gods ; 
 for they would not encompass you 
 with evil; but if either there are 
 none, or they do not care for hu- 
 man affairs, luhat is it to me to hve 
 in a world void of gods, or void of 
 pro^ddence 1 
 
 16. Since it is a difficult thing 
 to maintain even one man in idle- 
 ness, and still far more difficult, a 
 whole family ; but most difficult 
 of all, to maintain an army in idle- 
 
 E2 
 
u 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 18. Pemiciocissimufn est, non modo domum suam destruere, 
 ^d etiam coipus et animam. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 •An adjective or participle is sometimes put in a different gender 
 from the substantive with which it stands, as agreeing with 
 some other substantive understood. 
 
 1. The remaining tribes con- 
 tinue practising these exercises 
 among o??e another. 
 
 2. Their seven brave children 
 having died, whom Adrastus, king 
 of the Argives, led. 
 
 3. I opened, and 1 behold a 
 child bearing a bow, also wings 
 and a quiver. 
 
 4. O children, overshadowed with 
 suppliant boughs. 
 
 6. Receive the two children of 
 my brother, the most beautiful of 
 the gods. 
 
 1 6. O my child, unhappy above all 
 men. 
 
 7. How deep you slept, O son, 
 who did not leap up ? But how 
 then did Ulysses escape ? 
 
 8. I say that expression is the 
 interpretation (of thought) by a 
 fit appellation, lohich has the same 
 power in poetry as in prose. 
 
 9. Teach ye all natiojis, bap- 
 tizing them in the name of the 
 Father, and of the Son, and of the 
 Holy Ghost. 
 
 10. IT Remember these things, 
 my dear son, and having gone with- 
 ID the walls, repel the fierce hero, 
 
 \f\k(^v^ diarsXsu. 
 
 G\/r}(fxui^ S'TTTO. ysMvatos 
 «rexvov,& 0^ A^ysios ava^ 
 A5^a.g<rog ayu.^ 
 
 Avoiyd,^ xaj ^^scpos fxtv 
 
 Q. Tfxvov ixTyi^joj xKaoog 
 
 'Tfo^ip^oiu-ai"^ a<5£X. 
 (po5 Tsxvov ^uo, 6 xaXof « 
 &sog. 
 
 il TSxvov, nrs^i m'ot^ xafA- 
 fji-o^of (pug. 
 
 'fif (3a&vs^ xojfjiaWjP.^. w 
 
 5-EXVOV, Off OUX SX&OPSU ; 
 
 'O Sa ouv 06v(f(f€vs irwj 
 dioLCpsvyu ; 
 
 Aeyo) X£|(ff £»|x» o Sia 
 6 ovo(xa(J'ia& l^fji,»)vs»a, os°* 
 
 XM S-rtl 6 £/X(X£T^O?,PS xcu 
 
 iiti 6 XoyogPff £)^w auroj 
 
 Ma^r]T£uw5 *aff 6 edvoff, 
 jGa-rrji^w auroj £»ff 6 ovofi-ot 
 ^arr)^, xai 6 uioff, xou o 
 ay/ Off <7rv£ufAa. 
 
 '0& paw,™l,,<piXoff r£x- 
 vov, ajxuvw 5s ^Tjioff av*)|, 
 «»X05^ gvroff sifjLi/ (Aijos 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 55 
 
 nor stand as an antagonist to this 
 man ; for if he shall have slain 
 thee, my beloved offspring^ whom 
 I myself brought forth, swift dogs 
 will devour thee, far away from 
 both of us, at the ships of the 
 Greeks. 
 
 11. When he saw the woman 
 sitting on the ground, and the 
 dead man lying, he wept for the 
 misfortune, and said, Alas ! O 
 good and faithful soul, thou art 
 gone then, having left ns ! 
 
 12. States have made death the 
 punishment for the greatest crimes, 
 as not being able to restrain injustice 
 by the fear of a greater evil. 
 
 13. The barbarians are, by na- 
 ture, fond of money, and despising 
 dangers, they either provide what 
 is necessary for their sustenance, 
 by incursion and invasion, or pur- 
 chase peace for great rewards. 
 
 (piXos ^aXoj, oj TiXTw^ au- 
 TO?, aveufls tfu iisya eyw,? 
 A^ysios cra^a viius, xuwv 
 
 p^ajxai xadijfxai, xa» 6 ve- 
 x^o? xsifjiai, Sax^uu re s^t 
 
 u aya&os xai 'ifitflos -^^X^* 
 
 ^Ol. ifoKis^ S'!fi 6 jxe^ag 
 aSixriiia.^ j ^'iM-'a davarog 
 <oi£w,' US oux av, ihSyag 
 xaxos (pD§o^, . <■-- l^a^jxia 
 
 ^utfij, TO /3a^§a^ov 91. 
 Xop(^»)|xaTov, xaj xiv^-jvog^ 
 xaTa<p^ovt6d,^ 11 5ia f-ri- 
 
 14. 
 Dei. 
 
 6^o^r]S xai S(po5c? 6 5(;^si- 
 
 avT ixaTaXXaTTW .™ 
 Genres ambulant in vanitate sensus sui, alienati a vita 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 Two or more substantives singular have a verb, adjective, or rela- 
 tive plural ; if they be of different persons or genders, the verb 
 
 • or adjective will agree with the most worthy ; if they signify 
 things without life, the adjective is commonly in the neuter. 
 
 1. A fox and a goat, being thirsty, 
 descended into a well. 
 
 2. A bat, a bramble, and a cor- 
 morant, having formed ?i partnership, 
 resolved to lead a trading Hfe. 
 
 AXwrrvil xat T^wyog^ di- 
 4^aw, SIS (pfsa^ xaTa§aivw.* 
 
 NuxTS^iff, xat ^aros, xcu 
 ai^'jia, Irai^sia -roisw,"** 
 SfXffo^jxof Siayiyvuixui^ ^log 
 
56 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3. ,Aulus Manlius and Cornelius 
 Sylla were se?2t, unto luhom Boc- 
 chus said, that he made war upon 
 the Romans on account of Marius. 
 
 4. I go away to Crcesus and 
 Sardanapalus, being about to dwell 
 near them. 
 
 5. Simon Peter, and Thomas, 
 and JVathanael, luere together. 
 
 6. Peter and John ansioering 
 to them, said. If it be just before 
 Grod, to hear you rather than God, 
 judge ye. 
 
 7. And all the men and wo7nen 
 were fair. 
 
 8. Dost thou not see that shame 
 saidfear are innate in men ? 
 
 9. As sto?ies, and bricks, and 
 pieces of timber, and tile, when 
 scattered about in confusion, are 
 2iseful in no respect. 
 
 10. IF We are present for the 
 purpose of deliberating respect- 
 ing vjar and peace, vjhich possess 
 the greatest influence in the life of 
 men. 
 
 11. For indeed this very earth, 
 and the stones, and the whole place 
 here, are injured and wasted. 
 
 12. And his mother said to him, 
 Son, why didst thou thus to us ? 
 behold lh.y father and / grieving 
 and sorroioing icere seeking thee. 
 
 13. And the Lord said to Jo- 
 shua, Lo I give into thy hand Je- 
 richo, and her king, being powerful 
 in strength. Now do thou set thy 
 soldiers in a circle round her. 
 
 nsy.crcj5 AuXoj MaXXio^ 
 xat KoPvyjXioi: 2oXXaf, hs 
 
 E-rj 6 K^ojtToff xoLi "2a^. 
 ^ava-ffaXo^ a-TTsi/JH, ■jrXijtfjov 
 
 E<,u.i ofxou 2i|xwv TIs- 
 
 dava»}X. 
 
 'O Je n^T^ojxaj Iwavvr,^ 
 
 a*ox^<vofi.aiP^ "ttpoj aurog 
 STTw^ Ej 6iXixiog sjjxj svw- 
 criov ©eoc:, tfu oxouw pt«X. 
 
 XOV y\ 0;O^, J^^JVCJ.^ 
 
 Asuxoj 5s -rcff av>)P xou 
 ^'uvr; fiixj. 
 
 Aj^wj 6s xoii cpotojr ouj^ 
 
 O^aw £/Jl/(pUTOg aV&PUITOC: £J|X» J 
 
 'fitfcre^ Xi(5o5 ts, xai 
 •rXivdo^, xa» ^uXov, xai xf- 
 ^afjiof, araxrwj ^£v ^ittw," 
 
 'Hxw sxxX'/jtfjot^w^ s'S^f 
 ^r-oXsjU-oj xcu si^nvr), Ig, jX£- 
 9'a^ Juva/xjj £;)^u, sv o j^iQg 
 
 'O^s jxsv ^a^ 6 yr^, xai 
 "ki&og, xon acraj 6 tocTo^ 
 
 xai xa~a.Q?u(jxu. 
 
 Ka; sirw^ 9r^o5 ajTOj o 
 jxrjrJ?^ avTog- Tsxvov, ri 
 ffoisw ff^w ourus ; iJou o 
 ^arvjP Cu xai syw o5uvao|*ai 
 
 XK» y^V'TTiU}"^ ^'fjTSU (fv. 
 
 Ka< S'^rw^ Kvpios 'if§os 
 Ir\iovg, l5o\j syu ifaPaSi- 
 
 yu, xai 6 ^adiXsug auroj, 
 ^uvaroff £<|X» tv kJ';)(u?, Eu 
 5s irsPKfTYiixi^ avTo^ o /xo- 
 j^ijjioj xuxXoj. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 67 
 
 14. No, h\ii vain glory ^ and pride, Ou, aXXa xevo^o^ia, \cu 
 and much madness ; these things rutpoj, xai toXuj ''o|U(^a* 
 burned you to a coal. o-jTog Cu a<ra\6paxou. 
 
 15. jyeptunus, et Jwno, et Minerva machinabmtur \'incere 
 eum. 
 
 16. C?/rM5 et Cyaxares cum instmxissent (suos) exspectahani^ 
 tanquam, si accederent hostes, pugnaturi. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 TAe genitive case of a substantive is often put absolutely, the for- 
 mer substantive being understood. 
 
 The genitive case is qften put absolutely, Ivcxa, x«f '^> or some case 
 of Tis or s\$, bei'/ig understood. 
 
 1. Lampon the son of Thrasy- 
 cles, and Athenagoras the son of 
 Archestratides, and Hegesistratus 
 the son of Aristagoras. 
 
 2. O unhappy woman, and 
 daughter of an unhappy father. 
 
 3. It was Mary Magdalen, and 
 Joanna, and Mary the mother of 
 James, and the other women with 
 them, who told these things unto 
 the apostles. 
 
 4. He thereupon took up his 
 abode in the palace of Croesus. 
 
 5. Let him bid his mother re- 
 turn to her father's house. 
 
 6. For since those who hved 
 before us had descended to the 
 abode of Hades. 
 
 7. When Agesilaua crossed over 
 into Asia, and was laying waste the 
 country of the king, Tissaphernes 
 made a truce with him. 
 
 8. I commend you for your 
 prudence, but hate you far your 
 timidity. 
 
 9. They call you happy because 
 of the power of your words. 
 
 Aajx-rwv 6 ©?(i(fvxkrig^ 
 ■y.ai A6-fi\ayo^ag o A^5(£(r- 
 TPctridrig, xai 'H/r^ffjCr^o-- 
 Tog 6 A^idTayo^ag. 
 
 Ej.ai 5s May^aXvjvtj 
 Ma^^»a, xai Iwawa, xai 
 Ma^ja Iaxw§oj, xa» o Xoi- 
 rrog (fuv auToj, 6 Xsyur 
 cr^cj a-rotfroXoj outoj. 
 
 'O fxsv 5ri diaiTOi r^ 
 £v KpojCo?. 
 
 M.r^zTiP sg ndxT'fi^ avw^w 
 a-TToveojxai.f 
 
 E-^ej ya^ ouTog ir^o syu 
 ^aw° eg 'Adrtg xaTS^ofiai. 
 
 Ayr]<jiXc(.og ejc: ACia crs 
 5ia€aivoj,^ xai 6^ BaCjXsyg 
 XujLtaivw,'" TiCidacps^vris a- 
 
 Seikicc (frvyu. 
 
 vous, 
 
 ^g 
 
 Eu^aijxovj-^w tfu Xoyog 
 5jvajx»ff. 
 
5S 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 10. C^Tus havinf^ heard this, 
 pitied him on account of the mis- 
 fortune. 
 
 11. It is not right to blame this 
 man for the things that have heeii 
 omitted, so much as to commend 
 him for his ingenuity and diligence 
 itself 
 
 12. I knew some of those of the 
 same age as, or a httle older than 
 myself. 
 
 13. And that he ha\-ing taken 
 some of the fillets^ bound Socrates 
 with them. 
 
 14. Leading- Mm out of the 
 way, under some palm trees, he 
 ordered them to spread some of the 
 JMedian carpets under him. 
 
 15. He married one of the daugh- 
 tei-s of Adrastus. 
 
 16. The fish called Cephalus is 
 one of those that live in the fens. 
 
 17. The king of the Romans, 
 being iioav old, goes to the house of 
 a teacher. 
 
 18. ^ And often indeed before 
 this, through thy whole life, I 
 have been wont to esteem thee 
 happ3^ on account of this disposition. 
 
 i.9. And learn dl&ofrom me, my 
 son, said he, these most important 
 things ; you should neyer run into 
 danger, either in your own person 
 or with your armj', contrary to the 
 sacrifices and auguries. 
 
 20. And these elder men ser\^e 
 in war no more out of their own 
 country^ but remaining at home, 
 they judge all public and private 
 
 ' things. 
 
 21. In the tent there was one of 
 the captains, called A glaitidas ; a 
 person who, as to his manner, vjas 
 one if the harsher class of men. 
 
 O1T6S 6 avTi? ou5( ourwi: 
 air(ao,ao!« 6 ExKtiiru^" wg 
 avTos 6 STivoia xai ff-jrovir, 
 
 Eyu £id3(jj^'' spacer ttXi- 
 
 Kr/i avTos Xor jaCavw^ 
 
 A'xayu aurog 0005 s|w, 
 liTo (poivi^* Tier, 6 Mo^djxoj 
 <KtXcs uTc^aXXw xtXeucj 
 avTOfA 
 
 ya7r^^. 
 
 'O ix^vg K£9aXog I sv 
 6 sXog i3iouo £{(jii, 
 
 'O 'Pw|JLa»oj ^aCiXsu^, 
 'y7]pa(fxu r;5>], eg 8i6cx.(fxa- 
 
 Kai ToXXaxi;: ,aev Sri Cy 
 
 .1 
 
 Mav^c 
 
 ^5 eyu 
 
 yaj- irapcc ya^ le^cv xai 
 oiwvoj |xr]r5 fv tfcajrou jxrj- 
 Ss'iroTS, ^-r,Ss £v 6 (J'7parta, 
 
 TfUW'" U£V OUX=T» £|w 0^ 
 
 eauTou, oixo» ^s jul5voj, ^.- 
 xa^w TS xojvoj ^aj xaj o 
 10 tog. 
 
 Ev tfxiivy) Ti/yp^avw* c»5 
 fi/xi? Taliot.p-)(og, AyXaT- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 59 
 
 M'/; yap ejfjn sx Aa^siof 
 <r>jf, Ap^ai/x£v»]g yivo/xat,"e 
 
 22. For I should not be descend- 
 j ed from Darius, the so7i of Hys- 
 
 taspes, the son of Arsamcs, the son 
 of Armnes, the son of Tcispes, the 
 son of Cyrus^ the son of Camhy- 
 ses^ the son of Teispes, the son of 
 Ac/usmenes^ if I did not take in- 
 stant vengeance upon the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 23. Si velles hospitem impcllere, te, cuni in urbem ipshis 
 venisses, accipere, quid faceres 1 
 
 24. Et ilHc germanac nosticc, leges quae apud inferos sunt, 
 haudquaquam benigne te excipient. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 Adjectives signifying plenty, worth, condemnation, power, 
 difference, desire, memory, knowledge, and their opposiies, 
 require the genitive. 
 
 Verbals compounded ivith the privative a, and those ending in »xo?, 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 1. Life is full of many cares. 
 
 2. The whole world is full of 
 traitors. 
 
 3. Our houses are destitute of 
 friends^ huXfull of assassins. 
 
 4. To me then, Socrates, being 
 such a man, reemed to be deserv- 
 ing of honour rather than of death. 
 
 5. Think that they who conceal 
 are worthy of the same punishment 
 u-ith those who openly commit 
 offences. 
 
 6. To be master over sleep ^ so 
 as to be able both to lie down late 
 and to rise up early, and to take 
 no repose, if there should be any 
 need. 
 
 IToX'vi^ jut-Srf-rof siixi o"« 
 
 ^aw^ (p^ovrij. 
 
 Uac 
 
 OJXOUfASVOg' jXfff. 
 
 l-TSyy] (pikos s^rj.ao^, oi^ 
 J' a-TToXXi/vref rrXsog. 
 
 C-OIOUr05 EljULJ, OOXsU^ 711X7} 
 
 cfioj cj,aj fxaXXov, t; ^a- 
 No/ij(^w avTos cjfjii ^Yi- 
 
 
 Si ri -isu 
 
60 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 7. You are guilty of the same 
 ignorance with others. 
 
 8. Doing nothing at variance 
 either with his country or his own 
 disposition. 
 
 9. And thou shall not be with- 
 out tastiiig of all delightful things^ 
 and shall live without experiencing 
 troublesome things. 
 
 10. Melampus, the son of Am}'- 
 theon, appears to me not to have 
 been ignorard of, but well acquaint- 
 ed with, this sacred rite. 
 
 11. IT I say that those chiefly 
 are worthy of praise, who being 
 nothing at first, nevertheless have 
 advanced themselves to a high 
 station, having appeared worthy of 
 command. 
 
 12. It is incumbent on a gene- 
 ral to be capable of providing those 
 things which appertain unto war, 
 and capable of procuring necessaries 
 for his soldiers. 
 
 13. It is peculiar to man to love 
 even those that offend; and this 
 comes to pass, if you consider 
 that they are your relations, and 
 err through ignorance, and un- 
 willingly ; and that after a little 
 
 *0 auToj ayvoia iJcreuduvaf 
 £j|jLi « aXXoff. 
 
 Ouogjj aXXoT^tos 'KtiSUf 
 ours fc'auTou irwr^xg, outs - 
 
 airii^os 5ia§Jou.'" 
 
 AoxEw £vw MeXaifrouff « 
 Ap.u^swv, Qvctia. ovTOS oux 
 sijxj a5ar)j, aXX' SjXffei^of. 
 
 ^YllM ouToj ixoXitfra S'^fai- 
 
 VOg Cc|jOJ etfJLJ, OtfcS jXTjSfJg™^ 
 
 s^ o^^X^ ^'i^^y °M^^ ^*' M*^/" 
 cr^o^w^sw,^ afiog 5ox£w^ a^- 
 
 Ila^afl'xsuao'^jxo? 6 stg o 
 
 'Z'oXSfJLOg, 6 CT^aT'/iyof* £l{ll 
 p^pr], xaj 'sfo^idrixos 6 £irj77)- 
 (Jcjoj 6 CriaTiwrTjCr. 
 
 lojoc av^^wcroff <piXtu xai 
 'jtlaiuS ovTog ds yivo/xaj, 
 £av (j'ufA'7r|o(J''3rj'ff797 Coj, orj 
 xaj CuyyeVTjj, xai 8ia, ay- 
 voja,* xaj asxwv afjwx^-ravw 
 
 xaj wj fji-sra oXiyog afxoo- 
 you shall both die ; and, above rspos ^v/jCxw, xa», -n'fo Tas; 
 
 6-1 ou /SXacrlcd^ (fu* ou ya^ o 
 ^^£|j.ovjxov (fu xaxoff flroifw m 
 
 14. Et quum inlueretur omnem Hellespontum navibus 
 eoopertum, omnia vero littora atque Abydenorum campos 
 hormnihus refertos^ ibi se beatum prsedicavit. 
 
 all, that it did not hurt you ; for 
 it did not make your mind worse 
 ihan it was before. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 ^X 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 The comparative degree requires the genitive^ when it is translated 
 by than. 
 
 I. The possession of virtue is 
 I more excellent than loealth, and more 
 I useful than noble birth. 
 
 j 2. An honourable death is more 
 
 \ eligible than a base life. 
 
 I 3. We suffer throughout life, 
 
 I other things more lamentable than 
 
 ' this. 
 
 I ■ 4. There is a time when silence 
 will be better than speech, and there 
 is a time when speech is better than 
 silence. 
 
 5. If these things be just, they 
 are better than wise things. 
 
 6. But I think no acquisition 
 more noble or more splendid for a 
 man, especially a ruler, than virtue, 
 and justice, and generosity. 
 
 7. The servant is not greater 
 than his master, nor the apostle 
 greater than he loho sent him. 
 
 8. In order to have men obedi- 
 ent, nothing is more useful than to 
 seem to be wiser than those luho are 
 governed. 
 
 9. Whether are these mathe- 
 maticians superior as to becoming 
 letter than other men 1 
 
 10. IT Do you \vish, tell me, 
 having gone about to inquire of 
 one another, Is there any news ? 
 For what can be more novel than 
 this, than a Macedonian namely re- 
 ducing Greece beneath his sway ? 
 
 I I . But if the enterprise appear 
 greater than the former one, and 
 aaoro laborious and more danger- 
 
 F 
 
 VEia £<fJll. 
 
 Al^CTog xaXo^ ^avarojf h 
 'ET£|og our Of, flfa^a h 
 
 (5' ou Ciyrj Xoyoff, 
 
 El ^ixajoj, tfoqjo^ ^^f^' 
 Twv oJs. 
 
 EyW 5e, OU JeiJ VOfAI^W ^« 
 
 avTj^, aXXwf re xai a^^uv, 
 xakog s^ii XT7]|xa, ou5s Xa/Jb- 
 'H'Pof, a^s-rjy xai 6ixaio(fvvfif 
 xat ysvvaiorrig. 
 
 Ovx ei|x< 6ouXog jxeyoff J 
 xu^iof auTof , ovTS aflrotfToXej 
 
 Eiff o"« 9r£idw™ff avd^coflroj 
 ep^c;, ou^si^ ej/xi avytfifto^, ?j 
 
 (pPOVI/JLOS* 5oX£W^ gljXJ a^- 
 
 Ilorf^ov ir^osyu ouroff S 
 li.a6Y\iia'nxos,'JiPog o /SsXti&jw 
 yivofAai^ aXXoj avQ^w^og ; 
 H /^ouXo/xai, ej'ff'S e/w, *ff- 
 ^isi,ai^ aXXi^Xwv -n'uvdavofAai, 
 XsywP Tij xa/vog ; Tiff yo^ 
 av yivo/xai^^ ouTOff xaivoff, i| 
 Max£(5wv av»)^ xarairoXs- 
 fjiEw 6 'EXXaff ; 
 
 Eav 8s iisyag o flf^ofiff i 
 if^otfSsv (paivw," xai wiiO- 
 vocT, xai g'n'ixivduvoff, a^iou i| 
 
^ 
 
 62 
 
 GREEl^ EXERCIS£S. 
 
 oug, to request either that he hav- 
 ing persuaded lead us, or having 
 been persuaded, send us away to a 
 friendly country. 
 
 12. Besides this is much more 
 absurd than those things. For, ob- 
 serving closely, I found those same 
 persons practising the things most 
 contrary to their own words. 
 
 13. A short syllable is that which 
 has a short or shortened vowel, not 
 at the end of a word ; so that be- 
 tween it and the vowel in the next 
 Byllable, there be not more conso- 
 nants than one simple one, but either 
 one, or none. 
 
 14. If thou findest any thing 
 dctter, in human life, Xha.n justicCj 
 truth, temperance, -Aud fortitude, be- 
 ing turned with thy whole mind 
 to it, enjoy that which is found the 
 best. 
 
 15. My Father, who has given 
 them to me, is greater than all; 
 and no one can wrest them out of 
 the hand of my Father. 
 
 16. Vides homines dissidentes 
 tractantes hominibus nihilo dignis. 
 
 •jr^off (piXiof {X'^^iO') OL(piriiit. 
 
 En ^5 <oXiij ouro? sxejvof 
 aroirog. 'O ya^ auToff oirog 
 
 Bpol-/})'^ e»fu tfuXXa^ii i 
 
 ourwg wc:, jULSra^u auroj xai 
 6 sv 6 e^r)g tfuXXaS^ (pwvriev, 
 fjt,v) u-ira^5(w (J'ujX(pcdvov iToXu^ 
 si J d'TrXooff aXXcc i^toj £)ff if| 
 
 El /Ji-sv x^sjTTwv eu^^io'xWj 
 
 :!(«» avS^Siu, £ti exsivoc:,^ £^ 
 
 Xauw. 
 
 ^Sif 5uvajj!-ai a^'xa^oi ex 4 
 p^si^ "ffaT'/]^ eyw. 
 inter se, et gravius 
 
 CHAP. XXVt. 
 
 Partitives, and words used partitwely, comparatives, superlaiiveSf 
 indefinites, interrogatives, and some numerals, take after them 
 the genitive plural. 
 
 1. JVb orie of mortaiS is a happy ^vrirog ou^sij sj/xi sy^cu* 
 nan. fxwv avii^. 
 
 2. And some of them also fell. *0 5e xai auroj a*o4vij^- 
 
 8. 2%e younger of the men. 
 
 *0 vsoj avd^ws'o^. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 0d 
 
 4. Wilt thou avoid, then, both 
 the cities, which are governed by 
 good laws, and the most orderly of 
 men ? 
 
 5. For loho of the Greeks^ and 
 who of the barbarians^ does not 
 know ? 
 
 6. They killed near thirty of the 
 light-armed men. 
 
 7. Not many of the inhabitants 
 'of the country know, what thing 
 this fable might import. 
 
 8. And, what is the greatest and 
 most glorious of all., thou seest 
 thine own territory increased, and 
 lliat of the enemy lessened. 
 
 9. But that I may know every 
 thing, in what meats docs he de- 
 light? 
 
 10. But some of the enemy hav- 
 ing perceived this, again ran to 
 the river, ,and discharging their 
 arrows, wounded a few of the 
 Greeks. 
 
 11. But Alcibiades pursued, 
 having both the cavalry and one 
 hundred and twenty of the heavy-arm- 
 ed soldieis. 
 
 12. The rest of his ships, being 
 forty, he drew up, beneath the 
 wall. 
 
 13. ^l It is the easiest thing of 
 all io deceive one's self, for what 
 he wishes, that each one also be- 
 lieves. 
 
 14. Upon this, it appeared to 
 Xenophon that they ought to pur- 
 sue, and those of the heavy-armed 
 soldiers and targeteers who hap- 
 pened to be with him guarding 
 the rear, pursued : but pursuing, 
 they took no one of the enemy. 
 
 15. In this pursuit there fell 
 many of the foot soldiers^ and about 
 
 ITors^ov ouv (p5uy6jn> o rt 
 euvofxSw& ffoXij, xai o avi;^ « 
 
 T(j yap oux fiSew™' « 
 *EXX>)v, Tig ^s /3a^?a^o5 i 
 
 A-TToxTSivw^ syyvg «r^ia. 
 xovra 6 4^1X0 j. 
 
 Ou 6 "t^ePi-^u^ios fl'oXuf 
 itfl^pll, rig ffOTE OJ70S |*u. 
 
 'O Ss 'Ra.g jxsyaj xai xou 
 Xof, 6 fASv (Sag X'^i^ au^avw 
 o^aw, I 6ih -TToXcfXiog /xsjow. 
 
 'O d$ 'JTokSfAlOS p,SV TJf 
 
 sirt 6 iroraixoSj xai to^suw 
 oXjyoj rir^wj'xw' 6 *EXX7j». 
 
 AXxi?<a5>j5 5s 5jwxw,' 5p^w 
 T? i-ffcrsuf xaj 6 otXityij 
 sixofl"! xaj sxaTov, 
 
 *0 6s Xai'rrog vau^, rtr- 
 Ta^axovra si|x», uffo 6 rsjp^o^ 
 avsXxuw.^ 
 
 £|aTdTa6(>,^ 05 ^a^ iSouXo- 
 (ji-a»,oj7oj sxatfTo^ xai ojofJWi. 
 
 Ex OUTOJ, Ssvoouv 5oxS(^ 
 SiuxTSog eifAi,*" xaj 5*wxw^ 
 offXjTiif xai 6 'jrsXraiJ'rTjj 
 <r'jyp(avw^ tfuv auroj ocnC^o- 
 (puXaxsw^ <5iwxw 5s ouJeij: 
 xaraXajX^avw- 6 -roXs/xio^, 
 
 Ev ojTog Siu^ig 6 'B's^oi 
 airodvojtfxw^ flToXug, xai 6 
 
64 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 'n(3'TeP 6 6 wxTS^ig o,a/xa 
 
 Oavgpoc: Tor.c. 
 
 Ev AjcUii K«P)/*]5oviop 
 jxev oc^'j^w, Ajbuff Off ci^(*i' 
 oorog oL/v rroTEPog rjSvg oi/xa< 
 
 eighteen of the cavalry were taken 
 alive in the valley. 
 
 16. As are the eyes of bats to 
 the light which is by day, so is the 
 intelligence of our soul to those 
 things which are by nature the 
 most 7nanifest of all things. 
 
 17. In Lybia, the Carthaginians 
 govern and the Lybians are go- 
 verned ; lohich then of these dost 
 thou think to live most pleasantly '? 
 Or, of the Grecians^ in whom thou 
 art thyself, which seem to thee to 
 rule most pleasantly, those who 
 rule, or those who are ruled ? 
 
 18. He believed, that those of 
 the persons who associated with him 
 that embraced the things which he 
 approved, would be good friends 
 both to himself and to others. 
 
 19. Cum et bruta animalia doceant, et famulum ignavum 
 ac inertem nulla re dignum esse ducant, solos vero se ipsos 
 negligant, planum est abjectis eos servorum esse similes. 
 
 20. Critias quidem omnium in oligarchia avarissimus et 
 tiolentissimus fuit : Alcibiades autem omnium in statu popular! 
 intemperantissimus et petulantissimus et violeniissimus. 
 
 gaw; 
 
 '/) 6 
 
 'EXXrjv 
 
 Sv Is xcu 
 
 uvTcg si,ai, 
 
 croTE^oj 
 
 (fv Soxsu) 
 
 '^-5^^, 
 
 x^c 
 
 •rsw, 71 
 
 x^a.ew, 
 
 ?«w; 
 
 
 
 
 ^owjjuLa^w,^ sauTou 7S xcu 
 aXkos cpikos ayoL&os SijJj. 
 
 I 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 When siiiA and ymit^on signify possession, property, or duty, 
 they govern the genitive. 
 
 Verbs of beginning, admiring, wanting, remembering, blam- 
 ing, valuing, sparing, and the like, iviih their contraries, govern 
 the genitive. 
 
 Verbs derived from comparatives, or in which the idea of com- 
 parison is involved, together with many verbs coming from 
 nouns, and equivalent in meaning to the primitive -with the sub- 
 stantive verb, require the genitive. 
 
 1. It belongs to those loho con- 
 quer in the battle, to command 
 also. 
 
 *0 /xap^Tj vixaw? lau o** 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 65 
 
 2. To use violence then is not 
 the pari of those who practise wis- 
 dom, but to do such things as these 
 is the part of those who possess 
 strength without reason. 
 
 3. It is the pari of a villain, that 
 he die, having been condemned ; 
 bat of a general, while fighting 
 with the enemy. 
 
 4. It is the part of those who 
 are involved in the greatest difficul- 
 ties, and destitute of resources, and 
 held by necessity, and worthless too. 
 
 5. But Y/hen the victory belong- 
 ed to ^'Igesilaus. 
 
 6. I will go to that quarter, 
 whence it appears to me there is 
 an opportunity to begin the fight. 
 
 7. Unsocial, lawless, homeless 
 is he who delights in civil, cruel 
 war. 
 
 8. He taught that the tempers 
 which seem to be best, stand most 
 in need of instruction. 
 
 9. And they remember with 
 pleasure their former actions. 
 
 10. For no one of the fugitives 
 in the dangers of battle blames 
 himself but his general, and his 
 comrades, and all rather. 
 
 11. And all the citizens and 
 neighbours, both men and women, 
 shared in the feast. 
 
 12. And entertaining great hopes 
 that he will surpass all in the power 
 both of speaking and acting. 
 
 13. I saw even the best over- 
 come by the affections which they 
 cherished towards their childi-en 
 and their wives. 
 
 14. In offering up small sacri- .w- ^.«j«> w.-.v 
 
 fices from small means, he thought fxix^oj, ou5;v ^j^sofxai fxfiow I 
 
 Oux ouv (p^ov»](j'if atfxstJf 
 6"6 ^jtti^ojxat, aXXa o ifl^uf 
 
 Kaxoupyo^ fi-sv sijjLi, x^ivw* 
 
 Ato|o<: f</jt,» xai a/XTjp^avo^ 
 xai a.vwyxri zyj^i, xa» ouTOg 
 
 E?rji lii vix)i Ay^itfjXaog 
 
 6/)t'v £^'w 5ox£w xaj^oj sifu 
 
 A(p^Y]T(,)^, adsjxio'TOg, avfrf- 
 Tjoj £1^1 ixsivos, OS <?roXsiUt,os 
 S^a[i.ai sriSyj^ios, ox^uofig. 
 
 zliJacTxaj on o /3eX-T»CTog 
 {Joxcij? fj/jLj (putT/g fAaXirfra 
 
 Kai •JjcJswg /Xcv TaXaiof 
 
 Ou^e ya^ £v 6 6 flr'oXejut.og 
 xjv^uvog ipsuj/w? OLi(j£<g sau- 
 Tou xaTYiyo^cUJ, aXXa xa< o 
 (f-pa^riyog xai 6 (wv) <jrX»}. 
 o'lov, xaj crac: /xaXXov. 
 , Kaj ffccg ToXirris, xai o 
 
 fX£-7£)^W^ S6PT7]. 
 
 (5»a(peow 6"« 5uya(xa»^ Xeyw 
 <rs xai 'K^aTTu, 
 
 'O^aw'- 6 £Tj^ujL<.ia 6 •r*^) 
 crajcr xai o yuvT) 6 ^sXritf- 
 Tog »jTTao|xai.s 
 
 F2 
 
^ 
 
 66 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 that he was in no respect inferior 
 to those luho sacrificed much and 
 largely from many and extensive 
 means. 
 
 15. Who will find a flame more 
 powerful than hghtning, and a 
 mighty crash exceeding the thunder. 
 
 16. And he so increased the city 
 that it has become inferior to none 
 of the Grecian cities. 
 
 17. They, by themselves, con- 
 tending against those who were 
 ruling over both all Asia and Eu- 
 rope as far as Macedonia. 
 
 18. Having been unsuccessful, 
 he is not accountable to the state ; 
 but having been saved, will rule 
 this land as usual. 
 
 19. Some lime after, Inaros, 
 an African, the son of Psammiti- 
 chus, slew Achcemenes while ad- 
 ministering the government of Egypt. 
 
 20. They took still many more 
 alive, both others, and the son of 
 Tomyris, who was leader of the 
 MassagetcE. 
 
 21. If For who would not ad- 
 mire the courage of those men 
 who endured to leave their coun- 
 try and city, having embarked on 
 board their ships, for the sake of 
 not doing what was ordered ? 
 
 22. For when any one may have 
 confessed that it belongs to a com- 
 mander to prescribe what must be 
 done, he has shown that it is th^: 
 duty of a subject to obey. 
 
 23. Who noi only themselves 
 neglect neatness of person, but 
 even ridicule those ivho are careful 
 about it. 
 
 24. Whenever the Deity may 
 
 
 *Off Sri xE^auvoff x^si(t(fuv 
 
 eu^KfXU (pXof, /3^0VT7J fl' 
 
 lits^^aXku xaors^os xtv- 
 irog. 
 
 Kai otrug av^avu^ h <jro- 
 Xic:, utfTS ^'/}6?tg 'EXXt)v»; 
 
 vi^otxai -TT^oj xv^isvuS <rs 
 Arfja -Kcg xui 6 Eugwnnfj fjt,£- 
 X^i MaxsSovia. 
 
 u-TTfufiuvog 'JToXic;, tfW(^w,* dt 
 
 A^^aifXfyi^f; S'ri-^O'n'svuS 
 Aiyv-KToc:, xgo^oc: jj-srSTSira 
 
 "Xps, avr\^ Ai^uc. 
 
 IToXu? £ti croXuc: ^uype^j,* 
 xoA aXkog, xut 6 6 SatTiXcia 
 To/XL/^icr, i^r^arriysuS Matf. 
 (faysrat. 
 
 6 avrj^ iXBtvog 6 a^Srr), eg xa* 
 6 p(w^a xaj croXjj cxXsj-n-cj' 
 ij-TTo/xsvoj,^ S(5 r^iyi^7]g e/x. 
 €ajvw,^ u^re^ 6"^ ^v) o xgXevcu 
 
 'Otots ya^ rig ofji.oXoysw*<* 
 
 TaTTW otfTig -^Pi] -roisw, o Js 
 
 vuw. 
 
 'Og ou fxovov auroj sue^ja 
 afAsXsw, aXXa xai 6 g'S'j/xf. 
 Xso^ajS xaraysXau. 
 
 *Orav rij aya^oj 5 06og 
 
GREEK EXERCISES 
 
 e7 
 
 have bestowed upon me any bless- 
 ing, never will I forget him. 
 
 25. I have indeed been often 
 accustomed to ivonder at the boldness 
 of those who spoke for them. 
 
 26. He shrunk not from labours^ 
 he ivithdrew not from dangers^ he 
 spared not ricJies. 
 
 27. There is a city which a man 
 of royal race, called Soras, go- 
 verned, at the time that Eucratides 
 governed the Badrians, and the 
 name of the city is Perimuda. 
 
 28. He thought that he ought 
 to abstain from drunkenness in the 
 same manner eis from madness, and 
 from excess in eating in the same 
 manner a.s from sloth. 
 
 29. Ergone putas, inquit, si (juis diligenter curet etiam 
 eguestres copias qufe hie sunt, illas longe prcestatiiras aliis 
 armorum equorumque apparatu, ac ordine, et prompte peri* 
 cula adversus hostes subeundo, si exislimarent, hasc facientes, 
 6c laudem ac gloriam consecuturos 1 
 
 30. Hoccine dicis mi Socrates, inquit, ejusdem esse hominis 
 choro et exercitui prreesse 1 
 
 31. Ne tu, mi Nichomachides, inquit, homines administrandee 
 familiaris rei peritos contempscris. 
 
 ^i^wjxi,* 0UT8 flfoTS gifiXav« 
 
 6 ToX|jL73 6 Xsy Wo uTf^ auTof. 
 
 5uvoff a^JtrTajfii,"* ou }(f I** 
 
 ovojxa, avT]^ ^svog |5atf»Xixof , 
 6t£ xai [SaxT^iog a^u'^ Eu- 
 x^aTi5r]c, ovo/xa 5? 6 flfoXif 
 
 Ciofji-ai^ ;)^^>] xai jxavia, tr*- 
 wf >.m ciPyiu. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 
 Keris expressive of any of the senses, except thai of sight, govern 
 the genitive. — P'erhs of sight govern the accusative. 
 
 The Jittics and other ivriters frequently make verbs of hearing, 
 and sometimes those which denote the operations of the other 
 senses, govern the accusative. 
 
 1. Wonder not, O Cyrus, if Mr)^ai;/;.«^w, w Ku^of. 
 some appear dejected after having gi r-.c, (fx-J^uira^o}^ axovur 
 heard the things which are announced. 6 ayjiWu.'S 
 
 2. Since 1 indeed hearing some 'Q^sywysaxoxjurisiirat' 
 persons praised because they are ve'w. - oti vojj.if«-of avT]^ gip, 
 
63 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 men observant of laws, think that 
 he who knows not what law is, 
 would not justly obtain this praise. 
 
 3. Whilst I was a boy, hearing 
 Homer and Hesiod relating the 
 wars and dissensions, not only of 
 the demigods, but even of the gods 
 themselves. 
 
 4. For if the stag smell the ground 
 lately disturbed, he hesitates to pro- 
 ceed. 
 
 5. They will be quick-scented if 
 they scent the hare in places bare of 
 vegetation, dry, sunny, as the sun 
 is approaching the meridian. 
 
 6. But when the evil spirit s?nelt 
 the smell, he fled into the most dis- 
 tant parts of Egypt, and the angel 
 bound him. 
 
 7. Reflecting upon these things 
 and being dejected, few of them 
 towards evening tasted food. 
 
 8. Cyrus was delighted with 
 these things : he v.^shes therefore 
 that thou also taste them. 
 
 9. Accursed be the man, w^ho 
 eateth bread until evening. And 
 all the people tasted not bread. 
 
 10. Whereas the honourable and 
 the good, though the}'- desire both 
 gold and fine horses, nevertheless 
 are easily able to abstain from 
 these, so as not to touch them, in 
 opposition to wiiat is just. 
 
 11. But in the Vv^oody places 
 there is a stronger scent than in 
 those bare of vegetation ; for the 
 bare running through, and fi-e- 
 quently couching, touches many 
 tilings. 
 
 12. If therefore any one of you 
 is either inclined to touch my right 
 
 Tu^p^avw eraivoj, o fAi} *■ 
 
 2ibs<jpz Tis vo/xoj £l/XI. 
 
 cwouw 'O.arjPoj xai 'Htfio^o^ \. 
 jxai oy (xovov o '/j/xi^sof, aXXa 
 
 XOLl a-JTOff 6 6:05. 
 
 Eav ya^ 6 ska(pc5 o(f(p^a^- 
 voiJMi {yri) vS'jiffri xivew/ 
 (JutfwTrsw.'" 
 
 Eupjv Ss sifM eav o Xaywj 
 oScpPcf.ivoiJ.ai £v roirog -vj^iXof, 
 
 6 avdi-uTos (^(umv) Atyucr- : 
 Tog, y.a.1 6:uf a.\jrog 6 ayy^- ^ 
 Xos. * 
 
 Ojtos svvoew,™ xc/A adujxwj 
 s-X^u, oXiyog (isv avTog £is i /! 
 gCTt^a (jiTog ysuw.""^ '' 
 
 Ourog y-fSu 6 Ku^oj* j8ou. r 
 Xo^,ai ouv xui (Tu ciiroj 
 ysvu."^'" 
 
 ErixaTaPaToj (-'/*') o «>- 
 d^wrrog o^ a^ayoij-ai a^rog Iwff 
 sffirspcf Ka« o>,'X ^s-jw"** 
 craj 6 Xaoj ft^roj. 
 
 'O (5; xaXoj xdya&og, siri- 
 
 aya^oj, ofxwf oi^roc: ^aOiug ,: 
 S-jvaixoA ars^^w,™ wCts j«,i} 
 a-rrcd™ auroj, ffcz^a 6 6i. 
 xaiog. 
 
 Ev ^6 v\u5rig jxaXXov 
 >) £v 6 ^jXoc: Oi^w, 6iaT^£-)(u 
 ycL^ Xaywcr, xai avoxa^t. 
 
 El TIJ ObV ff-j v) Jsgioj (X^'f) 
 /3ouXo|*a» SjAog d'TrWj'o^ i| 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 69 
 
 hand^ or wishes to gaze upon rny 
 eye, while I am yet alive, let him 
 approach. 
 
 13. We therefore standing near, 
 both saw the things luhich were do- 
 ing^ and heard them defending them- 
 selves. 
 
 14. And indeed I saio also those 
 much-talked-of sights^ Ixion, and 
 Sisyphus, and the Phrygian Tan- 
 talus suffering. 
 
 15. I sec much land, and a cer- 
 tain large lake flowing around it, 
 and mountains, and rivers larger 
 than Cocytus and Pyriphlegethon, 
 and very small men. 
 
 16. I hear of these things also ; 
 but whether they be true, thou, 
 O Mercury, and the poets may 
 know. 
 
 17. Point out to me now the fa- 
 mous cities, of which we hear be- 
 low; Ninus the city of Sardana- 
 pahis, and Babylon, and Mycenaj, 
 and Cleonae, and Ilium itself. 
 
 18. A horse fears a camel, and 
 endures not either to see its form or 
 smell its scent. 
 
 19. And having caused him to 
 approach, he kissed him ; and he 
 smelt the smell of his garments, and 
 blessed him. 
 
 20. My father has neglected the 
 land. See, how my eyes are open- 
 ed because I tasted a small portion 
 of 'this honey. 
 
 ! 21. IT I know both the number 
 of the sand and the extent of the 
 sea ; I understand moreover a 
 dumb person, and I hear him who 
 sptaketh not. 
 22. Having sallied forth, and 
 
 ofAfjia oCfXoff, ^awS en, i!^o- 
 
 Kai ^r\v xdxsnog ei^w" o 
 
 0v:po':, xai 6 <I>pu^ TavraXof 
 yoCkS'rrug s-^u. 
 
 *0^w yn coXuc, xai Xj|xv?) 
 Tig [isyo.g crsPt^^cw, xaj o^o?, 
 xaj TOTttfAog 6 KoxvTOS y.m 
 IluPJoXsys^wv txsyaSy xai 
 o-vSpuiTTog ifcivv G^ixpog. 
 
 Axouw xai oiiTog-* ei 6s 
 uXridrig eifxj, (fv av, w *E^. 
 ixrig, xai u irorri^ris £i5u.^ 
 
 *0 ifokig sifKfriiiog r,5y) 
 Siixvv^^' syu, og* axouw xa- 
 TW 6 Nivoj 6 2a^5avaira. 
 Xoj, xai Bai?uXwv, xai 
 Myxrjvai, xai KXfwvai, xai 
 0^ IXiov axjTog. 
 
 Ka|jL7)Xog I-jr-jfof (po§ew,™ 
 xai oux avsp^w"^ outs 6 idsa 
 avTog o^aw, outc o oJfxr]* otf- 
 (p^aivcjxai. 
 
 Kai ^yyi^of (piXsw^ aurog' 
 xai off^Paivofxai^ 6 ocr/xri* 6 
 i/xaT;ov auTog, xai euXoysw^ 
 aurog. 
 
 A<jraXka<f(fuy 6 •n'ari]^ e^^w 
 y>] i^s, <5io<ri £»5w^ oc^aX^ 
 jxog s^w oTi ysuw™^ /3^«X^^* 
 Tig (jx^pog) 6 jjLgXi ourog. 
 
 EkJsw'"'' 5' syw ^|/ajX|xog 
 r' a^i^jjLoc:, xai /xst^ovP da- 
 Xatftfa, xai xwqjogf tfuvnj/ij, 
 xai ou (pcijvsuco? axouu. 
 
 Eflrf^e^p(Ofxai® xai a oy^- 
 
70 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 having 
 
 boldly attacked the rear, 
 they slew many, and compelled 
 a part of them even to fly ; until rig 
 Cnaeus having recall-:d those in the 
 van, exhorted them to halt and 
 engage the enemy. 
 
 23. Thou seest Jlrgives, O Cha- 
 ron, and LacedcBmo?iia7is, and that 
 half-dead commander Othnjades, loho 
 is inscribing the trophy with his 
 own blood. 
 
 24. Whenever thou mayest be 
 about to apply thxjself to any busi- 
 ness, secretly remind thyself what 
 sort of business it is. 
 
 25. I-Ie enacted that we neither 
 taste fiesh nor eat beans, turning 
 from the table my pleasantest 
 food ; and moreover persuading 
 men not to converse for five years. 
 
 26. This is in truth the very 
 evil which I mentioned, for thou 
 hearesi a proof of his madness. 
 
 27. I heard of these things, and 
 how thou didst appear to have re- 
 turned to life after havmg died, 
 and how thou once didst show unto 
 them thy thigh of gold ; but tell 
 
 me this, why did it occur to thee rig (fv ^ks^oilou" vop^os 
 to pass an ordinance, that men eat flrej; w"»^ fJirjcs x^ea^,P iir^^a 
 neither j/^esA nor beans ? xva[ios saSiu ; 
 
 28. An alio quodam sensu ilia attigisti 1 
 
 29. Nequaquam ; sed OMdies canes jam jam miserabiliter 
 ululantes mei causa, coryosque flebilem in modum alls concrc' 
 panics, quando frequentes sepelient me. 
 
 30. Multitudinem autem, Charon, istam vides^ naviganies, 
 lellantes, in judiciis versantes^ agros Golmtes^ fosnus exercenies^ 
 stipem petentes ? 
 
 xai ceu^'w'^ CLVTog avay* 
 ya^c^'^ £0)S Tva'icg avtt' 
 
 SotXXw'' 6 voXe^iog. r 
 
 A^ysiog opau, w Xa^wv, 
 
 xai AaxB6aifj.o'Jiog, xai o rjin- 
 
 6vrig SHSivo^ dr^cLTrfyog O^^u- 
 
 o.br^g, 6 £7ri^pa(pa!? 6 t^o. 
 
 craiov auros atjma. 
 
 *OTav aTTw"* i^yav fj.eX- 
 
 Xw, uvrO|U vaw^ (TSauTou* oiroj- 
 
 og £1^1 i^yw, 
 
 r,5vg syuye ouv o4/ov Sxt^ol- 
 crei^os a'7ro(pa»vw £ti 6s xcu 
 •ffgjflw avfl^cA^TToj sg irsvrs 
 J70g iX7\ 5jaXe^op-ai. 
 
 OuToj £i,a» 8'/)ra o xaxoj 
 aucog og syu "ksyu, o ya^ 
 
 ouw. 
 
 Axouw oijToc:,? xai wf 
 5oxeui^^ avaQio'J^ airo&vritJ^ 
 xw,° xai ug p(Pua'ouf o f/<i). 
 ^oj £'7ri(5£»xvufAr*^ '«or£ cu- 
 
 COS' £X£JVOg 5e £^U £<jrw,* 
 
GREEK EXEBCISES. 
 
 71 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 ! The price or measure of any thing is put in the genitive. 
 
 I The matter of which any thing is made is put in the genitive. 
 
 I. The Thracians purchase 
 their wives from their parents /or a 
 
 {great deal of money. 
 I 2. Nor, if a person younger than 
 j thirty years sell, am I to ask/c;r 
 \hoxo much he sells % 
 j 3. For how much dost thou offer 
 this one ? Merc. For ten mince. 
 ^ 4. Thou mightest in time be- 
 come a sailor perhaps, or a gar- 
 I dener ; and that too, if this person 
 nere were willing to part with thee 
 for two oholi. 
 
 6, Of which things some per- 
 sons having received small portions 
 from him gratis, sold them to the 
 rest /or a large sum. 
 
 6. For ivhai price is this man ? 
 Merc. For twenty mints. 
 
 7. The gods sell all good things 
 \mto us for our labours. 
 
 . 8. Consider, that calmness is 
 sold for so much, firmness for so 
 rmich, but nothing is got gratis. 
 
 9. The Epidaurians, therefore, 
 inquired whether they are to make 
 the statues of brass or of stone '; 
 the Pythoness, however, permits 
 neither of these, but of the wood 
 of the domestic ohve. 
 
 10. From this city, the barbari- 
 ans brought over, on floats made 
 of skins^ loaves of bread, cheese, 
 vine. 
 
 II. "fF Having seen Philip, the 
 "Macedonian, I was not able to con- 
 tain myself: he was pointed out to 
 
 *0 ©^a| cdvcojJiai I yvrn 
 
 Mr^os 7]v cwXscj vfog r^ia* 
 xovra sroj s^ojixaj'^ mtoioj 
 "jrwXsw ; 
 
 Tiodog tiXjto^ avax7]^uTrw j 
 'EPM. Asxa jxva. 
 
 ^oj gv y.ai^os ymiion'^ xai 
 
 owjxj™^ c^rocfi (^uo o§oXoff. 
 
 'Of rig (xw^oc fxs^oj «•«- 
 
 •roXus 6 aXXcj crwXsw.^ 
 
 Uotfog ouTos fi^» ; 'EPM. 
 Eixorfi jxva. 
 
 'O Tovob TwXsw cyu 'sus 
 
 EiriXsyu, ou Ttxfovrog 
 •jrtoXsw wrra&iia, coCourog 
 
 E-n-SPwcaw^ ouv o E-jri- 
 6oi\jpiog coTc^ogP ^aXxof 
 "TToiw^ 6 cyoikiia.^ »j Xj^of 
 
 saw, aXXa |uXov yju^t^os 
 eXaia. 
 
 Ex ojToc; ToXjff 6 /Saj. 
 
 Sicp&s^a, aPTog^ tv^oj,? ok 
 
 vog- ^ j 
 
 5><Xi'7r'iT'oj MaasSuv syu 
 
 ^sacpLaf^ outJs x^arsco Sjxau. 
 
72 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 me m a certain corner, mending 
 rotten shoes /or hire. 
 
 12. At the entrance there is a 
 paved way of stone for almost 
 three stadia. 
 
 13. But tell me, said he, whj-, 
 although making thy corselets nei- 
 ther stronger nor of more expen- 
 sive materials than the rest, dost 
 thou sell them/6r a higher price 1 
 
 14. And the moon beneath her 
 feet, and upon her head a crown 
 of tioelve stars. 
 
 15. I would willingly sell thee 
 the Isthmian contests, for as much 
 OS the croio7i of parsley is to bo 
 bought. 
 
 16. Coronam e rosis et croco consertam in unguentum 
 intingens ei misit. 
 
 17. Nicias, Nicerati filiusj dicitur praefectum fodinis argen- 
 leis emisse talento. 
 
 18. Emi quanti dicis ; pecuniam vero deinde solvam. 
 
 h syu sv yuviSiov Tig, [Li€» 
 5o5 ax£o/xa» o (Ja.6pog o u**- 
 
 Kara jxsv SKfoSos, tfr^ajv- 
 vujxi'ff siixi l5og Xidog e-TTj 
 Cradioj t^sis (xaXjo'Ta -rrj. 
 
 A<ra^, (p'Ol^i, Xsyu^ syu 
 
 diet. <r<S* OUTS KiX^^'^S OVTS 
 
 •toXutsXtjj 6 aXKog coiw o 
 BuPa^, ii^oXvg 'XuXsu • 
 
 K.ai <fs\r]vt\ uiroxarcj 6 
 
 (pcckn) avTog (frscpavog a(fTr]^ 
 6u8sxa,. 
 
 'O ^s I(f&iuog^^ aifoSi' 
 6u)in^'^ av rj8sug oCog o I 
 tfsXjvov drscpavog si^ii wvioj. 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 Passive verbs have a genitive of the agent after them^ which is 
 governed by a preposition expressed or wider stood. 
 
 1. No action worthy of men- 
 tion was performed by them. 
 
 2. Whatever is fit to be done by 
 Godj it is impossible for man to 
 avert. 
 
 3. For no one ever complained 
 that he was deprived of any thmg 
 by Agesilaus. 
 
 4. It is evident that if he shall 
 depart farther, we shall be frozen by 
 the cold. 
 
 JI^cfJ(fu^ aero auTog ou- 
 8sig s^yov a^ioXoyog. 
 
 Orfrij 6ei yjvojxai* sx S 
 Gsog, ajxvj^avoj a-TrorPfirw* 
 av&pwrrog. 
 
 'Xcro ya^ Ayrj(fiXa.og (frs- 
 ^c/Jt-ai jjLSv ovSsig ovdsig^ 
 <7roj<7rore e^aXew.* 
 
 wrsiiit,^ wrroirriyvviut* wro i 
 •Ivxos* 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 78 
 
 5. That the citizens might not 
 be infecied with \dce hy strangers. 
 
 6. Say that thou wilt he injured 
 by us in nothing, my child. 
 
 7. For it is intolerable, my 
 fiiends, to be laughed at by ene?mes. 
 
 8. I seek truth, by which no per- 
 ^son 2oas ever as yet injured; he, 
 however, is injured, who remains 
 m his error and ignorance. 
 
 9. Such things as these are done 
 by bad poets of themselves, and by 
 good ones for the actors. 
 
 10. How is Medea willing to be 
 left alone by thee 1 
 
 11. Thou liest, O Agamem- 
 non, murdered by thy wife and by 
 ^gysthus. 
 
 12. For when Agamemnon 
 trefathed forth his Hfe, having 
 been wounded on the head hy my 
 daughter. 
 
 13. IF But there were some, that 
 iioere even secretly taken away by the 
 Athenians who brought succour 
 from the borders, and saved. 
 
 14. It is impossible, then, O 
 ffenyman, that thou see all things 
 accurately one by one ; for it would 
 ■be the delay of many years ; be- 
 
 ' aides, I should he proclaimed as a 
 runaway hy Jupit&r. 
 
 15. Thou also having thrown off 
 the Macedonian cloak, didst put 
 on, as they say, a Persian garment, 
 and thoughtest thyself worthy to 
 be adored by Macedonians, byfree- 
 ttien. 
 
 16. For do not all thus appear 
 tto thee to be composed of two^ 
 
 *oXiT>)f aero |svoj 6|m^ 
 <rXr]fjLi. 
 
 5gjg"e a^ixeco™ rsxvov, 
 Ov ya^ ysXcLO) TXr^ros fif 
 
 ^X^^os, (piXog/ 
 
 ovSsis iru'ffoTS jSXairrw* 
 /3Xa<ffTCd 8b siftykSvuiS eoo { 
 lauTou a-TraTT)? xai ayvoia, 
 Tojourog iroisuj viro juisi 
 6 (pauXoj it^oiTirris Sia. av- 
 To?.^ v'jro 8s 6 aya6os Sm i 
 
 Jlus dx) fxovoj M»)5gia Xefr» 
 crw ^eXw ; 
 
 Ksifxai, dog aXop^oj (f(poL- 
 
 vwv. 
 
 E-rsi ya^ sxcrvsw' Aya. 
 fAS/jLvwv /3ioj, flrXTTtftfoj^ d«». 
 yatrj^ 6 Eftog u-re^ xa^a. ^ 
 
 E»|j.* 5£ Tij, 6^ xai viro 
 A^T/vaios affo 6 o^to* 
 
 8ta<fu^(*).^ 
 
 Has f'-sv ouv tfo £!&(/ 
 xa5' sxatfTOff ax^i^wj ajxr)- 
 
 Xuj ya^ av fTo^ 6 Jiar^i^ij 
 
 puTTCjf 5£»' xa&airsp a*o- 
 8ea.u/s yffo Zsuc:. 
 
 Hu dc xai MaxsScvtxoc 
 ^Xa|xu5 xaTa€aXXw,* xav- 
 
 xa» flfPofl'xuvgw uffa Maxe- 
 
 Ou ya^ xai «ra^ ourw rt» 
 5ox6U tfyyx«fw» «x 5oo,<^ 
 
 a 
 
74 
 
 CHEEK EXERCt8£8. 
 
 ^}/up(T) xai tfWfAa ; djtfrff rig 
 xwXuwsr eifxi, 6 jxsv 4/up(i) 
 £v ov^cLvos eifxi, o^fcrs^ si/xi 
 ex Zsuff, 5s ^vrjToff (fASf Of ) 
 eyw flfapa o vex^of ; 
 
 *^el^W^ 5»]jxog, ou fto- 
 vov ^aXKu iiiro o tfr^ariw- 
 
 Toj, aXXtt xai u-to i vXn- 
 
 *T9i(J'Tr;(x»^ Ku;vr«avof 
 £v 6 ajX!j)i56a<r^ov eKtoSog, 
 
 5(;0(Jiai^ TS ai;pvi(5jws o KofH-i 
 |ji.o5oj,d xai fAS/aj qjwv>i 
 •TTfos-Trw," u^ro 6 CuyxXijTos 
 (/^ouXtj) auTog** eiri'S'SfjLflrw, 
 Tojouroff d ns^Tiva^ fcru * 
 
 l)<ffS^£l5u <r£ tfu^XlJTOf 
 
 (jSouXr)), xa» <r^oj iraj gy-, 
 (prijxi(^w, irug rs riju.'jje xai, 
 ai(5wj tcu^oL avTos Tuyp^eu, 
 vw,^ £»^ /SatfiXeioff e-jrave^ 
 p^ofJt.ai'' auXrj. 
 
 20. Superatus a morte. 
 
 21. Oportebat quidem me forsan prolixa dicere, quoad tam 
 multa « ^e accusatiim. 
 
 22. Ismenodorus ergo (nam trucidatus erai a latronibus, juxla 
 Cithaeronem,) gemebat, vuln usque in manibus habebat. 
 
 parts, soul and body? So that, 
 Avhat is it which prevents that the 
 soul which was from Jupiter, be 
 in heaven, but that I, the mortal 
 part, be with the dead. 
 
 17. The people were destroyed, 
 not only being beaten down by the 
 soldiers, or trampled upon by the 
 horses, but also being oppressed by 
 the, crowd. 
 
 18. duintianus having secretly 
 taken his stand in the entrance of 
 the amphitheatre, having drawn 
 his small sword, rushed suddenly 
 on Commodus, and called out with 
 a- loud voice, that he was sent to 
 him by the senate. 
 
 19. Pertinax having said such 
 things, encouraged the senate very 
 much ; and being applauded by all, 
 emd having received all honour and 
 reverence from them, he returned 
 into the royal court. 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 Adoerhs of time, place, quantity, order, exception, and the likc^ 
 
 govern the genitive. 
 Nil and Ma are joined with the accusative ; afxa and ufwu with thi 
 
 dative. 
 
 1. J^ear the wail. J^ear the wo- Ayyi I rei^os, Ajx 
 ter. 3 iSu^. 
 
 2. I heard behind mc a great Axouu' o^ritfw syu 9f*9% 
 ▼ftwe as of a trumpet. f^syoff &S ^oKvty^. 
 
7IIEEK EXEllCISES. 
 
 3. Of these things perhaps there 
 is now enough. 
 
 4. Without thee we are afraid to 
 go home, 
 
 6. He humbled himself, having 
 become obedient unto death, even 
 the death of the cross. 
 
 6. A tragedy could not exist 
 without action, but it might exist 
 without manners. 
 
 7. He sends away to the king 
 those whom he took, luithout the 
 knovjledge of the rest of the allies. 
 
 8. And the Assyrian having fol- 
 lowed as far as he thought it to be 
 safe, returned. 
 
 9. There was along the bank of 
 the Euphrates, a narrow passage, 
 between the river and the ditch. 
 
 10. To perform his daily func- 
 tions in that part of the heavens, by 
 being in which, he may benefit us 
 most. 
 
 11. As they rested not during 
 the night, they slept until late in the 
 day. 
 
 12. The Athenians knowing 
 that they were not concealed, laid 
 down their arms again, except about 
 three hundred men. 
 
 13. By Juno! the invention is a 
 fine one indeed, O Pistias. 
 
 14. No, I swear by those of your 
 ancestors who exposed themselves 
 to danger at Marathon. 
 
 15. He led them forth at day- 
 break, and having engaged with 
 the enemy, slew many of them. 
 
 16. Early in the morning they 
 come to the sea, and having gone 
 into the way called Elorina, they 
 proceeded. 
 
 Avsu dMy oixaSg ecrsi/M 
 Taffsivow^ lauTou, yivo- 
 
 To^, &ava.ros 5s (frav^og. 
 
 Avsy |xs« "Jf^afig ovx av 
 yivoiiai^^ r^cLyuSiUj avsu 5s 
 riQos yt^oixa.i^ uv. 
 
 OvTos Is Xa/A^avw^ atfo- 
 "TrsjX'ffc*) ^atfiXeugd x^uipa h 
 
 Kaf 6 (xsv Atftfu^iog 5i&lu 
 
 XU^ C(.-X§tS OS 0L(f(f)(O<.T,S 010- 
 jUiai^ SJjXJ, tt'B'OT^e'jrw.'"® 
 
 EifAj Ss 'iru^a, avrtg • 
 Ev^^aTTjS ita^oSog Ctsvoc, 
 
 Evrau^a o ou^avo^ avatf- 
 tyu wipgXew.d 
 
 rivwtfxw^ A^i^vajo? on 
 00 Xav^avw,* xa<:arid*jfji.i">* 
 iraXjv o'tXov ifXr^v T^iaxo- 
 
 Nr] 6 *H^a, xaXoff ys, (j 
 XIJiyTja^, S'j^i/]ixa, 
 
 Oo, fxa 0^ £v Ma^aflwv 
 r^oxiv5uvsuw*ff cr^oyovoj. 
 
 *A/Jia (pwff s^oSog 
 'n'oisw,™^ tfu^CaXXw" Jg o 
 v'jtsvavTiog iroXvg jasv aur»c 
 a-roxrgjvoj.^ 
 
 *Ajixa 5g Iw^, a(pjxvfo- 
 /xai "T^og 6aku(f<fa, x<n 
 gtfCaivw^ gf 65og EXw. 
 ^ivij xaXgwe flrofguw,°* 
 
76 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 17. With his right hand let him 
 seize the reins near the withers, 
 together with the mane. 
 
 18. ^ But when thev were near 
 the fortress, the enemy having sal- 
 lied forth, put them to flight, and 
 slew a large number of the barba- 
 rians, and some of the Greeks who 
 had gone up with them, and they 
 kept pursuing them until they saw 
 the Greeks bringing aid, 
 
 19. Dost thou see then, said he, 
 hcfo?-e thai groi-e^ a place which 
 seems to be beautiful, and like a 
 meadow, and illuminated with 
 much light 1 
 
 20. At first he called himself 
 Nobody ; but when he ran off, and 
 was out of reach of my dart, he said 
 that he was named Ulysses. 
 
 21. No one having sense, fights 
 with his neighbours merely for 
 the sake of conquering his oppo- 
 nents ; nor sails upon the seas, only 
 to pass over them ; nor takes up 
 the sciences or arts merely for the 
 sake of the knoiuledge itsef ; but 
 all men do all things, on account of 
 the pleasures, honours, or profits which 
 arise from their works. 
 
 22. I think, hy the gods, that he 
 is intoxicated with the greatness of 
 the things which have been done ; 
 but not indeed that he chooses to 
 act in such a manner, that the 
 most foolish of those with us may 
 know what he is about to do. 
 
 23. Definite mihi, ad quot usque annos existimare oportet, 
 homines esse juvenes, 
 
 24. Vestes quidem qui commutant, /ri^(?ns eas astusgue 
 causa commutant. 
 
 Eifsj 5s eyyvg yivo(xa»' 
 •rw"' auros, xai a^'oxTJi- 
 (T'uvavaoaivw'^s 'EXXi^jv <rtc^ 
 EXXi^v /3oy]fl£w. 
 
 h 6 aXcToj sxmos, Torrtg 
 tic:, OS Ooxsu xaXoj: ts siu.t 
 xai X£j|jiwvoei57]j:, xai <^us 
 'Xokvg xaraXttfiLirw j 
 
 *0 fxev flr^'corog"® Ovtis 
 la-jTou a-TToxaXsw,^ e-ret ^8 
 ^lacpeuyw,^ xai c^u ejjxi 
 (BsXoSf OSvdtfsvs ovo/Atti^w 
 
 ou^ei?, vooj S)(U, ivExev au- 
 Tcs o"« xaTaywv/^o/xa»^^ i 
 avTiTa(f<fw^S ouTg -rrXsw h 
 •reXayoj", X"^'^ ^"^ crs^ai- 
 ow™^f fjLovov xai |xy)v ovSs 
 6 Sjx-rfjpia xocj tsxv'JJ aurof 
 svsxa £'n'jfl'T'>),a'>] avaXa/x- 
 
 yov vidvSj 7] xaXo^, ») Cu/j^. 
 
 E/w oijxai (xsv, VT) o fisc?, 
 exsjvoj jj.s5ow* 6 y^sye&os o 
 
 (fw, wtfTS av&7|Toff, ffa^a 
 exsjvoc. 
 
CRXEE EXERCISES. 
 
 77 
 
 25. Quis enim, absque hac, bonum aliquod discat? 
 
 26. Et, per canem^ O viri Athenienses, certe ego patiebar 
 aliquid tale. 
 
 CHAP. xxxn. 
 
 Adjectives signifying profit, likeness, obedience, fitness, trust, 
 clearness, decency, facility, and their contraries^ and those 
 compounded with Cuv and 6,aou, govern the dative. 
 
 Etfri taken for s-)(^u to have, governs the dative. 
 
 . All verbs put acquisitively^ i. e. verbs of serving, using, rejoicing, 
 obeying, trusting, discoursing, fighting, and the like^ with 
 their contraries^ govern the dative. 
 
 1. There is nothing either so 
 serviceable or becoming to men, as 
 order. 
 
 2. To thee it will be honorable, and 
 to the state advantageous. 
 
 3. One while like to a poor man, 
 and another while to a young man. 
 
 A. Having said these things, and 
 others like to these, I descended. 
 
 6. Thou zxi faithful to my wife 
 and to my family. 
 
 6. Every tyrant is inimical to 
 liberty, and hostile to laws, 
 
 7. It is disgraceful to those nobly 
 bom to live viciously. 
 
 8. Behold, I am really naked as 
 thou seest, and of equal weight with 
 the other dead persons. 
 
 9. Thou then, son, if thou art 
 wise, wilt entreat the gods to be 
 forgiving unto thee, if in any thing 
 Ihou hast neglected thy mother. 
 
 10. O Hystaspes, and ye others 
 who are present, if you mention it 
 to me, whenever any one of you 
 may have undertaken to marry, 
 
 G2 
 
 E/jtxi o\)Ssig cvTUS ou5{ 
 Evx§'n<f'ros ovTS xakos «*- 
 
 2u xoKog ei/Ai xai o ifo- 
 "kig aya&QS. 
 
 AXXoTf ftsv -BTcdp^o^ gva- 
 Xi/x/off, aXXoTS 8' avTS 
 avY}^ vso^. 
 
 OvTos xai flra^a-jrXTh 
 (ftog oiiTog sieuy^ xara^ai- 
 
 IlKfrog aXoj^off, 6 t$ gjxof 
 SoiiogP fijxi. 
 
 To^avvog- a<Kag S)(6^S 
 sXeu^e^ia, xcu o vopoj svav- 
 Tiog, 
 
 Zaw 0LKfx^f>S aitfx^wff • 
 xaXw^ 9uw.'^5 
 
 l5ov, yujxvoff, ug o^aw, 
 akri&ug eijuw, xai icfoo'rafl'wff 
 aXXo? vsx^og, 
 
 1v ouv, w ifttigj av tfw- 
 <p^ov£w, 6 fxsv 4soff *a^ai» 
 
 St Tif cra^afxeXew o /ji.*)r*]^.C 
 'XtfTafl''n'»jff, xai o aX- 
 Xof ^s 6 ira^Eijxijff >jv gyw 
 Xsyw, orav ci^ <fu yajxfw 
 f-jfi^^eiisw,* yivwtfxw «*«• 
 
78 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 you will know what kind of as- 
 eistant I will even be to you. 
 
 11. He who makes most of the 
 same opinion with us, would just- 
 ly be esteemed very able both in 
 epeakino; and in acting. 
 
 12. We have no other good but 
 our arms and our valour. 
 
 13. They to whom it has thus ap- 
 peared proper, and they to whom 
 it has not, have not the same com- 
 mon sentiment. 
 
 14. His children were brought 
 unto him, for he had tioo small sons 
 and one of large size! 
 
 15. Abolishing all those things 
 in which slaves are subservient to 
 their masters, he enjoined only those 
 things in which freemen oheij their 
 magistrates. 
 
 16. He did not use sleep as a thing 
 that had dominion over him, but as 
 a thing governed by his business. 
 
 17. He thought that the gods 
 greatly delighted in the honours they 
 received from the most pious. 
 
 18. But I perceive some rather 
 ^•listing him than ariy of them. 
 
 19. ^ And they entreat you to 
 be upon your guard lest the bar- 
 barians attack you in the night. 
 
 20. For neither was Lycurgus 
 long lived, who contended loith the 
 immortal gods. 
 
 21. Consider, said he, that no- 
 thing is nearer (in resemblance) to 
 the death of man than sleep. 
 
 22. And they treated Mram well 
 on her account ; and he had sheep, 
 and kids, and asses, and male ser- 
 vants, and female servants, and 
 Mule© and camek. 
 
 croiewj^g" 5ixaius av Xsxri- 
 
 av £i\k\. 
 
 E/w ou^sjg oiXKag eifu 
 aycL^og SI ^1^ offXov xat 
 
 *0 h ourw ^oxgwP"^ xai 
 f//o, ouTo^ oux eiai xoivo; 
 
 $£fw^ "TTa^a oeuroj 5 irat- 
 5»ov, 5uo ya.^ avrog vieug 
 
 A:pai^6oj otjcg 5ouXo(r ^sff- 
 
 rur oCcj s'ksvds^og o-^X^ 
 
 Ou jj.r/v C'^rvog; ys ^erfra- 
 77\g, oXka O'^X^^^ ^"^ ^ 
 
 AXXa (o^w) evjoj (iaXXov 
 
 SXZlVOg IfKfTeOU Ti TIC auTo^ 
 Kat xsks-ou) (puXarrc; jxij 
 
 OvS: yap ovSs Auxou|. 
 yag 6r,\i si/aj, oj pa, &so£ 
 
 Evvo£w^ ^c, (pvjjJt'f, Sri 
 sy/u? fji£v av6^}^fMog Qct- 
 vaTog o'jos;g £i^i y^'vc^. 
 
 K«< A§fa;x su Xfa«^°** 
 . 5ia auToj, Hcu ytvofxai^ av- 
 
 xai ovoj, xai <7farj> xai ^o*. 
 ^XT^, xar T^Jtiovoj, xw xa- 
 
 fJbl^Xoj. 
 
GREEK EX£SCIS£9. 
 
 79 
 
 23. For I hear, as perhaps you 
 also do, that those who spoke (in 
 public) in the time of our forefa- 
 thers, whom all of the present day 
 praise indeed, but are far from 
 imitating, pursued this mode and 
 custom of managing- the govern- 
 ment, that illustrious Aristides 
 namelj', Nicias, him that was imj 
 name-sake, Pericles. 
 
 24. Wherefore, seeing these, the 
 life of man appeared to me to re- 
 semble a long procession and for- 
 tune to conduct and arrange each 
 part. 
 
 25. For there is somehow this 
 disease in sovereign power, not to 
 trust friends. 
 
 26. As therefore by those he was 
 elevated to power, at a time when 
 they each thought that he would 
 do something advantageous for 
 them, so ought he b}'- these same 
 also to be hurled down again in- 
 stantly, since he has been clearly 
 convicted of doing all things for 
 his own aggrandizement, 
 
 27. Quihuscujique studiorum non est finis utilis ad vitam, hae 
 non sunt artes. 
 
 28. Nee enim constat ei qui agrum sibi egregie consent, quis 
 nam fructum sit percepturus. nee constat ci qui egregie domum 
 sibi redificat, quis earn sit habitaturus. 
 
 29. Legationes inidique venerunt, omnibus gratulantibu$ 
 Romanorum sub Pertinace imperio. 
 
 *0 ya^ zi<i ^^(iy(iV(ii 
 eyw Xe^wff axouw, tid'nn^ 
 itfug xat tfu, 0^ S'Traivew 
 
 jxso/xai Ss ou flravi), ouTog h 
 Tj^cTToj xai 6 sdog 6 «'o>j. 
 rsia p^^ao.aaj^ o A^KtrSh 
 6rig sxsivog, 6 Nixiaj, o 6/xw- 
 vu/xoj SfiauTou, 6 UspixXyig* 
 
 Toiya^Toi, Sx=ivog o^aw^ 
 6qxsu~ fyw av&^oi^cs 
 /S»o^ <n'ojX'7rii Tig fxax^og -tt^o- 
 CejJeoj,'"''' -xo^Yiyzu §£ xat 
 diararru sxudTog 6 Tup^ij. 
 
 Ev£j|ut,j ja^ 'Kug ouTog S 
 cuPavv/j vodri^a, 6 cptXog fJiij 
 
 'Uif'nSP ouv dia 0UT05 at- 
 ^w^ [i^zya.gy riwxa sxudrog 
 ffvix(ps^(*}S oivrog kavro\) oio- 
 fAKj^ 7ig cr^atfCw, ovrug 
 cipSiXw 6ta 6 uwog ourof 
 xai xc.^ai^sw'' 'jraXiv, SffSu 
 o/j TTcvra evsxa eaurou tfc** 
 
eo 
 
 IRSEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. xxxm. 
 
 The cause, manner, or instrument, is put in the dative. 
 Sometimes passive verbs have a dative of the agent after them. 
 Comparatives and superlatives have the measure of excess most 
 commonly in the dative, sometimes also in the accusative. 
 
 1. Both by her hands, and by 
 filthy living, and by all evils. 
 
 2. He struck a panic by his con' 
 ^ivance and art. 
 
 3. Sacrifice to God, being splen- 
 did not so much in thy garments as 
 in thy heart. 
 
 4. Men live among the rest of 
 animals like gods, excelling them 
 by nature, both in body and in mind. 
 
 5. For it had been cut off with 
 a scymitar by the Egyptians. 
 
 6. But with brazen and adaman- 
 tine walls, as he says, he fortified 
 our country. 
 
 7. Has any thing new been de- 
 creed by those below concerning 
 those here ? 
 
 8. For base actions are taught 
 by base persons. 
 
 9. Were these things also agreed 
 upon both by us and by thee ? 
 
 10. Whatsoever evil and base 
 things have been done both by this 
 man, and by the brothers of this 
 man. 
 
 11. A double wall, of seven or 
 eight stadia, had already been fi- 
 nished by the Athenians. 
 
 12. The royal cubit is greater 
 ihan the common cubit by three 
 fingers. 
 
 13. The practice of justice is 
 
 Kai x^^ii '««» XufAttjP xa» f 
 
 'js'as xaxoj. 
 
 xcfA 'rrxyy\. 
 
 Gtos &vUj ULT Xafiwr^ 
 £j//.i 6 xXaf/<u^, us xa^$ui. 
 
 ITa^a aXXoj ^coov,* wtf» 
 
 Tevu, cpv(fis xai 6 (rwjxa xau 
 -vj/up^i] x^ariirevu. 
 
 A-rroxoTTw ya^ xocrtg vif9, 
 Aiyvirriog. 
 
 AXXa ')(akxs(is xai uSou 
 fioMTivos TSix^S, w? aurqj 
 
 I"-' . ■ 
 
 Aoxs&a r«ff vsurs^os o xa^ 
 <ru irs^i 6 ev&aSs ; 
 
 AKfxios ya^ ai(fx^ 
 flr^ayjLta Ex5i5a(fxu, 
 
 H xai ouTOff OffcoXoysw* 
 syu TS xai (fu 
 
 *0(fos xaxos xai OLi^Xi^t *( 
 xa» ouTO^, xai o ourof a5gX* 
 
 AiirXoog Tfi^o? I^ra \kef ■ 
 •f\ oxTW (fraStov viSri sifirSm 
 Xeco Ad>)vaioj. 
 
 'O ^a(fi\riios 'ffrrXPC i 
 jxergioff cifAi ff>ixuff fisyaf 
 T^ffif JaxTuXoff. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 81 
 
 bg 80 much better than riches, by 
 how much these last benefit us 
 only while hving:, whereas the for- 
 mer procures an honourable name 
 for us, when we have ceased to 
 exist. 
 
 14. But the other by far the 
 *irst of his equals in age, in all 
 Aingg. 
 
 15. .A wall, not weaker than the 
 other wall by much. 
 
 16. He thought that those mer- 
 cenaries were not so much supe- 
 rior to his subjects as inferior in 
 number. 
 
 17. Speak out ; thou wilt be 
 much more hateful, being silent. 
 
 18. IT It behoves us to think 
 these things concerning God, who 
 is in -power most strong, in beauty 
 mrjst admirable, in life immortal, in 
 virtue most excellent. 
 
 19. By how much more men 
 there are in the city, hy so much 
 sooner I think that they will be 
 reduced by famine. 
 
 20. Come then, let us consider 
 all the things, that have been done 
 hy wze, one by one ; for thus then 
 it will appear most plainly, which 
 of them is bad, and which good. 
 
 21. Whatever virtues are said 
 to be among men, thou wilt find, 
 upon consideration, that they all 
 are improved by discipline and stu^ 
 
 22. Though, if I must conjec- 
 ture by the silence being yet great ^ 
 and by the cold hot yet pinching me, 
 as is usual in the morning, it is not 
 yet midnight. 
 
 23. By how much superior the 
 
 fxev ^aw jxovov wcptXsw, 6 Ss 
 
 XPog, mag^ aeidrog. 
 
 Tei^og ou tokxiS ad&SMr^ 
 6 Ui^og TS\-/f.g. 
 
 *H^=ojxa»," 6 jxsv fxjtf^o- 
 
 Karau^aw -rrokvs^ £■)(. 
 
 OvTog x^ri irsPi Qeos 
 3iavoeofjt.ai, 6o\iai::g ixsv sjjxiff 
 t^x^^^Si ica.Xk*g Ss evir^s. 
 'Xr,g, ^wv] 8s aQuvoLTogf a.^sr^ 
 Ss aPKfrog, 
 
 6v -TroXig siixi, coCouToj av 
 'rayyg Xifjioj aurog ajygoftoj 
 aXifl'xw.P^ 
 
 AycjJ cotvuv, (j'xo'^reca 5 
 
 fxatfroj, ouTw ya^ St] fca- 
 Xitf-ra 6r]kog si^xt, og Tig t$ 
 avTog ayoL&og em xat bg tij 
 xuxog. 
 
 Xeyw, (fxo<:t£ui^s crag ^a^*]- 
 tfij: TS xai y.s'ksT'ri av|avw5 
 
 SV^KfXU), 
 
 Kai Toi e<ys pf^ii tw- 
 fjLa»^o(xa» Tc »}tfup^ia flro» 
 X-jj en ejfjii, xai o x^uog 
 
 wtfcra^ e/^w,""^ a-n'oxvaico, ou- 
 
62 
 
 fREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 history, exhibiting the wonderful 
 achievements of the Greeks and 
 barbarians, is to that detailing the 
 lamentable and grievous misfor- 
 tunes of the Greeks, hy so muck is 
 Herodotus more judicious than 
 Thucydides in the choice of his 
 subject. 
 
 24. O amice Crito, studium hoc tuum magni sestimandum - 
 est, si modo cum recta ratione conjunctum sit : sin minus, I 
 guanio vehementius, tanio moles tius. ■ |i 
 
 25. Una vero causa judicata fuit a Minoe etiam in gratiam. ) 
 
 26. Non enim civi/ibus dignitatibus, neque generis pracellen' 
 fta, neque divitiis Deus optimos jiidicare solet. 
 
 'EXXrjv TB xai jSa^€a|oc : 
 7fa?*3> 6 oiXT^og xa» dn- 
 vo^ ira&os 6 'EXX>)v 6iay» 
 ^eXXw TotfovTog (p^ovi|Xo^ 
 
 6 sxkoyri vtfoQsdis, 
 
 CHAP. XXXIV. 
 
 An impersonal verb governs the dative. 
 
 X^rj and Sst, signifying it behoveth, are followed by the accusative ^ 
 
 with the infinitive. 
 Afi signifying necessity or want, juieXfi, /xeTsC?-!, Ai'^oo'tjxsi, ^la. 
 
 (pg^si, gXXeiirfj, fA£T«/AeXgi, frequently govern the dative of thg f" 
 
 /?«-so» i^eVA ;Ae genitive of the thing. 
 
 1. I think that' 2? ts not alloioed 
 me when praising, to say any thing 
 of thee which I cannot truly assert. 
 
 2. // is allowed private persons to 
 curtail their expences, but it is not 
 permitted unto tyrants. 
 
 3. But let it suffice for thee^ Ree- 
 ing their works, to reverence and 
 honour the gods. 
 
 4. Does it then appear to thee to 
 be possible for a man to know every 
 thing which exists ? 
 
 5. Why does it become you to fear 
 these men ? 
 
 6. It becomes him not only as an 
 enemy, but also as a traitor. 
 
 7. Whom it behoves to seek death 
 
 'Hyoujxaj ovx s^stfri^ syu !i 
 
 oj r\g av fXTi aXTj^suw. |^ 
 
 * 'O f;.£v idjwT^? e|eo'-ri I ^ 
 Sairavr) Cuvrefxvw, o 5e tw* } 
 ^uvvog oux £v(5£j^fTaj, P 
 
 AXXa £|a^si<= Cu 6 £p- ? 
 yov aurof o^aw, c'e§of/.ai xoi < 
 
 Apa, ovv Sqxsi tfu a.v6^(^ (* 
 •s'oj ouvarog £i/xi 6 si/xjS ffai? 
 
 Tis tfu if^odrfKii wrtg 
 
 Ou fAovov W5 ^X^fof au- 
 Tof ir^odrficei aXXa xoj wf 
 
ORBEK SXERCISES. 
 
 ftd the remedy of the troubles of 
 
 8. Reflecting upon which things, 
 it behoves thee not to despise those 
 I which are invisible* 
 I 9. The definition is entirely wor- 
 thy of praise, as having all things 
 which ii behoves a good definition to 
 have, 
 
 10. My^riends, an excellent nlan 
 has come to us, for it behoves all 
 men now to know this man's deeds. 
 
 11. Tell me plainly thus, what 
 is this dress, or w hat. need hidst thou 
 of the journey down % 
 
 12. He said that he would care 
 nothing about your confusion. 
 
 13. I care nothing /or thee. 
 
 14. And in the latter the bad share, 
 I but it is impossible for the e\ii to 
 ■ participate in the former. 
 
 15. I shall try to make him who 
 Ijave these things to us, never re- 
 pent of his journey to me. 
 
 16. IT Moreover in the winter it 
 w not enough for them to cover only 
 the head, and body, and feet ; but 
 on ihe extremities of their hands 
 Ihey have rough gloves. 
 
 17. It becomes all persons indi- 
 vidually to make libations, and to 
 aaijrifice and offer first-fruits, chaste- 
 ly and not disorderly, nor careless- 
 ly, nor meanly, nor beyond their 
 ability. 
 
 18. You may use as winter quar- 
 ters for the arrhy, Lemnos, and 
 Thasos, and Sciathos,and the other 
 ielands in this quarter, in which 
 there are harbours, and command 
 •11 things iohich it behoves armies 
 fo have. 
 
 Id. It behoves (hec to hate those 
 
 Ilavu eiraivos a^tog i 
 0^0?, w^ '"'o? sxyi off'oj ^ 
 
 avrj^ o.ya&os, vuv ya^ ijii; 
 irac: avd^w-JTos 6s^ sidtu^ I 
 oiiTog E^yov. 
 
 Asyu ouTUS atrXuSy <ni I 
 CtoXt] ; *) r<5"® tfu o xa.ru 
 
 Eru,^ on ou^sv auroj /w- 
 
 Ov5sv Byu fxsXsi tfu. 
 KctxsivojP p.sv 9auXoj 
 
 aSuvaros f/.eTaXa|x§avw.* 
 
 'O jXeV oilTog 8l8(,}lJ.l^S syu 
 
 fffi^aw"* ifotso f/.rj'B'oTff fxg. 
 ra/xsXsj^ o at^oj syu oSog. 
 
 AXXa fxrjv xa< £v o X^ifXWf, 
 ou fxovov xe(paX»], xai tfw/xa, 
 xai -rouff a^xei auroj (fxs'ga- 
 ^wP"'' aXXa xai irs^i ax^jp 
 ;(£i^ X^'^'5 Satfug ex"* 
 
 ^irsv^w, xai duw, xai aira^ 
 ^o/jiai, exaCregP flr^orfyjxsi, 
 xa^a^wff, xai |x>) SffiCefl'u^fxe- 
 vwg:, f^rj^s a/LtsXwf, jx^j^f 
 7XjJ;(^w5, fjiTjtJg ucrs^ 5uva- 
 
 ^Tira^X^i (fv 5^effJi.a5{of ftffw 
 5^^a:d™ 5uvap-i.c, Aijjxvs^ 
 xai 0aCo,c, xai Hxiadog, xoi 
 6 aXXog 6 iv oOtoj Toirop 
 vyjCos* £v Off xai Xifit-^jv xeu 
 (Tiro^, xai oga p^^ tfr^ariv- 
 /xa <jrag uffa^p^w. 
 
M 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 who write things contrary to law, 
 and to think no one of such things 
 as these to be small, btit every one 
 exceedingly great. 
 
 20. Sending out the sheep one* 
 by one into the pasture, having 
 commanded the ram, what things 
 ii behoved him to do for me. 
 
 21. The multitude answered un- 
 to him, We have heard from the 
 Jaw, that the Christ remains for 
 ever ; and how dost thou say that 
 it behoves the Son of man to be lifted 
 up? 
 
 22. But by your country's gods, , 
 my sons, honour each other, if you 
 have any wish to gratify me. 
 
 XP05 »3ycO|xa« SUM 6 Twourog, 
 aXXa IxatfTog ufff^fxeyedr;;. 
 
 Movoj cra^jijjxj^ o 'S'^o^a, 
 «rov eg 6 vo|x>7, 6vTgXXw°^ I 
 
 avros li:s^ syu.s 
 
 A-n'oxpjvwP'^ auToj 6 op^Xoff, 
 sycjj axouw^ £x 6 vojuiog, ori I 
 X^idrog [xsvu eg 6 aiwv xou 
 crc«j(; Cj Xgyw, on 6si u>jyow* 
 6 uioj 6 av^^w-jroff ; 
 
 AXXa 'ff'^oj dcoj? flTo- 
 <r^woj, crajj, TijXfxcj aXX»j- 
 Xwv, 
 ^j^o/xai^ jXsXsi tfu. 
 
 'O /X=VTOJ SiUXOVlDLf h 59* 
 
 t-xatTTogP 6 •r^affo'wP'' xcm 
 
 e» <ri xa» 6"^^ s^''^ p^cp- 
 
 23. 0/*MeYf«^y however, ground- 
 ed upon each of the things which 
 have been done, I affirm that / 
 likewise have my share. 
 
 24. Sive GBs, sive aurum dicaveris, ahis quidem aliquando 
 possessionem et praedam dicaveris ; deo vero parva est cura 
 aurificum vestrorum. 
 
 25. Si bonam amicum paraturi simus, nos ipsos bonos opor- 
 Hi esse, et dicere bona etfacere. 
 
 CHAP. XXXV. 
 
 7%e accusative is often put absolutely, xara being understood. 
 
 1. Endeavour to be, as to thy Ilfi^aw™ fisv (fusfxa (pu 
 ody, fond of labour, and as to thy Xo'^'ovoc, 6 65 -^vx^ (ptXcCo- ^ 
 
 mind, fond of wisdom. 90^. 
 
 2. Armed as to my hand with ^Oir'ki^Q^'' Ss y^t^ I6i 
 this sword. (pao'yavov. 
 
 3. I am distracted as to my fear- ExrsivuP'' (poQspog 9^. j 
 fid mind. 
 
 4. I venture to be wise as to hu- *0 av^u^mg (fQ:pta wt* 
 man knowledge. Swsvu £ifx» 0*090^. 
 
 5. Dost thou wish to kill me as M17 amt^su^ Byu ^v isKu 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 86 
 
 thou killedst the Egyptian yester- 
 day ? 
 
 6. A stone of an hundred feet as 
 t) iis lengtk 
 
 7. Or who, being a slave to his 
 pleasures, would not be shamefully 
 affected both as to his body and his 
 •mind ? 
 
 8. IT They all sailed wounded, 
 one as to the leg, another as to the 
 Jkead, and another injured as to some 
 other part. 
 
 9. Moreover, as to sacrifices^ and 
 temples, and festivals, and sacred 
 enclosures, he devised in what way 
 these shall be. 
 
 10. Crito therefore, as often as 
 he collected either corn, or oil, or 
 wine, or fleeces^ or any thing else 
 of the things useful for hfe, which 
 grow in the country, having taken 
 a portion, was accustomed to give 
 it to this person ; and as often as 
 be sacrificed, he invited him, and 
 treated him with attention as re- 
 gards such things as these. 
 
 11. The one was robust and 
 tnasculine, and squalid as to her 
 hair, full of hardness as to both 
 her hands, girt up as to her robe, 
 jfuU of white dust as my uncle was 
 whenever he polished stones ; the 
 other was very handsome, both 
 graceful as to her demeanour, and 
 elegant as to her attird 
 
 12. Because the barbarians are 
 more slavish as to their manner than 
 the Grecians, and those in Asia 
 than those in Europe, they remain 
 under the despotic government in 
 nothing murmuring. 
 
 : 13. The keen and ready-witted 
 are, for the most part, both rea- 
 ^J ixcited to passion ; and are 
 
 H 
 
 Aiyvifriog ; 
 
 Ixarov. 
 
 H Tij oux av, rj5ovii\ Sorh 
 
 xai tfwfxa xai o 4'UX'' ♦ 
 
 T^aufnarias Ss ^as Biet' 
 cXew,^ fAEv (TxsXeg, 6 5«5 
 xs^aXy), 6 ds aXXoj ns (fiff- 
 
 ©urfia Ss, xai le^ov, xtxt 
 lo^T»i,xai MfAevoj, g|eufitfxw* 
 (Kfrts r^oirog fiif/,» ovrog, 
 
 OvTos ouv k^ircjv, oflfori 
 CuyxoiJw^w^ Y) (TiTof J ij eXa»- 
 ov, *j omsy ri SPiov, tj aXXog 
 <^^5 £v ay^og yiy&fjiai j^- 
 (fjfAcj ir^os 6 ^jog, a^ai^fiw* 
 5i5w/Ar* xai hirors 6vu,^ x«» 
 Xsw,^ xai 6 ToiouTOff flfog cir^ 
 IxeXsw.™"^ 
 
 EifAi fjiev s^anxag xeu 
 av(5^»xoff, xai avxM§^S o xo- 
 H<^, ^(Si^ TuXogP ava'^Xscj^, 
 (Jia^wvvufAiP"^ 6 atffliQgjriTavoj 
 xa.T£ysixu,s o\os stfjt-i 6 deio^, 
 o^ws |ew^ 6 Xi^og* 6 srePo^ 
 6s jxaXa Bvir^otfwffog, xai S 
 tf^Tllxa eu'^^6'rr)j,xai xoCfwof 
 ava^oX*], 
 
 Aia 6"^ ^ouXixo^ sifM^ S 
 ^oj |ut,£v fSa^^a^os o 'EX^ 
 X»)v, 6 ^g irgpi Ada,* i 
 
 fl'S^I 6 Eu^WTTJ,* UffOfASVU S 
 
 ^stfcroTixog a^pci], oydsv d\j(f, 
 XEfaivu. 
 
 'O <r£ o^u5 xai ayp^ivo©^, 
 wj <jroXvj,P xai cr^oj 6 o^y< 
 o^u^^o^o; sifM* XM arru ff* 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 -rXoiov. 
 
 Ka» vuv, A^iaf , o xar« 
 
 XaXe-Tfoj ?x flrXoutfiog 'ffE- 
 •rXouTSw.^ 
 
 ffoitw,^ xa» sup(o/jt,a»^ o flsog* 
 
 6 aya^off, 
 
 tfXTjvrj £jj xoir»j 
 
 borne along bounding, as ships 
 without ballast. 
 
 14. And now, O Arcliias, as far 
 as lies in m}'- power, I do not dis- 
 grace Athens. 
 
 15. It is more afflicting to have 
 become a poor from a rich man, 
 than not to have been rich at first. 
 
 16. At last, having made" the 
 third libations, and having prayed 
 to the gods for good things, they 
 broke up the company in the tent, 
 in order to go to rest. 
 
 17. Moreover, as some of the 
 letters are vowels, which perfect 
 a sound by themselves ; in the 
 same way we may remark of ex- 
 pressions themselves; some of 
 ihem after the manner of vowels, 
 tire of themselves expressive. 
 
 18. Altero eorum, de quibus mentionem fecimus, plenus est 
 Timaeus, vir quoad alia, pentus. 
 
 19. Harum artium ego jamdudum cupidus sum ; praesertim 
 si sufficerit mihi eadem scientia ad homines bonos quoad am- 
 mos, et pulchros quoad corpora. 
 
 TO, eaurou (pwvrj a-jTocsXew a 
 avrog t^o^o^ sj/ai £'S'jvo£&/ 
 xai STi Xg^is'E 6 jX£v avTOSt 
 
 £t<XI. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVl. 
 
 Verbs of asking, teaching, doing well &r ill, speaking well or 
 ill, taking away, putting on or off, concealing, and ike like^ 
 are joined with two accusatives, the one of the person, the other 
 of the thing : or with one accusative and an adverb. 
 
 1. Nevertheless, answer me, 
 O Minos, for I will ask thee a short 
 question. 
 
 2. In the mean time Chrysan- 
 tas the Persian came, and some 
 others of the alike honoured, bring- 
 ing deserters. And Cyrus asked 
 the deserters respecting the intelligence 
 they brought from the enemy. 
 
 Ev ovTos $e s^oiiou'^ X^* 
 (foLVTUS 'ne^(fris xai aXXo^ 
 71$ 6 ofjLOTifJi.05 auTojxoXo^ 
 ayu. Km 6 Ku^o? s^urtxA^ 
 auTOfwXoff oP £x •'oXf- 
 
GBEEK EXEKCISES. 
 
 87 
 
 3. But when then will death 
 cover my body? This long life 
 teaches me many things. 
 
 4. They teach their servants oj'ts, 
 frequently spending much money 
 upon them, but they neglect them- 
 selves. 
 
 5. Come then, if I buy thee, 
 what wilt thou teach me 1 
 
 6. The Thebans did many other 
 injuries unto us. 
 
 7. For they never as yet ceased 
 doing many evils unto us. 
 
 8. What heaejits thou didst pro- 
 mise that thou wouldst confer up- 
 on us when thou didst receive the 
 money, have been aheady perform- 
 ed by thee. 
 
 9. He conferred many benefits on 
 the city. 
 
 10. O man, act not injuriously to 
 the dead. 
 
 11. In order that they, having 
 become powerful both in their bo- 
 dies and their minds, may both re- 
 gulate their families well, and act 
 kindly to their friends. 
 
 12. Themistocles then uttered 
 many and injurious things against 
 both him and the Corinthians. 
 
 13. Say est thou these things of 
 our general ? 
 
 14. To treat with fair words him 
 who uses fair ivords, and to act kind' 
 ly to him who acts kindly. 
 
 15. Be thou valiant, in order 
 that some one of posterity may also 
 speak well of thee. 
 
 16. The choruses uttered their 
 sarcasms against no male^ but against 
 the females of the country, 
 
 17. He deprived my only and be- 
 loved son of life. 
 
 TO? rfwfAa xoCkvieru ; croXuf 
 SiSadxu syu 6 ToXug (Biorog. 
 'O jULgv oixsrrig £x5i5a^. 
 xw™ fS'/vY}, taixifoXvg t(o\, 
 "kaxigcig a-jTOj n^yv^iov ava- 
 Xji^xw, savTou Se a/i-sXsw. 
 
 rig syu> SiSacfxu ; 
 
 ©rj^aioj 'XoXvg jji^v xai 
 aWog syu a^jxsw.^ 
 Ou ya,^ ou Js'rToJ'TfoTS 'jr'auw"^- 
 rroXuff xctxog syu >r'oisu. 
 
 aycx&os syu^ ots Xa,y.§av6j* 
 
 IIoXuj aya&og o cr'oXi^ 
 •rotsw.^ 
 
 Av&^c^rfog, fjoy) S^olu o ^uijC- 
 xw"ff xaxug. 
 
 *Iva SuvaTcg yivo/xai^ xcu 
 (j'wju.a xai 6 •^^X'^j xai I 
 kavTov oixog xaXug oixsw, 
 xa» 9»Xog eu coisw. 
 
 Tots Jrj o ©s/xjo'toxX'jj^ 
 exsjvo? T£ xai 6 Ko^iv^;of -jro* 
 Xu? Te xai xaxoj Xs^w.^ 
 
 Ouiog Xsyu tfu 6 tfT^a- 
 TYiyog ; 
 
 Eu Xsyw sv Xsyc^fS xai 
 su ^oisw su •n'oisw.ff 
 
 AXxijxo? sifAi, jva Tig (fv 
 
 xai 0>]^iyOV05 £U S'B'W.® 
 
 Kaxwg ayo^svu^ o X0|0S 
 avr,^ fASv ou5si5, 6 5s sffi^Wf 
 ^10 J yuv*]. 
 
 'O iiovog eyoi^ xm qjiXof 
 
88 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 I 
 
 18. They are endeavouring to 
 deprive you of this countnj. 
 
 19. And since we have taken 
 their arms from them^ so it is incum- 
 bent that we ourselves be never 
 destitute of arms. 
 
 20. A large boy, who had a 
 small coat, having stripped another 
 boy small in size, who had a large 
 coat,/?M/ on him (the small hoy) hif 
 oion, while he himself put on his 
 (the small boy's.) 
 
 21. Do not conceal from me those 
 things which I am going to suffer. 
 
 22. But now, since he is no 
 more, I look to thee, that joined 
 with this thy sister, thou hesitate 
 not to slay .^gysthus, the perpe- 
 trator of thy father's m.urder : for 
 it behoves me not any longer to 
 conceal any thing from thee. 
 
 23. IT Mithridates again appears 
 to them after they had crossed 
 over, having one thousand horse- 
 men, and bowmen, and about four 
 thousand slingers ; for he asked so 
 many from. Tissajphernes. 
 
 24. And Herippidas, always de- 
 siring to perform some brilliant 
 achievement, asks from Agesilaus 
 about two thousand heavy-armed 
 soldiers, and as many targeteers 
 besides, and horsemen, both those 
 of Spithridates, and the Paphlago- 
 nian, and of the Grecians as many 
 as he could persuade. 
 
 25. But tell us, from what did 
 he begin to teach thee the office of 
 a general? And he said, from 
 the very same point with which he 
 even ended ; for he taught me the 
 precepts requisite for marshalling an 
 army, and nothing besides. 
 
 26. I praise also this law, that 
 
 Kai wtf-n-E^ ys sxeivog h 
 oirXov a(pai^£w,P' o-jtwj fvw 
 fxuTog 5si |x>] otXov vara 
 
 fxsyas £-)(uS •)(it(jj\, £x5uw* 
 auroj, 6 fisv lauTou cxeivo^ 
 
 M75 £yu x^u-rrw^c o-'^.^^ 
 
 Nuv 5s, rjvtxa ouxeri ej/xi, 
 SIS Cu 5v] jSXc'ffw, hirers 6 au- 
 To^si^ rrccT^uos (povoj |uv q6s 
 a(5sX(pi) iirj xaToxv£ij=c xrti- 
 vw^ Atyta6o5' ouSsig ya.^ tf« 
 
 5et X^UffTW Sy(ji £TI. 
 
 (paivcj™ M\^loLh.'r\g craXjv, 
 £;^w k'':r£uff X'^°'» ^°i''''1^ 
 5;, xaj fl'(p£v5ovy]T'/)5 s\g <rt. 
 'r^ay.idyi'kioi, Totfcurog j^a^ 
 
 fx£w a£i "kaikir^og rig SPyU' 
 (^o/xai, aiT£w Ay£(J'iXaog' 
 OTrXjTr;^ £^ 5i(f;)(»Xio», xou 
 <r£X-raCT*jg aXXoj rotfouroff,- 
 xaj iff'TEuj 6 rs 'Etn&^idarvs, 
 xa» 6 HaqjXa^cjv, xa.i *EX-. 
 Xrjv ocotfog crsj^w^^ 
 
 ATft| Xa/w^ e/w, irod£v 
 a|-)^«°'^ tfu 8i6a(fKU tfrfou 
 TTjy/a ; xa» 6?, ex 6 aurot:, 
 (pr]|x/, =15 oflVe«; xaj teXsu- 
 Tttw- oP° yaP tay.<nxcg syu^ 
 XKi aXXo^ oy^fj^ didadxu,* 
 
 Amu xai o5s vo/xc^, J* 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 S9 
 
 neither the king himself put any 
 one to death for a single offence, 
 nor that any individual of the rest 
 of the Persians injiict^ for a single 
 offence, an irremediable punishment 
 on any one of his own domestics. 
 
 27. From these men then pro- 
 ceed both they who do the great- 
 est evils to states and individuals, 
 and they who do the greatest good. 
 Whereas a mean disposition never 
 does any great action toioards any 
 one, whether an individual or a 
 state. 
 
 28. Why then do they wish that 
 we wage war ? Is it in order that 
 we may injure one another, and may 
 each of us stand in need of the 
 assistance of these ? 
 
 29. He deprived them both of life, 
 him and his servant Calesius. 
 
 SO, In misfortunes no good re- 
 sults from silence ; for the heart 
 desiring to hear all things, is found, 
 even in their misfortunes, desirous 
 
 jxij sis oLina Ivsxct jxijrs au- 
 rog 6 I3a(fi'ks\js if^ridetg (p«. 
 VSU6J, |X7]r£ Tis aXXog Ile^ 
 
 B'ffi sis airia^ avrixsdTos ^a- 
 
 Ex ouToj Sri avrj^ xai o 
 iisyas xoxog s^ya^ofuouS o 
 flroXi J yiyvoiLat xai o idiurris, 
 xai 6 6p° aya.&os- C/xix^os de 
 (pvtfig ovdsig fxsya^ oudsieors 
 ovSsig OUTS idiurrig oure tfo* 
 Xig 5^aw. 
 
 Tig 5yi 'jroXe/xew syu /Sou- 
 XojUiai ; r) Jva syu |x?v aXX»j- 
 Xwv xaxwj 'jr'oisw ; sxsiMogf 
 ds aix(pQT6^cg 6?oyjat ; 
 
 AfJi-ipw fiujmoj a'S'au^aw,* 
 auToj, xai 6s^a<n'uv KaX»j- 
 
 xaxocr, 6 yaf "jro^ew crag xaf . . 
 8tu xXuw, xav 6 xaxo^ "h-xyog 
 Silt^iS aXiCxw. Ou juirjv (j5jXo5 
 ys xai T«5"® ,'jiaXXov 13 (piXojr, 
 x^iwrrw <5jxaicf <fo$ 8v(f^§a^ 
 
 (of listening to the woes of others.) 
 Surely it is not just that thou con- 
 ceal from friends at least, nay even 
 more than friends, thy calamities, 
 
 31. Bonum aliquid facer e inpatriam conatur. 
 
 32. Thebae te hoc malum docuerunt. 
 
 33. Ephoris licet hoc regifacere. 
 
 34. Praecepit, si quis roget me nomen, Menippum ne dic«- 
 rem,f sed Herculem, aut Ulyssem, aut Orpheum, 
 
 HS 
 
00 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. XXXVII. 
 
 Verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, freeing, and the 
 like, take after them the accusative of the person loith the geni- 
 tive of the thing. 
 
 Some verbs of accusing and condemning have, on account of the 
 nature of their composition, the person in the genitive, and the 
 crime, or the punishment, in the acc^j^ative. 
 
 1. I will accuse thee of cowar- 
 dice. 
 
 2. He promised that he would 
 ^ve money, provided they accused 
 me of the deed. 
 
 3. But when he heard that the 
 enemy were thrown into great con-. 
 fiision, by reason of their accusing 
 one another of what had happened, 
 he immediately led his army to 
 8ardis, 
 
 4. Do not convict the people of 
 the Athenians of folh^, before the 
 Grecians. 
 
 5. If they two, in any respect, 
 committed transgression, the ac- 
 cuser blames Socrates for this. 
 
 6. How this will also prove of 
 advantage, we will easilj^ teach 
 you ; if, having convicted Clean of 
 having received bribes, or of theft, 
 you thereupon enclose this fellow's 
 neck in the pillory. 
 
 7. But Socrates, said the ac- 
 cuser, in particular taught them 
 to treat their fathers with contume- 
 ly, by asserting that it was allow- 
 ed one by law even to bind his fa- 
 ther, after having convicted {him) of 
 madness. 
 
 8. I therefore acquit both you of 
 this blame and Jigasias, provided 
 Agasias himself saj that I am the 
 author of any one of these things. 
 
 fxaj^ syu. 
 
 'Q.S 5s axouw^o ffoXey.!*^' 
 
 Mr] a»^su -jra^avoia evo»- 
 Tiov 'EXXiiv, & Jr,jxo^ 4 
 
 E» jxev Tjj -rXTja/j-eXsw,^ 
 
 'Qj5s xai ouroc: gufiupc^w, 
 ^«5iwj 5i5atfxw '/jv KXsw? 
 ^w^ov aiPsw^ xai xXott], sitol ■ 
 
 ouTcj |uXov au. 
 
 AXXa Hwxparrjj ye ©rjjju 
 xarrj^o^og, o 'rarr]^ cr^o. 
 
 xara vofxoi; s^S(f<n^ 'ffaPavoia 
 (oL-jTog) a'jPcw® xai h ffar^if 
 
 E^w ouv affoXuw xa» (fu 2 
 aiTia, xaj Ayatfia, av auToj 
 AyoLdiag (prjjxi* gyu T«f outqj 
 
CniEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 91 
 
 9. No surely, since I acguii thee 
 (if this murder. 
 
 10. Only release me from this 
 care; for if I have leisure from 
 these things, I think that thou wilt 
 be useful, in many respects, both 
 to me and Cyrus. 
 
 11. I go, about to give to the 
 state no ignoble offering of death, 
 and about to free this land from evil. 
 
 12. Why does it behove me to 
 charge injustice against Phoebus I 
 
 13. He chargedfolhj against the 
 rest of men^ whosoever do any 
 thing, contrary to the things indi- 
 cated by the gods, 
 
 14. And having come to the 
 temple of Juno, they persuaded 
 about fifty men of the suppliants 
 to submit to a trial, and adjudged 
 death against q//— (condemned them 
 all to death.) 
 
 15. I have ample justice from 
 thee, O stranger, since thou de- 
 noimcest death against thyself — (con- 
 demnest thyself to death.) 
 
 16. IF Hurl, O Jupiter, if it has 
 been decreed against me by the 
 fates that I be struck with a thun- 
 .derbolt, and I loill in no respect 
 accuse thee of the Uou\ but Clotho, 
 who wounds through thee. 
 
 17. If then a person having been 
 compelled by another, should put 
 to death any one, as for example 
 a public executioner, or a guard, 
 the former having obeyed a ma- 
 gistrate, and the latter a tyrant, 
 whom wilt thou accuse of the wwr- 
 
 18. What law is full of so much 
 injustice and inhumanity, as to 
 deprive of grateful acknoiuledgment 
 
 eXsu^c^w ipovoj. 
 
 Movo^ syu airoXuw* aitoe 
 6 g'S'jfxsXcia' i^v ya^ syu tfj^o- 
 X»] ayu a/Ko ouroff, eyw fs 
 Cu 0J0(jLa< ffoXug* xa». Ku^off 
 
 oux ai^-)(^^os flroXij 5i5wfjn, 
 votfoj 6s o8s araXXacTCw 
 
 $oȤoc:? Ss a5ixia* 1*8* 
 rig 6si xarriyo^su j- 
 
 6 QsogS (j'rjfjt.aivw irojew rig., 
 Ej 6 'B^ttiog (ie^Qv) s^fr- 
 
 xa» xarayivwCxw^ aircLg? So?- 
 vofrog.^' 
 
 xaT(x5<xa<^w ^avaroj. 
 
 BaXXw, 6J ZsvSj Si gyu 
 xsmvvog 'r^XyidSu^ /J-^'^w, xcw 
 (Ty ovOsig aiTiao/xai o cXr,^^ 
 aXXa KXw^w 6 6ia, (fv <r»- 
 
 T^wCxw.? 
 
 E< ouv rig avayxa^w' v*o 
 aXXo^, (povsvu^^ 7ig, o!ov Sr^- 
 (xioj, 7) 6o?ucpo^oc, 6 /xsv 6l' 
 xa,iJ7t\g TS»^6j,P^ 6s Tu^av, 
 vo$, <Tig aiTiao|jt.ai 6 (povog ; 
 
 a6»xia xa< ixjtrav^Pwiria fAStf* 
 Toj, wcfTS 6 6i6wfjM^ff <ri5"« I 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 6g& av Xa|x?avw° o TifWJ^ia 
 flToiEw,'" aXXa ofAOJWj a'ff'ajff 
 davarog^ xarax^ivw. 
 
 M« ;)5r507i wAo has given some of 
 his property (to the state,) and has 
 done a humane and generous ac- 
 tion? 
 
 19. For I see thee, whenever 
 thou mayest have condemned one 
 of sacrilege or theft ^ not inflicting 
 punishment according to the im- 
 portance of the things which they 
 may have taken away, but con- 
 demning all luithout distinction to 
 death. 
 
 20. For fate adjudges death 
 against all men— (condemns all 
 men to die ;) but an honourable 
 death, nature assigns as a peculiar 
 privilege to the worthy. 
 
 21. Tu quidem, O Terpsion, nova^- legis es auctor, ut is^ 
 qui ampUus divitiis uti nequeat ad voluptatem, moriatur : hoc 
 autem secus a Fato et Natura constitutum est. Terps. Q,uin 
 iUam igitur incuso iniquce constitutionis. 
 
 22. Quid hoc ? ferisne, O Timon ? Antestor, O Hercules ! 
 hei! hei ! in jus voco te de vulnere ad Areopagum. 
 
 23. Eo quippe iniquitatis venerunt, et tantcenos''^ condemn^' 
 runt ignavi6e,^ ut quos ssepe bellum pro suis agris gerere postu- 
 larunt, eosdem nunc de Messena pugnare vetent. 
 
 xarax^ivw,^ o 6s xaXwj a'ff'o-. 
 ^VTjCxw,® idjogos 6 (f'rrovSaios 
 6 (pv(fis a-rrovsjULw,^ 
 
 CHAP. XXXVIII. 
 
 Verbs of comparing, giving, promising, declaring, and the like, 
 
 govern the dative with the accusative. 
 
 1. He did not compare me to a 
 god indeed, but thought that I far 
 excelled men. 
 
 2. Demosthenes and Diogenes 
 (have spoken) well ; the one call- 
 ing rich and ignorant men golden 
 sheep, the other comparing them to 
 fgs upon precipices. 
 
 E/w Sc 6sos ftsv oux sixa- 
 ^w,^ av&^uiros ds iroXvg ir^^- 
 
 KaXwg Aijju.otf^ffvyjg xcu 
 6 Aioysvrig- o /*sv J^^tfco^ 
 9r^o§arov xaXfiw 6 flrXoutf/oj 
 xaj a<n'aiSsvTi>St o 5s h 6flri 
 6 x^»]fAvos& tfuxtj aireixo^w 
 euros. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 OS 
 
 3. I will do this, but do thou give 
 my seat to Sophocles to keep. 
 
 4. Whatsoever thirigs yon give 
 unto me I willingly receive ; but he 
 of you who is most in want shall 
 make use of them. 
 
 5. The Macrones thereupon give 
 vnto the Greeks a barbarian spear, 
 and the Greeks a Grecian one to 
 lAem. 
 
 6. Give then, said Agesilaus, 
 provisions unto my army, until I may 
 come to that place. Tithraustes 
 then gives unto Mm thirty talents. 
 
 7. Unto you he announced peace, 
 unto them assistance. 
 
 8. From all these things they 
 knew that the army of the enemy 
 xvas somewhere in the neighbour- 
 hood. Immediately thereupon the 
 leader of the scouts sends a person 
 to announce these things unto Cyrus. 
 
 9. Thou tellest me, O Croesus, 
 of great poverty in heaven, if it 
 shall behove them to send for their 
 gold from Lydia. 
 
 10. IT Whence, in the Odyssey, 
 one might compare Homer to the 
 setting sun, whose grandeur re- 
 mains without its vehemence. 
 
 11. And our orator, by his both 
 burning as it were, and at the same 
 instant rending every thing with 
 violence, and moreover with rapi- 
 dity, power, vehemence, might be 
 compared to a tempest or a thunder- 
 bolt. 
 
 12. Upon Jlrtabazus he bestowed 
 a golden cup, upon Hyrcanius a 
 horse, and many other and beauti- 
 ful things ; but unto thec, O Go- 
 
 iTu 6 fAaXitfTa Ssoy.on.s 
 
 Evrsu^sv 5i5w|Xi 6 Max^wv 
 /3aP§a^jxog Xoyp^)) 6 *JEX- 
 Xrjv, 6 5s 'EXXi^v Exsjvof 
 
 'EcaJJ av Toivuv, (prjfAi « 
 A'y-:(ji'Kaog, sxsjffs cropsuw,™ 
 ^i(5o;f/.J h (fr^aria. 6 E-TriTT]- 
 5:10$' SXSIV05 |X£v 5r] Tj, 
 
 caXavTov. 
 
 2u (J.ev siPrivt], sxstvog St 
 /So7)^fia ETra^'/sXXw.™* 
 
 Ex o[)Tog airas yi^udx^^ 
 on z\\n^ irou crXijfl'iov o Cr^a- 
 T5u,aa ffoXfffjLio^. Eu^u^ 
 ouv trtih'Kt,) (fxo'ffa^'XT'iS f^S 
 a-yysXKu^s outos o Kvpos; 
 
 IloXuf syw Xsyw, 6J K^ou 
 tfoj, TSvia £v ou^avDj, ei sx 
 Auf5ia fxsTatTTsXXw™ ^ 
 
 ^Okv, sv O5u(ro'5ia *a. 
 ^H»xa,^oj"^<i TI5 av 'O(jt-i]^05 xa- 
 <ra5uw"> '/jXjoj, 6j 5i;(a 6 ^(po- 
 d^oTfig crapafii-svw o /xeys^oj, 
 
 Kai 6 (xsy TjfxSTS^of 5<a 
 6"e ^STcc /Sia sxatfToc:,? £n 
 
 ciov xaiw^ re a|xa xai 5ta^- 
 cra^w/ (J'xo^'B'roj Tig 'n'a|e;-. 
 xo^Jcj -Ji xb'^auvo^. 
 
 •jroj/xa, 6 5s 'T^xavioj k-jrog, 
 xai aXXo^ croXuff xai xaXoff 
 5w^£o|Aa»-^ tfu 5e, 9»j/*i., <^ 
 
94 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 bryas, said he, I will give a htisband 
 for thy daughter. 
 
 13. To give great and pompous 
 epithets to trijling little circumstan- 
 ces would appear the same thing, 
 as if a person should put a great 
 tragic mask upon an infant child. 
 
 'O jxix^off 'jr^a.yiiariw iri. 
 
 oi/of;.a, 6 a\)Tog av (paivw,™ 
 ug £1 Tig TPayixog ff^oCw-. 
 rtsiov fisyag iraig <ffe^iu67iiu 
 vriTTiog. m 
 
 fpavs^ou^ ovojjia rfo o av- 
 &Pu<!rog, bg 5i(5wjuti syu sx o 
 xoff^og' dog sj/xi, xai syM 
 axjTog 6i6(ji\ki xai 6 Xo^-'dj 
 
 KaiSifiT] K^7]5 £|ay7«X- 
 
 14. I manifested thy name to the 
 men whom thou hast given unto me 
 out of the world ; thine they were, 
 and thou hast given them unto 7ne, 
 and they have kept thy word. 
 
 15. And had not a Cretan an- 
 nounced unto Agesilaus the approach- 
 ing army J he (Epaminondas) would 
 have taken the city like a nest, al- 
 together destitute of defenders. 
 
 16. Verum si honestis et optimis quiousque eum comparem, 
 tnerito aliquis me laudanti potius, quam convicianti compardrit. 
 
 17. Clavumfortunceveiexes dedere; et basin globosam pedi" 
 bus subjecerunt. 
 
 18. E?iuntia ipsis ea quae a nobis gerantur. 
 
 iroXig wtfTS^ veorT/a, crav- 
 
 CHAP. XXXIX. 
 
 Every verb may take an accusative of a corresponding noun. 
 
 1. They m'e going theii* fated 
 way. 
 
 2. Be thou cautious therefore 
 with that caution which I men- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Having sinned a base sm, I 
 will endeavour to make amends 
 for it. 
 
 4. Miserable, alone, he sufers 
 continually ivith a cruel complaint. 
 
 6. What an arising thinkest 
 thou, O son, I then arose from 
 sleep 1 
 
 EuXa?sofxai ouv 6 suXa. 
 Qsiu hg syu Xf^w. 
 
 '^Aiia^rioL oniyj^og ai\ut^» 
 
 Autfravo^, fAovoj, aisi vo. 
 Csw votfoj ay^iog. 
 
 2i) 5>] TSxvov, crojog syw 
 wjcLdradig 6oxsu e| uirvof 
 
 I(3'?'»)ftl° TOTS ; 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 95 
 
 6. He leaped a light leap forth 
 from the ship. 
 
 7. They being besieged a siege 
 hy the sycophants not inferior to 
 that by enemies. 
 
 8. They exercise all care. 
 
 9. It is better to run this risk in 
 the case of foes than friends. 
 
 10. The rich live a life more 
 miserable than you. 
 
 11. Lest some one shall ^/e a 
 bill of impiety 
 Rhadamanthus, 
 
 12. IT Tragedy having under- 
 gone many changes, rested when 
 it became possessed of its proper 
 nature ; and ^schylus first in- 
 creased the number of actors from 
 one to two, and lessened the parts 
 of the chorus. 
 
 against us before 
 
 13. Ye have seen in the comedy 
 of Aristophanes, one Socrates car- 
 ried about there, and saying that 
 he walked in the air, and babbling 
 much other folly. 
 
 14. Thou didst awaken me 
 being rich, and enjoying a most 
 pleasing dream, and experiencing 
 wonderful happiness. jjlovsw, e-ireysj^w.' 
 
 15. Istum amorem omnes mortui amant. 
 
 16. Populo amicus erat et una. fugii hsiUC fiigam. 
 
 17. Glui turpe consilium cepit, is, si fortuna ei adfuerit, 
 lucrum quidem invenitj nihilo vero minus malum ceperit con- 
 silium. 
 
 IIr]5ij|xa xouipoj sx vavg 
 
 'Tiro 6 fl'uxo(pavTiis flro- 
 Xio^xecj flroXjo^xia oods» 
 gXarTwv 6 u-ro croXgfjiiof. 
 
 Eirj/xeXsofAaj leas sienks- 
 Xfia. 
 
 OuTog x<v5uvsu|xa iav* 
 (Juvsucj sv ByP^<ig X^eiTTWV 
 >) (piXog. 
 
 'O tXouc'jos -JfoXu a^Xioj 
 dx) (3ios /3»ow. 
 
 Mv) Tig sycd* 7^09^™ 
 y^a(pir) atfsSsja, siri *Pa- 
 ^ajxav^of. 
 
 IToXug fjt,era§oX>j fjtff. 
 Ta^aXXw^ 6 T^ayw^jfiC, 
 "jrauw™^ scfSJ S}(w^ 6 gaurou 
 (purfjg* xa» TS uirox^i- 
 «r7]g TXt]doj, e| £15 erg 5u9 
 Tf^^rog 6 Aitf^uXoff ayw,* 
 xaj 6 (fAf^og) X^^^S eXar. 
 
 'O^aw, ev A^irfrotpavYjg 
 xw/xw-^ja, Swx^a-Tifij T15 exsi 
 flrs^Kpe^w, (patTxcj <rg ae^o- 
 Carsw, xai aXXoj <jroXu5 
 (pXua^ia (pXua^sw. 
 
 2u syu irXourSw, xai 
 
 &ot.viia(frog eu^aijxovia suiou. 
 
OREEK EXERCISER. 
 
 CHAP. XL. 
 
 Participles govern ike case of their own verbs. 
 
 1 . leaving done these things, they 
 departed, having provisions from the 
 hostile territory. 
 
 2. After these thino^s, Tissa- 
 phernes came to the Hellespont; 
 and having seized Alcibiades, who 
 had come unto him with a single 
 trireme, bringing both gifts of hos- 
 pitality and presents, he confined 
 him in Sardis. 
 
 3. They who are fond of this 
 pursuit will benefit themselves in 
 many respects. 
 
 4. Nor did he make those who 
 associated with him lovers of rich- 
 es ; for he caused them to cease 
 from their other desires, and did 
 not exact money from those who 
 -desired him as a preceptor. 
 
 5. They two seeing these things, 
 iyid being such persons as they 
 have been before described to be, 
 can any one say that they two, be- 
 cause they desired to lead the life of 
 Socrates, and to possess the modera- 
 tion which he possessed, courted 
 his fiiendship ? 
 
 6. He ako instructed the at- 
 tendants, if any one else of the 
 heavy-armed soldiers might wish 
 to stand near, in order to hear his 
 vords, not to prevent him. 
 
 7. I know it, and I was afraid 
 V)hen I heard thee declaiming,' and 
 especially when thou didst threat- 
 en that thou wouldst draw up from 
 their foundations the earth and the 
 sea, with the gods themselves, hav- 
 ing let down that golden chain. 
 
 8. TT And whenever the horse 
 
 jxaj,^ e-riTrj^sioj bx o Art- ' 
 Msra ourojr, Tifl'fl'cupsf- 
 
 ccvTos elg 'T^iYj^TiS AXxiCjo- 
 6r]g ^eviog"^ re xai Jw^ov 
 ctyuif guXXafJi§avw,® si^u^ 
 
 ros 6 spyov toXdj. 
 
 Ou iir,v ouoe ffacfj^f^- 
 jm.aTog ye 6 Cuvsijxi? 'xot* 
 €w^ 6 IJ.SV yo.^ aXXoff ith. 
 
 0\itng 8s h^u,^^ xtu I 
 
 Tig aurog"^" (py]ixt o /oioj « 
 Sux^arng ETi^ufiLSw, « xcu 
 6 fl'w(p^o(J'uvr) Og £X£»VOf C^^^j* 
 
 xai aXXoj £i T»g jSouXojxoj 
 6 o'jrXo(pof'og 'n'^ofl'jrf'nijuu*" 
 axouw™ 6 Xo^'og, /a») xwXuw^ 
 
 EiiSew,'"'' xai <$g»(5w"^ y» 
 axovws: Cu Srifjiijyopew xcu 
 fjiaXiCra offore aifziksfj" 
 avaCTOtu £x /8a5^ov o yij 
 xoci 6 6u'^a(f(fa, avTog 6toc^ 
 tffi^a exsivog Xf''*''^^ 
 xa^»*)fAi.^ 
 
 Kai orav Ss ifvtrtui/\ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 having suspected any things be not 
 inclined to approach unto this, it 
 behoves (the rider) to teach him 
 that the things are not terrible ; 
 but if this cannot be done, to touch 
 the thing which appears to be alarm- 
 ing, and lead the horse towards it 
 gently. 
 
 9. Or smelling or touching xohat 
 Jhings thou mightest be delighted. 
 
 10. He himself therefore always 
 continued mindful of the things con- 
 ducive to virtue. 
 
 11. For if, excelling in this the 
 rest, thou undertake to transact 
 the affairs of the state, I would 
 not wonder if thou shouldst very 
 easily attain unto what thou de- 
 «irest. 
 
 12. For if they determine to fol- 
 low, you will appear to be the cause 
 of it, having begun io cross over. 
 
 13. For, having learned that he 
 neither sacrificed to the gods nor 
 used divination^ but even laughed 
 at those who did these things, he 
 Eaid. 
 
 14. He called it a favour, when 
 any one quitted him, that when he 
 made use of his services, he did not 
 ruin him. 
 
 15. But, O Socrates, obeying 
 MS thy supporters, neither value 
 children, nor hfe, nor any thing 
 
 00705 flf^otfei/xi, Si6u(ix(ji osr, 
 oTi ou 6si\iog fijmr et 5s ^f, 
 airru^s auToj o deivog ^«w 
 xsoi £(.u,i, xou Wffo^ tr^ouc 
 
 H <r»5 o(f(p|a»vo|xai ij owf- 
 Ast fjisv oyv 6 icpos a^6T<| 
 
 Eav yaf, oiiTog Sia(pK 
 fw" 6 aXXog', sm-)(ei^Si^ # 
 
 Hv ya^ 4^7)^5 1 ijw™5 hitth^ 
 fj.ai, Cu 6oxeu aiTios ei(*% 
 
 Ka-rafxavdavw^ ya^ au. 
 
 <rcg «ilT£ ^UWff iSOSy OUTf 
 
 fjiavTiicoj (tsx^>3) X^^^i^^ 
 
 xaraysXcLUyS (pr}|xi, 
 
 Eof^yftfia xaraXEyco,* 
 
 cTi X^"'^™^ auTof , oux a^oV 
 Xu/xi* auTcj. 
 
 AXX', <o 2wx^arij^, ifst* 
 
 IJA\TS flraiff <5^i flToXus Wdi* 
 
 else, more highly than justice. cw,™ fx^TS o"* Jaw,*" fAijrf 
 
 aXXog /xrj^sjf, ff^o 6 5ix«iog* 
 
 16. Vidi reges et satrapas nostros, mendicantes apud eoSj 
 et primas literas docenies. 
 
 17. Plures futuri sunt vos redarguentes, quos nunc ego com* 
 pescebam. 
 
 18. Deos et heroas precati, fines ita transierunt. 
 
 19. Nee reliquarum facultatum quicquam non cmc^umy vel 
 mexploraiiim relinquenies ;* a^nicos vero, egentes ipsorum cwr^i 
 mgligenies.^ 
 
•8 
 
 6 REEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. XLL 
 
 Jt participle is used absolutely with a noun or pronoun ; moH 
 commonly in the genitive ; sometimes in the dative ; and often 
 m the accusative, especially if it be an impersonal ; in the n#- 
 minative rarely. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 1. While the Lacedamionians and 
 their allies were deliberating toge- 
 ther. 
 
 2. The enemy encamping under 
 the very walls. 
 
 3. A day having intervened, a 
 battle again takes place, and the 
 people conquer. 
 
 4. And yet, Laced eBmonians, 
 when such a state cs this has placed 
 itself in opposition, ye delay. 
 
 6. The men having arrived, and 
 Saldethus, the Athenians immedi- 
 ately put Sal£ethu3 to death. 
 
 6. When & god grants a gift, 
 m.vy prevailelh not, 'and when he 
 does not grant one, labour is of no 
 avail. 
 
 7. Both the Syracusans and their 
 tillies having been vanquished, and 
 having carried off their dead men 
 under a truce. 
 
 e 8. My friends having come to 
 tne, advise me to remove myself 
 away, lest I suffer some punish- 
 ment from thee, since I have injured 
 ibee greatly. 
 
 9. But these things, O Socra- 
 tes, thou appearest unto me to say 
 "Well, bidding me endeavour to be- 
 gin every action with the gods, 
 mnce the gods are controllers no less 
 ©f peaceful than of warlike opera- 
 
 AiaXe»irw* *!fAS^a, fxa;^ 
 avdfs yjyvofxai, xa» viJcaw f 
 
 KeOfliaovioj, 5«a|XeXXw. 
 
 A^ixyjoixaj" 6 avy^P, xou 
 2aXai5rf, 6 AQrivaiog o |XS» 
 2aXa»^oj su^uff airoxTSivu,^ 
 
 QSOS 5l(5w/Jt.l, (X7)5e/5 Kf. 
 
 /x>)(Jei5 ifl'p^uw wovo^. 
 
 €ouXeuw sxiroduv ej^u £|tjt,a»^ 
 Tou, fir] TiJ xa» waCp^w^ u«i 
 tfu, wg a5»xgw'' fteyaj.P 
 
 AXXa ouros jxev, w 2e*- 
 
 Xsyw, xsXsuw A'Cj^aw™ tfnt 
 ^eoj afX^™ ^"^ ^^7"^ 
 
 ^rcwv eif >ivixoj, ?) 6 roXft- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 99 
 
 10. Whenever thou seest any 
 one weeping in grief, either when 
 his son is going abroad^ or lokeii he 
 has lost his property, beware lest 
 the appearance may take thee in. 
 
 11. These things having been 
 said, they arose, and having de- 
 parted, burned the waggons and 
 the tents. Having done these 
 things, they took their dinners, 
 and lohile they ivere dining, Mi- 
 thridates comes with about thirty 
 horsemen. 
 
 'OTav xXaiw Si8(J' rig f» 
 ifSv&oc:^ 7] a.'KoSriixsu tsxvw, 
 7) a-jroXXuai oP lauTOu, ir^o- 
 (fsj^w (o vo-jc;) fJL'*] tfu 6 (pav- 
 
 xon aTe^;^o,aai' xaraxaiw' 
 6 afxafa xai o tfxtjVT). Ov- 
 
 wj T^jaxovTa. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 12. Which things hav-ing been 
 done, how shouldst thou not de- 
 servedly think well of thyself? 
 , 13. While the Corey rceans were 
 pitching their camp, the twenty ships 
 sailed down. 
 
 14. And also lohen Phrynichus 
 composed a play, the Captiu-e of 
 Miletus, and represented it, the 
 whole theatre fell into tears. 
 -15. When the year loas elapsed, 
 the Ephori again make a demon- 
 stration against Elis. 
 
 16. As Jesus departed thence, 
 two blind men followed him, cry- 
 ing aloud and saymg, Have mercy 
 upon us, Son of David ; and ivhen 
 he had entered into the house, the 
 blind men approached liim. 
 
 eixoroL'j If^syas cp^ovsu ; 
 
 5fuw,™ 6 <ikii(fi wxvs xara- 
 
 Ka< Sr) xai iroifo* *^i>- 
 vt^og 5^a/xa, MiXriTOS aXw- 
 
 (pQ ivw -raX/v 6 E(po^o5 9f ow- 
 ^oc CT'i 6 HXi^. 
 
 axoXoudsw^ auTog 5uo tw- 
 <pXoc:, x^a^w xai Xsyw, 
 
 p^oftai^ 5g £j^ 6 oixia, cri©. 
 o'e^^ofAai^ auToj 6 TU(pXog. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 17. When Crassus loas retreating 
 with great loss, and endeavouring 
 to make his way through the more 
 mountainous part. 
 
 18. Three spies of the Cartha- 
 ginians having been apprehended* 
 
 ra avap^wPEw, xai <5ia 6 o^ff*- 
 voj 65ellW TCi^aw.™ 
 
 Karart'xo'Troff Ka^;(*)5oviog 
 
100 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 19. It being an uncertain thing, 
 when any other person having 
 made an incursion, will take away 
 the fruits of their labours. 
 
 20. The Grecians haviiig three 
 Jlcets worthy of mention ; thai with 
 you, and ours, and that of the Co- 
 rinthians. 
 
 21. It having appeared proper to 
 engage in a sea fight. 
 
 22. Thus then died Therarae- 
 nes ; but the thirty, as if now it 
 was permitted them to tyrannize 
 fearlessly, sent word to those who 
 were excluded from the list, not to 
 enter the city. 
 
 23. Although it was allowed him 
 to make use of many and advan- 
 tageous things as he wished. 
 
 24. This individual being sum- 
 moned by the Athenians to a trial 
 for his hfe, did not obey, having 
 £aid that it was foolish for an ac- 
 cused person to seek to clear him- 
 self, when he had it in his power to 
 
 TfSlff jUOSV EifJLI Xo^'Og Cff- 
 
 10 J 'EaXt^v vauTJXos (C^"^;'- 
 
 0»lPafX<EV"»3f jxsy Sri ou7U>s 
 aTo^VTjo'xw''' 6s TPiaxov- 
 
 Tu^avvcW adsus, ^^osiruP 
 fj^ev 6 E^w xarakoyog fi.% 
 fjCcjfJM ss atfru. 
 
 Ila^Ei/xi aurcff ^roXuff xcci 
 
 Xojxai.^ 
 
 0-jTOg E'3'l x^Kfis xaksci 
 ^avarixog O-tto o A/3'/]vaio<:, 
 oyp^ Li-raxouw,^ E^w^ Eurj^rj 
 
 (pEuyW,^ EVEtfTI 9£U2'W.'' 
 
 25. Fathers resli'ain their chil- 
 dren from bad men, si7ice their 
 intercourse is the destruction of vir- 
 tue. 
 
 f 26. He prayed to the gods also 
 simply to give liim the things that 
 were good, since the gods knoiv best 
 what kind of things are good. 
 
 *0 irarrjp ej^^w o vUvi 
 
 oxjtos ofAtXia 5iaXuO'i5 EifU 
 
 Kai Eu^aJjiat^ ^6 flr^og J 
 ^toff avXug o aya&og 6160^ 
 f;.j, wg ^Eof xaXoj ej^ew/ 
 
 NOMINATIVE. 
 
 27. rFAm they have opened the 
 body's pores, fire is kindled anew, 
 t- 28. For the army being nume- 
 rous, it will not be in the power of 
 every city to accommodate them. 
 
 29. Wishing to send some one 
 as a spy into Lydia, and to ascer- 
 
 flfaXiv yjvofjiai 6 itv^, 
 
 BouXojxai ris xaradxi' 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 101 
 
 i tain what the Assyrian is doing, 
 j Araspes appeared unto him to be 
 I a suitable person to go on this mis- 
 I fiion. 
 
 I 30. But he goes forth in haste, 
 and having both seen them hum- 
 bled in spirit, and having heard the 
 large concourse crying aloud with 
 a mournful cry, tears are shed co- 
 piously by him also. 
 
 <rri§sios £<|j-i A^ttiifas e^Q- 
 fji-a»^ scri 0UT05. 
 
 xat siSu^ <r£ rwffSivus 5ia- 
 x£»,aar, xa» axouw^ tfuv 01- 
 
 a'oros^ "f f OX^'^ 5ax^u. 
 
 PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 31. The storm being indeed such 
 as thou mentionest, food having 
 
 failed, not as much ivine being at 
 hand as to be smelled, numbers being 
 loom out with labours, the enemy 
 pressing on in the rear. 
 
 32. The wall being weak, and 
 in one place even fallen dow?i, it 
 being also built low, and at the 
 same time the gates standing open 
 through security, 
 
 33. Since therefore they were 
 excluded from the sea, and plun- 
 dered by land, some endeavoured 
 to deliver up the city to the Athe- 
 nians. 
 
 34. At last, many corpses lying 
 upon each other in the river, and 
 the army being destroyed, partly in 
 the river, and partly, if any por- 
 tion even escaped, by the cavalry, 
 Nicias surrenders himself to Gy- 
 Kppus. 
 
 35. Wonder not my host, if, 
 v>hen my child has appeared unhoped 
 for, I indulge in many words. 
 
 36. And luhen he had spent 
 three months there, a plot hewing 
 hen formed by the Jews against 
 
 yu, diTog 6s £'3r»Xe»flfw,™* 
 ojvoj Ss iiriSs oifcp^oiivu lea. 
 ^£i(xr, v<xo 6s •n'ovoj ^oXuj 
 airayo^svu,^ croX£/jLip^ 8$ 
 
 'O rSiX^S cccfkvYig £//jt,f, 
 xai gcfTiv 7) xai fn'TTTUj 06s 
 f3^a-)(^Eug oixo5o/xsw,P'^ xax 
 itvXri a/xa 5toL 6 a5sia avot. 
 yw. ; 
 
 Ei^yu) ouv ayrog** 6 da- 
 Xatfca, xai xara yvi cro^- 
 6su, zyxsi^cUi^ Tig r^os 
 A&Yivaiog OL-yu^ flToXij. 
 
 T£Xog 6s, v£x^oj re -ttoXu^ 
 Sti aXkyiXuv^ xsj/ixai £v fi', 
 •roTajXoj, xai 6iacpQet^uP 
 <j'T^aT£i;jxa, 6 |ut,gv, xaca 
 iroTa^iog,^ • ^£, xai £i Tig 
 ((X£^oj) 6ta<psvyu,^ uiro 
 kirfuc:, Nixiaj ruXiir'R'05 
 lauToo 'jfa^a6iSuii.u 
 
 ^ ^S'vog, |u,ii daujxa^w, 
 T£xvovP* £i (paivwP^ asXx- 
 T05, fxrjxuvw Xoyoff.S 
 
 Kai flroi>)<ras° fjt.>)v T^fifj 
 yivofxai^ auTOj etti^ouXii 
 uiro 6 Iou(Ja<oj, juteXXw avo*. 
 
102 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 him when about to set sail for yw™ sis o 2u^ja, yivo^Mil* 
 
 Syria, a resolution was taken by yvwjjLrj 6 uirotfr^eipw dia M»> 
 
 him of returning privately through xs6ma, 
 Macedonia. 
 
 37. The earth being torn open Ava^|»]yvufxi fjisv sx ;8a. 
 from its depths, Tartarus itself being 6^og yij, auTo^ 8s yvfivota 
 laid bare^ and tlie whole world being Ta^ra^oc:, a^a.T^o't'ri ds oXof 
 broken up and re/ii asunder^ all things xai (iiaa'Taa'i^ o xotfiaof Xajii- 
 together, heaven, hell, things mor- §avw, era? a,aa, ou^avoj, 
 tal, things immortal, together com- cl8'/]s, o &vr]Tog, o aflavaros, 
 bat and share the danger in that afj^a o tots Cuix^oXs/asw xai 
 fight. tfuyy.fv^uvsuw y^o-X^' 
 
 38. Hunc igitur Pertinacem, node intempesta, sopore correp- 
 iis omnibus^ Lsetus atque Electus adeunt. 
 
 39. Ilia haec adhue dicente, non expectavi ego finem verbo 
 rum. 
 
 40. His expositiSj felicitas in laudabilibus sit, an potius in 
 honorabilibus rebus videamus. 
 
 CHAP. XLH. 
 
 The infinitive mood has an accusative before it, when its agent or 
 subject is different from that of the preceding verb ; but a no- 
 minative when they are the same. 
 
 When the preceding verb and the infinitive relate to the same per- 
 son, the pronoun, unless empliatical, is omitted before the latter ; 
 hut when they relate to different persons, the pronoun must b* 
 expressed. 
 
 The infinitive mood is governed by verbs, participles, and adjec- 
 tives. 
 
 The infinitive, vjith the accusative frequently before it, is often put 
 absolutely, being preceded by the particles wjr, uxdrs, or^jv, v>X^h 
 fxsx?'> C'^d some others, either expressed or understood. 
 
 The infinitive is often put elliptically, o^Si, (SXsirs^ c'xo'jrsj, ^oj, ithuj 
 xsXsuUj or 6j-)(i)^f.oLij being understood to govern it. 
 
 1, These indeed think that the Owto^ (*gy mi^m, h hog 
 
 gods knoio some tilings, but that h fxev ei^-jjjw, o 5s oux ekJt?. 
 
 they do not know others ; Socra- /w* l.(jix^a.Ty\g 8s 'xas iiys^ 
 
 tes, however, thought thai the gods /xoi^ ^foj siSraui. 
 knew all things. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 103 
 
 2. The accuser also said, thai 
 ie (Socrates) observed respecting 
 friends, that it is of no advantage 
 that they be loell disposed^ unless they 
 shall also be able to benefit. 
 
 3. He thinks that he himself 
 knows all things. 
 
 4. I pass over in silence that I 
 myself have been frequently crown- 
 td, 
 
 5. He showed that Cyrus was 
 an enemy to the king, but he him- 
 self a friend. 
 
 6. We shall not say that we our- 
 selves are blameable. 
 
 7. Each hoping that he shall do 
 notliing himself. 
 
 8. And they said that they saw 
 the royal standard. 
 
 9. And in doing these things, 
 wilt thou say that thou art acting a 
 just part ? 
 
 10. For he said on that occa- 
 sion, that he heard this remark 
 from many, that a sincere and 
 good friend would be the most 
 valuable of all possessions, while 
 he said that he saio the generality 
 of men caring about every thing 
 rather than the acquisition of 
 friends. 
 
 11. Do not thou hasten to be rich, 
 rather than to appear to be good. 
 
 12. A man who is about to do 
 a great action is accustomed to de- 
 lay. 
 
 13. Whenever the boys seemed 
 to befit to learn something. 
 
 14. Without nrtue it is not easy 
 to bear fortunate circumstances pro- 
 perly. 
 
 15. When he saw Agatho. 
 
 16. Great vengeance fell upoa 
 
 ^ikos auToj Xeyw, ds ou- 
 Ssig o(ps'Kog euvoog sjfjLi, si ^^ 
 xai wfpeXsw ^uvafAai, 
 
 O«ojxa« auTos flrag eiSi\* 
 
 naPaXsicrw iroXXoxij av- 
 
 <ros CTcfpavow. 
 
 fA»oj ej/x» /SaCtXsuff, avrog 
 6s oiXog. 
 
 Oux ajjTos 75 OLtriog (pijjxi 
 £i,ai. 
 
 AvTcg fxsv Qvdsis Jxatfrof 
 •rojsoj £Xffi(^w. 
 
 Kaj 6 ^atfiXsjoj CijjXEjBf 
 cPau (pyjiJA. 
 
 Kai (prifii, obrog *o»6w, 
 
 OoTog jitsv ya^ 6rj voXug 
 {fir;_ai axouw, ug t(o.g x<n«fXtt 
 K^arisrog av Siixi^ (piXog 
 (fa.cprig xai aya&og' siriiis^ 
 Xsofjoai? Ss 'rragS f;.aXXo» 
 o^aw q)T,}ii ffoXXo^ 7j ^i. 
 Xoj XTrjcTjj, 
 
 M'/) cTcEu^w 'ffXoiiTffw ju-aX- 
 Xcv "X^^ri^Tog 60XS0 £jfx», 
 $jXsw oxvew iTPayixa avrjf^ 
 
 ECefoav ^o:<Sw^ Ixairop 
 SifA/ 6 ffajj f/^av^avw Tig. 
 
 Avsv a^srri ov ^oiSmg (pg» 
 |co sit^ikskug 6 £uTvx*)H^. 
 
104 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 Croesus, for this reason, {as we may 
 conjecture)^ because he thought 
 himself to be the happiest of all 
 men. 
 
 17. They made a great outcry, 
 so that the enemy heard it. 
 
 18. Those from the city mar- 
 shalled themselves, so as to Jill the 
 road. 
 
 19. The God of glory appeared 
 unto our father Abraham, being 
 in Mesopotamia, before he dwelt in 
 Charran. 
 
 20. Lord, come down quickly 
 before my child dies. 
 
 21. I often spent my time in 
 banquets, until I forgot all things, 
 if there was any thing troublesome 
 in human life. 
 
 22. Bo thou always excel and 
 be superior to others. 
 
 23. Do thou go home, and oj^er 
 sacred hecatombs to the immortal 
 gods. 
 
 24. Contradict and examine my 
 discourse. 
 
 25. Saj/ that thou hear est the voice 
 of Hercules. 
 
 26- If We must earnestly en- 
 deavour, by whatever method one 
 can, both by education and by pur- 
 suits, and by the sciences which 
 we learn, to fee from vice, and at- 
 tain to its contrary. 
 
 27. Although he never promised 
 to he a teacher of this, jet he made 
 those who associated with him to 
 hope, that they, imitating him, would 
 become such (as he was). 
 
 28. It is better that one die of 
 hunger, bein§ without grief or fear y 
 
 on vofjLi<^w* lauTou si/ai av- 
 G^tfiiros airag oX^iog, 
 
 wrfTS ToXsfjLjoj axouw. 
 
 'O §e sx a(fTv (fvvra<f- 
 (fu,^^ Cxtrs fjX'S'X'Jj^w'' I 
 
 'O Qsog So^r] o'TT'To- 
 
 ei.ai sv MsffocroTajxia, ^^i» 
 ri xaToixsw' avrog sv Xa^ 
 
 a'Ti'o^vria'c*;*' o iraiSiov syo), 
 
 AictycA)^ s^j tfuyv-rotfjov ■tt'oX- 
 Xaxji; jw-sv, /xsp^Pi 6? efiXav- 
 davoj™^ -Tracr^^ isj ng X^^' 
 ifog sv av<3f6J7rivo5 ^ios Sijxi. 
 
 AleV a^|3'(3'eUW X«J UffS^. 
 
 ^op^o^ sjfxj aXXoc:. 
 
 Ojxa^c acroc'-TSi^w, s^Jw 
 
 AvriXsyw xai ^Jsu^uvw fi 
 Xo^o^^r. 
 
 \krig xKvo. 
 
 U^o&oix'/irsog jxsv ocrij <r»i5 
 (Juvajxaj, xa» Sia. T^o(pri xpu 
 6i' £^/T»]5su,aa, fxa^TjixoL «, 
 (psuyw^ /xsv xaxia, Touvav-. 
 riov be u'l^su).^ 
 
 KatTOI OU^g IfUlfOTS {I'JfKf-^ 
 
 p(Veojut-ai® 6iSa(txetkog £/(*» 
 ouToj, aXXa sXTrji^w ^oisw* 
 
 fjt,so/Aa» sxsivoj, Tojotfds ^'ivfr. 
 
 K^sitffl'wv Xifxoj aflro^vijfl'- 
 
GREEK EXERCISES, 
 
 105 
 
 than live in plenty, being troubled ; 
 and ii is belter that thy son be bad, 
 than thou wretched. 
 
 29. But he has come to this 
 pitch of pride, as to send now to 
 the Euboeans such letters. 
 
 xo^aijxwv. 
 
 'O Js Sis ovTog^ Cbfij 
 
 30. Having left the judgment- Ajpirf-T'*)/;.!^ o ^jxaCrrj^iov, 
 ?eat, we came to the place of pu- 
 
 nishment ; but there 
 
 my friend, 
 there were many and miserable 
 things to hear and sec. 
 
 31. Be present, then, said he, 
 at the doors, clothed with these 
 dresses, before the sun rises, and 
 stand as Pheraulas the Persian 
 shall tell you from me. 
 
 <^oc: JccXaCTvjPfov a;^ ix- 
 vso.aaj'^ £v^a oe, u (piXoc:, 
 
 ojTOb, cr^jv TjXiog avareXXoj, 
 xai xct^K^rriiM ug av tfu «I>5- 
 ^uvXc/.g ns^iTrjj £^ayj'cX. 
 Xw^ ira^a, eyu. 
 
 ^Oray 6si Cuyxiv^uvfuw* 
 OiXos^ 1] -rar^iff, joltj jut,av- 
 
 Hv yaf -Tr^osirw" Cu 6 /xav- 
 Tjjr, (poLuXog y<vo/xoi o le^o?, 
 6r]Xoj OTi 6 ^avarof tfiiiLfcaj- 
 
 32. When Mow mayest have to 
 encounter danger for thy friend or 
 country, do not consult the sooth- 
 sayer, whether thou oughtest to 
 do it. For if the soothsayer de- 
 clare to thee that the omens have been 
 bad, it is evident that death is sig- 
 nified, or the maiming of a part of 
 the body, or flight. 
 
 33. Miror igitm-, quo tandem pacto, persuasi fuerint Athe- 
 nienses, Socratem de Deis non sana mentQ esse. 
 
 34. Quid jucundum nosti, nihil horum causa/acere volens ? 
 quae jucundorum appetiturn non expectas, sed, j?nw.s^Wfl7» op- 
 j)€tas, omnibus repleris ; pnusguam esurias comedens ; prius- 
 quam siiias bibens % 
 
 35. Rhetor Demias advenit, plebiscitum habens in dextra, 
 et se consanguineum nostrum esse dicens. 
 
106 
 
 fiREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 CHAP. XLin. 
 
 Participles are often used instead of the infinitive^ after verbs &• 
 
 noting an affection or emotion of the mind. 
 The participle is used after the adjectives cpave^ocr, JrjXoi:, and their i 
 
 compounds, after a(i:avY;..c, sffjcpavy;?, ^-c. ; and the adjective is 
 
 commonly rendered in English by its adverb. 
 
 1 . I remember to have received tliis 
 wealth. 
 
 2. I know thai I am come to a 
 powerful city, 
 
 3. We might continue to be most 
 happy. 
 
 4. I will not cease to have God 
 for my defender. 
 
 5. He appeared to surpass all his 
 contemporaries, 
 
 6. They continue to maintain the 
 peace. 
 
 7. I, my friends, am delighted to 
 be honoured by you. 
 
 8. I perceived that I loas very un- 
 wise, and foolishly exasperated, 
 
 9. He continued to i??jure no one 
 indeed, but to honour the good and 
 to punish those that offended. 
 
 10. And I am not asha?ned to say 
 these things. 
 
 11. No one will appear to have 
 gained this honour more nobly. 
 
 12. No one, either mortal, or 
 demi-god, or immortal, ivill be found 
 to have received the kingdom more 
 honourably. 
 
 13. I never ceased to pity our- 
 selves, and to think the king and 
 those with him happy. 
 
 14. He was evidently endeavour- 
 ing to surpass. 
 
 15. Those about Ariaeus, were 
 
 ^lUi^ cXouToff. 
 
 MaXio'Ta av eu(5ai|xovfw 
 0SOS ov \r,y(ji r|oa'-ra<rr^ 
 Hag 6 '/;Xi| 5ia(pSPU (pa»- 
 'O Si^ri^r} ctyu SiOiTsXs-u: 
 
 viro (fv TJjxacd. 
 
 AiUTSks'J' ovoeis |Utsy aSt. 
 
 6 (5e sIcjulafTavo? xoXa(^w. 
 Ka» o-kos fxgv ovx a»C- 
 
 Ou(5s»^ 9aivwP* Tijxi? 
 oC'Toj xaXss xraof/-ai.^ 
 
 0;;(5fjc:, OUTS &vr]Tog, owe 
 y/(jL;^£o?, ouTe a^avaTog £y- 
 ^((Txw, xaXog XafA§avw*' i 
 /SaCjXsitt. 
 
 Ou croTS -rauw"^ £/w p-ev 
 oiXTeiPW, /3a^iXfu? (5c xaj i 
 tfyv auTcj |Aaxa^»^w. ' 
 
 *av£^off £/.ai vixaw iTci. 
 
 Ev5>]Xoj Sffw i ire^i 4 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 107 
 
 evtdeniiy giving less attention to 
 Xhe Greeks. 
 
 16. He did not 5ficre//y make use 
 of divination. 
 
 17. He evidently did those things 
 also from choice. 
 
 13. He openly sacrificed, often- 
 times at home, oftentimes on the 
 public altars of the citj. 
 
 19. ^ I will obey God rather 
 than you ; and as long as I breathe 
 and am able, I will not cease to cul- 
 tivate philosophy. 
 
 20. But the Assyrian, when he 
 kneio the spies to be advancing^ or- 
 ders two or three chariots and a few 
 cavahy to spring forth and flee. 
 
 21. The same day, when he 
 heard that Cyrus was there, he 
 led away the army quickly unto 
 him. 
 
 22. And thus neither wilt thou 
 le found injuring thy masters, nor 
 will it have been consulted badly 
 for ourselves. 
 
 23. Art thou not ashamed to he 
 so careful of riches, and glorj', 
 and honour, that they may be to 
 thee as abundant as possible ; but 
 dost thou take no care, nor think 
 al all of thy understanding, and of 
 truth, and of the .soul, that it may 
 be as good as possible 1 
 
 24. O Gadatas, thou hast evi- 
 dently been persuaded by Hystas- 
 pes, to entertain those sentiments 
 which thou utterest. 
 
 25. Where men think, that he 
 who excels will neither be pro- 
 claimed by a herald nor receive 
 rewards, there they evidently are 
 without feelings of emulation to- 
 wardg one another. 
 
 c^oCe^^oo veug'. 
 
 ovx ncpavr\g ety^i, 
 
 Ka» sxstvog ex v^oai^sd^ 
 
 x»j fACv ojxoi, 'TroXXoxig 6t 
 S'Xi jcoivog 6 ':roXic: /Swixo^. 
 
 nSi^OJ™ ^eO^ fJLttXXoV n 
 
 (fv xai fc-ojA-flrs^ av efjiirvew* 
 
 (piX0(3'0(pSCJ. 
 
 'O $s ACcfuPio^, ug yiMLid" 
 
 (pfu^w xjXsuw a^fxa fgavjrf- 
 TTtiLi^s 5vo 7j rP£i^, xa» Iir- 
 cog (ikiyag. 
 
 ■ra^eifAj Ku^ojr, oj}(0|xar w^otf 
 
 Kai otru outs tfu aXjc'xu 
 «5jxsoj (JsCtot'jj^, cure syw 
 xaxij^ fit^ouXsufASvogP" fi^. 
 
 X^rjjxa jxfv oux ai<J'}^uvw»] 
 £rjueXo;jL«i, o^wg Cu f»/xi' 
 w^ ^roXur, xai 5o|a xai Ti.ur) j 
 {p^ovT^.Tij (5c, xaj aX'/)5sja, xai 
 6 4'^X^» ^'^'*^S '*^^ /SeXTifl'Toc 
 £t.uj,' cux £':r<jjLsXo/ji.ai 8w5f 
 (p^ov<ngw ; 
 
 n FafJaraj 5>5Xo^ «i/a» 
 uro *Tfl'Tafl''7ry)? '7r£i5wP''f 
 ouToj ^jvwffxw OS X£yu. 
 
 'Ott'ou (X£v ojofAai o av^w 
 -TTo^ xpa-riffTguwo ixriTS xij- 
 ^ufl'fl'w, M.»]TS a^Xov Xa/Jt.^(»- 
 vw, (5-/;Xos £</xi fvrau^^a m 
 (pjXovsixwf ir^dj aXX)}XwV' 
 
105 
 
 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 26. Non cessabo scribere. 
 
 27. Sed quomodo agit ? Sitire desinit. 
 
 28. VidefMr animus immorlalis esse. 
 
 29. ,Ma7iifestum erat eum neminem diligere. 
 
 30. Manifesium erat eum animi sollicitudine afficu 
 
 CHAP. XLIV. 
 
 The verbs ei|xi, ruyp^avw, u-ra^w, ^ivo/xai, xu^w, rj^w, (p^avw, Xav« I 
 flavw, anfi? some oMers, are used xoith participles after them^ whick , 
 require to be rendered^ in Latin^ by the mood and tense of the i 
 verb annexed, while the verbs themselves are most generally ren* 
 dered by adverbs. 
 
 1. Wilt thou not be silent 1 
 
 2. Into how great a desire hast 
 thou thrown us, if these things are 
 ISO ! And they are so, said he. 
 
 3. This plan of operations was 
 Jit for nothing else, than for steal- 
 ing away or retreating with rapi- 
 <iity. 
 
 4. But if you shall do these 
 things which you mention, know 
 that you loill put to death a man 
 who has already watched much 
 for you. 
 
 6. The river Selinus happened 
 to run through the middle of the 
 country. 
 
 6. One of the attendants called 
 him, in order thai he might inspect 
 the entrails which had been taken 
 out ; for he happened to be sacrificing 
 
 for the purpose of ascertaining the 
 future. 
 
 7. But Clearchus ordered Tol- 
 mides, an Elean, whom he happen- 
 td to have as a herald with him, to 
 proclaim. 
 
 8. I happened to say that there 
 
 fiia ejx^aXXw syu, e» oiiro^ 
 ovTU)S 6)(u. AXXa 5»fM, 
 (prjjJLi, obrug s-)(U. 
 
 OvTog 6 (fr^aTriyia stfu 
 o\)8sig oKKos 5uva|xai, >] acro^ 
 
 Hv 6s iroisu, og "ksyta^ 
 nfrilM on avt)^ xaraxaivw* 
 cjfjti, iroXujT fASv ^r] tcpo <fit 
 
 TvyxpLvui^ 5s 5icc (icdug 
 
 vovg. 
 
 KaXew^ rig avrog o uTrrj- 
 
 KXea^^of Ss TcXjxiiijp 
 HXsio.c, 6j rvyxavui^ $y^t4 
 ■Tra^' lauTou xtj^v^ avgcrc/ 
 xcXeuw/ 
 
 Tuyp(avw2 Xgyw, lu Co* 
 
eRSEK EXERCISER. 
 
 100 
 
 >tv-o*al4j3e to us, many and favour- 
 able hopes of safety. 
 
 9. Tribes have been separately 
 form.ed by the state, 
 
 10. We will endeavour, with 
 the aid of the gods, to inflict ven- 
 geance on any one who injures 
 us ; but if any one do us kind- 
 nesses, we will, even as far as w^e 
 are able, not be inferior to this one 
 in doing good. 
 
 1 1 . We never as yet did you any 
 injury. 
 
 12. And when again he may 
 have turned back. 
 
 13. If my mother did not live. 
 
 14. Do thou observe if he rk re- 
 dined in sleep. 
 
 16. But do thou, if it appears 
 good to thee, hold in light estimation 
 the honours of the gods. 
 
 16. Since thou, O mother, with 
 tears and lamentations deplore my 
 deceased father and beloved coun- 
 try. 
 
 17. The Scythians came to the 
 bridge long before the Persians. 
 
 15. But the foot immediately 
 proceeded on a run to Epipolae, 
 and ascendhy Euryelum, before the 
 Syracusans arrived. 
 
 19- We no sooner came to Troe- 
 zen, than we were seized with such 
 Tiolent diseases. 
 
 20. But when day dawned, they 
 proceeded in silence, dra'^^n up in 
 battte array, against the enemy ; 
 and (without difficulty), for there 
 was a mist, so that they approached 
 near undiscovered. 
 
 21. And Cyratadas, while they 
 were landing at Piraeus, escaped 
 
 K 
 
 *Tffo |x£v 6 *oX»g ii<]fa^(ti 
 8iai^S(Aps (puX>j. 
 
 A(5ixew& fji.evTOj crsi^aca"* 
 tfuv 6 deoff ajm-uvw,*"^ sum fjtsv- 
 to; Tig syu sv iroisw u^fa^- 
 X", xa» oiiTos eig yz 5uvapj 
 
 lf:oL^')^(J' xaxug ifotsu. 1 
 Ka< oTttv av *aXjv atest^ 
 fjt-»^ yjvofjLai." 
 
 E» fA>) XV^OJ ^aw TWTW.% 
 
 'O^aw xad' virvog (A»j xa- 
 TttxXjvw^ xu^w. 
 
 2u 5' SI doxsuj S 4sog 
 fivrj/xog"* arifJLtt^w^ gj^w. 
 
 -ni^, rar^ij rs (piXoj, xa- 
 
 *^avw° ffoXug 6 Hxu^^ 
 
 (xvfojxai.^ 
 
 ^^ofxog -sTPoj 6 E-ri-jroXai, xai 
 ^davw ava^aivw" xara o Eu> 
 ifuriXov, -r^iv Su^axouCiotf 
 flra^ayjvofxaj.* 
 
 Oux (pd.avw" ^15 T^oi^*)if 
 £^o|jLai,° xoi Totfourog voCog 
 Xaji.§avw.' 
 
 flTogsuw"^ (fiytj (fv\ira<f(fuy't 
 s<jri croXs/xiof , xai ya^ ofU" 
 p(Xi] yivofAar® oitfre Xavddw 
 v6j° fyyug wiotfg^ojxoi.' 
 
 Kai & Ku^ara^a^ «v i 
 
HO 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 and 
 
 unobserved amid the crowd, 
 saved himself into Decelea. 
 
 22. U As often also as he sup 
 ped and slept in an}^ place, he did 
 not kindle a fire by night in his 
 camp, but made a light in front 
 of his army, in order that no one 
 might approach unobserved. 
 
 23. When the camp of the As- 
 syrians was taken, her husband 
 happened not to be in the camp, but 
 
 xai a'X'oo'Wi^wP^ eg AsxsXaa. 
 
 xaflju5w,*^ sv fiev o Cr^aTOTS- 
 Oov cry^ vuxrw^ ow xaw,^ 
 
 •TTPO 8s (fr^lXTSOllCL (pWg 
 
 'OrS aXiCxoj^ 6 o Atf(fw- 
 pjos C'Tga<roir£5ov, o avr,^ aw- 
 
 was gone as embassador to the ro-irsdov eif^i aXXa cr^oj » 
 
 king of the Bactrians. 
 
 24. I would be very grateful to 
 the Deity, if I should not be mis- 
 taken iri the opinion -which I k'lp- 
 •pcn to have of thee. 
 
 25. And if 3^ou will break these, 
 or succumb to those who are break- 
 ing them, I predict to you, that you 
 Will insensibly give up the govern- 
 ment of the state. 
 
 26. Do not forget hospitality to 
 strangers ; for by this, some have 
 mterimned angels unaioares. 
 
 27. If the murder of husbands 
 shall be lawful for women, you 
 cannot any longer avoid dying 
 (death), or you must become the 
 slaves of women. 
 
 28. Forte in Satumi sacello deamhulabamus, 
 
 29. Imprudens interfectorem filii sui alebai. 
 
 30. Ut nee Cyrus nee Circes, ^ugdi praoccupent. 
 
 ' 31. Una a^uc pars imperii reliqua est, si quid modo forte 
 micUigo, 
 
 BaxTPtccng /SaCjXeug 'jr^sC- 
 JJoXvs av 050^ X'*f'? 
 
 Xuw,^ *; 6 xctraXuw S'Xit^s. 
 iru}, irpoXsyw Cu, on Xav- 
 6avui^ "jroXirSjao 'saPa'/ui- 
 
 •O (piXogsvia |x>j S'jrtXavflefr- 
 voaar b\a okoj^ /a^ Xa»* 
 ^avw^ T«j ^svi^u^ ayysXog. 
 Ei a^Ci^v (povog £«/Jt,i yuvi| 
 otfjoc:, ou (p^avw^ stj av 5v>3(?». 
 xw, yi ywrt (JouXsuw Xl*w«« 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 Ill 
 
 CHAP. XLV. 
 
 The, Greeks use jut-eXXw loith an infinitive^ to express thefuture^ 
 both active and passive^ luhicJi, in Latin, would be rendered by a 
 participle of the future and the verb sum. 
 
 . 1. A^t) here I mean to exhibit 
 it against the tliii'd day — (ostensu- 
 rus sum). 
 
 2. They are about to perform the 
 funeral obsequies — (facturi sunt). 
 
 3. Concernmg what things ye 
 are about to decide — (judicaturi es« 
 tis). 
 
 • 4. First consider in thy mind, 
 every thing which thou mayest 
 be about to utter — (verbis prolaturus 
 sis). 
 
 6. Did not I say that you two 
 were going to be troublesome to me ? 
 — (moiestiam. allaturi essetis). 
 
 6. If thou wouldst even hear the 
 words which are going to be men- 
 tioned — (sunt proferenda) . 
 
 7. After this, Seuthes removed 
 liis camp farther ; but the Greel^s 
 took up their abodes among the 
 villages, whence, after having sup- 
 plied themselves with as much 
 provisions as possible, they intend- 
 ed to proceed to the sea — (ituri 
 erant). 
 
 S. Re said this, signifying by 
 what death he loas about to die — 
 (moriturus erat). 
 
 9. When the nightingale luas 
 about to be killed — (occidenda es- 
 set). 
 
 10. IT Thou appearest to me to 
 say, Socrates, tkat if we loould ac- 
 quire a good friend, we ourselves 
 must be good both at speaking and 
 acting — (comparaturi essemus). 
 
 Kai Sv^a^s fj.6XXu f^#. 
 Ta(p>) f/-gXXw iroiew. 
 
 Has hifng av /xfiXX^o Xfyw 
 
 p^w^ -r^ayjxaP jxsXXw syw j 
 
 Kav axouw o fisXXw j£U* 
 
 Xo^/oj. 
 
 *EXX'/)v (fxriVBuf^ ftff xw/Aij, 
 o^sv laeXXw,^ crXsitfrt^P" eti- 
 
 
 
VI2 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 11. For who, being about to 
 make any thing, is ignorant what 
 he is about to make ? — (facuturus 
 •it), (facturus est). 
 
 12. Those who are about to be 
 auxiliaries, ought to be friends, not 
 enemies ; neither envious in the 
 prosperity of their commander, nor 
 treacherous in his adversity — (fu- 
 turi sunt). 
 
 13. In the (play) Cresphontes, 
 Merope is about to kill her son, 
 and does not kill him, but on a 
 sudden discovers who he is ; and 
 in the Helle, the son, being about 
 to give up his mother, finds on a 
 sudden who she is~(occisura est), 
 (dediturus). 
 
 14. Nonnullus occidit, nonnullos 
 
 15. In hoc ipso die, laturus erat 
 tentiam, de sua etiam ipsius dicendi 
 
 T»5 ya^, /xeXXw ro»8^^ 
 
 (p&ovsoi,^s |ut,*]<r£ sv 6 xax(^ 
 
 Ev K^erf^ovT')]?, Ms- 
 
 voj, a'n'oxTSivc) 6s oy, aXX«t 
 avayvw^i^w^ xai sv 6 'EX. 
 
 fjij jxsXXw, avayvM^i^u} 
 
 {occisurus) erat. 
 unusquisque vestrum ees- 
 libertate. 
 
 CHAP. XLVI. 
 
 The time when is commonly put in the genitive, sometimes in ihn 
 dative ; how long in the accusative. 
 
 1. But the Greeks, having gone *0 S 
 forth each day with their beasts of 
 burden and slaves, brought away 
 
 without fear, wheat, barley, wine, 
 figs. 
 
 2. For, on the preceding day^ 
 Bending, he ordered us to deliver up 
 our arms. 
 
 8. On the following day, sailing 
 thence with a favourable wind, 
 they coasted along/or two days. 
 
 4. For we indeed thought that 
 you intended to attack the enemy 
 ly night, 
 
 5. This then was the termina- 
 tion of affairs on this night, but 
 
 EXXr^v s|?j|ji,t° Ixatf- 
 TOg 7)|X£^a8' Cuv u<rf^2yy\(ii 
 xai av^^a'ff'o^ov, (pe^w™^ 
 
 0.5eWJ cru^OS,P X^J^7),P OiVOf, 
 
 tfuxov. 
 
 'O f/.sy ya^ flr^otf^ev ijjxff- 
 fa,^ <R'£(X'7rw offXov cra^a^ 
 5i5wji;.» xeXfuw.^ 
 
 EvTSu^sv 6 Ctf-Te^aiog (ri|ut'&' 
 ^a<^) ava^^w"™ irvsufjia xaXof, 
 crXsw^ >jjx?Pa 5uo ifaPCL yr^ 
 
 E70J |xev ya^ ojofjiat^ (Tu 
 
 6 Vuf & '/JXW^ £1(1 6 "ffoXSfAJOf . 
 *0 /XSV OUV VU^'* OUTOf OUTIC 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 11^ 
 
 m the following day they brought 
 them to ihe army. 
 ■" . 6. And, having stationed watch- 
 es, they slept during the night. 
 ' 7. Having said these things, he 
 was not guilty of a falsehood ; for 
 the young man, becoming delight- 
 ed with wine, ceased not drinking 
 either by night or by day. 
 
 8. I wish to inform some, and 
 
 to remind others of 
 
 y«", 
 
 that of 
 
 those advancing against us, they 
 who occupy the right wing, are 
 the same whom you, on the fifth 
 day (preceding this), having rout- 
 ed, pursued. 
 
 9. Thence they proceeded, dur- 
 mg all the succeeding day, through 
 ,enow. 
 
 ■ 10. Xenophon, having taken 
 swith him Polycrates, went by night 
 to the army of Seuthes. 
 
 11. In this month 3-e sent away 
 ^Charidcmus, ha\dng ten' ftnpty 
 ships, and five talent^-- of silver. 
 
 12. But the generals and cap- 
 tains, having come from Aristar- 
 chus, brought back intelligence, 
 that at present indeed he requests 
 them to depart, but to come at 
 tvening. 
 
 13. U And they come to the sa- 
 cred mountain on the fifth day : 
 the mountain's name was The- 
 ches. But when the foremost 
 came upon the mountain and be- 
 held the sea, a great cry arose. 
 
 14. Thus many lay, as if a rout 
 had taken place, and the despon- 
 dency was great. On the follow- 
 ing dayy however, no one died, 
 but almost about the same hour 
 they recovered their senses, and 
 
 Tog Big dr^cf.rsvixa, 
 
 •n-o'tsw,™^ xaO£u(5w.^ 
 
 aXXa 6 vsa.vi(fxog r;d(t) m. 
 vog^ OUTS vu|,s OUTS ^f^a? 
 Tauoj™^ TIVW. 
 
 avajLtvaw^ Cu /SouXo/uiai, ori 
 fi/ju, 6 '7rPoo'ci,ai,% 6 j*sv h 
 
 *0 Afsvo(pwv -rra^aXaft^di- 
 vw^ IloXv/. ^a-Tir,g oi-)(oixUi^ 
 vii^s s-iri Hsxj&Yig ffT^arevp^a.. 
 
 Ou-Toj 6 ^j.ri'vS (5txa vai-b 
 a'TTotJ'TsXXco £-)(u Xcf.Pi5r]iiog 
 xsvog, xai crsvTS caXavrov 
 a^yv^tog. 
 
 'O 8b (fTPOLTYiyog xai 
 "KoyjoLy^ '/;xw cra^a 6 A^itf- 
 Ttt^-Xpg, airayysKKu^ 6rk 
 vuv jxev a-TTSifJi/ ccMrog xsXgyw 
 6, 5ciX7]§r ($6 r,X(,). 
 
 Kai ttipixvsoaai Sifi U^og 
 o^'oj 6 TSfXTTToc: Tj/xe^a' ovojxa 
 OS fj.ai o^oj: 0'/];^i]<:. Etsu 
 5>) Ss 'jr^uTcg yivofJt.a»° £*» 
 o^of , xa» xaTe»(5w° 6 6oCkar- 
 ra, -TToXug jc^auyr) yjvo/Aai.* 
 
 Ks»,ua»^ cuTW TToXu?, (^jo*. 
 
 croXu^ f«|x» 6 aQvfxia. 'O ^8 
 i)(j<rs^aAog a-ro^vyjfl'xw^ jxev ou. 
 5s»<r, a/jt-(pi 5s 6 aurog a'ou 
 wpa (p^ovsw,^ <r^»Toj 5s xai 
 
114 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 on the third diud fourth day arose, as 
 if after a draught of medicine. 
 
 16. The man, having taken me 
 with him, washed me for nine and 
 twenty days, havmg begun with the 
 moon. 
 
 16. Hail,Menippusl and whence 
 hast thou come unto us 1 for thou 
 hast not appeared this long time in 
 the city. 
 
 17. The narrative of the Odys- 
 sey is long ; a person being many 
 years abroad, and watched by Nep- 
 tune, and being alone. 
 
 18. I say that five hundred of 
 the^e should be Athenians, of what- 
 ever age may appear to you to be 
 right, serving an appointed time, not 
 long, but as much as may seem to 
 be right, in succession to each 
 other. 
 
 19. If a law should be enacted, 
 that persons not eating be not hun- 
 gry, and not drinking be not thirs- 
 ty, nor be cold in winter, nor warm 
 m summer, no law could be able to 
 bring it to pass that men obey as to 
 these things. 
 
 20. Moreover even yet at the 
 present day, every ninth year, the 
 Delphians send boys of noble Hrth, 
 and one from arnong themselves as 
 an architheorus. 
 
 21. Postridie Tigranes ipse aderat. 
 
 22. Gluum vero advenent finis a fato preestitutus, non obti- 
 vione inhonorati jacent, sed memoria per omne tempus hymni« 
 celebrati florent. 
 
 23. Vestem indueris non modo \ilem, sed eandem quoqu« 
 estate et hyeme. 
 
 Ila^aXafjiSavw^ 8s eyu i 
 av>]^ Tjfxs^a kvuBo, xcu sixo- 
 tfiv, ttjxa 6 I,skr,vr, a^X">"* 
 
 "TToflev syu acpixvsoiiai ; iroXvs 
 yoi^ X^°^°ff °'^ (paivw™ £v i 
 •^roXif. 
 
 *0 08v(f(f5ia fjwxx|0j X«- 
 
 ToXuf, xa» Ta^aipuXaTTw 
 Cffo 6 IIoCskJwv, xai uovoj 
 
 SlJJt-/. 
 
 OOroj 5s A&YiMaiog cpr,itA osi 
 £»fjii Tgyraxoo'joi, £^ og av 7ig 
 tfu '>;Xix/a xaXwg s-)(U ^oxsw, 
 yj(jvog <raxTcj CT^areyw,"* ' 
 |j.r/ ixaxPog olrogj aXXa hds 
 av 5oxsw xaXwff sy(0}j sx 6ia- . 
 (5o^v) aXXi»)Xwv. 
 
 fxr] Ttivaco, xa» jj-*] -rivw jxij- 
 
 fjL7j<5s 6aXcrcj"* ^spoc, ouOei^ 
 av vojjLog ^uvafiaj^ dia'r'PaC- 
 
 Ka! £Ti xa» vtv sco? svva*" 
 <roj, AeX(poj -rais su^evrjg* 
 crcjxrcd xai a|;)(»^gw^'Of s»j« 
 
QREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 115 
 
 CHAP. XLVIL 
 
 The question whither 1 is commonly answered by sig or ft^os with 
 the accusative : where ? by sv with the dative : whence ? by 
 ex or aero loith the genitive : and by or through what place ? 
 by Sta with the genitive. 
 
 Adverbs in 6i and tfi are used to signify at a place : in Js, es, or 
 ^£, to a place : and in 6sv and 6s, from a place : 8s is also add' 
 ed to accusatives, to signify to a place. 
 
 The distance of one place from another , is put in the accusative. 
 
 1 . Thence he advances three days' 
 march, thirty parasangs, to the plain 
 of Cayster. 
 
 2. Thus Cyrus spoke, and hav- 
 ing done these things, went to the 
 Persians. 
 
 3. After these things they pro^ 
 needed to the Taochi,five days^ march, 
 thirty parasangs ; and their provi- 
 sions failed. 
 
 4. Through this region, both 
 through that which was hostile, 
 and that which was friendly, the 
 Greeks proceeded eight days'' march, 
 lind come to the Chalybes. 
 
 ''•' 5. An overthrow having hap- 
 pened to them at Leuctra. 
 
 6. Intelligence having come un- 
 to him, that in the battle at Co- 
 rinth, eight of the Lacedaemonians 
 ky dead. 
 
 7. Lysander, having drawn up 
 <Hi shore the ships at Ephesus, re- 
 Hiained quiet. 
 
 8. He was enabled to say, that 
 they alone of the Greeks, fought 
 in aid of the king at Platace. 
 
 9. But w^hen there came to him 
 twenty ships from Syracuse, and 
 ethers came also/row Ionia. 
 
 10. But when he hud come, he 
 
 /xoj T^Ci?, 'J^a^ad a.yyr\g '"^'«- 
 xovra sig Kuikjtpos 'XsSiov. 
 E'TTw^ jaev o',ka!g 6 KvPos^ 
 
 Ex ouTog -roPSjwP^ Sig Tao- 
 
 (jayyr,g t^iolxomtu, xaj o 
 £ffir-.^o£;ogP" s-TriXsi-^rw." 
 
 Atcc ovrog 6 X^-?'^ ° 'EX. 
 Xrjv, 8kx <rc 6 'XoXs(xiog, xai 4 
 (piXiog, 'jro^suwP^ ojctw tfra^ 
 f/-og, xa< a(puveofxai gig Xa-. 
 
 Auto J £v Aswr^a, (fvp. 
 
 AyysXia £^)^o,aa<° auTof, 
 wc: £y sv Ko^iv^og i^^X'^' **"" 
 TW AaxsoaiiJ^oviog <)vvja'xw.P''*^ 
 
 *0 A-jtfav(5^oj, avfXxuw* 
 6 sv 6 Ecpstfog vauj, IjcTuj^ja 
 
 E-xoj^ Xs^u, oTi jxovoj « 
 *EXXy)v ^adiKzvg^ c;'uffc|xa- 
 Xo/Ji'««''^ sv nXa-rai«i. 
 
 E-jrsj ^6 s^oixai^ aurogo 
 <rs sx 2u^axoua'a« vayg eua- 
 tfjv, s^o/AttJ^ 6s xai a^r* 
 Iwvia. 
 
 Effsj 6s ^xw,^ avaSaivu* 
 
IIS 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 went np unto him, with the em- 
 bassadors /rowz Lacedccmon. 
 
 11. Thence he advances through 
 Syria, and comes to the river Araxes. 
 
 12. Thence the Greeks proceed- 
 ed through the Macrones ; but on 
 the first da J? they came to the river 
 which separated both the territory 
 of the Macrones, and that of the 
 Scythini. 
 
 13. But the soldiers, having 
 sold the corn which they had col- 
 lected together, and the other 
 things which they had taken, pro- 
 ceeded thence through the Bilhyni. 
 
 14. They spent the winter be- 
 ing occupied with these things ; 
 but at the opening of the spring, 
 Phamabazus having manned ma- 
 ny ships, and having hired in addi- 
 tion a mercenary force, sailed, and 
 Conon along with him, through the 
 islands.^ to Melos. 
 
 15. The insolence of the slaves 
 and strangers at Athens is very 
 great ; and it is neither allowed 
 there to strike a blow, nor will a 
 slave give way ^or thee. 
 
 16. Pausanias, having received 
 this letter, though being even be- 
 fore held in great estimation by 
 the Greeks on account of the chief 
 command at Plaicdce, was then 
 much more elated. 
 
 17. But the hives were nume- 
 rous there, and as many of the 
 soldiers as ate of the honey-combs, 
 became all deprived of their senses. 
 
 18. What in many therefore and 
 •iker instances is fully apparent, 
 that there is not a firmer band, than 
 when it is composed of friendly 
 fellow-combatants, is in this in* 
 Etance also made manifest. 
 
 EvTgutiSv fgtXauvw 6ui i 
 Xu^ia, xa» a{;:.{xvso/xai 'g^ag 
 A^a^r,g CoTaaoj, 
 
 •EvT£u5cV -^O^tVCjP^ 'EX- 
 
 Xi^v 6ia Maxfc^v 6 <t^wto^ 
 6s hlt'S^u a^ixvio/xaj^ t-jr< 6 
 
 Maxpojv x^^a, xat 6 o 2xu- 
 
 xc/jt,»,^w,P*& xat 6 aXXcg o^ 
 Xaat'avw,^ exro^tuw™- 5ta. 
 
 xa» fs'.j^ccg" flr^oC/j-ic^ow,"** 
 flrXtOj^ ^aPva€a^og rS, xat 
 Kovwv iulst' auToj:, Oia 
 v»;crog fj£ Mtj^oj. 
 
 'O SovXcs xoA 6 |X5roiX(^ 
 'ToAng 5;/,!.» A^vjvtjCjv axoXa- 
 tfja, xai OUTS 'TraTc.O'O'w^ £^ 
 scTtiv a-uTo5j, CUTS Cts^io'ti}- 
 
 O-jTof XafAfavcj^ 6 nau.>. 
 tfaviag 6 "/^cifxi^ajV £j/ii xai 
 
 Cicro 6 'EXX^y (5ja 6 IlXa* 
 7aio.(fiv riyiixoviay iroh/g 
 <ro-rs (xaXXo» ai^w.' 
 
 'O ^6 (/fAT/vog 'jfoXvs BffU 
 au7o^», xa» 6 xtj^iov o<fo$ 
 (payw^ (/T^aTiwTT;?, iraj 
 
 TIoX>a;(o^< ftsv ouv xoi 
 aXXo^i <5'/)Xog, oTi oux £<fj4 
 itfp^u^og (paXayl, vj o«rav e« 
 (piXog dvii-ixa-x^os a^^o'^Wj'^* 
 xai £v 0VT05 ^n^ow*'' 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 117 
 
 19. If thou .come to any of the 
 Bearest cities, either to Thebes or 
 to Megara^ (for they are each go- 
 verned by good laws,) thou wilt 
 come as an enemy to the govern- 
 ment of these. 
 
 20. And they decreed that they 
 cause those to cease from their 
 authority, and choose others with- 
 out delay ; and they chose ten, one 
 from each tribe, and the thirty with- 
 drew to Eleusis. 
 
 21. But he went to Lycia under 
 the safe guidance of the gods. 
 
 22. Bring thou forward another ; 
 or rather those two ; that laughing 
 man who is from Abdera, and that 
 weeping one who is from Ephesus ; 
 fof they themselves \vish to be sold 
 together. 
 
 23. And he, having taken in 
 addition from Athens both other 
 ships and heavy-armed troops, sail- 
 ed awa}'. * 
 
 24. They selected Dracontius, 
 a Spartan ; who, when a boy, fled 
 from home, having unintentionally 
 Blain a boy, ha\ing struck him 
 with a Spartan sword. 
 
 25. They went each of them 
 home. 
 
 26. The storm carried them to 
 tea. 
 
 27. The Greeks thereupon were 
 in great perplexity, reflecting that 
 they were distant from Greece more 
 than ten thousand stadia. 
 
 28. But when the Greeks, hav- 
 ing crossed over, were distant from 
 the ravine as much as eight stadia, 
 Mithridates also crossed over, hav- 
 ing his force. 
 
 29. Some distaat a journey of 
 
 Eav eis fyyuTara rtf 
 
 Tt M'sya^aSs, (suvojxscj yag 
 a,a(po-s?oj,) "s-oXs^ioff fjxu i 
 
 oCtoj flroX»TS»a. 
 
 Ka» -^vicpi^oj^^ ex£(V35 
 fn-sv xara-irftuw,^ aWog Si 
 
 airo (puXv)* xai o T^iaxovT« 
 
 Avra^ 6 ^aivw* Av>.tY,)i&i 
 
 AXXog rfu^oLyu,^ fAxXXov 
 ds S\)o oyrog* e yiXaw o 
 A§(J>jPo5sv, xai sXaJw o s^ 
 E(pe<ro5' ajAa ya^ aurog nru 
 v^ddxd^ /SoyXcfiai, 
 
 IT^oCXafiSavw® h A^ij- 
 
 oirXiTTjf, avro'TrXew.* 
 
 Ai^soj™^ A^axovTJoj 'S.'xa^' 
 
 oixc^tv, flraig axwv xaTaxrSi- 
 
 'O fASv ^aivuP OIX0V& 
 
 Xa. 
 
 Ev "TToXuff Sr) acro^ia eifti » 
 'EXXiiv, £vduffcSo(xa» oTj afl'ff- 
 p(w^ 'EXXas crXsov oj ffcy- 
 ^loj (frcudiov. 
 
 Eirsi 8s 6 'EXXtjv Sia^cu. 
 vw'' wrfs^u'^ yaPO-S^a oCoC 
 
lis 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 many days, and others even of ma- 
 ny months, 
 
 30. IT Thence they proceeded 
 Virongh Troas, and having crossed 
 over Ida, thej^ come first to Jhitan- 
 dros, then, passing by the sea-coast 
 of Lydia, to the plain of 'J'hebe. 
 Thence^ having come through Jldra- 
 myttium and Ccrtonium by Atarneas 
 to the plain of Cavcus, they reach 
 Pergamus of Mysia. 
 
 thin.Q:s, Xeno- 
 
 31. After these 
 phon negociated for vessels, m 
 order that they might cross over 
 as soon as possible into Asia ; but 
 during this time, Aristarchus the 
 prs£fect//-ow Byzantium having ar- 
 rived, having two triremes, told the 
 soldiers not to cross over into Asia. 
 
 32. Aristarchus meets at Cyzi- 
 cus Anaxibius sailing away from 
 Byzantium, and Anaxibius enjoins 
 upon Aristarchus to sell into slave- 
 ry as many of the soldiers of Cyrus 
 as he should find left at Byzantium. 
 
 33. I advised both thy father 
 and my brother Darius, not to go 
 on an expedition against the Scy- 
 thians, men inhabiting a city no 
 where. 
 
 34. If moreover it behoves to 
 make mention also of minor mat- 
 ters, they first, through their com- 
 mand of the sea, discovered new 
 modes of feasting ; whatever was 
 agreeable in Sicily^ or in Italy ^ or 
 in Cyprus^ or in Egypt, or in Lydia, 
 or hi Peloponnesus, or any where 
 else, all these things were collected 
 
 Evreu^ev h "jto^suw™- but, 
 
 I^v], s\g AvTttv^^og a(pixvse. 
 fxai cr^wTov, ei^ct <Ko.^a. ^a- 
 XoTTa croPSucj™ o Au^ja, gjg ■ 
 ©r^§*) Tedjov. Ev-reu^ev 6C . 
 
 ■n'a^' ATaPVsbj i\g Ka'ixo^ 
 
 ;<a7aXa;j.cavw o Mutfia. 
 
 Mir a o-C<rocr Ssvo^cov fxsv 
 rrParru^ 'rrs^i "ttXciov, oiTwg' 
 iTiTo.yrid-a (Jia^aivw^ ejj 
 6 Ada, fv ^2 oirog «(}>«• 
 
 AC;a. 
 
 ATTo-TrXsu? ^£ Ava|»€»of gx 
 Eu^avTJGV CLivavcftw A^itf- 
 
 Ava^jgioc: s-TtKjTtWoi 6 f;.gv 
 APiC^ra^o^, c-tToCo^ av eu* 
 ^kTxw^ £v Bu^avTiov o Ko- ^ 
 ^Oc; (JT^OLTI'^TTIS Li'jrcXsicu'' 
 
 a^sX^eoff^c s.aoc:, Aa^swf, 
 
 Xarra -r^wTov fxsv t^otto^ 
 
 £v SixsXia >?^y^, »} sv Itou 
 Xjw, 7] £v Ku-r^oc:, r^ gv Ai- 
 yu-rr-TOf, >j sv Audia, •>) ev 3 
 novro.c, ri £y nsXctovvTitfof, 
 'i) aXXodj orou, ouro^ ifaj e«S 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 119 
 
 ^to one, by reason of their com- 
 toand of the sea. 
 
 35. But the soldiers of Iphicra- 
 fces, havmg made irruptions into 
 inany parts of Arcadia also, both 
 carried away plunder e.nd attacked 
 Ihe walled citie-s. 
 
 ' 36. But let us see Gnipho the 
 lisurer, if it appear good to thee; 
 he does not live far off, and his 
 door itself is open to us. 
 
 37. Do not thou hesitate to go a 
 great distance to tho.-,e who promise 
 10 teach any thing useful. 
 
 croXXa^^co's xaj 6 A^xaSiO, 
 £f;v§aXXco,^ X5r)Xacew^ t£, 
 xai cpfrirgaXXw^ if^cg o ^iu 
 
 E/W 6c, St S(jX£lf TviipCd* 
 
 6 8avsi(fio5 et6w,^ ou ftct. 
 xPog {oSoc) ds xcu oicofi 
 
 6 dv^OL, 
 
 Mr^ Jta-o>;vew jxajffcg c^eg 
 
 38. Sed inihi neque domo exeunti mane, dei signum adver^ 
 satum est, neque quando hie ascendebam. 
 
 39. Descenditque post finem annorum ad Achab in Samor 
 riam, 
 
 40. Laudaverit jure aliquis ilium Jjkc?iis legislatorem, qui 
 v^tuit parentem a filio ali, quern nullam artem edocuissel. 
 
 CHAP. XLVIII. 
 
 V^hal adjectives, governing a dative of the agent and the case of 
 their own verbs, are used to signify necessity, 
 
 1. The saying, I^ow thyself,' 
 tneans. if thou knowest thine own 
 circumstances and what thou must 
 do. 
 
 2. Both all who speak and ye 
 who hepj, must prefer things which 
 ate- best, and will be salutary. 
 
 3. If they were to have done 
 any thing base, thou shouldsi have 
 •hosen death rather than it. 
 
 4. If it be not consistent with 
 what is honourable to be saved, we 
 muii choose death. 
 
 fir, ftv 'ir^ayii.a, sidst/'* 4 
 CauTov, xa» rig (fv fl'oii)- 
 n-isog. 
 
 Kai \syo}S a-ra?, xcw 
 axouw Cu, 6 ^sXTidros xat 
 
 Ei jxsXXw^ «'^X^^ ''* 
 
 auTcg 'X^oatPsrSQS si.ai* 
 Av y.T, Si^xi^ ir^og o xa\o£ 
 
120 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 5. IVe must show that we have 
 
 been educated better than others, 
 
 and instructed in the way to \irtue. 
 
 . 6. We must not overcome women 
 
 by strength. 
 
 7. The wise man ought to avoid 
 Uving for fame, and regarding things 
 pleasing to the multitude, without 
 making right reason the ruler of 
 his life. 
 
 8. But this must first he consi- 
 dered by us, whether there be any 
 art of sublimit}'- or depth ; for some 
 persons think that they are quite 
 mistaken who refer such things as 
 these to precepts of art. 
 
 9. TT If thou wishest that the 
 gods be propitious to thee, thou 
 must worship the gods ; or if thou 
 wishest to be beloved by thy friends, 
 thou must do good to thy friends ; or 
 if thou desirest to be honoured by 
 any state, thou must assist that state. 
 
 10. I think that a person should 
 captivate those whom he would wish 
 to make willing assistants in the 
 works of war, by all good words 
 and deeds. 
 
 11. I say then that you ought 
 to give aid to these things in two 
 manners ; first, in saving their ci- 
 ties for the Olynthians, and send- 
 ing the soldiers who will do this j 
 and secondly, in injuring this coun- 
 try by ships and by other soldiers. 
 
 aXXoj afteivwv <r^s<pw, vgu 
 
 yuv»). 
 
 ^svxrsos tfw(p^oyew,lf 
 
 xai fAT) o^^oj Xoyog rjyg. 
 fiwv irojsw™ 6 (3ios. 
 
 Tig -ri (3a&og rs-xyr^' S'jrsi rt^ 
 oXus oioiULi ^laTaracj,"' oP* 
 6 roiovTog ayctiS sig re^vixng 
 'Tta^ayyeXfut, 
 
 E» 6sog Wsug gi/ju tfy 
 /HouXojxai, Qs^arrsureog (tfu) 
 Gsog' SiTS vifo (pikog ids. 
 Xw ojya.tcaM^ 6 (piXog (cTu) 
 SUSPySTrjTSOg* s»r£ u-^o coXjf 
 
 w(psX'/jreo^. , 
 
 'Of i\g fl'oXEfi.og £fy«v ^ 
 crojiW T\g /3ouXojxai tfuvg^of 
 cr^o^ujjt-of, ou<roj '^a\Ta.<Kojiiy 
 syu yB SoxBi, ayu&og BriPoi. 
 T^og e»f/,i,xa» Xoyog xa.\ B^yoit. 
 
 si/xi 6 ir^ayii^a, tfu, o"** t« t 
 ToXjf OXuv^jog o'W(^w,f xo* 
 
 sxirs^j/KUj xai o*^^ o £Xsiv<»ff 
 5(w^a xaxwff oroiew/ xai 
 <r|ir)^»jff, xa» tfT^arjwrijj iri- 
 
 12. Si quis, quum tibicen bonus non sit, videri velit, quid 
 ei faciendum sit 1 An non imitandi boni tibicines in iis qua 
 sunt extra artem ? Ac primum quidem, quum ilU instrumentu 
 pulchra habeant, multosque pedissequos circumducant, etiaa 
 ipsi h(£cfadenda. 
 
6IIEEE EXERCISES. 
 
 131 
 
 CHAP. XLIX. 
 
 T%e infinitive mood, or a participle^ is used to supply the place of 
 gerunds and supines. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 1. The first of the Athenians, 
 most powerful in speaking and act- 
 ing. 
 
 2. The Cretans are skilful in 
 using the bow. 
 
 3. He -will be hard to make war 
 against. 
 
 4. Thou wert going to leave 
 this deserted house to others, to be 
 plundered. 
 
 5. Do thou refrain entirely from 
 shouting, and from laughing at any 
 thing. 
 
 6. He spent the greatest part 
 ■of his time in enquiring^ and consi- 
 dering., and consulting. 
 
 7. It is time for thee to depart 
 from fighting. 
 
 8. Such wert thou to he looked at. 
 
 9. What went ye out to behold ? 
 
 10. For he was stem to behold. 
 
 11. It happens that our state is 
 worthy tc be admired, both in these 
 respects, and besides in others. 
 
 12. If indeed the valiant spirit 
 of thy father has been instilled in- 
 to thee, such a one as he was to 
 perform both a deed and a word. 
 
 13. And by injuring his country 
 both with ships and other troops. 
 
 y.a.t if^aTTU Swoltos 
 
 'ff'oXS/ASW. 
 
 Xw o^(pavog 5ia|<3ra^w.' 
 Boil, xa» 0°^ SflriysXaw 
 
 Ev o"^ ^^iTSu, xai (p^ov- 
 
 Kut^og (fv 6°6 aiesipiiP 
 
 E»^< 5k5w^ TOJOUTOf, 
 
 Tig ^Is^x^M-a*^ ^eao/AOi j* 
 STuyvog ya^ o^aw 5<jxi. 
 
 Kai £V T£ OUTOJ flToX^ 
 
 £v aXXog y»vo^a«. 
 
 E» 8r] rot tfu flfaTii^ ev- 
 (fruE^uP ffcsvog iiuj, oloj: exfi- 
 voj sj/xj rsXew* g^yov re 
 S'Xog <rs. 
 
 Km 6°« sxemg x"^* 
 xaxwff ofoiew, xai t^mi^>j5 
 xai tfr^arjwTijs ^TSgo^, 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 14. 1 myself acquired them by 
 wnf erring foFVours. 
 
 h 
 
 
122 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 15. Thou dost endeavour to de- 
 ceive me, hy purposely speaking 
 things contrary to those on which 
 we were just now agreed. 
 
 16. We gain friends, not hy re- 
 eeiving, but by conferring favours. 
 
 17. I have spent my own pro- 
 perty in doing nothing else than 
 honouring and bestowing gifts, 
 whenever I admired any of the 
 soldiers. 
 
 18. He made those who associ- 
 ated with him, entertain the hope, 
 that they by imitating him would 
 become such. 
 
 19. The accuser said, that he, 
 by selecting also the worst pas- 
 sages of the most celebrated poets, 
 and using these as proofs, taught 
 those who associated with him to 
 be evil-doers and tyrannical. 
 
 20. He observed moreover, with 
 an air of pleasantry, that bethought 
 that Circe made (men) swine, by 
 entertaining them with many such 
 things. 
 
 21. I went to thee, in order to 
 see how thou art. 
 
 22. And thou never growest 
 weary in contriving how these 
 things may be to thy friends. 
 
 raw, ST:ir'ri6r\g svavrioj Xe- 
 j'u 6g^ a^Tt ofjLoXoysw.* 
 
 Ov 'xa(i-)(<ji £u, aXXa 
 5^aw, xraofjoaj o (jjjXoff. 
 
 *0 i5/oj X?''1M'°^ avaXitf- 
 xu, ou^cjj oCKKog tojsw, i\ <r»-- 
 |xaw, xai ;)^aPi^o|xai, orav | 
 
 EX-ri^co 'Toiscm^ o Ci;v- 
 
 ^y\lM (5' avTog o xari?- 
 
 exXsyw"" 6 rrovri^os (fxspos), 
 xai ouTog iia^Tv^iov ^^aw,°* 
 5i(5aCxw 6 Cuvtjjxi? xaxou^^- 
 ^og siixi xai cu^avvixoff. 
 
 xw'T'TwS 6 Ki^xTi Cj flroiewj I 
 TotovTos 'Jtokvs dsnvi^u, 
 
 s-7r»o'x£'ffro|xaj^ -^rwg s^'*'- 
 
 'O'^'cog T£ oijTog yjyvoftcu 
 cpikog oux ttToxafi-vw /At}-. 
 
 PROMISCUOUS. 
 
 23. In living indolently and in 
 loving satiety, pains qmckly cling 
 to pleasures. 
 
 24. This is the way leading to 
 true learning, and it is very difficult 
 m appearance, 
 
 25. Do thou piously reverence 
 
 Ev 6"^ fa5u|xsw xoj k 
 •a'XriO'ixoviiP ayacrctw, £u4l^ 
 Xu-s-r) 6 TjOovtj fljra^a'TiJTvw- 
 
 OuToj ejjxi o5off, aye* 
 flfpog 6 aXii^jvoj iraidsia, 
 xai (xaXa /c ^^aXs^rog ^r^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 I2t 
 
 the things which appertain unto 
 the gods, not only by sacrificing^ 
 but also in abiding by thy oaths. 
 
 26. Who are given to change, 
 and quick in reflecting and in ac- 
 tually performing whatever they 
 maj'" have devised. 
 
 27. But if battles are decided 
 even now as formerly, by those 
 that fight well, thou wouldst not 
 do wrong in taking heart. 
 
 28. For a faithful friend in ad- 
 versity is more pleasant to behold 
 than a calm to mariners. 
 
 29. It is not easy to he told, how 
 much pleasure they feel in having 
 put their enemies to flight, how 
 much also in pursuing^ and how 
 much in slaying their enemies. 
 
 30. He had soon destroyed the 
 wild beasts in the park, by pursu- 
 ing, and striking and killing them. 
 
 31. And leave no pretence to 
 your general of sailing to another 
 place, or of doing something else. 
 
 32. Having said these things, 
 he showed some valuables both 
 numerous and beautiful, and told 
 them of others, so situated that 
 they were not easy to be seen. 
 
 33. I wish, O kmg, rather to fail 
 by acting honourably, than to suc- 
 ceed by deceiving. 
 
 34. And what decrees have been 
 passed against the rich, which, by 
 Cerberus, they have no means of 
 escaping. 
 
 35. By dying I shall afford 
 laughter to my enemies. 
 
 36. A person may know the 
 
 TzXsoj^ s^yov<^ OS av yivud' 
 
 E» fxsyroi, wff'TS^ <^(r- 
 ^sv, Jja 6"® S\i iJ^a-)^o^ai,^ 
 sri y.ai vuv o fJia^Tj xpivw, 
 
 Yli<j-To^ ya^ sv xaxojP 
 cojr,^ x^si(f(fuv yctkyi^ri vau- 
 TiXoc: eiifo^aw. 
 
 jUiev >/J«V«5 SVCJ fV 6"^ TP5- 
 
 Sv o"* 64\)i»»ij, Idos 5e £v 0"*" 
 aToxTtivw » <7roXejjLiof. 
 
 To(-/u 6 «v 6 crapa^sitfog 
 ^T)^jov avaXifl'«y, ^jwxoj, xaj 
 /3oiXXw, xaj xaraxajvw. 
 
 cXsoj aXXoa's, r) rf^arru 
 ctXkog rij dr^oirriyog xa- 
 TaXrj'Tw.^ 
 
 OCtoj s-ro;,^ o ixsv 6sh- 
 xvuw^ "TToXu^ TS xai xaXc^ 
 xrrijaa, o 6s xtj,aaiS w^ jjtrj 
 ^a(5jog siaj Si5w.^ 
 
 BouXofxar 5' ava|, xaXwif 
 ^pacj £|afjLapravw^ jjiaXXov 
 '/) vixaw xaxug. 
 
 Kaj oJoj p^Sj^OTOVsw o 
 •s|-''»)(p<(f;j/a xara 6 -rrXoutfi- 
 0?, Of, fxa Kf^^s^o?, oy- 
 Ssig (j.r}-)(avr] o°^ 5<a(peuyw* 
 uvTog. 
 
 Qvr\(fxuP Ti4»5/x» SfAOf 
 BXH^^ 7sXwg, 
 
 MsXiTTtt ^Xixia &ayi~ 
 
124 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 age of bees in this manner ; those 
 which are but a jear old, are glos- 
 sy, and resemble oil, in colour ; but 
 the elder ones are rough both to 
 look at and to touch, and appear 
 wrinkled by theii' age. 
 
 37. For thou shalt never hy 
 weeping bring up the dead from be- 
 low. 
 
 38. When he was prevented 
 Jrom discharging public duties him- 
 
 «elf, hy being employed about great- 
 er things, he called to him for this 
 purpose, Archiadas, a religious 
 man. 
 
 39. De rebus incertis vero, oracula consultum mittebat suo3, 
 an suscipienda essent. 
 
 40. At iste certe pater tuus aptior est ad docendum minus 
 quam plus habere. 
 
 ourog* 6 fASv auroe-Tijg CtiX- 
 irvos TS £i|xi, xai ejxco™' 
 eXaiov, 6 Xfo"*** ^^ "^f -^- 
 
 Oy ya^ avayw flrors 
 
 avw. 
 
 xwXuw^ 6 '!ro\iny.oc;,y^ dta, 
 6°^ ffS^j lisyag atf^^oXgcfAai,"^ 
 A^X^aSaSy 6 ^cog^ (piXog, 
 Sir* ouTog "Ta^axaXsw.^ 
 
 CHAP. L. 
 
 Two or more negatives strengthen the negation. 
 But if the two negatives belong to two different verbs^ they form 
 an ajirmative. 
 
 1. Nor did any other one of the 
 Greeks suffer any thing in this bat- 
 tle. 
 
 2. That is, not only not to have 
 prejudged any thing. 
 
 3. A mean nature n£!oer does 
 any thing great unto another, either 
 unto an individual or a state. 
 
 4. The other things have no 
 where in no way any communion 
 with any one of the things which 
 are not. 
 
 Ou5g aXXog 5g 'EXX>)w 
 ev ouTo? fxax*} 'J^cl^X'^^ 
 
 OXiTOg £J/JM, OU fXOVOV 6°® 
 
 ^Slg". 
 
 y«ff ou5e ifoTS ov6sigy ovre 
 i8iCA)Trig OUTS 'ffo'kig 5m(,}. 
 'O aXXoj iJ^f] sjjxiff ou- 
 
 xoivuv»a sxw. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 125 
 
 6. I will not omit to ascertain 
 b}^ inquiry the whole truth respect- 
 ing these. 
 
 6. It is disgraceful to deny that 
 he who both labours, and benefits 
 the state most,j|ts not deserving even 
 G> the greatest rewards. 
 
 7. We were compelled to change 
 to the opinion, that the ruling of 
 men was neither among impossible 
 nor difficult things. 
 
 .8. They said that they would 
 not march forth on the ninth day, 
 "if the moon were not at the full. 
 
 9. Cities many in number and 
 difficult to take, if (they are) not 
 (taken) hy a long siege. 
 
 10. I would not pay even an 
 ..'obolus to any person. 
 
 11. Thus there is not even one 
 wise person. 
 
 12. Miserable art thou, in re- 
 proaching me with these things, 
 which every one of these will re- 
 proach thee with. 
 
 13. If thou wishest thus to in- 
 terrogate any one of those here 
 present, every one will laugh. 
 
 14. Both infantry and ships and 
 every thing perished. 
 
 15. He certainly will attack us. 
 
 16. Thou art certainly a gene- 
 rous man. 
 
 17. IT For the then Athenians 
 did not seek for an orator or general 
 through whom they might enjoy a 
 happy slavery. 
 
 18. That he thought, therefore, 
 that command became no one who 
 was not superior to those govern- 
 
 ou ^ag TuvOoQ/ofj-at^ Te^j o^g 
 aXrj^eia. 
 
 Aio'p^^oj £j,at avTiXs^w, 
 
 xa» w9sX£w xotvojj ouTOg 
 xaj jxs^ag a^iow. 
 
 OUTS a5\jvaTos outs 6 yoL- 
 
 Etvacos Ss oux e^s^xo- 
 fxai (pr)fjLi, jut,'/] ou crX»)^7i5 
 ej(ji(g' 6 xvxkog. 
 
 IloXig croXug xai X*^^- 
 iros Xa^§av6o,*' (x») ou X?^" 
 voj xai -^roXio^xja (?\.afji,§a- 
 vw.P%) 
 
 Oux av a-ro^i^w/xj^'* ou- 
 5s av o§oXog ou5e{g. 
 
 OuTwg oux s»/iAi tfoqjog 
 ou5s sJg. 
 
 2u 6' a&Xios ys, ouTog* 
 ovs<5ii^w, 6g^ (fu'^ ovSsis (si. 
 /xi) 6g OUX' °^^ ove»5i(^c»; <ra- 
 
 Ei TJg S^cXw OUTWg s^o- 
 
 jxai h sv^a5s, ou(Js/g (s»|xi) 
 6(3'T<g ou ysXaw."' 
 
 Kai "n-s^cg xa/ vaug, xai 
 ou5ag (sifxi) 6g Tig oux a-R-oX- 
 
 XujXI.'nS 
 
 Oux sijxi o'Twg oux s-ri- 
 
 TlfiripLi'n^ syu, 
 
 Oux sijULi o-n'ojg oux sifxi tfy 
 ygvva^ag avT]^. 
 
 Ou ya^ ^TjTSw^ o tots 
 A^rjvaiog OUTS ^*/TW^, outS 
 dr^arriyos Sia. otfTig 5ou- 
 Xsuw^ SUTUXWg. 
 
 *Oti jxgv ouv oux oiofxai* 
 le^otfrfliu ouSsig ap(ri,S ofl'- 
 Tig jx>} /SsXtiwv gifiwd § o^. 
 
 L2 
 
126 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 ed, is evident to all, even in the 
 things already mentioned. 
 
 19. I again asked thee to give 
 me a thing, than which I knew 
 that thou hadst nothing of less 
 value to give me; nor any thing 
 easier to be commanded. 
 
 20. He does not therefore hold 
 in estimation praise from such per- 
 sons as these, who do not even 
 please themselves. 
 
 21. Wlien he saw him unable 
 to bear the spear, he gave liim 
 the other things, and did not fear 
 that he would not he able to bear 
 them. 
 
 22. They who are most hostile 
 in the play having become friends 
 at last, go out, and no one is killed 
 by uny person. 
 
 23. Since he affords himself to 
 him of the Greeks who wishes to 
 ask whatsoever thing any one may 
 wish, and gives an answer to every 
 me, 
 
 24. But since thou do.st call 
 those things which are many, by 
 one single name, and. dost say that 
 every one of them is a form. 
 
 p^WjP xa» S n'^o^suP tag d^. 
 "kos. 
 
 IlaXiv airsuy^ Cu, og «. 
 S^su^ OUTS dv jnw^oj sijU/jS 6i. 
 ^w(xi^ syu o\)Ssis' OUTS |adio^ 
 
 Ou rojvuy ouSs rioLPOL o 
 TOJouTof e-TTaivoj £v Xoyc)g 
 <r»dy],aj,"' Idyz ov5s auroj 
 
 'Qs o^cfM^ auToj ou 5y- 
 vaixoLt jSarfrai^w^ o 6q»v, 9 
 aXkog 6iO(,)}xi,^ xan oux vpo.^ 
 
 ccurojT. 
 
 Xsur>),? £g£^;)^ojUi-aj, xm ojsq- 
 6vt,ijxu^ Qhosig viTQ ovStig. 
 
 *Ats aurogi -ra^sx^ 
 aurou SP'jjTU'ji 6 'EXXrjv a 
 /3ouXo/xa<? Off TJ? av rtg 
 
 AXX' Sffs;5y] 6 -s'oXyc: oi- 
 coff s/ff Tig crPo(J'ayo^sut^ 
 cvo,aa, xai (py;|xj ou^sij av- 
 '70ff'^(e(,a<) Off t;^ 01) tfvTijLW* 
 
 Ouosjff (ei/J-j) oijTig ou xo»- 
 TttJcXaiw^ 6 cra^'ijjxjjg' 'ttX'/jv 
 ye auToff 2wx^aTr,ff. 
 
 25. He subdued to tears every 
 one of those present, except So- 
 crates himself 
 
 26. Dixerim ego quidem, nemini nullam esse institutionem 
 ab illo qui non placeat. 
 
 27. JVono 7iusquam pugnabit tecum. 
 28^ Nemo non faciet. 
 
 29. Nemini non placet. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 CHAP. LI. 
 
 127 
 
 The article is used to mark a distinction or emphasis. With ihs 
 infinitive it supplies the place of nouns, gerunds, and' supines. 
 With the participle it is translated by the relative and indicative. 
 With fASv and 6i, it signifies partly ; and it is often used for 
 ornament sake. 
 
 1 . The celebrated Socrates seeing 
 the famous Alcibiades. 
 
 2. The famous Leonidas, he of 
 Lacedsemon. 
 
 3. In the beginning-, the mighty 
 God created the heaven and the 
 earth. 
 
 4. And after the seven days, the 
 water of the dehige cr.me upon the 
 earth. 
 
 5. They lead av/ay /Ac Eijphrse- 
 us (I was mentioning) to prison. 
 
 6. The Ismenias (of whom we 
 are speaking) said to him, conduct 
 me in. 
 
 7. For a person to conquer him- 
 self, is the chief and best of all 
 victories ; but for any one to be 
 overcome by himself, is the basest 
 and worst of all things. 
 
 8. To injure-, is nothing difficult, 
 but is in the power of every man : 
 but to benefit, is by no means in the 
 power of every one. 
 
 9. To knoio how to govern 
 others, this appears to us to be sur- 
 prising. 
 
 10. It is honourable even for 
 one who is growing old to learn. 
 
 11. It is better to be dead than to 
 live miserably. 
 
 12. Death is frequently more 
 eligible than life. 
 
 13. Towards the accomplishing 
 •ff those things which he might 
 
 'Opaw 2w3c^aT»]j o AX- 
 *0 A£wvj(5r)j Aaxs^ah- 
 
 Ev 0.?X''\i *'0/Sw' 6 0605 
 
 6 ou^avoj xai 6 yvi, 
 
 '|xa»^ siri 6 ^tj, 
 
 'O IcTjXSvjaf, ayu £yw, 
 
 "Tac: VIX-/9 <zpo:Tog ts xcu 
 
 aurog^ 'jiip' lauTou, itag oLKf* 
 ■^^og TS o-ixa xai xaxog. 
 
 '0"« iJ.sy (SXcLirru, ovSsig 
 j^a^s'TToc:, aXX' avi^^w^o^s 
 
 6au.r, airag. 
 
 TTOJ aXXog C^Ofl'TOCTSUW, ou- 
 
 roff Sav^xadTog sycj (pau 
 EaXoj xat yri^otcfxu^ o°* 
 
 7) ^aw a^Xjwj. 
 
 AiPSroj st(xi TfoWoiXii 
 
 E'ff'i 0"® xuTSPyu^oiiai 
 0$ s-^ri^ufz-sw, (T'uVTo^aoj o5oj 
 
128 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 desire, he thought that the short- 
 est route lay through hoili perjury, 
 and falsehood, and deceit. 
 
 14. He contrived the rendering 
 his soldiers obedient, fwm his join- 
 ing ivith them in committing injus- 
 tice. 
 
 15. Since he wishes to be vic- 
 torious in the pancratium, having 
 considered with thee, he will as- 
 sociate with this one, whosoever 
 may appear to him to be the fittest 
 
 for his practising these things, 
 
 16. We notwithstanding an- 
 nounce, by our having alwo,ys grant- 
 ed permission to him of the Athe- 
 nians who has wished it. 
 
 17. We spend the time of acting 
 in making ourselves ready. 
 
 18. Upon this, Xenophon took 
 counsel with the rest, what it be- 
 hoves them to do about their go- 
 ing up any farther on the expedi- 
 tion. 
 
 19. A sower v»^ent out to sow, 
 and in sowing, some seeds fell by 
 the way side, and the birds came 
 and ate them up. 
 
 20. Woe, woe, woe to those 
 who dioell upon the earth, from 
 the remaining blasts of the trum- 
 pet of the three angels who are 
 about to sound, 
 
 21. But when they had supped, 
 and it was night, they who were 
 ordered went and seize upon the 
 mountain. 
 
 22. Chirisophus having inspect- 
 ed the entrails, led (his force) along 
 the road, while they who had seized 
 
 oio|JLai^ Sipij 5ia o°* s-jfio^- a 
 
 ifa^sx(*)y sx o°e (fvmdixsu \ 
 
 E-rsj viXYjrpo^og /3ouXo- [ 
 jxai'* 6 ifa.yx^a.Tm ;^jvo(Aa»,* ; 
 (Tyv tfu (Txsrrw,™^ hg wi 
 Soxsu anTog Ixavog £j|x; s«j 
 
 tfuvsjai. 
 
 /3ouXo/j-a»,& 
 
 Sig 6"^ 'TTa^aCxsua^w ava- 
 XjCxw. 
 
 Ex Qvrog o f/.sv Scvo(puv 
 
 r.ne 
 
 •jTcPj o"« STi avcd cTT^arsuw.' 
 
 •TTa^a 6 hdog, xa.i s^^ofi/Oi* 
 6 crgTSivov, xa< xaratpayti 
 auTo^. 
 
 Oua/, cuai, ouou 6 xa- 
 T0IX5W g-rj 6 yr], £x 6 Xoi-. 
 crog (pwv-*) 6 ffaX<ffj^| 6 T^eiff 
 a^^eXog 6 jxeXXw ffaX-^'i^w. 
 
 E'ff'Si 5s ^tj-rvsw^ xai vuf 
 juiaf,^ xai xuTukaiJ.^avu & 
 
 a/w^ (6 (jT^oLTSviia) xcurct 
 6 6(5oj* 6 5s', 6 o^og xwop 
 
 { 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 129 
 
 tLpon the mountain and the height 
 advanced. 
 
 23. But their king, loho loas m 
 the wooden tower lohich was huilt 
 upon the height, would not come 
 out, nor those loho were in the place 
 which luas first taken. 
 
 24. How then? said Gobrvas. 
 Because, replied he, it behoves us 
 to display these things as injuring 
 I len, but those as benefitting. 
 
 25. It appears to me, to be a 
 more difficult thing to find a man 
 supporting prosperity in a becom- 
 ing manner, than adversity ; for 
 tke former gives rise to insolence in 
 most persons, the latter to modera- 
 tion in all. 
 
 26. Those vAih the king also 
 died ; one, while opposing some- 
 thing ; d/noiher, while fleeing ; and 
 a third, while striving to protect 
 himself with whatever he could. 
 
 27. Having adopted this prin- 
 ciple, he has conquered and pos- 
 sesses all things ; j9(3r^/?/ as one 
 would possess, having taken them 
 in war, and partly, having made 
 them fidends and auxiliaries to him- 
 self. 
 
 28. Come then, what sayest 
 thou is the number of thy force ? 
 There are, said he, Median horse- 
 men more than ten thousand. 
 
 29. For one man is better than 
 ten, by working in season, 
 
 30. IT But after the second ir- 
 ruption of the Peloponnesians, the 
 Athenians, since both their terri- 
 tory was ravaged the second time, 
 and the plague as well as the war 
 afflicted them, altered their senti- 
 ments. 
 
 Xaix^avw® xai o ax^ov, s-rsi- 
 
 'O 5s (3a(fi\svg avrog, o 
 (f»|xi) sv jxoa'uv 6 «*' axpov 
 oixo(5oa£w,'' oux &s\uP e^s^- 
 
 TLCjg 6r\ ; (priixi 6 FtJ- 
 Qpias' OTJ, 9rijXJ, 6 fJL£y 
 
 Aoxeoj syu ycCKz^og Bi- 
 {Li s-'^jj'xw*' ayi}^ 6 aya- 
 
 xo^-P" 6 f,i£v yo(P o§^J5 6 ffo- 
 
 Kai (fvv (3a(fiXs-jg 5s 
 a.'rc&\i-r}iiu.(,),^ o jxsv -Tr^ocaX- 
 Xw"™ Tjj, 5s (psvyoj, 6 5s 
 ySy xat ajAuvw"* orfTij §vva.. 
 
 OuTog 5(;^ao(i.ai^ o yvw. 
 1X7) 'n^ag xc(.ro.aTPS(ptA},P xat 
 cp^ij* oP" jx?v, u)g av al- 
 fsw^o Tig sp(w iroXsixog, 6 
 ^£, cru/XfAap^og"^ xaj 91X05'^® 
 
 •TTOIcW.^ 
 
 Tig -TrXii^og (pTjjxi sifxi ; gifn, 
 (pi1(XJ, Mr]5og I'TT'TSUg fASV 
 •TroXug 6 (ui'U^ioi. 
 
 Eig ya^ av>)^ cra^a 
 ^sxa (Jiacpspw 6 gv w^a £^- 
 ya(^o/j.ai. 
 
 MJra 5s 6 5cUTS^og etf- 
 §0X11 6 IIsXo'Trovvyja'iog, i 
 A&7ivaiog, wg t5 7*3 aurog 
 
 T£(Ji.VW° 6 5suTe^0g, Xttl 
 
 vorfog s-ffixsifji-ai^ a/xa xai o 
 croXjfxog, aXXojow"^ o yvw- 
 
130 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 31. What does the in other re- 
 spects divine Plato ? wisliing to 
 speak of the tablets of laws, " hav- 
 ing written," says he, " they v/ill 
 lay up in their temples the cj'press 
 memorials." 
 
 32. In this way also the famous 
 lawgiver of the Jews, no common 
 man he, when he had formed a 
 just conception of the power of the 
 Deity, even expressed it. 
 
 33. To succeed well beyond be- 
 sert, is to the imprudent the occa- 
 sion of thinking wrong : w^herefore 
 to have preserved good things, often 
 seems to be- more difficult than to 
 have acquired them. 
 
 34. Pythagoras said, that these 
 two things were given from the 
 gods to men as the best, viz. to 
 speak truth, and to do good. 
 
 35. But if ever there be any 
 suspicion of a scarcity of those 
 things whence these are to a?ise, 
 there is no fear'lest I lead thee to 
 the atlainment of these things, by 
 thy labouring and undergoing priva- 
 tions in body and in mind. 
 
 36. That man, I think, who, in 
 opposition to these things, is tem- 
 perate in relation to corporeal 
 gratifications, adheres also to his 
 oath, and happens to be an easy 
 person to have dealings with, and 
 fond of striving with regard to the 
 not being inferior in benefitting those 
 luho do him a good turn. 
 
 37. Thinking, therefore, that 
 the contempt of enemies gives 
 rise to a certain confidence for en- 
 gaging, he previously instructed 
 the cryers to sell naked those of 
 the barbarians who were taken by 
 the robbers. 
 
 IIXaTwv ; SsXr og dsXw 
 
 fjt-VTj.aa." 
 
 OuTog^ xai lou^aiog 
 
 v'JS av7)P, eiTSiSyi 6 6 ^sw* i 
 ^)tw,^ xai exqjajvw.^ 
 
 (ft^oveu 6 avo'OToj yivo/xar 
 ^loTTs^ iroXKaxig 5oxfw o** 
 
 HvQayoPas Xe^'w,^ 8ji 
 
 OUT Of ef ©£0» 6 UvQPO}<7fOS 
 
 Si^uij.i' xaXof, 6"® <rs aXij- ' 
 ^Suw, xai o"* svs^ySTcu. -I 
 Eav 6t If are ^»vo/Ji-a»* Tiff ■ 
 v'rro-^ioi (fxavig^ acp' hg eifM 
 ovrcg, ov (poCoi, jxvj Cu ayoi^ 
 snri 6,"® 'jroviCj Jtai raXat-ro- 
 
 i 
 (ExflVCJ^) OlUCf.l i7.£V, OJ ' 
 
 TavavTja OL/-rog,S syxPccTrig ! 
 fjisv £i/j.i 5«a 6 (rwfxa« ■ 
 TjJovii. suo^xoj 5e, xa» «y- 
 ^vix^oXog £;^< ruyxuvu, xca 
 (piXovsuroj 'Tf^o? 6"^ jxr) eX- 
 
 XSJvTCd £U -a 0<£W SVS^yiTSU. 
 
 'Hysoi^at §s 6"« xara- 
 
 (pPOVSW 6 ffoXj/XJOf |wf/,1J TIf 
 
 6 XTjtfTrjg aXjffxw ^a^§a|o£ 
 yu.ava^ ffwXew, 
 
eREEK EXERfclSES. 
 
 131 
 
 38. There may be great excess 
 in all the things wliich we have 
 
 f mentioned ; the one, drawing us to 
 ! extravagance ; the other ^ driving us 
 fo baseness. 
 
 39. The expression "jnan," or 
 " white," does not denote the time 
 ^\-ben ; but this, *' he walks," or 
 
 he has walked ;" the former de- 
 
 juiev, flfPoff "ToXutsXt)^ £|. 
 Xeuxoj:,"* ou -Tr^ocfrjjxaivw 6°* 
 
 notes the present, the latter the past. 
 
 40. Horum minime est, qui prudentiam exercent, vim in- 
 ferre; sed illorum est, qui vires hahtnt absque consilio, tale 
 iacere. 
 
 41. duo autem modo mihi visus sit familiaribus suis pro- 
 ^sse, partim opere semetipsum demonstrans, qualis esset, pccT' 
 tim coUoquiis usus, scribani. 
 
METAPHRASIS. 
 
 *^ Verbum aliquod poeticum cum per alteram prosaicum 
 ejusdera linguae interpretetur tjnro, cognitionem vocabulo- 
 rum duplo augebit atque adeo majores solito prefect us fa- 
 ciet. Eadem quoque opera maturius videbit, quid difFerant 
 vocabula antiquissimae Greecias et recentioris, ac quid poe- 
 ticae notae nomina et prosaicae. Vim porro particularum, 
 quae Graeco interprete aliis redduntur, discernere adsuescet" 
 Burgess {Episcopi Mensvensis) Initia HoTnerica, 
 v Praef. vi. 
 
 SIMILITUDINUM SERIES EX ILIADE 
 COLLECTARUM. 
 
 Z. 146—149. 
 
 *uXXa Ttt fX8v r' avSfAog ^a(xa5;5 p^ssi, aXXa 5e if fiXij 
 TyiXedowcTa (pu£», sa^og 5' S'TTiyiyvsrai w^rj* 
 *'ClS avS^oiv ysvsri, »j fji-sv (pusi, »j 5' a'7roX'»)ys», 
 
 " As is the generation of leaves, so is also that of men.. 
 Some leaves the wind scatters upon the ground, while others 
 the budding wood produces, and they bloom in the season of 
 spring. Thus the generation of men — one springs up, ano- 
 ther ends." 
 
 'Oiroios (puXXov (pvdig, toioutoj xai o av»]^. *0 (puXXov 6 ffcw 
 i av£ju,oj X"-^^ ^•'B'TW Its^oj ds o uX>) o gudaXrjj jSXatfravw gflri 6 g 
 »a^ yivojxai xa»^g*» oijrwg 6 avrj^ o ysvog,? flTore ^-^ /3Xa(fravw, flrorf 
 
GREEK EXERCISE9. 1$^ 
 
 I, 323—327. 
 
 ' ilg xaj fyw leoKKas |*£v aOffvoug vuxTaj lauov, 
 "Hjxara 5' aifxarosvra 8is<ie^ri<faov •roXe/Xi^wv, 
 AvJ^aCi fxa^vafAevoj, ort|wv ^vsxa tfcpSTS^awv, 
 
 " As a bird brings food to her unfledged young, when sli« 
 hath found it, and yet it is badly with herself ; so I alst) have 
 spent many sleepless nights, and gone through bloody day* 
 in combat, fighting with heroes, for the sake of their wives.'' 
 
 fflrsj5av Xajx§avw,^<l xoxwj 5s xai aurou vira^w outw xayw iroXyj 
 ftE» avirvog vu| (Jia^w,'' ^fxg^a 5g aifWXTowPS^ diavuw^ ^roXsfJiStj* avrf. 
 
 O. 360—364. 
 
 Tij ^' olye <^o5(6ov«ro (paXayy7)5ov, if^o 6* AiroXXwir, 
 
 *Pfia fwtX', wff 6r£ rij ■^.ali.a6ov iratg (Ly/\ hoiKwi^rff 
 ^OCt* siisi ouv 'Xoi'^cfji a&v^fiaroL v^i-jriETjffjv, 
 A-^z at^rig tfuvgp^fug flTotfjv xaj X^^^'^j c^'^f^v. 
 
 " Along this way then they poured forward in troops, an^ 
 Apollo before them, holding the awful -ffigis. But he de- 
 stroyed the wall of the Greeks very easily, as when a boy 
 would the sand near the sea ; who, when with childish incli- 
 nation he may have formed play-things, again overtumi 
 Ihem with his feet and hands, sporting." 
 
 Aia oCrog^ OS nirog ^ts^oftoi^ (paXayyijSov siw^oifdev 6s o AflfoX- 
 Xcjv Aiyig xars^u o fifyaXoTijXog* xaTa€aXXw" 6s 6 csip^og o 'EXXti? 
 hjxoXws Xiav, ug 6ts Tig xara 6 4/a|Xjxog iraig flrXiitfjov o 6a'kouf<fa' 
 ktfttg sireidav iroisu^^ Araiyviov o a^^tfyvij,? ^-aXw |wra ovrof tf'V7«^ 
 
134 GREEK EXERCISES 
 
 n. 257—265. 
 
 O) 5' dtjjia riar^oxXw fAeyaX^jro^e 6u^viX^(vTSi 
 
 A'jTua ^5 (fcpr,xs(t(fi\/ soixorej sfj^^eovro 
 Ejvo(5»o»j, ooff raidsg SPJ^fiofivoucriv ff^ovTCf, 
 Ajsi xsero^sovreg, hdu) siti oix*' .£;;^ovraj, 
 Nr]7naj(o»' ^uuov (5s xaxov •roXejo'Cj rj^eiCj. 
 Toug (5' e« ':r5^ -s'ttPa rig <rs xjwv av&^witos oJjrjjff 
 Kjvi^Cej aexwv, o< (5' aXx;fjLov rjTo^ s-^ovrsg 
 IlPodtjuj <sag vsTETui, xai afxiivsj oio'i rsxec^cf;. 
 
 Those, however, who were armed along with the mag- 
 naiiunous Patrockis, marched in good order, till, full of cour- 
 age, they rushed upon the Trojans. Im.mediately the}' pour- 
 ed out hke to wasps dwelling by the road, which foolish 
 boys, according to custom, iiTitate, constantly vexing them 
 maintaining their habitations on the road ; and cause a com- 
 luon evil unto many. For if perchance any way-faring man, 
 travelimg there, disturb these unintentionally, then they, pos- 
 sessing a courageous heart, all,, to an insect, fly forth and de- 
 fend theu" young." 
 
 Ovrog 5g a/xa Har^oxkog o iisyaXo-^^vxpg '^"^"^^^^^ <ro^eiiw,°^ ius 
 $v 6 T^wg: ixsyacp^ovcuS s-TTj^aivw/ Eu^swj ^S cTip-/)^ l^oiog S'lfiTt^rnii^^ 
 K^^oov s^£(/Jij^sr <jfa^o5iogj hg 'tta.ig flra^oguvw (i\)vi\^-/\g, asi s^t^ii^Wj strt o 
 •Sog^ otxia 6;)(U, v»]'jt'joj' xoivcg 6s xaxog o croXuc; rj^T^ar Ourogya^ 
 sav rfs^ rig rs <;ra^s^-)(^opMi av^pwrog odoiiropog xjvsw axuv, oiiTog Ss i<!y(y' 
 
 n. 297—300. 
 
 'Clg (5' or' a^* u%|./r)X>]j xo^v(pY,g o^5ocr iisyaXoii 
 KjvTjC'ei -ffyxivy^v vstpeXr^v dTS^orrriyBPSra Zpj?, 
 Ex T* 5^avov "iraCai Cxocriai xai 'ttpwovsj ax^oj, 
 Ka» vacrai, oujPavo^ev 5' a|' y-rs^^ayrj aCffsroj aidij^. 
 
 " As when from the lofty summit of a vast mountain, Jove^ 
 ■*-ho collects the lightning, shall remove a thick cloud, forth 
 in an instant appear all the rocks, and high ridges, and forests,' 
 while from the heavens, immeasuiable aether thereupon bur»t« 
 Jbrih upon the view." 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 135 
 
 A. 127—131. 
 
 Ou5s tff^cv, Msv£Xa;,^£oi fj.oi.xa^:S 'ksXoMvro 
 
 'H Toi "TT^otrdcv (TraCfx /SsXocr e)(;s-:rcuxe5 ajxuvev 
 'H ds Totfov pwSv se^ysv wrro X^°''?j '^^ ^''"^ i^'^T"'^^ 
 
 " Nor v/ere the blessed immortal gods forgetful of thee, 
 Menelaus, and first the plundering daughter of Jove, who, 
 standing before thee, averted the deadly arrow. She repelled 
 it from his body, as much as when a m.other drives away a 
 fly fi-om her son, when he reclines in sweet sleep." 
 
 OvSs Cu, w Msvs'Kacg, o ^soj 6 iiaxa^toc; £'r<Xav5o/Aa»^ o a<5avaT05, 
 •r^wrog 6s 6 Zsuj &vyaTy\^ o a^sXsiog, o^tjct tfu gji/.'n'^oa'/^sv lo'rr],ai'' o 
 ^sXoj "^rr/c^o^ ocfforfoSsw^ aurog (5s toCoutoc: fn-ev xwXuw^ a-jro 6 tfwjuia, 
 xaj&aifs^ If^'flT'o^ sx. 'jraig xwXuw (xuta, ors yXuxucr xotfjiawP^^ u'S'voj. 
 
 r. 10—14 
 
 Eut' o^so.? xoPvcp7}ifi NoTOf xa'j-ep^suev ojifcip^Xiiv, 
 itoijxefTjv ouTi (pjXrjv, x\snrrr) 6s ts vvxTog a.asjvwj 
 Totftfov Tig t' e-nXfuc'ff'ti, 6(j'ov t' sin Xaav jtjo'iv 
 fij a^a T60V i-ffo Too'a'j xovjcfa'aXoj w^vut' asXXTjj; 
 E^p^ojxsvwv jxaXa 5' wxa 6\:irpri<i<i(i^ irs6mo, 
 
 " As when the south wind has poured down a mist upon 
 "the brow of a mountain, by no means agreeable to the shep- 
 herd, but to the thief better than night, and one sees as far 
 as he casts a stone, thus the excited dust rose from beneath 
 their feet as they advanced, and they crossed the plain with 
 great rapidity." 
 
 Ka^a-TTs^ 6'/\ sv 6 xo^iKpT^ o^og o Notoj o ofjt-i;)(;X'>] xara^^sw,' o -Troijxrjv 
 w6aii,(jig TT^ocfcpiXog^ o xXs-r-Trjg 6s 6 vu| x^sjCCwv, xai Tocfoiirog Tig e(p<). 
 ^w, Sep' ocToj Xi<3o5 a^iTiju-/- ourw 5r] u<7ro o crouj outoj xovjo^rog 5ia- 
 ygj^ojP- asXXw(5»j5 'jo^suw™^ Xiav 6s Tap^swg 5ja 6 cre^iov 6\s^o\ka\.^ 
 
186 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 r. 23—29. 
 
 *Cl(frs Xswv ex^r^ iuL£/aXiJ eiri tfoiiAan xu^tfoj, 
 Eu^wv r; eXa^ov xi^acv, r^ ayfjov aiy'a, 
 n£;vauv pi/aXa ya^ ts xaT£Ct)ie/, eiTf^ av aurcr* 
 2£uwvra» Ta^^S? ts xuvec, daXc^oi r' ai^TjOi' 
 *nj ^X^fl MsvsXaof AXs^avG^ov dsoei^Ea 
 O^aXfLOjtfjv i^wv* (park ya^ 'nCa.ffda.i aXeiTTj*. 
 
 " He rejoiced like a lion having- lighted, when hungry, 
 ^pon a huge carcase, having foand either a horned stag 
 oar wild goat ; for he greedily devours it, although swift dogs 
 and blooming youths stir themselves in pursuit of him. Thu» 
 rejoiced Menelaus, when he beheld vnih his eyes the hand- 
 some Paris ; for he conceived that he would chastise the 
 guilty one." 
 
 ^6$ x£^c(.<f ^opog, t] ayms ai^ csivau, Xiav ya^ xara-fuyu, xavrsf 
 avTos 5iwxu Ttt^vg Te xuwv, xtt* sv^aXr;^ nos. OUug yonPuP^ i 
 
 (XfMX^CijXo^, 
 
 P. 1—6 
 
 Ou^' iXad' Ar^eof ulov, a^T^iXov MsveXow, 
 
 IlaTfoxXog T^weffCi (5a|ji.£ij ev ^^'/oTiiri. 
 
 Br) 6s 6ia "jr^of^a^wv xsxo^ud/xsvog af^o^*! yayjiur 
 
 Aft^j ^' a^' auTSd /3aiv', iff t»s 'jtepi to^axt it'ttrri^, 
 
 n^WTorexog, xivuptj, ou t^jv £i5oia toxoid, 
 
 ■^fi^ flffi^i IlaT^oxXw /Sttivs fav^off MsvsXao?. 
 
 " Nor did Patroclus, subdued in battle by the Trojarw, 
 elude the obsenation of the son of Atreus, the warlike Me- 
 nelaus ; but he advanced through the foremost combatants, 
 armed in shining brass. Round him then he stalked, like 
 any dam round its young, hanng brought forth for the first 
 lime, moaning, not being before acquainted with pariuriticn ; 
 so stalked the yellow-haired Menelaus round Patroclus." 
 
 Oux Xavdavw° 5e h I Ar^euj -j'log o qjiXoflroXspioj McveXaog o JJa- 
 r^oxXoff Izo T^wff 9ov£yw^ ev 6 ftax'*'' noPSuijP^ ds 5ia o r^o^ta- 
 ^off xadocrXi^w" Xa/xcr^oj x^^^''^' "^-f ^^ ^'l auToj /xaxo[Wu^ ucT-rf* 
 CEfi 5afiia>uff i^rirr,^ T^u;Toroxog:, d^r^vr^-ixo?, ou s'pTcPov ecjtfTajiot 
 
EXCERPTA 
 
 E DUOBUS 
 
 GR-ffiCIS HOMERI PROSAICIS VERSIONIBUS, 
 
 Altera Pahaphrasi, altera Metaphrasi^ 
 OJE EXTANT IN MSS. BODLEIANIS APUD OXQNIENSES, 
 
 COLLATA CDM 
 
 PLATONIS 
 
 EJUSDEM LOCI ENARRATIONE. 
 
 ILIADIS LIBRI PRIMI 
 
 LOCUS, aUI INCIPIT A VERSU OCTODECIMO, 
 
 I, 
 
 AT^si(5ai rs xai aXXoi si)xvy)|xi5s^ Ayam, 
 'Xfjiiv fiev ^fo» 5oisv, oXu/xiria 6u)\kOiT^ syovrsSi 
 Exire^tfai n^iajxoio croXiv, «u 5' o»xa5' ixsCdai* 
 Ilai^a 5s fAoi Xurfairs (piXi^v, Ta 5' a'Ji'ojva ^sp^stf^s, 
 *A(^ojui.suo» Aioj uiov lx>5§oXov A-TroXXwva. 5 
 
 Evd' aXXoj jxgv flfavrsj eirsujpyj/xriO'av Ap(aioi, 
 Ai^eitfdai 4' Ig^iia, xoi ayXaa 5sx^ai a*oiva* 
 AXX' oux Ar^SiSji AyafAe/xvovi yjv^avs ^ufxw" 
 AXXa xaxwg a(pȣi, x^are^ov 5' E'b'; /xu^ov stsXXs* 
 M»j tfs, ye^ov, xci^Tjifiv eyu cr'a^a viiuo'i xij^siw, ^0 
 
 H vuv ^tj^uvovt', 11 iidrs^ov avrig lovra, 
 Mr) vu Toi ou "X^ontfi^jf tfxTiirr^ov xai (in\k^ 6soio, 
 Tiiv 5' gyw ou Xutfw, 9r^»v fjwv xai 7>j^aj gflrsitfiv, 
 'H/xers^w evi oixw, gv A^ei T>)Xofii ifa-r^g, 
 'ItfTov g'n'oi)(o|ui^>iv, xai Sftov Xsp^oj avriowtfav. ]5 
 
 AXX* 1^1, juiQfj (x' s^sdt^Sj (fauTS^os its xs veijai. 
 'fig S(paT** s55ei(fsv S* 6 ys^wv, xai siesi^ero jutudoi. 
 Bi? 5' axswv -ff-a^a diva <7roXu(pXoi(J'§oio daXatftfij^, 
 HoXXa 6* E-reiT* acraveuOs xiwv »)^ad' o yp^aioj - 
 M2 
 
188 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 AifoWuMi avaxri, <rov -yjuxofjuoj rsxs A»}tw. 20 
 
 KiXXav T£ Ja^srjv, Tsvs^oio rs icpt avatTrfSij, 
 
 2|X(v^£u- ei-iroTS roi ^(^a^isvT' sttj vv)ov e^s%]>a, 
 
 H e» 5?) -rors toj y.ara irma, ,a>)jpr £xr)a 
 
 TauPwv 7)5' a»ywv, to^j jxoi x^r]i5vov seXSug' 25 
 
 TiCeittv Aavaoj J/Jia doLx^vct tfoitfi (3s'ks<t<ftv, 
 
 " Ye sons of Atreus, and ye other well-armed Greeks, may 
 the gods, who possess the Olympic mansions, grant that ye 
 may destroy the city of Priam, and return in safety to joiur 
 homes. But give freedom to my beloved daughter, and re- 
 ceive these ransoms, reverencing' the son of Jove, the far-dart- 
 ing Apollo." Then all the other Greeks assented to respect 
 the priest, and to accept the rich ransoms. But it pleased not 
 the mind of Agamemnon, the son of Atreus, but he dismissed 
 him with disgrace, and added a threatening speech. " Let 
 me not find thee, old man, either nov/ loitermg at the hoilow 
 ships, or again returning, lest perhaps the sceptre and garland 
 of the god avail thee not. For this female I will not free, old 
 age shall first come upon her, in my honie in Argolis, far fi"orn 
 her native land, plying the web, and sharing my bed. But 
 begone and irritate me not, in order that thou mayest depart 
 in safety." Thus he spoke, and the old man was afraid, and 
 obeyed his order. He v/alked in silence along *he shore of 
 the loud-roaring sea, and ha-ving gone apart, the old man then 
 poured forth an earnest prayer to king Apollo, whom the faii- 
 haired Latona bore : " Hear me, O god of the silver baw, thou 
 who protectest Chrysa and the glorious Cilia, and rulest 
 bravely over Tenedos, O Sminthian god, if ever I decorated 
 with garlands thy beautiful temple for thee, or if ever I con- 
 «umed in honour of thee fat thighs of bulls or of goats, accom- 
 phsh this desire for me ; May the Greeks, with thy arrows, 
 render a speedy atonement for m,y tears." 
 
 II. 
 
 PARAPHRASIS. 
 
 n At^bi^-o? cs xaj aXKos Ap^aio? ir'oXsafG'TT;^- tfu fisv siSs SiSuin^ & 
 deos 6 oixew o\)Pa\>tog cix>i(X«, sxiro^&iu^ jl/^sv 6 -ttoXj^ 6 IlPtaiJ^og, xaXwc: 
 Ss a.'jfs^oij^nn'^ sig sauTou 01x0.^ sxaffroc:' eyo) 8s l 'jraig (p»Xog Xuw,* 
 fiUTog (5s a-^oivov Ssyoi^o-h^ suXa?sofi.ai 6 vhg Zsvg, To^^Swd^v to^suw 
 AiroXX'oiv, k i?-P£v^ S7W. (5) Tore aXXoj [X5v -jcas A^ajof fia-iSoaw* 
 
GBEEE EXERCISES. 139 
 
 «|iow= a{5,-o|xaj ts o U^svg, xa» o ifs^ixakXrig mros aifomv Ss-^^oiuu-"^ 
 aXX' ovx a^sCxw^ o Ar^siSris Aya^sp-vuv ouro? xara o auroj 4'^X*'' ^^* 
 ^ rfxXTj^wg- auroj a'T'offSfji'Trw,^ STriTa^/xa (5s Sffira-rrw^ (Juvatfrsta^ xai 
 
 xojXos vau5<i s/w xaraXa.a^avw* (10) >) vuv (J^jduvo;, i^ ytfTS^ov f-rav. 
 Jift; •" iva 1^7] ou ;)(P'iitfj,a£uw^ Cu o |a§5o<: xai 6 tfTSfx^a 6 ^soj , S(f)' 65 
 
 ^^^e6J »;XW. OiJTCg ^5 S^U OU XuT^OVP SXeU^c^OW, "^T^IV St' ttUTOj E^- 
 
 ^(^o/xaj^ 6 }/r)^aj sv 6 ffxog ojxo^, sv 6 A^yoXig, -Jro^lw 6 irar^ij auTOf, 
 ICroff ixsra-xsi^i^cijjai xaj £|xoj xojrr,*^ vnrTj^srSi^' ('15) aXX' a-TreijUt,!, 
 /Li->1 eyw SisysiPCjj, us av ai^o^/jijoj ars^^cfxai.^ ■ O-jtwj STiratfCw^ tpo- 
 t£wP^ OS ys^'^n, xat 'TFj^wP^ 6 stirayixa- aTe^;)^o,aai^ (5s dturrau ju,£t' 
 /xffXi^^i^, tX'/]5'iov 6 ajyiaXog? 6 Qakadtja, c'uvs])^*]^ 7)j^y) 6 *a^a 9 
 ai^iaXogPg' S'Tr/xXutfjg'^ -roisw,? 6 'Kopsiol -Tro/ew™* nitB^-^oiio.i^ 6s ■ji'o^^w 
 • yriPttiog sirtrsraiisvct:^ avacs^Tru^ sup^ij AttoXXwv, avaf, of S 
 xaXXixo,aoj cixrw^ Arjrw (20) Xs^WjS scraxouw^ syu, A^yv^oro^oe;, 
 if 6 X^ua'aj? vnts^aJiri^u, y.ui KiXXa 5ia Cu ^siofaTOf, xa/ Ts- 
 ,vS(5of& x^aT(x»wf r.vao'tJ'w ; 2fA;v5gi;f • tiiro^s (fu E'TTj 6 vaog <!rePixaXKrii 
 wjccCrtiia y.at sra/wvcj?" (tspoj? avaTii)'>].aj'^ i^ sj^rrors Cu fJt-rj^of Xwra. 
 jog cau^of xaj c<i| Xc-raxaiw,^ ourof ^tw STTi^ujuiJa TfXsiow* ^j^wfi^j" 
 /iavaof 6 ctpoCtixw? <r;ixw^ja £»f £x(5jx'>;c'jf s,aof Jax^u. 
 
 111. 
 
 METAPHRASIS. 
 
 n Ar^uf crajf, xai Xoitoj suo'n'Xof 'EXXtjv tfu jX8v 5i'of <ra«- 
 ^w^ 6 OXt'i^ffog xaTOjxsw, sxiro^ko)^ Il^ia/xof 6 -roXjf, xai xa>.wf 
 l«f orxsiogP" 'xaea.yivoixat.^ 'O rr^o(f(pi\os 6s syu QoyuTriP Xur^ow,"^^ 
 •uTof 5e 5w^ov 5s;^o,aai/ a^cfjoai Zsuf uiof 6 pi-ax^o§oXof AtoXXwv. 
 (5) Tots ixev 'E^Xtjv aXXcf icag (j.st fuqjr/pLia ^oaw,'^ euXa^copt-ai 
 fl-e Is^suf, xai 6 XafX'r^of (Jip^ojaai^ Jw^^ov aXX' ou 6 Ar^svg craif 
 Aya/7-£,avrwv<i a^xsw^ 6 •I'^x^,^ aXXa jxf^' ^§^15 acrcffSjX'Trw,^ a-rrsiXyj- 
 f ixof (5s Xoyof Xs^w.^ Mr,5a,awi:, gj crpSff^s-jT'jjf, s-tti 6 ySa^uj g^w 
 re vaus^ xa-TaXa,a§av6J,^ (10) 7] vuv £7X.^°^*<?'*' ''I ^^ ^surs^og -jraXiw 
 ff-njpayivojxai,^ IX'/j-Trwf oux av tfj ^^r^kiJ' 6 ^a€5of, xai^o tfrsipavwfxaP 
 t ^sof. OuTof e^w oux airoXuw, yrj^ag aurof ifporspov KaraXa/x- 
 favw sv -Jj^aSTcPof o!xo? sv 6 Ap/oXig ao^^w ffa^^if, itfrou^ysw xat 
 i(paivw xai sif 6 s.aoj xojt^ 'j-rav-raw, (15) AXX' a-rsifxi, j^rj s^^w 
 ira^o|uvw, hifug av (Tw^wi"? S7:'avs^)(^o|xai.° 0-jrwf stw,^ (5c ysfwv 
 f>o§swP^ xa» •rsi^w'"- 6 Xoyof. IIo^suwP^ Ss y}(jvxug, -^a^a 6 ai^ia- 
 Xog» 'jfo'kv7apa-)(^og ^oCKadda' -roXuc;?" 5s (xSTa cuTof a'To^sv 'ttopsvwP* 
 tv/oii-ai,^ ys^o;v (Ba.diXsvg A<;roXXwv, of 6 y.aXKixoixog ysvmu* 
 Atjtcj. (20) ETTaxouw^ syu, Aajx-n-PoTolof, odrig - 6 X^iKT'a* U'ffsp-' 
 f*ap(w xaj ^sjof xa» ^au^j-aCrof KiXXa, xai 6 TevS(5of& l^'x^^wf /3a- 
 
140 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 riXeuw, (J 2fAiv4iog' sav Cu ctots atp^a^fP" xai xaXogP" e^t o va«t 
 ^cQpavow,* 1) si-n-e^ crore tfu Xi-Tra^og xai /xrj^jajoj otfreov xa»w^ <rau^ 
 »} xai aig* ouTog eyu rrX*]^ow^ 6flndujxr](ji,a* Tifjiw^ja 5»^wfii^ o 'EXX»|» 
 aiwi Sfws 5ax^j o (To^ jSsXoj. 
 
 IV. ' 
 
 PLATONIS ENARRATIO. 
 
 T^oia, avTos Ss tfwt^w^f 6 6s 6uyaTr,^ ov^ auTog^^ Xyw,^ ^sj^ojuwxi^ 
 acroivov, xai o dsoj aiJeo.aai.^s (5) ToiouTog os gcrw^s avros^s 6 fjL» 
 cXXo^ CsSo/xaj^ xai (fuvaivew'^ o Js AyafjLsjxvwv ay^iaivw,^ svtsXXo- 
 {jiaiSvuv <rs sifjt-i,^ (10) xa» au^ig fJuTj g^ofxai," (Xi^ auToj tots CxTiir- 
 T^ov xai 6 ^£0^ tfTSjXfjiaP oux ecra^xsw^** tpiv 5s XuwP^^ avrogs 6 ^u- 
 yartj^, sv A^os (prijxi yrj^ctdxui^ ixsrcc ou* (15) affeifn^ (5s xsXsuw,^ 
 Hoci fAii t^s&i^u, ha. tfwg oixa(5s s^p(ofxai.^'i 'O 5s 'jr^eo'^suTijs axoi;w% 
 isiSu)^ Tfc xai a-TTSii*!^ tf'/il, acroj^w^sw^S 5' sx 6 (fT^aro'jrsSov, w'oXuj'P* 
 « A's'oXXwv'i su;)(;ojxai,^ (20) 6 ts siruvujxiaP 6 ^so^ avaxaXscJ,s xou 
 ifl'0|xi|xv>j!fxwj& xai a-^avTacAj,? si tj^ croo^ore '/j sv vaos oixo5ojiit,r](j'ig,P ij 
 fv is^ogPS 6\j(ficiP^ XH^?)^^"^^ 5w^ew°^^ ojP Jtj p^a^iv xaTgup(OfArai^ 
 rtu* A;(aioj o 65 dox^ 6 fixeivog /SsXoj. 
 
REMARKS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 GREEK DIALECTS. 
 
 I. 
 
 "The Greek language, like every modern one, was not 
 m ancient times spoken and written in the same manner in 
 all parts of Greece ; but almost every place had it^ peculi- 
 arities of dialect, both with respect to the use of single let- 
 ters, and of single words, forms of words, inflections and ex- 
 pressions. Of these dialects there are four principal ones, 
 the *3Eolic, the Doric, the Ionic, and the Atiic. Originally, 
 however, there was but one common language,- and this 
 was the Doric ; not indeed the Doric of later times, but a 
 language spoken by the Dorians, from which were derived 
 the ^oUc and Ionic varieties, after the colonization of the 
 coasts of Asia Minor. It was not till the Greeks colonized 
 Asia Minor, that their language began to assume both con- 
 
 * Matthiae's Greek Grammar, vol. i.% 1. et seqq. (Blomfield's trans- 
 lation.) 
 
 ' " Ut omnium GraEJcarum urbium et nationum origo referenda est ad 
 Thessaliam, Macedoniam, Epirum, et loca vicina, quoniam qui ea loca 
 primis temporibus incolebant, et antea TpaiKoi vel HeXairyot dicebantur, 
 primum 'KWrjves leguntur nominati fuisse ab Hellene, Deucalionis filio, 
 qui, ut Deucalion, in Phthiotide, Thessaliae regione, regnasse traditur; 
 et quoniam 'EXAas fuit urbs atque regio in Thessalia. cum nondum ulla 
 alia in terrarum orbe nota esset 'EXXaj : ita linguam antiquissimam et pri- 
 mitivam Graecorum, quae proprie dicebatur 'EXXj/vik;/, fuisse Thessalorum 
 aive Macedonum propriam, sed ab initio, si quidem cum lingua Grjeco- 
 rum, qualem in libris hodie exstantibus reperimus, imprimis cum Attica 
 coraparaveris, valde horridam et incultam, et barbaram potius quam 
 Graecam, reliquarum tamen Graeciae dialectorum omnium fontem et origin 
 nem statuendam esse, non verisimile modo, sed paene certum est." Stur^ 
 :riua de Dialecto Macedonicd et Alezand. § 3, 
 
142 GBEEK EXERCISES. 
 
 fistency and polish. The lonians were the first who softened 
 its asperities, and, by attention to euphony, laid aside by de- 
 grees, the broadness and harshness, which were retained by 
 their ^olian neighbours on the one hand, and by the Dorians 
 on the other. The rich soil of Ionia, and the harmonious 
 temperatui'e of its climate, combined with the more proximate 
 causes of its vicinity to Lydia, and its commercial prosperity, 
 %vill account for this change of language. It was from the s' 
 colonies that the mother country first adopted any improvo- V 
 ments in her own dialects." 
 
 II. 
 
 " It seems probable that all the Greek colonists in Asia 
 Mmor spoke at first a common language. One of the most 
 remarkable features in the change which originated with 
 the lonians, Avas the gradual disuse of the digamma. This 
 letter the Dorians laid aside at a later period. The ^olians, 
 on the contrary, always retained it ; whence its appellation 
 of JEolic. The first change which the inha.bitants of Attica 
 made, was to modify their old Doric to the more elegant 
 dialect of their richer and more polished colonists ; so that, 
 if we recur to the period of about 1000 years B. C, we may 
 conclude, that the language of Attica was nearly the same 
 as that in which the Iliad was composed. Subsequently, 
 however, as the people of Attica embarked in a more ex- 
 tended commerce, the form of their dialect was materially 
 altered, and m.any changes were introduced from foreign 
 idioms." 
 
 III. 
 
 " The JEOLIC DIALECT prevailed on the northern side 
 of the Isthmuo of Corinth, (except in Megaris, Attica, and 
 Doris), as well as in the ^clic colonies in Asia Minor, and in 
 some northern islands of the ^gcean Sea ; and was cliiefly 
 cultivated by the lyric poets in Lesbos, as Alcseus and Sappho ; 
 and in BcEOtia, by Corinna. It retained the most numerous 
 U-aces of the ancient Greek ; hence also the Latin coincides 
 more with this than -wdth the other Greek dialects. It is pecu- 
 liarly distinguished hy retaining the old digamma, called from 
 this circumstance the ^olic digamma. Alcaeus is considered 
 as the model of tiiis dialect." 
 
 IV. 
 
 " The DORIC DIALECT, as being the language of 
 men, who were most of them originally mountaineers, was 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 143 
 
 hard, rough, and broad, particularly from the frequent use 
 of a for >j and w ; as for instance, a Xada, roM xo^olv^ for i) Xv}5rj, 
 Twv xo^wv ; and from the use of two consonants, where the 
 other Greeks employed the double consonant ; as for in- 
 stance, CO for ^, as f/.^Xio'^arcu, &c. The Doric tribe was the 
 largest, and the parent of the greatest, number of colonies. 
 Hence the Doric dialect Wds spoken throughout, the Pelo- 
 ponnesus, in the Dorica Teirapolis, in the Doric colonies of 
 Magna Graecia and Sicily, and in Doris in Asia Minor. It 
 is divided by the ^grammarians into the old and new Doric 
 dialects. In the old, the comic writer Epicharmus, and 
 Sophron, author of the Mimes, were the principal writers. 
 In the new, w^hich approached nearer the softness of the 
 Ionic, Theocritus is the chief writer. Besides these, the first 
 'Pythagorean philosophers wrote Dorip, fragments of whose 
 ,^work3 are still remaining; for instance, Timaeus, Archytas, 
 (who is considered as the standard of this dialect,) and Archi- 
 medes. Pindar, Stesichorus, Simonides of Ceos, (who proba- 
 bly, however, used tlie Doric only when he was writing for 
 Doric employers,) and Bacchylides, use in general the Doric 
 dialect, but softened it by an approximation to the others, and 
 -to the common one. Many instances of the dialect of the 
 Lacedaemonians and Megarensians occur in Aristophanes. 
 Besides these, tl:ie Doric dialect is found in decrees and treaties 
 m the historians and orators, and in inscriptions. This dialect 
 ■was spoken in its greatest purity by the Messenians.'^ 
 
 "The IONIC DIALECT was the softest of all, on 
 account of the fi-ei:^uent meeting of vovv'els and the deficiency 
 
 . ol aspirates. It was spoken chieny in the colonies of Asia 
 Minor, and in the islands of the Archipelago. It v/as divided 
 into, old and- new. In the former Homer and Hesiod wrote, 
 
 j&nd it was originally very little, if at ail different from the 
 ancient Attic. The new arose when the lonians began to 
 mix in commerce and send out colonies. The writers in 
 this were Anacreon, Herodotus, and Hippocrates.^ The 
 
 ' '* The student is to attril)Ute to Anacreon only tlie fragments which 
 were collected by F. Ursinus, and a lew additional ones ; and not those 
 poems which commonly go under his nar.<?, a few only excepted. As 
 Anacreon lived more than 100 years before Herodotus, his dialect was 
 probably different. With respect to Herodotus, it is to be observed that 
 m adopt&d the Ionic for hia history, being himself a Dorian, consequent- 
 
144 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 principal residence cf the Ionic tribe in the earliest limes wat , 
 .Attica. From this region they sent forth their colonies to the 
 shores of Asia Minor. As these colonies began earlier than ■ 
 ihe mother country the march of cultivation and refinement, 
 the terms. Ionia, Ionian,?, and Ionic, were used by way of emi- 
 nence, to denote their new settlements, themselves, and their i 
 dialect, and finally were exclusively appropriated to them. ' 
 Tlie original lonians at home were now called Allies, Atheni- 
 ans, and their country, lajing aside its primitive name of Ionian j 
 took that of Mica."'' . ' 
 
 I 
 
 VI. 
 
 "The ATTIC DIALECT underwent three changeg. 
 The old Attic w^as scarcely different firom the old Ionic, as 
 Attica was the original country of the lonians ; and hence 
 we find in Homer many forms of words, which were other- 
 wise pecuhar to th« Attics. In this dialect Solon wrote hia 
 laws. Through the proximity of the original ^olic and 
 Doric in Bceotia and Megaris, the firequent intercourse with 
 the Dorians in Peloponnesus, and with other Greeks and 
 foreign nations, it was gradually intermixed with word* 
 which were not Ionian, and departed farther from the Ionic 
 in many respects, and particularl}^ in using the long a where ' 
 the lonians employed the t), after a vowel, or the letter J ; in 
 avoiding the collision of several vowels in two different 
 words, by contracting them into a diphthong, or long vowel ; 
 in preferring the consonants with an aspii-ate, whilst the loni' 
 ans used the tenues ; &;c. Thus atose the middle Attic, in 
 which Gorgias of Leontium was the first who A\Tote. The^ 
 writers in this dialect are, besides the one just mentioned," i 
 Thucydides, the tragedians, Aristophanes, and others. Tha : 
 new Attic is dated from Demosthenes and -<Eschines, al- 
 though Plato, Xenophon, Aristophanes, Lysias, and Isocra- 
 tes, have many of its peculiarities. It differed chiefly firom 
 the foregoing, in preferring the softer forms ; for instance, 
 the 2d Aor. avXhsysis, avaXkaysig, instead of the ancient Attic 
 and Ionic, tfuXXe^^^fj^, airaWax^^i^ ; the double ^^ instead of 
 the old gfl", which the old Attic had in common with tbf» 
 
 It he is not always consistent in his usages, and perhaps is more Ioni« 
 than a real Ionian would have been. His dialect is Certainly different 
 .from that of Hippocrates." Blomjidd, Remarks on MaUkuB^t Or. Or\ ^ 
 !>. zxxiii 
 4 Ia the age of Homer the Attics were stUI called Xaoves* 
 
SREEK EXERCISES. 145 
 
 loiiic, Doric, and ^olic ; the double rr instead of the hiss* 
 ing Co*. They said also, ffXsuM-wv, yvacpsv^j for -rvgu/xcdv, xvat^evg, 
 and (Tov instead of the old |uv." 
 
 VII.3 
 
 " Athens having attained an important political elevatioUi 
 and exercising a species of general government over Greece, 
 became at the same time the centre of hterary improvement. 
 Greeks from all the tribes went to Athens for their educa- 
 tion, and the Attic works became models in every depart- 
 ment of Hterature. The consequence was, that when Greece 
 soon after, under the Macedonian monarchy, assumed a po- 
 litical unity, the Attic dialect, having taken rank of the others, 
 ?:)ecame the language of the court and of literature, in which 
 the prose writers of all the tribes, and of whatever region, 
 henceforth almost exclusively wrote. The central point of 
 this later Greek, literature, was established under the Ptole^ 
 mies at Alexandria in Egj^pt." 
 
 viir. 
 
 *' With the universality of tne Attic dialect, began its de- 
 generacy. Writers introduced peculiarities of their provin- 
 cial dialects ; or in place of anomahes peculiar to the Athe- 
 nians, or of phrases that seemed artificial, made use of the 
 more regular or natural forms ; or instead of a simple phrase, 
 which had become more or less obsolete, introduced a more 
 popular derivative form, as vrix^(f&ai for vsiv, to swim, and 
 a^orfiav for a^ouv, to plough. Against this, however, the 
 grammarians often pedantically and unreasonably struggled ; 
 and, in their treatises, placed by the side of these offensive 
 or inelegant modernisms, the true forms from the old Attic 
 writers. Hence it became usual to understand by Attic^ only 
 ihat which was found in the anjiient classics, and to give to 
 the common language of ^literature, formed in the m.anner 
 indicated, the name of xojvvj, ' the vulgar^ or sXX^vixtj, ' the 
 Greek,' i. e. ' the vulgar Greek.' This xojv/j Siaksxros after all, 
 however, remained essentially Attic, and of course every 
 common Greek grammar assumes the Attic dialect as its 
 feasis." 
 
 • Bultmann's Greek Grainiaar, p. 2. (Everett's translation^) 
 N 
 
i46 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 IX. 
 
 " To the universality, however, of the Attic dialect, ail 
 exception was made in poetry. In this department the At- 
 tics remained the models only in one branch, the dramatic. 
 For the other sorts of poetry, Homer and the other elder 
 Ionic bards, who continued to be read in the schools, re- 
 mained the models. The Doric dialect, however, even in 
 later days, was not excluded from poetry ; on the contrary, 
 it sustained itself in some of the subordinate branches of the 
 art, particularly in the pastoral and humorous. When, how- 
 ever, the language which prevails in the Ij'rical portions of 
 the drama, that i-s, in the choruses and passionate speeches, 
 is called Doric, it is to be remembered that the Doricism 
 consists in httle else than the predominance of the long a 
 particidarly in the place of % which was a feature of the 
 ancient language in general, and retained itself for its dignity 
 in sublime poetry, while in common life it remained in use 
 «nly among the Dorians." 
 
 " The Macedonian dialect must be especiallj^ regarded 
 among those which were in various degrees incorporated 
 with the later Greek. The Macedonians were allied to the 
 Greeks, and numbered themselves with the Dorians. Thejf 
 introduced, as conquerors, the Greek cultivation and refine- 
 ment among the conquered barbarians. Here also the Greek 
 was spoken and written, not however ^^^thout some peculi- 
 zirities of form, v/hich the grammarians denominated Mace- 
 donian. As Egypt, and its capital city Alexandria, became 
 the principal seat of the later Greek culture, these forms 
 were comprehended under the name of the Alexandrian dia- . 
 lect. The natives also of these conquered countries began to 
 speak the Greek {kW^.E^siv)^ and such an Asiatic Greek was 
 denominated zWr^ii^Ty]^. Hence the style of the wTiters of 
 this class, wath which v/ere incorporated many forms not 
 Greek, and many oriental turns of expression, was denomi- 
 nated Hellenistic. It need scarcely be observed, that this 
 ♦lialect is contained in the Jewish and Christian moniimenta 
 of those times, especially in the Septuagint and in the New 
 Testament, whence it passed more or less into the worlis of 
 Ihe Fathers. New barbarisms of every kind were introduced 
 
 • Patten's translation of Buttmann's account of tiie Greek Dialect^ 
 (•ppendcd to Thiei-sch'a Greek tables.) Note 12 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 147 
 
 during the middle ages, when Constantinople, the ancient 
 Byzantium, becam.e tne seat of the Greek empire and centre 
 of literary cultivation. Out of this arose the dialect of the 
 Byzantine writers, and finally, the yet hving language of Xh% 
 modern Greeks." 
 
 EXERCISES O.V THE DIALECTS. 
 
 JEOLIC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 
 
 SAPPHONIS FRAGMENTA. 
 I. 
 
 IloixiXoqjPov, a6avo.<r'' Ao^oJjtk, 
 Tiai Aioi: doXoTrXoxs, XjO'O'o.aat <rs 
 Mr] f«<' aijaiC'i. fX7]5' oviaio'i 5a|xva, 
 
 Ilo-vja, QviMV 
 AXXa ti!"j5' ?vt3', at 'Pi'ora xarg^wra 
 Ta? Sjxaj av6a.g aVoicTa -roXXag 
 
 X^uffSov, iiv5e^, 
 APfJi.' vti:oc6s\jx(!a(foL' xaXoi (Js t' ayov 
 flXiSg (Tt^w^oi, -tts^j yaj fxeXatva^ 
 
 ^svs Skx. jxecTtfw. 
 Aiirffa, 5' sxfTjxovTo* tu 5', (j jxaxai^a, 
 MsKJiarfafX' aflava-rw crpoo'wffw 
 
 "J The readings here followed, are those given in the " Cktmtnidg* 
 
 (Xasgical Researches," vol. i. p. 3. et scqq. 
 
146 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 MajvoXtt ^ufz-ij — -ivog au <ru TeJ^oi 
 Ma-rg (fayvivsutfag qjjXoTara ; tij t', <j 
 
 Kai ya^ aj (psu^sj, ro.'x^ug 5jw|si, 
 Ai (5e (5wm fjLT) ^cX^t', aXXa owo'ei, 
 Ai 5ff jxij (pjXei, Tcc/zuig (piXatfgi 
 
 Koux eiJiXoirfav. 
 Ev5s ^01 xat vuv, ^aXsrav rs Xutfov 
 Ex (jiFPi|L/.vav oCffa 5' €jXoi TsXsifl'dflti 
 ©uixoj i/xe^^fi, tsXecTov, tu 5' auTa 
 
 TO VENUS. 
 
 O artful-minded, immortal Venns, wily daughter of Jove^ 
 do not, I entreat thee, O revered one, subdue me with troubles, 
 nor my spirit with woes: But come hither, if ever even before 
 this, hearing my earnest supplications, thou gavest an assent 
 to my prayer, and having left the golden home of thy father, ' 
 came, having harnessed thy car : while thy beautifol swift 
 span-ows moving their rapid pinions, bore thee along from 
 heaven over the black earth amid the blaze of noon. Quick- 
 ly they came ; but thou, O blessed one, having smiled with 
 thy heavenly countenance, inquired what it was that I suffer- 
 ed, and why I now call thee, and what in particular I wish to 
 happen to my raging breast — whose love do you again fruit- 
 lessly seek to ensnare by your persuasive art, who, O Sappho, 
 slights you ? For if now he even flee, soon ^v^^ he pursue : 
 and if now he receive not gifts, yet will he soon bestow them , 
 and if now he love not, soon will he love thee, even thougli 
 unwilling to make a return. — Come thou unto me now also, 
 and free me from cruel cares ; and do thou accomplish for me 
 whatsoever things my bosom desires to be accomplished, and 
 be thyself my ally. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 149 
 
 II. 
 
 E»^ E^wfJiSvav 
 
 *cuv8rai p» x>ivog iCoj; &soi(ftv 
 
 dag i;Ta>cousi 
 Kat j/sXwtrac: nis^osv. To juioi V^v 
 
 AXXa xafjb.asv yXudda FSrays, Xs-rfTOV 5' 
 Aurixa ;)(?w tu^ u7ro5=(5^ofjiaxsv, 
 Oif'xaTS(!(fi 5' ouosv o^r]jX<, ^o|X§Su- 
 tfiv 6' axoai /xoj. 
 
 TIatfav ay^Si' p^Xw^oTS^a 5s -rroiaj 
 <J>ajvo(Aaj a'TT'vous. 
 
 TO A BELOVED ONE. 
 
 That roan seems to me to be equal with the gods, who 
 sits facing thee, and in deep silence hears thee sweetly speak- 
 ing, and laughing in love-inspiring accents. This always 
 causes my heart to throb in my bosom, for when I behold 
 thee, in an instant no portion of my voice any longer comes : 
 but my tongue falters, a subtile fire immediately runs be- 
 neath my skin, I see nothing with my eyes, my ears tingle, 
 a cold sweat pours down, a trembling seizes my whole frame^ 
 1 become paler than the grass, and, breathless, seem to want 
 but little of death. 
 
 ' • In tliis ode, the readings given in the " Cambridge Classical H*- 
 Beared," vol. i. p. 7, are principally followed. A few are adopted fsntu 
 WcKke's ediUon of Longinus. 
 
 N2 
 
150 CREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 DORIC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 
 
 L 
 
 CORINNiE FRAGMENTUM. 
 
 Ex ApoUonio Dyscolo, 
 
 Mefjupojxai luvya rav Xiyov^av Mv^Suy Sr» jSava (povtfa •€« 
 
 " I blame the melodious MjTtis, because, be*ig a woman, 
 £he engaged in a contest with Pindar." 
 
 II. 
 
 LACONUM LEGATUS. 
 
 Ez Aristophanis Lysidrata, v. 1247—1272, ed. Brunck. 
 
 'O^fxaov 
 
 Tav ^' cfJLav /Awav, oltjc: 
 
 0/5ev ajjLjXi, Twg r' Acfavajoj^* 
 
 'Oxa <ros fi-cv s-tt' A^tkixitiw 
 
 n^ox^oov /JsixsXoi 
 
 IIorTa jiwXa, twc: Mti^s r' evixuir 
 
 Afjos 5' av Av^mSag 
 
 Ayev, K^e^ Twg xar^us 
 
 ©ayovTrtS 'T'ov o5ov?-a. ITcXuS 5* 
 
 Afx^i ras yevi'ttg ct^^oj -/•vo'ej, 
 
 IToXyg 5' aiJ.« 
 
 Kai Karrwv uxsXwv »sto. 
 
 Hv yap tu'jS^ss -oux sXaffffiog 
 
 Tag ■^oiixij.as, toi n^prfai. 
 
 Ay^ore^' A^Tajj^i Ci^^oxtov?, 
 
 MoXe (Jju^Q, 'ircf..P(!£vs tfjo, 
 
 Nuv o' au 
 *iXja 5' atsg sviro^os s\'t\ 
 
!' 
 
 GBEEK EXERCISES. 15t 
 
 Kai Toiv al/Jt-uXav oXwjfSXWf 
 
 Kuvaye lea^devs. 
 
 Arouse these youths, O Mnemosyne, and my muse, 
 vhich knows us and the Athenians ; when the latter at Arte- 
 misium, like g-ods made an attack upon the vessels of the 
 foe, and vanquished the Medes ; while on the other hand, 
 Leonidas led us whetting the tusk like wild boars. Much 
 Ibam frothed around our mouths, and much at the same 
 time flowed dovv^n even to our legs. For our opponents the 
 Persians were not fewer in number than the sand. O Diana, 
 who presidest over the groves, destroyer of savage beasts, 
 come hither, virgin goddess, to our league, in order that 
 ihou mayest unite us long in friendship : now again let there 
 always be unbroken amity to our agreements, and may we 
 oease without delay from the craft of foxes. come bitherj 
 come, O virgin huntress. 
 
 III. 
 
 CHORUS LACONUM. 
 Bx Aristojjhanis Lysistratd, v. 1297 — 1323L 
 
 Taiiysrov aur' e^avvov exXi-jTwa Mwa 
 Moks Aaxajva, 'jt^sittov aixiv ^ 
 KXfwa Tov A(xvx\aig tfjov, 
 Kai ^^aXxiojxov Atfavav, 
 
 To/ dr] <n'af Eu^wrav -^/saSdovn. 
 E<a fxaX' 2jix§>i, 
 Q'ia xou(pa «;raXXwv, 
 
 Ta (jiuv ;)^opoi jxsXovri, 
 Ka« <7ro5iJv xru'Tog* 
 'Ars "TTwXoj 6' ai xo^at 
 
 Ilccf TOV EUPWTOV 
 
 AfiiraXXovTi cruxva to5oiv 
 
 E^xovrojfTar 
 Too 6s xo|xai tfijov^', a-re| Bax^a* 
 
162 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 *Ayr]-ai 5' a Arjoas irais 
 
 AXX' aye, xojxotv '7raPajLfc'jruxi55s Tff 
 
 *A Tii eXaqjoj- x^otov 5' afxa <roi- 
 
 »j p^oPw;psXtTav 
 Ka» rav (fidv 5' au rav x^arKfrav 
 
 XaXxicjxov -ujxvsi, 
 
 Tav 'To'.jx/Aap^ov. 
 
 Come again, O Laconian muse, ha\ing left lovely Tay- 
 getus, celebrating- for us the revered god of Amj-clcE, and the 
 ChalcicEcan Minerva, and the valiant sons of 1 jndams, who 
 sport along the Eurotas. Come, enter with spirit upon the 
 task, shaking the light borders of thy garment, that we may 
 sing the praises of Sparta, to which the choii's of the godis 
 are a care, and the noise of feet : since the damsels, like 
 young colts, leap up along the Eurotas, hastening ocAvards 
 with the fi-equent beating of theii- feet. Their tresses stream 
 in the ail", like those of female Bacchanalians, wielding the 
 thyrsis and sporting. The chaste daughter of Leda leads the 
 way^ the beauteous leader of the band. But come, with thy 
 hand confine thy hair under a fillet, and leap with thy feet, 
 leap hke a stag ; and make at the same time a loud clapping 
 serviceable to the chorus, and celebrate again in song the 
 Chalcicecan, the most powerful of the goddesses, who coi^ 
 tends with every foe. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 15S 
 
 UL 
 
 SPARTANORUM DECRETUM CONTRA TIMOTHEUM* 
 
 Cum Salmasii Vers^ione. 
 
 DECRETUM. 
 
 i EorsjtJrj Tjjji.o!J'20|^ 6 Mi\r,(fioP 
 
 ! coXiv, rav fraXaiccv jmcoav ctTj- 
 I fwctf^r), xai Tav Jja tccv i';rTa 
 I X°^^^^ xi'j'at'»|iv aTocr;rPS(pof;.t- 
 i-. vo^ '7roXu<pCA)viav SKfuyuv Xi),aai. 
 
 vgTai Ta^ axoft^ cwv vswv, ^ja 
 I tS 7a^ itoko-^^a^dio.^ xa» ra^ xaj. 
 \ VM-fiCTO^ TOJ jjisXiO^ aysvvea xa» 
 
 •rroixjXav avri o-irXa^ y.ai \£- 
 
 Tw |jLsXso^ (5»£(j'jv avT« <rc(^ evap- 
 fjt-oviw ToT-rav avrij^r^o^ov a|j.oi. 
 €av, "jraPaxXv)^;!? & xai srrov 
 aywva Tap EXsyfTuja^ Aa|xa- 
 
 fjt-yffw (JjatfxSuav, <ra^ -a^ 2sf/.e. 
 Xa^ uSivaP oux svOua <rwP vsw^ 
 
 ^J^aXKT], OsSo-X^OA (pOM 'ZSPl 
 
 TouTWv rwp (3a.(fi\sap <rw^ E;po- 
 ^wp (y.SfJL-jyafl'fl'ai Ti/xo(T£ov, s-zra- 
 vayxaCaj 6s xa» ^av svJexct p^o^- 
 5av £xrtt|XovTa tu^ "fff^iT-ra^ 
 u-roXi-riiv (jLGvov ca^ e-TTra, o-Trw^ 
 IxatfTo^ TO Ttt^ -jroXio^ ^"fo^ 
 oPwv syXa^rjrai e-rrav UTra^Tav 
 
 a^sra^ xXso^ ayovTwv. 
 
 SALMASII VERSIO. 
 
 E-jTii^ii Tipio^eo^ 6 MiXrjCio? 
 •ffapa^'ivojasvoj sjj Triv 'Jj/xers^av 
 ToXiv, TrjV craXaiav jXcutfavaTJ- 
 fta^si, xai <r*]v 6<a twv £<jrTa 
 )(o^Jc/jv xj^aPio'jv acrotfT^^cvpofXe- 
 vog: ToXuqjwvjotv fitfa-^cov Xufxaj- 
 vsrat Tag axoag twv v'?cjv, ^»a 
 Tf T>3J 'jroXu^^o^Jiag xai Tr]S xa«- 
 vorifjTOff Tou (xsXouc: avsvvij xcu 
 ffoJxiXrjv avTj k'ttXyi^ xai T£- 
 rayiisi/YiS apicptsvvuTai Tr^v /xoutfav, 
 £<7ri ^^w(j-aToj (fuvjCTttixsvcff tt^v 
 Tcu f/.fiXevg (Ji£<rjv avTi tt)? £va^- 
 
 JXOVIOU "jr^^Og TT^V aVT.iO'TlpO^OV ttjXOi- 
 
 Crjy, cTRPaxXi^^sij 6s xai £i^ tc¥ 
 a^wva Tr}g EXsuf^iviOfj Z^rj/XTi- 
 T^oj airesitv] SiasKfaro tyiv too 
 f;.u^ou 64afl'x£u'>jv, rag rr]g 2£f/.£- 
 X->^^ (j^Sivag cvx evdixa. Toug vsovg 
 Si6a<fx£i, Ssdox^oLi €(pa.cfc:v <:rs^ 
 TOUTWV TQvs BaffiXsoiS TOUg EipO- 
 ^OUg fJL£/Jt,-v|ya(J'^Kl T/|ao^£ov, f-ro- 
 va^xatfai ^s xai twv svotxa )(o^- 
 5wv £XTaf/,ovTa Tag irs^irrag 
 ij'ToXi'Trsjv fxovov Tag I^Ta, offwg 
 Ixaa'Tog TO T-j^g ^roXfwg /3a^og 
 OPWV suXa^iiraj £jg t»]V 2Ta^Tr]v 
 £iri(|3£P£jv Ti TWV riQuv f/.r) cr^og T>jf 
 a^fiTi^g xXsog ayovTwv. 
 
 ^ This dfecree has come down to us in Boethiu?, " de Musicaj" 1. 1. p. 
 1372, ed. Basil. 1570, fol. It is given in tiie notes to Scaliger's edition of 
 Manilius ; in Casaubon's Comments on Athenjeus, (8. p. 352. a ;) and in 
 Saltnasius, " de Hellenisticd." It is here presented to the student, not as 
 an exercise, but as a species of classical curiosity. It furnishes a strong 
 proof, if such indeed were wanting, of the attachment of the ancient 
 
164 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 IONIC GREEK TO BE RENDERED INTO ATTIC. 
 
 L 
 
 Ex Herodoti Historia. 
 CLIO. c. 178, 179. 
 
 rov, ejJcoCj xai sxa-rov tfra(5iwv, souo'i^j TSr^a^wvou* outoi tfTa^ioj crjj 
 
 To fxsv vuv p^syaQog coCoyTov sCtj tou arTrSoi; <rou Ba§u\wvioi;. Exs- ' 
 xo(Tjxr]To 5s ojj ou5ev aXXo '7roXiT|aa twv yj.asif: i5'^-£v 7a:p^og p.sv "tt^w- 
 ca u-iv fSaQca ts y.ai svPta xa» ffXevj u5a-roj if;^i^s?r y^sra os, 'J'fJj^off 
 •jrgvrrjxovra (xsv <;ni^5Wv ,/3«a'iXri'iwv gov to £upo?, uyog 5e Ofyjxo'fjwv 
 
 r^KJ'j oaxTuXoKJ"!. Asi 5y] ^xs 'S'^oj t-outokTi tiri'pmfl'ai, iva Te sx 71^5 
 CttTj^ou V) /r) avai3'j;A0j/)T], xai to Tii-xf'5 owuva T^oTrov e^yadfo. O^uC* 
 (fovTSg ajn.a Trjv Taojfov, £tXiv^?uov ttjv yr|v <r>3v t* «rou cPuyjxaTOff 
 £X(pt^o'jSv»]v IXxutfocvrss 5s ■ffXiv^ouj ixava.c, wn'riicJ'av au<rag £v xajxi- . 
 vojtfj' /J.:Ta 5s, TsXa«TJ )(;^sw|J^Svoi af^TjoKru} ^s^fxr;, X7.i 5ia T^nixovra'' 
 5ofXijv tXiv5oi' ca^Couj xaXafAWv (5ia'5'T0i§a^&v7i.Cj eosi^av it^ura jxsv 
 TT/^ TC-QPou Toc p^sjXsa' ^suTS^a 5s aiiTO TO T6;;i^og tcv auTov t^ottov. 
 
 Babylon lies in a large plain, and is in size each way a 
 hundied and twenty stadia, being a square. These stadia of 
 the city's circuit amount in all to four hundred and eighty. 
 So great then is the size of the Babylonian city. It was 
 embellished moreover, such as no other city of those which , 
 we know. In the first place, a ditch encompasses it, deep 
 and broad, and full of water ; next, a wall, which is in breadth 
 fifty royal cubits, and in height two hundred cubits. The 
 Toyal cubit is greater than the common one by three digits. 
 I ought, in addition to these particulars, to mention, to what 
 use the earth from the ditch was applied, and in what way 
 the wall was built. At the same time that they were digging 
 
 Spartans to the ^ (canina liitcra.) .The iEoIo-Doric tribes were all fond 
 of the US3 of this letter, and suid h-nop, trop, afop, &c. for lirnog, Trouf, dtof. 
 So also no'ip for irais, whence the Latin -puer. The double Latin termina- 
 tion in or and os, as honor, hones ; labor, labos ; may thus be easily ac- 
 counted for. The former is the more ancient form. 
 
If 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 155 
 
 the ditch, they formed into bricks the earth which was brought 
 out of the excavation. When they had weighed a sufficient 
 number of bricks, they baked them in furnaces. After thisy 
 using for cement heated bitumen, and between every thirtieth 
 course of brick placing a frame-work of reeds, they first buill 
 the sides of the ditch, and next, the wall itself in the sanw 
 way. 
 
 n. 
 
 Ex eddem. ! 
 
 EUTERPE, c. 28. 
 
 Taura jxev vuv fcT-rw Cjs e(i<ri <rs xaj us OL^ry sysv:ro. Teu ^1 
 ♦KsiXou ras flrrj^ag outs Aj/u^riwv, outs Ai§uwv, cvtS 'EXX'jvwit 
 .rwv ffAOJ aifixo^svuv sg Xoyov?, ouosij ursCj^^gTo eiJ;v«», c< fi/H. £» 
 
 ' Ai/U'TTW £v 2at voki 6 y^a|A|j.a7/(?r»;j twv i^cjv -^pr.iJ.oLTuv 'rT,g Afi-Jj- 
 •piiTjf. Ouroc: 5' sjxoi ys "rraii^eiv sJoxss, (paasvoj £i5jvai ut^sxsu^^ 
 
 . "EXeye 5e' dj5s. " E»va» 5uo ou^sa cj o^tt Tccg xo^u(pc:j a-ffi^fASvo, 
 fteralu IIuviyTjc: rs croX/og Xe»,asva <rrjj ©r^oaitJo?, xai EXscpavTJVrjg* 
 
 . rovojxara 5s sjvai roi(fi ou^sCj, tgj /xsv, Kfw^pj, rii 5e, ?Jw(p». Taf 
 4JV 6r} <if'i]yD'S Tou NcjXou, eoutJ'ag a^v(t(fovg, £x tou f^s^fou twv oupsw* 
 
 -, Ttturewv ^ccjv xai to jxsv ^ja/tfu tou vSaToc:, s-tt' Ai^u-jr-rou |sc»v xai 
 
 , ir^os l3o^sr,v avsfxov to 5' Its^ov >j,ai(fu, Stti Aj^iccrjvjg t£ xai votou. 
 'ftg 5s aou^^'Coi SiCi aJ 'r77'yai, sj ^Jc.TSj^av s^if\ toutou YapLfAjrjp^o* 
 AiTU'jrTou /SaC.'Xsa a-^ixsfjSuu IIoXXswv ^k^ ocutov p^iXja^wv op. 
 yujecjv flrXsgafievov xaXov, xaTSivaj Taurvj, xaj oux s^ixsc^ai sj /Sutf- 
 tfov. 
 
 Be these things then both, as they are, and as they have 
 jbeen from the beginning. But of the sources of the Nile, 
 no one either of the Egyptians, or Libyans, or Greeks, who 
 conversed with me, professed to have any knowledge, except 
 in Egypt, in the city of Sais, the scribe of the sacred treasures 
 of Minerva. • This person appeared to me indeed to be jest- 
 ing, when he declared that he was very well acquainted with 
 them. Fie expressed himself moreover in the following man- 
 ner : — ' That there are tv/o mount;|i,-3, v;hose summits termi- 
 nate respectively in a sharp point, situate between Syene, a 
 t;ity of Thebais, and Elephantine ; and that these mountair» 
 ■we named, the one Crophi, the other Mophi. That the 
 eoQTces of the Nile then, which are of unfathomable depth, 
 flow from between these mountains ; and that one half of (bo 
 
156 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 water runs towards Egypt, and in a norlhern direction, and 
 the other half tou-a,rds Ethiopia and the south.' But to show- 
 that its sources were unfathomable, he stated, that Psaromiti- 
 chus, king of Eg^-pt, had ascertained this by actual trial : for 
 tiiat, having caused a rope of many thousand fathoms to b« 
 made, he let it down in this place, and did not reach bottom. 
 
 m. 
 
 Ex eddem. 
 EUTERPE, c. 118, 119/ 
 
 E»^o/jt-evou 6b fiSu rovg l^sctg, ei jxaToiov Xoyov Xsyovtfi ol EXXn». 
 fsg roL its^i IXiov ^sverf^at, 7) ou, scpada.v t^oj tuxjtcc radSy Io'to- 
 fir<fi (pajxsvoi si^svai «ra^' auTo^j MsvsXsw. EX^tiv ,a5u ya^, ^.s<ra i 
 T'ljv 'EXsvif)^ a^'irayriv, sg Tr^v Teux^i^a yr,)/ 'EXX75VWV tfT^aTtijv flroX- i 
 >)f]v, /Sorj^furfav MtvsXsw* sxoccCav 5s sg yT,v xai ]S^v6sK!av rry^ \ 
 dr^oiTiYiV, iicixitsiv eg ro IXiov ayysXovg' Cuv §s C^j isvai xai auTov 
 MsveXswv Toug 6' zitsi rs sCcX^cjy sj <ro ts»x°^) ot.'rrci.iTESiV 'EXsvtjv 
 t£ xa< Ta ;;^|^/jt,aTa ra 01 oj;)^sto xXs%|>aj AXs^avfJ^c.^, twv cs a5ixr(» -| 
 (XfXT&jv (Jjxag airssir tou^ 5s Tsux^o-jj tov aorou Xo^'o.v "ksysiv tots : 
 xco fxfrscsira, xai ojxvuvraj xai avw.aori, i^r) fisv £%Siv 'EXavjjy^ | 
 fii^ds T'a e'ri/caXsi'f/.sva y^9'i][xa.ra^ aXX' £;va< aura 'n'avra ev Ai^u*- i 
 ^■w' xa» 0U3C av 6jxaiwj au=roi <5(xag 6'7r£;;(fiv, a Jl^w^rsuc: Aj^u'K'rioj 1 
 ^atfiXsuj sp(sj. Oi (5s 'EXXt^vsj xa-Ky 5\a(^SaA doxsovrsg uir' au- I 
 rojv, ourw ^t] s-ttoXiopxs.ov, eg 6 s^siXov. 'EXouCi Ss to tsj^^o^ ug ovk \ 
 S(fiaivSTo *j *EXsv^/), aXXa rov aurov y^oyov <rw T^oTfPW £7ri/v^avov<ro, | 
 fc^Tw 6^ Tifl'TeuO'av-TSj <rw Xoj'W cy '::p(^7(*i oi 'EXXr,vgj aurov Msvs- j 
 X/^ijv tt'TotJ'TsXXouo'j TaPa H^wrsa, A'xixo^svng dpo MsveXsug sg r»j» 
 AiyvXTov, xai ava.'S'Xcotfag ij ttjv Me^x^^iv, si'rra.g Trig aXT^dr/jrjv <rwJf 
 's'^i^yfxaTwv, xa» ^svjwv ir)vrr]iT£ (Xs^aXwv, xa» 'EXevrjv aTa^ca xoxcjf , 
 acrsXaSs* t^oj 5s xai ra swUrou ^i^^'/jjxaTa. j 
 
 Upon my asking the priests, whether the Greeks relate : 
 tn idle tale respecting the occurrences at Troy, or not ; they, 
 in answer to these things, inentioned the following particulars, 
 having eissured me that they had learnt them by actual in- i 
 quiry from Menelaus himself. That after the abduction of 
 Helen, a numerous army of Greeks came to the Trojan land, 
 to assist Menelaus. That when the army had disembarked 
 and pitched their camp, they sent ambassadors to Troy, and 
 
©REEK EXERCISES. 167 
 
 li 
 
 that along wth them went Menelaus himself. That these, 
 when they entered within the walls, demanded back Helen, 
 and the wealth which Paris had stolen aloni^ with her person ; 
 ftnd also claimed satisfaction for the injuries inflicted. That 
 Ihe Trojans, however, made the same statement then which 
 they afterwards did both under oath and not, that they had 
 not Helen, nor the wealth which was made the subject of 
 accusation, but that these were all in Egypt, and that it was 
 not just for them to render satisfaction for things which Pro- 
 teus the Egyptian king had. But the Greeks thinking that 
 they were trifled with by them, for this reason laid siege to 
 the city, until they took it. When, however, Helen did not 
 make her appearance on their having taken the city, but they 
 received the same statement as the former one in answer to 
 their inquiries, upon this then the Greeks credited tiie assertion 
 first made, and send Menelaus himself to Proteus. And 
 when Menelaus had arrived in Egypt, and had sailed up to 
 Memphis, having stated the true circumstances of the case, 
 he both received splendid gifts of hospitality, and obtained 
 Helen back uninjured. 
 
 Ev 6b tcj aurcj ;)(^cvw ro-jrcj, sv tw Muo'iw Oo'kv^u), tfuoj X.^'"** 
 yivSTai ixsya' op,asoj;tSvog 63 ouroj ix tou ovpeog rourou, ra twv Mu- 
 cTwv spya. Sia(p&si^s:iy.s, IloXXaxj 5s oi MvCoi sir' aurov s^sX^ovtSj, 
 TOJSio'xov (j.sv oh^sv y.axoVj i'lta.dyyi 5s 'tt^oj aurou. TeXo^ 5Sj anfh 
 xofjisvoj Ttt^a <rov IvPojtJ'oy cwv Mutfwv ayysXoi, sXsyov tuSs' " CI 
 f^a(fCk^\}, hoc: y^^r^ikOL [Xsyi'Trov a.\is:pavr] tjjajv Sv ttj X^j^rj, hg tol S^a 
 ^lacp^si^jf TouTov 'ffPoQ'j'fXSo^svoi iXssiv, ou 5'jva.iJ,s§cf vuv wv •r^ofl'- 
 isoiisl^a, ffsv, Tov <rai5a xa» \oya5ag vSTjvja^ xa« xuva^ tfu/x-fffff/^ai 
 *j«jLiVj ojj av ja»v c^cXwfZ-ev sx rrig X^^'^^*" ^' M*^^ ^''1 '''O^^'^JV sSsov- 
 CO. K^oKfog Ss jxvrjaovsuwy to'j ovsipou ra sifsa^ sXsys (f^i TaSe, 
 " Uai5og (J-sv irs^i rou f,ao-j fjov) (xvYiifd'f\TS sti' ou ya.^ av u/xiv tfujA- 
 #^,a^]>aJ,aJ• vsoyctixog rs yct.9 s^Tt, xai TauTa oJ vuv jxeXsi, AuJwv, 
 jjtc'.'roi, Xoya^aj xai to xuvr^vso'iov irav fl'uars|jt,%|.'6J' xai JjaxeXeurfo/Aai 
 Teifl*! louo"*, Siva.i ug TfPoSviXOTO.Toiat Cuvs^sXsiv Cfiiv 70 ^i^^iov gx tijj? 
 5(wp^?]S." Taura af!0£»v|yaTo. 
 
 At this same time, there is^a large monster of a boar ia 
 th« Mysian Olympus, and this boar ru.;liing from this moun- 
 
 O 
 
16^ «KEEK KXEKCISES. 
 
 lain, was accustomed to destroy the agricultural labours of 
 the Mysians. The Mysians, although they often went forth 
 against liim, did him no injury, but suffered from him. At 
 last, however, messengers of the Mysians came to Croesus, 
 and said these things : " O king, a very large monster of a 
 boar is in the habit of appearing in our country, which de- 
 stroys our labomrs. Although desirous of taking this boar, 
 we are not able to do so. Now then, we request of thee, in 
 addition to other favom's, to send thy son, and chosen young' 
 men, and dogs, along with us, that we may drive him out of 
 the country." They then made this request, Croesus, how- 
 ever, remembering the words of the dream, spoke thus to 
 them : " Do not make mention any longer respecting my son, 
 for he is both newly married, and these things now occupy hia 
 attention. I will send chosen young men however, and dogs, 
 and every thing belonging to the hunt ; and I will order those 
 who go, to be as active as possible in aiding to drive the wild 
 beast out of your country." Thus he answered. 
 
EXERCISES IN PROSODY. 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE REDUCED TO PROSAIC 
 ORDER, TO BE RETURNED INTO METRE.^ 
 
 HEXAMETERS. 
 
 1, 
 
 Ev jxsv gTSuf yaiav, £v 5' ou^avov, sv Ss &aKoL<f(fa.Vf 
 (s) Axaf;.avTa t' 'n£>.iov, 'TXii^ou:J'av ts rt'sXirjvriv. 
 
 Ev 6s Tavra ca rsi^a ra oujpavoj t' 6TT£(pavwTaf, 
 (S') nX*]ia(5ag d', 'T«(5a<; tc, to C^svo.c -ts J7^jwvof, 
 - A.PX.TOV &\ 7}V xai e7rixXr)Tiv xaXsourTjv afxa^av, 
 
 *H t' (rTf'S:ps-7a< aurou, xai ^oxeucj <r' fi^jwva* 
 
 Oir] 5' etfTi ttfji^/xc^oj Cxsavoio Xostpwv. 
 
 In it he formed the earth, and the sky, and the sea, the 
 unwearied sun, and the full moon. In it also, all the con- 
 Btellations, with which the heaven is crowned, the PleiadeSj 
 the Hyades, and the strength of Orion, and the Bear, which 
 they likewise call by the appellation of the Wain, which is 
 there turned round, and watches Orion ; and it alone is d&^ 
 prived of the baths of Oceanus. 
 
 2. 
 
 Ev 5' STiSsi aXwrjv fxsya (3^>Qovcfav o'ra^uXijo'i, 
 KaXyjy, -^^v^siriv (Bor^sc; 5' jXeXaveg i^Cav ava* 
 *E(rTr]Xc» 8s 5»a(X'7rs^e<; af/v^sjidtv xa|aa|i. 
 
 * The student will observe, that each line is separately reduced to pro- 
 eaic order, and niust be separately returned into metre. — Those lines wmcK 
 wre marked thus (s), are s[)ondaic. 
 
160 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 AfAipi 5s, s\ag(fs xaasrov xuavsrjv, irs^i S' l^xog 
 KfitCffJTi^ou* |xia 5' ara^tiTos y\Z\i oirj st* auT»}v, 
 Trj (f)o^r,Si: vkTO'ovto, ots aXwi^v T^uyowSi/ 
 Ila^^fcvjxai '^£ xai Tj'ideoi, (p^ovt'ovrsg araXa, 
 4'6^ov ^fcXir)Jea Jsa^rov ev crXexTOJ? raXa^oKfi, 
 A' £v jjLS'TO'ojv/ ToiTjv TaYj y^iystj] (po^inyyt 
 K»^aPi<^s l|j,;Posv 5' uro xaXov a£j(5e X»vov 
 ^wvTj Xszra'Ksrj' toi 5s o.aa^rr) ^r]0'(3'ov<r?5 
 MoXffT) t' iiJ;Kaw t£, stovto ffxat^ovTSS •roo'i. 
 
 On It he likewise placed a vineyard very heavy with 
 grapes, beautiful, golden ; but the clusters throughout it were 
 black ; and the vineyard (i. e. the vines) stood against silver 
 poles, placed in order. Round he drew an azure ditch, and 
 around this, an hedge of tin ; but one path alone was upon 
 it, by which the carriers went when they gathered the vintage. 
 Young girh and youths of tender minds, bore the luscious 
 fruit in twisted baskets, and in the midst of these a boy sweet- 
 ly plajed upon a shrill lyre, and with a sofi voice sang beauti- 
 fully to the string ; whilst they, beating the earth at the same 
 time, with singing and shouts of joy, followed, skipping with 
 their feet. 
 
 3. 
 
 Kujxa (5' a|a(p' A^iXXi«a UraTo Ssivov xuxwjjisvov, 
 *Poo£: 5' sv CaxsV 'Ti'Ttwv u&si, ov5s i:o5a(f(fiv 
 Irri^ilaiJdai ei;^c' o 5? sXs -/^ePtJiv irrsXsriv 
 Euipusa, iXejuXfi^' rj 5' e^nrouCa ex ^i^wv 
 Aiwfftv wnwj'fx x^^vjavov, Z'nidyz 6s ^cS^^a, xaXa 
 Iluxivoifj o^oiijiv >M\i a.vTov Ss y=:puPw(J'sv, 
 E^tTouff' •jracr' sjefw 6 5' af avo^ouCag ex Xi/ji-vr}j, 
 IlSTe(fdai x^ttiTfvxiKfi cro'fj 'n'sSwo tii^sv, 
 ASKfas' ou5' [xsyas 6eos er' skriys, S'k' a-jTov 5' m^tp 
 AxfoxsXajvjowv, iva crovoio [uv 'xavifsis 
 Ap^iXXrja (5jov, aXaXxei 5s Xoi/ov T^wstftfi. 
 
 A^O^CUfl'eV n'r)XS<5l')J 5\ e'TT'J t' OCfoV g^Wr) 5ou^OJ, 
 
 (s) Ep(wv oj/xot' jxsXavoj aicTou, tou 6r]^riT7)^os^ 
 
 *0» d' (XjXa 'K?TSYiVUV Xa^Tjrf-TOJ T£ Xai WXIfl'TOff. 
 
 Kova§i(^£v (f/j.t^^aXe&v Xiarf^ejff 5f vTra.i&a. toio 
 4>£uy', 6 5' l'n'e-70 li.syak'^ o^un;.a^5w, |c6jv o-^fKfds. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES, J$l 
 
 ^oCeoLitfj a^avaroj, roi s'xov(fi sv^'jv ou^avov, 
 MSya xufxa oii'Trereo^ -jrota.aoio toddaxi fxiv 
 Ka^u-n-eP^tv -n-Xa^' wf/.ou<:* 6 6' S'rrYidoL v-^ocfs flrorftfiv, 
 Avja^wv ^li/xw* flroTafxog <5' C-to s^afxva youvar' 
 Aa§^o?, |swv u-rrai^a, uxs^sirTS 6' xovir^v iro^ciiv. 
 
 Terrible round Achilles stood the swollen water, while the 
 wave, falling upon his shield, puL'hed him along, nor could he 
 steady himself on his feet. He seized with his hands a bloom- 
 ing large elm ; it, however, falling from its roots, threw down 
 the whole bank, and checked the beautiful stream with its 
 thick branches, and made a bridge over the river, falling en- 
 tirely in. Then having leaped up from the gulf, he hastened 
 to flee Vv'ith rapid feet towards the plain, filled with terror. 
 Not yet, however, did the mighty god desist, but rose to rush 
 after him, blackening over the surface, that he might cause 
 the noble Achilles to cease from warlike toil, and avert de- 
 struction from the Trojans. But Pelides leaped back as far 
 as a spear-cast, having the force of a dark eagle, the hunter- 
 bii'd, which is at once the strongest and fleetest of the winged 
 race. Like to this he rushed, and the brass rung dreadfully 
 upon his breast ; but bending obliquely, he fled from it, while 
 it, flowing behind, followed with a mighty noise. As often as 
 the swift-footed noble Achilles attempted to stand against it, 
 and to know whether all the immortals who possess the wide 
 heaven put him to flight, so often did a vast billow of the river 
 flowing from Jove wash his shoulders from above : whilst he 
 leaped high with his feet, sorrowful in his mind, and the rapid 
 stream subdued his knees under him, and forced away the 
 sand from beneath his feet. 
 
 4. 
 
 KuXXc9ro5iov, s/jlov tsxoj, o^fl'so, avra 'ya^'<fe(isv 
 H'/ffxoiasv 5iVT)iVTa Sav&ov sivon (xaj^?)* 
 AXX' rap^ji'Ta eirafAuve, toXXtiv 8s (pXoya tKpavffxso. 
 Eyw aurap Zs(p-j^m xai Notoio apysffrao, 
 "EKfoy-ni o|9(T'ouiTa p^aXfryjv ^usXXav s^ aXo^sv, 
 *H xt^paXac: xa» TSuj^Sa. T^wwv x£v aero xyjai, 
 <E>oP£o'j<ra xrtKov ©Xeyfjia* Cu 8s 'ra.f o-)(6as Hav^o/o 
 Ka(' 8sv8^£cf.^ gv o' hi -TTuPj auTov iJ.ri8s ■irofji.'R'av tfs 
 
IM GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 Eywv ia)(ov<fa (p^f/^oja', tots 'jtv^ axa/xarov tfj^eiv. 
 *fiff fipa^'* -rup 5e ^ccTTi^asg TiTvffxSTo 'HipajCroj.- 
 n^wra fxeu -Truf* Suisto sv crs(5»w, vsx^ou.c Js xats 
 IloXXouff, ol ^a sCav aXi.c xar' aurov, oyg A;)(;<XXgyj XTa»' ' 
 n£(5<ov <7rav 5' S^ri^a.\/&r,^ vdj)^ (5' ayXaov dyjiTo, 
 *f2g (5' 6t' aXw>]v veoa^'Jc' Bops'ij otwpivoj 
 By\^o.ivyi .ajvjy' av, oC-tij: ^f s^tiPJi /xiv Xoli^si' 
 Qg irav irzSiov efrjp'av^ir], xa^r5' vsxpouj a^a 
 
 XlrsXeai re, x«i <rsaj, i^tJs (xv^ixoj, jcoijovto, 
 
 Tec 'irscpvxsi oCKig 'kspi xaXa ^^s&i^ci Tora/xoio* 
 E7P(;;£Xuej ts, xaj i-)(^di>es tsj^ovt', oI xccra (5«vaj, 
 Oi ev^a XKJ sv^a xuviCTajv xa^a ^ssd^a xaXa 
 (s) TtJ^O|ji/£voJ 7rvoi>j 'H^af^'-roio ToX^.a-ijooj. 
 
 Arise, Vulcan, my son ; for against thee do we deeni ed- 
 dying Xanthus to be a fit opponent in fight : but a5.-:ist with 
 all haste, and show forth abundant flame. In the mean while 
 I v/ill go to excite a severe storm of the west wind and rapid 
 Bouth from the sea, which, biinging a destructive conflagra- 
 tion, may consume the heads and armour of the Trojans. 
 Burn thou, however, the trees along the banks of Xanthus., 
 and send thy fire against himself; nor let him at all turn the« 
 away with kind words, or threatening : neither do thou pre- 
 viously restrain thy violence ; but when I, shouting, shall 
 give the signal, then check thy unwearied fire. Thus she 
 spoke ; and Vulcan darted forth his fierce-burning fire. First • 
 of all he lighted a fire in the plain, and burned up the nume- 
 rous dead, Vi^hom Achilles slew, which were in it in vast num- ■' 
 bers, and the whole plain was dried up, and the limpid watei 
 restrained. As when an autumnal north wind immediately 
 dries a newly- wet garden, while he rejoices, whosoever culti- 
 vates it; so was the whole plain dried up, and he consumed 
 the dead : whereupon he turned his shining flame against tho 
 river. The elms were burned up, and willows, and tamarisks ; 
 the lotus was consumed, and rushes and reeds, which grew ia 
 great abundance around the beautiful streams of the river. 
 The eels and the fishes, v/hich through the whirlpools, which 
 through the fair streams dived here and there, were fatigued, 
 wearied out by the breath of the various-artificer Vulcan. 
 
GREEK EXEHCISES. 163 
 
 HEXAMETERS AND PENTAMETERS, 
 
 1. 
 
 Ta S^ocfosvra ra ^oSa, xai sxsivr} rj xarciifvxvog 
 
 'E^-TTuXXoj TOig 'EXjxwvjaffi xsirai, 
 Ta< OS 5a{pvai p^sXa^j^j^vWoi tiv, Ilaiav Hv&is' 
 
 E-zti -rrsT^a AsX(p«j ayXuide tovto toi. 
 OuToj <5' 6 (xaXos xs^aoc: ^myag ai[ia^s\ /3w/xo 
 
 T?w^wv ^(S'/vsuv axPS^xova Tc^'jji.jv^ou, 
 
 Those dewy roses, and that thick wild-thjme, are sacred 
 to the Muses of Helicon: but the dark-leaved laurels, to 
 ihee, O Pythian Apollo ; for the Delphian rock adorns thes 
 with these. That white horned he-gcat, which crops .tha 
 lowest t^\ig of the turpentine tree,' shall stain the altai: with 
 his blocd. 
 
 2. 
 
 A Ov^tji SsiXaiS TV Tt 'n-}.tcv -tci, £i xaTaTa^Sig 
 
 Ar/XriVovs WTr&j 5axPuCj oSvPoiJ-Svog ; 
 'A p^j,aa^oj oip^srai, to Tsxog xaXov, sg 'A(5av oip^er'* 
 
 Avxoc; ya^ ''"^^X^^ aix(p=7ia^= ■)(a\o(.ig' 
 KXay^J'jiTi 6c a\ x-jvs^" tj -n-Xtov -to;, avjxa Tir]va^ 
 
 Oj}^o/.'.svac; omSs Xsi-tSTai co'-tswv T£:f;-^a ; 
 
 Ah wretched thou, O ThjTsis ! what will it avail thee, if 
 mourning thou waste away both thy eyes with tears ? The 
 young she-goat, beautiful offspring, is gone to the shades ; 
 for a fierce wolf seized her with his fangs. The dogs are 
 barking ; but what will it avail thee, since there is not even 
 left thee the ashes of her bones ? 
 
 3. 
 
 IIot' ev aXw*) i^aXo^ evruyuv 'r'ocfig aiyog 
 'E5a-^s 'iravrag 'rovg avakovg xXaSovg oivr^g, 
 
 ToCov ecroj wffvs to) sx yair^g- xcips, xaxiO'TS, 
 'H|uST£^ov TO xa.p'jrocpoPQ'J xXrjiJ.DL yvaS^otg' 
 
 Ta^ |i(^a outfa s^j.'irsSog yXvw vsxra^ -raXjv ccvjjo'ej, 
 'OcTCov Coi, TPotys, ^uojxsvoj £in(i<n'SKlai. 
 
 Once in a vineyard, the wanton, well bearded husband of 
 the she-goat, devoured all the tender branches of the vine. 
 
164 GRKEK EXERCISES. 
 
 This cry issued forth unto him from the earth : " Gnaw, 
 \ilest animal, our fruitful branch ; for the root remaining 
 vigorous, shall again yield sweet nectar, sufficient, O goat, 
 for a libation at thy sacrifice. 
 
 Ms <rsvraSTii^ov iraiSu^ £)^ovra axrj^ea 6v[kov 
 
 'H^-jratfs vriXsjrjj *AY5r]t:, KaXX»fjLap(ov. 
 AXXa /x-*] xXajoic: (jls- |j.£T£(j'p(ov ya^ xai jSjotojo 
 
 Ilau^ou, xai twv /Sjotoio xaxwv Tau^wv. 
 
 Cruel death carried off me Callimachus, when a boy five 
 years old, possessing a mind as yet undisturbed by cares. 
 Do not weep for me ; for I participated in little of life, and in 
 few of the evils of existence. 
 
 IAMBIC DIMETER CATALECTIC VERSE. 
 
 1 
 
 Ta 0r;o7;c: tfu Xsysig fJt-SV 
 a' au 6 <f>^'jyojv avTUSj 
 'AXwCsij: (V sixag syu. 
 Ms wXerfsv Gvx^' i'JT'roj, 
 Ou "Jre^ocr. vr^ei: ours* 
 AXXoj 6s xaivog (fr^arog 
 Me air' o/x|xaTw» /SaXwv. 
 
 Thou indeed dost tell of the wars of Thebes, and he, on the 
 other hand, of the loud shouts of the Phrygians ; I, however, 
 of my own captivity. No horse, nor foot soldiery, nor fleel 
 destroy me ; but another new host, wounding me firom the 
 eyes of the fair. 
 
 2. 
 
 Ilivsi rj jxeXaiva y»), 
 Avrriv 5s iri\si S:vS^e* 
 Av^ac: 8' 6aKa'f<fa crivsi, 
 0aXa<Cav (5' o rfkiog, 
 2?Xr)vyi 5' cov i;X»ov. 
 T», srai^oi, aap^sff^' juioi j 
 Iliveiv ^cXov-Ti x' auTW : 
 
 i 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 165 
 
 The black earth drinks, and the trees drink it ; the sea also 
 drinks the breezes, and the sun the sea ; and the rnoon the 
 8un. Why do you contend with me, O companions ! vvhen I 
 myself have also a mind to drink ? 
 
 3/ 
 
 n yvvaixsg, 5ot', Jots /j^oi, 
 A;xu(T'Ti 'rrisiv /S^ofxiou* 
 ll5rj <ya^ iizo xavixarog 
 AvaCTSvai^uJ T^o-Tro^rif. 
 A' SKsjvwtf Jots av^jwv 
 
 A' o'lOVS irWU^O) ffTe^a.VQV$ 
 
 Twv Ss f^WTWv TO xau;xa, 
 T»vj 0x^<ira(T(ju, xpaoir] ; 
 
 Give me, give, O women ! to drink copiously of Bacchus ; 
 for now exhausted by sultry heat, I pant : and give me of 
 those flowers, for my forehead scorches the garlands which I 
 wear : but, O heart ! with what shall I screen thee from ih« 
 ardour of love ? 
 
 4. 
 
 'O 5' EPuiS iU-o\u€(jov s-;(wv 
 
 T< y' ova^ To(5' ^tXsj ejvoi ; 
 a' 2yt,)ye ^oXkcis Soxsu 
 Ms <xXaKSvTa sv s^wo'j, 
 Ev aXXoij rJjoXicr^ayijv, 
 
 I seemed in a dream to run with speed, bearing -^^inga 
 upon my shoulders ; but Love, having lead round his beauti- 
 ful little feet, yet pursued and overtook me. What does thLs 
 vision mean 1 I think indeed, that I, being involved in many 
 loves, shall escape from the rest, to be enfettered by this on« 
 alone. 
 
 * In this and the following ode, the first foot of the measure is an ana- 
 
166 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 IAMBIC TRIMETER ACATALECTIC VERSE. 
 
 1. 
 
 Kai vuv o^cj Cs £7rj gxr,vaig vauTuaig 
 A/av-ro^, svi)a S)^£j ea'p^arriv tk^jv, 
 KuvTj^srouvTa 'iraka.i xai jui£7^ouf/.evov 
 
 Ejt' ev^oVj £ir' oux sviJov. Eu 5s b'k^b^zi C* 
 'fig Tig fu^ivoj (Saffi; Aaxajvrjg xuvoj. 
 Avrjp yap <ri/v^av£j apr» svoov, xa^a 
 Ka» li^oxTovoutT X^>"^ i^^'oj-ri (r-rai^wv. 
 Kaj craTTajvaiv tf' ckToj t'/]C5s -ttuXijc: avBsv 
 E^yov £r' fitfTiv, 5' Ews-fffiiv, p^a^jv 6<rou 
 
 On every occasion, O son of Laertes, have I beheld thee 
 "watching to seize some opportunity against thy foes, and 
 now do I perceive thee at the naval tents of Ajax, where he 
 occupies the last station, ranging for a long time back, and 
 exploring with thine eye the fresh impressions of his steps, in 
 order that thou ma,yest see whether he be within or absent. 
 In good season, doth as it were some sagacious movement of 
 a Spartan hound lead thee forth to the object of thy search, for 
 the warrior chances at present to be within, dripping with 
 sweat as to his head and murderous hands. It is needless for 
 thee any longer to be looking within this entrance ; but declare 
 why thou didst undertake this toilsome task, that thou ma jest 
 learn from her who knows all things. 
 
 2. 
 
 ITa< Ayaju-£|xvovof, vuv s^zdri (foi sxeiv* 
 Tla^ovn XsuO'CcJv, wv asi ridd' 'rr^o^ufAOff. 
 To(5e ya^ 70 raXanv A^yoj ou vo^sig^ 
 
 1 A Dactyl in the third place, 
 
 2 An Anapaest ii the first place. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. IjST 
 
 Aurv] 5', 0^6(J'<ra, tou ^sou Xuxoxtovou 
 ' Awsios ayo^oL' hSs (V ou| a^iff-TS^ag, 
 'O xXfivo^ vaoj "H^aj* oJ 6' ixavojut-sv, 
 ^ccdxsiv 6pav Taj ToXupfPutfouj Mux'/jva^, 
 
 * To5'£ -rs "TToXucp^oPov 5wfxa IIsXotkJwv, 
 'O^ev sx (povwv TttT^oj syw croTc cs 
 Hvc^xa, xalctfwfl'a, xd^sd^Ssj^afjiiiv 
 Ej TotJ'ovo' ryorjj, TJfji-o.'^ov Tar^j (povou. 
 Nuv ouv, O^SifTa, xa< (T-j gSvwv (piXraTS 
 
 • ITuXai^T), /5oiiX£U7£ov Sv Ta^si <ri )^p>] 5pav 
 'Qj ij^T] Xa/x-r^ov (TeXaj tjXjou tj/jhv 
 Sa^T] xjvsi £wa (p^c^jxaT' o^vi^w;, 
 Euqj^ovy) r' ,aiXa»va acT-r^wy exXeXoi-nrsv. 
 n^ju ouv £|o5oi7ro^siv av(5^ojv =rjv' Cts^tj^, 
 Ao^ojCiv I'jvairTcTov wj spi-iV svraud', 
 
 *lv' o'ox st' xai^og oxvsjv, aXX' axjxii ep^'cov. 
 
 O son of the Agamemnon who once led our forces at Troj, 
 it is now permitted thee to behold in person those things 
 which thou wast always desirous to view : for this is the an- 
 cient Argos, after which thou longest, the grove of the gadfl}^- 
 smitten daughter of Inachus, and this, Orestes, the Lycaean 
 forum of the wolf-slaying god ; while that edifice on the left 
 hand is the celebrated temple of Juno. But as regards the 
 place to which we have come, say that thou beholdest the 
 rich Mycenffi, and the blood-stained abode of the descendants 
 of Pelops, whence in. former daj^s, after thy father's murder, 
 having received thee from her who was of the same blood 
 with thee, a,nd thine own sister, I bore away, and saved, and 
 nurtured thee, for an avenger of the murder of thy father. 
 Now then, Orestes, and thou, Pylades, dearest of strangers, 
 quickly must you deliberate v/hat plan j^ou should pursue, 
 sdnce already the bright beam of the sun calls forth in clear 
 strains for us the matin songs of the birds, and the glcomj 
 night arrayed in stars hath departed. Before then any one of 
 the inhabitants come forth from beneath his roof, arrange to- 
 gether your plans, since wQi are here, where there is no time 
 for delay, but instant action is demanded. 
 
 3 An _A napjEst in the first place. 
 
 * A Tribrach in the fourth place. 
 
 * An Anapaist in the first place. 
 
168 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 3. 
 
 * Ev c'/i^' ^(Xe^a 'l-TfcroXurov <ra "TToXXa ^6 
 npoxo4/ao'' "TraXai, ou 5j» jxs woXXou •n'ovou. 
 Niv ya^ -tot' eXflovra ex ^ofxov Ilirdsw^, 
 
 Ej O-^-IV Xa{ TSX?] CSfXVWV fJ.U(J'77]i^JWV, 
 
 Ka» cr^iv eX^siv jxsv Tirjv^s T^oii^'»)viav yijv 
 Ila^' auTr,v irsr^av IlaXXaoo?, xaTo-sj^iov 
 
 ToXoi-rov ^sav \5^vff&ai uffcvrjtfoutTiv. 
 
 * E-ffSJ 5s Qrirfsvs Xsiorsi Ktx^oiriav ^(^ova, 
 ^euywv jaiaCfxa ai,aaTOj naXXavT»(5wv, 
 Kai (J'uv ($a/xa^T< vautfroXsj rvyvos x^^^*** 
 
 ' Ajvsfrag evjauo'iav g;c(5rjiJ.ov (pyyvjv 
 STSvouCa 5r) svrau^a, xaxTS-rXsyM'Svij 
 Epwtoj xivr^oi^, airoXXuTC/j -fj TaXaiv* 
 
 ^tyj}' OliTf* 5' OJXS-TfJOV ^UVOJ^s VO'T'OV. 
 
 AXX' ouTj ■)(^py] Tov5' s^wTK TavTTj irs^Siv 
 m^ayixa Si Qr^cfsi osi^w, xax(pavr).:r£<rai. ' 
 
 * Ka» <rov (xsv Trs^uxora croXs/xjov -/jixiv 
 IlaTyi^ a^ai^jv xtsvsj, ag 6 -Trovrjoj 
 Ava^ noCsi^wv ©rjrfsi /s^a? wTraCfv, 
 
 I feel no envy, however, on account, of these things — why 
 fihould I ? But I will punish Hippoljtus this day, for this 
 offences which he has committed against me. As I long ago 
 brought the most of these my plans to maturity, there is no 
 need now of much remaining labour. For Phaedra formerly, 
 the illustrious wife of his father, having seen him when h« 
 came from the abode of Pitthcus to behold and celebrate 
 
 * A Dactyl in the first place. 
 ' A Dactyl ill the tliird place. 
 
 ^ An Anapsest in the fifth place. 
 
 * A Dactyl in the third place. 
 
 * An AnapEDbt in the first place. 
 ■ A Dactyl in the third place. 
 
GREEK EXEBCISES» 16S^ 
 
 the sacred mysteries, was seized in heart with violent love, 
 in accordance with my decrees. And ere she came to this 
 Troe2enian land, cherishing a passion for an ahsent one, she 
 founded near the very rock of Minerva, a temple of Venus, 
 obvious to the view of this land ; and for the time to come 
 they shall record in song that the temple of the goddess wasf 
 founded on account of Hippolytus. But when Theseus leaves 
 the Cecropian land, flying from the pollution occasioned by 
 the blood of the Pallantides, and with his wife, sails to this 
 country, submitting for the space of a year to a voluntary 
 exile in a foreign land, here then, deeply groaning and wound- 
 ed with the stings of love, the wretched woman pines away 
 in silence, nor does any of her attendants know the cause. 
 This love, however, shall not thus be in vain. I will disclose 
 the affair to Theseus, and it shall openly display itself. The 
 father shall destroy the son become hostile to me, by the im- 
 precations which Neptune;* monarch of the main, bestowed 
 as a gift upon Theseus, that he should not thrice fruitlessly 
 ask a favour of the srod. 
 
DOCTRINE 
 
 OP 
 
 THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 T-f ea\ovjieva ^£<toT7)tos ptj^ara ffvvBfiinruxnv aveSe^aTO tvepyeriKri^ Kai TaQjjriKtfi 
 kadccr£{ji)s, ApoUon. lib. iii. c. 7. 
 
 1, 
 
 The Middle Voice in Greek is so called, because it has a 
 middle signification between the Active and Passive Voices, 
 impljnng- neither action nor passion simplj, but an union in 
 some degree of both. 
 
 2. 
 
 Middle Verbs may be divided into Five Classes. 
 
 In middle verbs of the FIRST CLASS, the action of tha 
 Verb is reflected immediately back upon the agent, and hence 
 rerbs of this class are exactly equivalent to the active voice 
 joined with the accusative of the reflexive pronoun ; e. g. 
 Xouw, " I wash another," Xouo|*a», (i. q. Xouw sy^avrov) " I wash 
 myself." 
 
 In middle verbs of the SECOND CLASS, the agent is 
 the remote object of the action of the verb, with reference 
 to whom it takes place ; so that middle verbs of this clasa 
 are equivalent to the active voice, with the dative of tho 
 reflexive pronoun, £|./.au7W, CsauTW, ^auTW : e. g. orfjiv, " to tako 
 wp any tiling for another, in order to transfer it to another ;" 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 171 
 
 ai^s-i&ai, " to take up in order to keep it one's self— to transfer 
 to one's self;" a(pai^f;v, "to take any thing from another," 
 •without any reference to one's own advantage; a^ai^3iC&ai^ 
 '■ to take any thing from another, for one's self, in order to re- 
 tain or use it." 
 
 Middle verbs of the THIRD CL/iSS, express an action 
 which took place at the comniand of the agent, or with regard 
 to it ; which is expressed in^ EngUsh by, ''io cause." In other 
 •words, this class may be said to signify,' " to cause any thing to 
 he done :" e. g. 7,?«cpoj, " I write ;" ^pa^po.aaj, " I cause to be 
 written, I cause the name, as of an accused person, to be taken 
 down in writing by the magistrate before whom the process is 
 cai"ried ; or simply, " I accuse." 
 
 6. 
 
 The FOURTH CLASS of toiddle verbs, includes those 
 which denote a reciprocal or mutual action : e. g. tfTSvJstf^a;, 
 " to make libations along with another, to make mutual liba- 
 tions, i. e. to make a league ;" (5{a>.L)S0'r»M(, " to dissolve along 
 with another, i. e. to dissolve by mutual agrfx^mont." — To this 
 class belong verbs signifying to contract, quarrel, contend, be 
 reconciled, &c. 
 
 ' The FIFTH CLASS, comprehends middle verbs of the 
 fist class, when followed by an accusative or some other case ; 
 in other vv'ords, it embraces all thosp middle vetbs which de- 
 note an action reflected back on the agent himself, and are at 
 the same time followed by an accusative or other case, which 
 that action /arMer regards ; e. g. 
 
 eiTTto av avTov 
 
 'ZevdiVTai Ta^cis re tcvvti, k. t. A. Iliad. T. 25. 
 
 Although fleet dogs stir themselves in pursuit of him. 
 
 ' This class of middle verbs is iu fact only a branch of the second. 
 Thus ypa(p£jdai, "to accuse," implies for one's self, i. e. to gratify one's 
 love of justice, or one's desire of reparation for injuries received ; rrouiadai, 
 " to cause to be done (for one's self) ;" SiSaaxEoOai, " to cause to be in- 
 structed, (for one's sell^ as a father lus son, to gratify his parental feel- 
 ings)." 
 
172 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 
 6u ^ 
 
 g cc I ^ -r; cj 
 
 
 .K- S..S, 
 
 •^c. - J3 
 
 s 
 
 P faO <^ a> 
 o 
 
 ~ S ^ § o s ^ 
 2^^ p. 12 G 
 
 CD 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 s. > > ^ 
 
 >= :: 
 
 W 
 
 fa 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o ts 
 02 O 
 
 O s-i 
 
 = ,=! O) 
 
 ^ to 
 
 •r; o 
 
 c o o 
 
 03 fl G 
 
 - S ^ c3 
 C ctS i-H 
 
 1^ r^ 
 
 
 
 a. > > > 
 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 173 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 
 GO 2 
 
 
 ^ OS 
 
 
 >^ 
 
 
 hi 
 
 
 
 fcjo a 
 
 
 .2 
 
 _g 
 
 HH 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■5 
 
 i'^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 t-1 
 
 
 ,^2 
 
 ^ 
 
 rl 
 
 0) 
 
 l>^ 
 
 
 g 
 
 r:3 
 
 "3 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 ci 
 
 !-. 
 
 
 •S 
 
 Oh 
 
 g^ 
 
 .22 2 ^ 
 ;-! tc cc 
 
 
 bJD © ^ 
 C a; O) 
 
 ,*^ O M CJ O 
 
 3^^ S ^.^ 
 
 -' t^" o 
 
 5-< r^ CO 
 
 O 
 
 
 .2 S QJ 
 
 
 ^ O fc£l' 
 
 "!^ 1^ . O 
 «^ -^ - 
 
 ^ o ;3 ;> 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 n 5-1 
 
 O M 
 "to I— < 
 
 o 
 
 CS u> 
 
 o o 
 
 « 2 
 
 <! l-f W 
 
 ^ u^ i 
 
 Co lu o 
 
 -J o 
 3-CV/3 
 
 Si 
 
 It 
 
 WW 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 II 
 
 O "m 
 SH £ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 'Sb a 
 
 ^ B 
 I2 
 
 So 
 
 O (D 
 ^ to 
 
 <u d 
 
 s 
 
 o . 
 
 Xfl <0 
 
 bjo 
 
 5b 'Bh' 
 
 o . 
 
 S-h" rj O 
 
 ^ 3 -- 
 
 = o '^ 
 
 O QJ OT 
 
 ,22 fcjo ?3 
 
 d ^ 03 ' 
 
 Sh P O 
 
 
 •5 
 
 o 
 
 '3 
 
 33 <r> 
 
 O -^3 3. 
 
 3 ;^ S 
 
 So 
 
 So 
 2 cj 
 
 So?H - i'^^ 
 
 3^3 
 
 UJ u> o k. ^ 
 
 P2 
 
 8 
 
 ? t § 5 
 
174 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 © 
 
 t 
 
 TO (U 
 
 a> TO 
 
 » ^ 
 
 -1^ 
 
 U-i 0) 
 
 3 \^^ 
 
 S -^ CO 
 
 ^ c^ ® 
 
 S § 2 
 
 03 CC to ^ 
 
 O " . 
 
 -• '^ t-1 
 
 o ^ o 
 
 Z 22 
 
 "o ^ ^ 
 
 TO "^ a;) 
 !>~> TO TO 
 
 
 " s c 
 
 O O CD 
 !> TO TO 
 GPP 
 
 O c3 k3 
 O O O 
 
 2;d 
 
 ^^ 
 P t-< 
 c3 - 
 
 ^ I 
 
 ^ P 
 
 J*q 'q, to 
 
 TO :3 
 
 >^ TO •- 
 
 « „ <D 
 
 o o 3 
 J3^ « 
 
 ^ o v; 
 
 TO 
 
 P 0) ^ 
 K-j ^ TO TO " C 
 
 S >^ ^ ^ bx) 
 
 o a 2 p 
 
 p ^ ._ ^ 
 
 P 5 j:^ 2 
 
 ■ =-* -^ o o 
 
 
 t— < 
 
 
 l-H HH 
 
 
 
 l-m— IH-4 H-( 
 
 H-i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ig 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 •«^ 
 
 1 ^ S i. 
 
 
 5" ? 
 
 „ 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 5 5 
 
 2 ^ S S 
 
 
 p S 5 g 
 
 55 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 11 
 
 J^ 5 f< 
 
 5 g S g.^ 
 
 
 H e* "e. e 
 
 1 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ,5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 iM 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 •5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >» 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 >> 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 
 , 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 TO 
 
 . P c3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CIJ 
 
 C 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 8 . 
 
 fe g 6 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 rQ 
 
 fe 
 
 ^00 -s 
 
 
 . 
 
 . 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 "2 TO 
 
 nvey another 
 use another t 
 use another t 
 Dwn another, 
 ceive, suppla: 
 
 s 
 
 nge another 
 w another, 
 ify another 
 ird another 
 
 -> 
 
 
 U 
 
 rp 
 
 P 2 
 
 p 
 
 S 2 •- p- 
 
 
 
 <i 
 
 •c2 
 
 ga 
 
 8 g^^^ 
 
 TO 
 
 
 
 H^ 
 
 
 t— 1 1-4 
 
 
 
 i— 1 HH h-4 H^ 
 
 h-4 
 
 I- 
 
 3 ,§ 
 
 ^ i 3 S 5 
 
 
 K K P w w 
 
 -- a O 3 
 
 E-i "S" *9< •9' 
 
 1 
 
GBE^K EXERCISES. 
 
 176 
 
 m 
 
 PQ 
 
 > 
 
 P 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 s ^ 
 
 8 5- 
 
 <L>_ p^ 
 
 H re O 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 < 
 
 
 i^.j 
 
 irt "^ OJ 
 
 feBoT S 
 C 5S <a 
 
 "^ o S 
 
 2 i^ "5 
 
 s-s =« 
 
 c:! : « 
 
 c-^.2 
 
 
 ^ S S o 8 
 1-5 16 -S 
 
 r-) <D O S ■►^ 
 
 J:^ "^ c« 
 
 5 ,o ^ _< 
 
 •;3 !*_ '—H "v 
 
 '^"IvS Is 
 
 &.-M ^ C te 
 
 w *j c3 a) o 
 
 i^ I ° I 2 
 
 P . CJ 
 
 111:3 1 
 
 « -i^ .S c - 
 so — 
 
 §-3 
 
 
 r- S ° -^ 
 
 |.S86 
 
 i>p| 
 
 •-' o „"*^ 
 c o Si 92 
 
 O V5 
 
 
 .S o 
 
 
 < I 
 
 >^ C5 U l-> 
 
 u tc a ^ 
 •2 2^ S 
 -^^S o 
 
 ,T-=J 
 
 „ ' — W J.' ^ 
 
 3- „•" S 'i' 
 
 ^ i.S2 "^ 
 
 ■^ "^ S "3 - 
 
 2 ? c;^ 2 
 
 -2 -^ . a i^ c 
 
 g 0*1;- o 03 
 
 " II III 
 
 5 S '^ 5..a 
 
176 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 H 
 
 
 >>•" >. 
 
 i 
 
 "g)?^'^ s s^^ 
 
 2 I ^-S^^ ti«,S^o-SS^ 
 
 v2o li-^t^ o-Spgop 
 
 
 3 
 
 = 5^ " w c3 S ^: -.- 
 
 . ^ •- •= .^ ^ f ^ 
 
 2 C!rrtWG-7!'^ C > •3^'S 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 Si 
 
 Sn 3 3 «VP ^ 
 5 a ^ S/,0 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 177 
 
 
 ^ o 
 
 ;3 O 
 
 - '^ -S "^ 
 
 S QJ 2 
 
 ^ S c^ o ?^ 
 
 ^'rt § 2 ? 
 
 ^ m 
 
 o :3 
 
 ■^ o 
 
 o 
 
 So 
 zn CO 
 
 •1-1 CO 
 
 Is 
 
 P S 3 
 
 H 'w ^ ' -i_> 
 
 % ^2 I- 
 .- a? -^ r _g 
 
 <q -- -^, . -^ 
 
 c/i OQ «3 
 
 O g 
 
 \'^ 
 
 o P ^ 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 o _ 
 
 .Jo. 
 
 "- P CC 
 
 o 
 
 <J 
 O 
 Q 
 
 H 
 
 H. 
 
 O 
 
 m 
 W 
 
 o 
 u> 
 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 s* 
 
 
 M 
 
 3 
 
 •5 
 
 o 
 
 
 $-1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 . S 
 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 CQ 
 
 2 
 
 5^- O 
 
 ^ 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 QJ O 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 rC ■-:3 
 
 ■O 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^ ra 
 
 C 
 
 P> 
 
 .*-> 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 i 
 
 2 n 
 
 , 
 
 <-J 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 o 
 
 
 C CO 
 
 , . 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 ^•^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 Td 
 
 i- 
 
 3 ->- 
 
 < < 
 
 ll 
 
 3 
 
173 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 11. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FOURTH CLASS OF 
 MIDDLE VERBS. 
 
 'Afy^iXXaff^ai, 
 BouXgustf^aj, 
 
 A<axovT«^£fl'(3af, 
 AiaXsyscr^aj, - 
 AjaXXarrstf^aj, 
 
 Afahjsddaif 
 
 Aia^i(pi(^stf^a», 
 
 Aia'ffXviKTf^sc'Satj 
 
 Ajareivscf^aj, 
 
 Ajarofsusa'^aj, 
 KaraXustf^aj 
 
 KoivoXoysttf^ai, 
 
 Ao^j^etrdai, 
 
 To contend together. 
 
 To skirmish together. 
 
 To contend together. 
 
 To deliberate together with another or 
 with one's own self. 
 
 To throw darts at one another. 
 
 To converse together. 
 
 To become reconciled with one an- 
 other. 
 
 To dissolve a contest between one an- 
 other, to become reconciled toge' 
 ther. 
 
 To combat together with the sword. 
 
 To smite one another. 
 
 To stretch across together, to contend 
 together. 
 
 To contend together in using the bow. 
 
 To reflect together with one's self, to 
 ponder in one's own mind. 
 
 To deposit mth another. 
 
 To dissolve a contest between one an- 
 other, to become reconciled toge- 
 ther. 
 
 To commune together. 
 
 To contend together. 
 
 To reflect together with one's self, to 
 deliberate in one's own mind. 
 
 » This verb is more frequently found with the signification of the first 
 class, as haravtoQai, to exert one's self, to urge. 
 
 2 The various meanings of this verb, and the connexion subsisting be- 
 tween them, are worthy of the student's notice. Thus, >cptvw, I separate, 
 1 separate the various particulars of a case, I consider them separately, I 
 pass an opinion upon them, I judge, I condemn : Kpivojiut, I separate my- 
 self, I separate myself in battle from others, (for example), 1 distinguislx 
 myself in battle, i. e. I Jight strenuously, Sec. Vid. arnKpn'w, in the ex- 
 amples of the first class of middle verbs.' 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 179 
 
 Ma^vstfOai, 
 
 To revile one another. 
 To contend together. 
 
 )> J» 5) 
 
 To make (peace) together. 
 To make hbations together, to make a 
 mutual treaty. 
 
 To agree together. 
 
 12. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE FIFTH CLASS OF 
 MIDDLE VERBS. 
 
 Avajxyafl'^aj r<, 
 
 Airo^iiso'^aj ri, 
 A-tfov^TrTeC^ai X'^^^^i 
 
 AovS'jdai (juiMiy 
 Avsiji^ai ^Ca^vtjv, 
 
 O^sysddai t», 
 Ils^aioufl'iJai -TToraUiOVj 
 
 To recall anj' thing to one'o o^ti re- 
 
 collecticn. 
 To strip any thing off one's self. 
 To wash one's own hands. 
 To put any thing on one's self. 
 To cut one's own hair. 
 To mourn for a person. 
 To wash one's own body. 
 To loosen one's ov.'n girdle 
 (See avaf;.vaCt)aj.) 
 (See arovi'Tr'Tsa'ilaj.) 
 To desire any thing. 
 To ferr}'- one's self across a river, to 
 
 cross a river. 
 To crown one's own head. 
 
 
 To fear any thing. 
 
 To guard one's self against any thing, 
 
 to be on one's guard against any 
 
 tilings 
 
 ' This verb is very rarely found with tlie signification of tlus class of 
 naddk verba, but ahnost always with that of the second. 
 
180 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 REMARKS 
 
 ON THE 
 
 TEJ^SES OF THE MIDDLE VOICE, 
 
 The proper signification of the Middle Voice is most appa- 
 rent, as has been remarked, in the Aorists, especially the first. 
 In the present and imperfect the distinction between the pas- 
 sive and middle voices is often mdeterminate, as the form in 
 both is exactlj^ the same. 
 
 2. 
 
 The futm'e rr.iddle has usually the sense of the active, also 
 sometimes of the passive. The future passive, on the contra- 
 ry, has seldom if ever the signification of the middle. 
 
 3. 
 
 In many verbs the aorist passive has also a middle signifi- 
 cation ; as xaTaKXivsrf^aj, Mid. to lay one^s self down ; xacsxXi- 
 ^/]v, / laid myself down : acraXXarTcC^ai, Mid. to depart, [send 
 one^s self away) : a^'/iXXay/iv, / departed. The same holds 
 ffood in "TTs^aiow, cpoQsu, "Trej^w, xoi/xaw, o^syw, aifox^ivuj affxu, 
 &c. 
 
 4. 
 
 In such verbs as those, where the aorist passive has a mid- 
 dle signification, the aorist middle is generally obsolete or rare. 
 Sometimes, however, it has one of the significations of the 
 verb appropriated to itself, and the passive aorist another. 
 Thus, the aorist passive C^aXiivai, is attached with the medial 
 signification to (jrsXksrf&aij to journey ; whereas (jTSiXadSai, the 
 proper aorist middle, belongs only to CTsXXstf^aj, to clothe one^s 
 self or send for. 
 
 The perfect middle is called by the grammarians of the 
 present day, the second perfect active. They maintam thai 
 il never has the signification of the middle, but always that 
 of the active voice ; and that this sigiiification is an intransi* 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 181 
 
 (ive one. This doctrine does not appear to be well founded. 
 That in some verbs we find the perfect middle supplying 
 the place of the perfect active, is readily admitted ; as, cxTova, 
 axypiooL, sC-rro^a, XsXoi^a, TTS^pvya^ oida, TScrovda, Teroxa, idio^a. 
 In these verbs, however, the perfect active is obsolete on 
 account of euphonj^ and therefore, it is conceived, no argu- 
 ment whatever can be deduced from the use of these middle 
 perfects, which can have a bearing on the present question. 
 In the case of other verbs, the peculiar meaning of the perfect 
 middle may easily be recognized. The following examples 
 Avili serv-e to illustrate this remark ; to understand the mode in 
 which the last meaning is obtained, the student must bear in 
 mind merely the peculiar force of the perfect tense of the verb, 
 in all the voices ; viz. its reference to an action already done, 
 but continued in its relations and consequences to the present 
 time, in other words, its reference to continued action. 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 
 AyyvfUj I break. Perf. m-iddle, eaya, I have caused my- 
 
 self to be broken, (by not offering, 
 for example, sufficient resistance,) 
 and I continue broken, i. e. / am 
 broken. 
 
 Avoi^y, I open. Perf. middle, avsooya, I have caused 
 
 myself to be stood open, (speaking, 
 for example, of a door which does 
 not offer sufficient resistance in re- 
 maining shut,) and I continue open, 
 i. e. I stand open. 
 
 E;'Si^y, I waken. Perf middle, e^f^/o^a, I have wakened 
 
 myself and continue awake, i. e. I 
 a?n awake. 
 
 EX'ff'w, I give hope. Perf middle, soX-ra, I have given my- 
 self hopes, and I continue in hopes, 
 i. e. / hope. 
 
 OX>,vfiv<, I destroy. Perf. middle, oXojXa, I have destroyed, 
 ^ ruined myself, and I continue ruined, 
 
 i. e. I am undone. 
 
 riejdw, I persuade. Perf. middle, TS-rroicJa, I have persuaded 
 myself and I continue persuaded, 
 L e. I rely upon, trust, confide, (in 
 
182 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 another, for example, in whose argu- 
 ments or assertions I have persuaded 
 myself to acquiesce, or whose wishes 
 or commands J have persuaded my- 
 self to obey.) i 
 
 IT^jyvufAi, I fix. Peif. middle, 'xsry]ya, I have fixed my. 
 
 self and continue fixed, i. e. I am . 
 fixed. 
 
 Uf atTrfw, I do. Perf. niiddle, ^s-jr^a^a, I have caused 
 
 myself to do, I have acted in such a 
 way as to do ; tS'K^o.yci xakus, I have 
 caused myself to do well, I have 
 acted in such a way as to do well, 
 and I continue doing well, i. e. / do 
 well, I am fortunate, ox prosperous. 
 
 ^ai)tff^ I show. Perf middle, -r/stpi^va, I have shown my- 
 
 self and continue showTi, i. e. I appear. 
 
 Mevw, I remain. Perf. middle, fAsii.o\a, I have caused my- 
 
 self to remain, and I continue remain- 
 ing, i. e. / persevere — (stronger in its 
 meaning than the perfect , active, 
 fjt.6/j,evtjxa, wliich signifies simply, / 
 have remained.) 
 
 The list might be still farther extended, but a sufficient 
 number of examples have been cited, it is conceived, to show- 
 that the perfect middle, in numerous instances, has the true 
 signification of its voice ; and to make it fully apparent, how 
 very unphilosophical it is, and how much at variance with th^ 
 principles of the language, to maintain that the perfect middle 
 is merely neuter in its signification, . w^hen that very neuter 
 meaning can only be deduced fi'om, and is in fact based upon 
 the peculiar meaning of the middle voice. 
 
 The perfect and pluperfect passive are sometimes used in a 
 middle sense. This is the case when the corresponding mid- 
 dle tenses are either obsolete or used for those of the active 
 voice. Vid. page 181. 
 
STATEMENT OF SOME OPINIONS 
 
 RESPECTING THE 
 
 GREEK ACCENT, 
 
 (From the Museum Criticum, No. 5, pp. 65— 69.) 
 
 The question respecting the pronunciation of the Greek 
 language has divided itself into two distinct parts ; one relating 
 to the sound of the vowels, diphthongs, and consonants ; the 
 other referring to the manner which should be adopted in the 
 prolation of words with a proper regard to accent. In the 
 controversy which arose on the former part of the subject, 
 many scholars of the continent were engaged : among our 
 own countrymen, Bishop Gardiner, Professor Cheke, and Sir 
 T. Smith, took the most active part. The diversity of opinion - 
 which has been entertained on the expediency or inutility of 
 attending to the information pointed out by the Greek accents, 
 has produced many treatises. The works of Primatt, Gaily, 
 Foster, Horsley, and Mitford. are those of our owti country, 
 which contain the most detailed ilformation on the subject. 
 
 It is probable, that on neither one nor the other of these 
 questions will the learned world ever come to an entire agree- 
 ment ; accents wnll still be considered by many, " mute and 
 immeaning marks" — (Gibbon) : nor ■v\iill the most strenuous 
 advocates for the use of them either understand clearly, or be 
 able to explain to others satisfactorily, " that secret power of 
 harmony and tone,"^ which was so pleasing to the ear of a 
 Greek. With respect to the pronunciation of the letters of the 
 language, the various nations of Europe differ from each other, 
 
 1 Milton. 
 
1S4 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 and all differ in a greater or less degree from the right niod€. 
 In England, we are almost singular m the erroneous and vi- 
 tiated pronunciation of some letters : " We Englishmen,'' 
 says million, in his Tractate on Education, ** being northerly 
 do not open our mouth in the cold air vade enough to grace 
 a southern tongue.'' — ScaUger was once complimented by an 
 Irishman in Latin, but the sound of the words was so unlike 
 any thing lO which the ears of that scholar had been accus- 
 tomed, that he supposed the stranger was addi'essing him in 
 his native idiom ; and in answer to his address, he replied — 
 Domine. non intdligo Irlandice. If it couid be possible lo cite 
 the best scholars m Europe before the HXi'aia at Athens, or 
 the assembled senate of Rome, we suspect that few entire 
 t^eiitences of a pleading of Isc^us, or a Verrine oration, would 
 be so spoken by tlem, as to be comprehended by their audi- 
 ence. — These questions must, from the nature of them, con- 
 tinue to be involved in doubt and obscurity ; and although 
 some light may be throw^n upon them from what we find in 
 Dionysius of HaHcamasEus, and grammariajis and scholiasts, 
 yet there vnR be many things, which, to use the words of 
 SaiLCtiuSifugierJ nostras awes. 
 
 The first opponent of the propriety of accents was Isaac 
 Vossius ; for it does not appear that Scahger doubted whe- 
 ther these virgvlz were properly placed, as %ve find them ; 
 he observed only, that if the nice tonical pronunciation of 
 the ancients could be expressed by a modern, it would be 
 disagreeable to our ears — (Foster). But Vossius questioned 
 their situation upon the words, and thinking them inconsis- 
 tent with the short syllables, he removed them to those which 
 were long. 
 
 It has been remeu-ked, that in examining the question con- 
 cerning the use of accents, we ought to attend to the testi- 
 monies which the ancientsftheraselves afford, for they alone 
 are competent to give proper endence on the subject. Did 
 they, then, consider them as opposed to quanrity % The de- 
 fenders of the accents answer in the negative ; for quantity is 
 the foundation on which the accentual system stands ; it is 
 the circumstance which' the most general rui^ for the seat, or 
 species of accent, regard — (Hors. 39). " The ancient Attics, 
 £ays Eustathius, (Od. H. p. 2S4), made the final d of such 
 words long ; lohertfore they acuted then* penultima, and said 
 cJyvojV— (Foster, 339). 
 
 The opponents of the accents say, that in the time of 
 Aristophanes the grammarian, and his immediate successors, 
 
GilEEK EXERCISES. 1S5 
 
 they were placed according to qua,ntity ; but that afterwards, 
 the grammarians departed from that system, used them in a 
 different manner, and assigned to them their actual position. 
 Vossius contended, that until the time of Antoninus and 
 Commodus, and indeed to the seventh centnrj^, accents and 
 quantity agreed ; and that the marks were employed for 
 instruction in metre. But the observations of iElius Diony- 
 sius, Apollonius, Herodian, and other critics of the time of 
 Hadrian, show that they read their copies of the ancient 
 writers by the same visible notation of accent which was 
 Tised by the grammarians of Alexandria ; and the scholiasts 
 and commentators of subsequent ages to the times of Eus- 
 tathius, Lascaris, Gaza, agree with those who preceded them. 
 The chain of evidence on this part of the subject is unbroken. 
 
 Bishop Horsley endeavoured to show, that the accentual 
 system, as handed down to us, was not phonetical merely, 
 before the time of Aristophanes, but was a written notation 
 used in Greece. I'he decision of this point does not appear 
 very important. If it be asked why accents were not used 
 in writing, as in pronnnciation, before the time of the Alex- 
 andrian critics, a visible notation, it is answered, was not 
 wanted : this was necessary at Alexandria, not at Athens ; 
 it Vv^as of use to strangers and the children of strangers learn- 
 ing Greek, but not to those who were acquainted with it as 
 a vernacular idiom. Mr. Blomfield has observed, that in 
 the Venetian Scholia, when mention is made of the gram- 
 marians who succeeded Aristophanes, they are said to use 
 the accentual marks ; but that nothing of the kind is stated, 
 when the names of those who lived before him are referred 
 to : and this, he adds, is a strong presumptive proof in favour 
 of the common opinion, which ascribes the first introduction of 
 them to that grammarian. 
 
 But accent ('TPoo'cj'iia), it is said, had a reference to music 
 only : it is defined, tovos it^lg ov a5o|xsv.— This, it was replied, 
 is only one part of the definition ; the other adds, xai Toi)? 
 Xoyoug 'Tojoufjie^a, which extends it to reading and speaking.^ 
 Dionysius also, when he mentions the constituent parts of 
 perfect writing or speaking, uses the words, tcWsjj (pwv^j, a\ 
 pcaXoufxsvai, cr^orfw^iai, 5<a(po^o», " different tones of voice that 
 are called accents." — They were musical marks. — Ans. This 
 is not true ; music had its own marks, namely, characters 
 
 3 Foster, p. 6. 
 
 a2 
 
186 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 formed from alphabetical letters. (Hors. 37). — Thej'' were 
 metrical marks. — Jlns. Gluantity had its own separate marks. 
 The literary researches which are now actively carried 
 on at Naples, will inform the learned world whether the 
 virgulce are observable in the Herculanean MSS. Villoi- 
 son,"'' on the authority of Winkelmann, quotes the word 
 OTKOTN, from the treatise of Philodemus on Rhetoric, as 
 having accents. They have been seen on no inscription of 
 the cursive character, of old date ; for that whicli was said to 
 have been discovered on a wall at Hcrculaneum, is now con- 
 sidered by the best scholars on the contnient as* spurious. In 
 the following words, which v.'e give from Gruler, we find a 
 rare instance of an accented inscription in uncial letters : — • 
 
 AIAHMfiN 
 
 nPOMOIPOS 
 
 Nf22A2. 
 
 Variorum Corrigenda, cccxlvii. 
 
 That the want of a visible notalion of thern might some- 
 times lead to a misapprehension of a passage in the ancient 
 writers, is evident from the instances quoted by H. Steplia-- 
 nus, of the confusion of Saxtc/Xoiv^ ^la^aXwv, ^j«€oXwv, in a pas- 
 sage of Plato — (Foster, 341). Origen, we are told, read the 
 words 0TAI201XaPAZlN as if they meant, " Woe to thee, 
 land of Zin," instead of " Woe to thee, Chora2dn." We may 
 add, that Jerome confounded a.'yvog and a^voc, and under- 
 stood by KAQ AlFEl^ subverlil, (xa^ai^s?), when the meaning 
 of the passage requires Ha6ai>st, emundavii. — (G. Vossius. De 
 A. G. L. 2. c. 8). 
 
 It was contended by those who asserted that accent affect- 
 ed the sjdlable over which it was placed, ihat the scholiast 
 on Hephffistion quotes this line of Homer in the 12th Iliad, 
 and adds, that the acute in 023»v lengthens the first sjdiable. 
 
 Ttj-wcg ($' ^^^-'/''^''^aVj i^2l '/5ov c6;oXov oyjv — 
 
 and that Eustathius, on the line (Od. K. v. 60), B?jv sJg AioXou 
 v.\\)TcL (^ojp.aTa, says, there is a violation of the metre, of which 
 the acute in A<6Xou is to be the ^spaitsia, the restorative re- 
 
 sProleg. p. 11. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 187 
 
 medy. (Foster's Reply, 38). — Ans. The scholiast's expla- 
 nation is wrong, upon this principle ; that if accent had 
 made any part of the doctrine of quantity, it is strange that 
 Hepha33tion, professing to treat on the latter, should not 
 have mentioned the former in the course of his work — 
 (Horsle}'-, 137). With respect to Eustathius, it appears, says 
 Foster, that he was far from being satisfied with his own 
 explanation. The two words were probably pronounced 
 oVipiv, A/o'jXcu. The reader will find in Mr. Gaisford's Hephas- 
 lion, two passages, cited from Eustathius and Scaliger, res- 
 pecting the first of these words — (pp. 181, 182). 
 
 In examining the work of Dr. Gaily we may remark, 
 that a great part of it is in'elevant to the discussion of the 
 question between himself and Dr. Foster j for he observes 
 towards the end of it, that his chief object was to show, 
 " that the Greek language cannot be pronounced according 
 to accent, i. e. according to that acute accent which we 
 use. without spoiling the quantit3\" This would be readily 
 conceded by every one who has attended to the first prin- 
 ciples of the question ; because, in our own language, quan- 
 iily and accents usually go together ; " the longest syllable 
 in almost every word, being that on which the accent falls." 
 (Hors. p. 4). Dr. Gaily should have shown that they were 
 not separated, nor separable in the Greek language. — If, as 
 lie asserted, elevation necessarily implied prolongation, some 
 one of the sj'llables in X£7S, XsySTs, Xs/o/i-sva, must be long ; 
 the acute must be placed on one of them ; but wliich would 
 be lengthened ?— (Foster, 265). 
 
 The prejudice against the Greek accents (the defenders 
 of them remark) seems to have arisen fi-om supposmg that, 
 because in most modern languages, a long time is com- 
 monly connected with elevation of voice, they were nece.>- 
 Barily connected in the languages of Greece and Rome. 
 " You are deceived," says Melancthon, " if you say that 
 acute and long, or grave and short, are the same. The go 
 ncrality of grammarians are apt to blunder wretchedly in 
 this affair. All long syllables are not aciited : in Virgilius^ 
 Fir is long, but not aculed ; nor are all acuted sj'llablcs 
 long ; in Virgilius, gi is acuted, though short." — (Foster, 
 120). The distinction between accent and quantitj^, in 
 Greek, as well as their use in ordinary pronunciation and 
 discourse, are pointed out by Dionysius in the following 
 passage : — " "When we are taught our letters, we first learn 
 their names, then their forms and powers : — after this," he 
 
188 • CRECK EXERCISES. 
 
 adds, " we proceed to whole words, with their particular 
 modes and qualities : I mean the length and shortness of 
 them, and their accents. — (Foster, 160). 
 
 In answer to a question asked by Dr. G., whether an 
 acute accent may be sounded in such a manner, as will not 
 make the short syllable Qn which it is laid appear long %— 
 Dr. F. replied, that he would elevate and shorten the pe- 
 nultimate of xu3(ou in the judgment of any ear that can dis- 
 tinguish a high from a low tone, in as easy and discernible 
 a manner as he could .^^horten the grave penultima of maxi- 
 mos. He quoted Cheke's words, who said that many of his 
 Greek scholars were capable of expressing the true sound 
 of the letters, their quantit}-, their accent, ^\^th great ease. 
 He had already refeiTcd to the words of Michaelis, w^ho 
 approved of the- opinion of Gesner, " that the accents do 
 not at ail determine which sj'llable is to be pronounced 
 longest ; that the accent for instance of (zv^^wroc: bemg placed 
 on the first sj-llable, doth not oblisre us to pronounce the 
 word as a dactyl : thus, as the Greeks spoke somewhat 
 more musically than we, iliey pronounced some syllables 
 more distinctly than othei*s ; they raised their tone and drop- 
 ped it ; and the accents are e^.ndences of this." The learned 
 translator of Michaelis v/as informed by Professor Reiz, that 
 lie had fi-equently liea,rd Eugenius, a Greek priest, after- 
 wards Archbishop of Cherson, read Greek verse, and that he 
 marked by his pronunciation both accent and quantity. — 
 Marsh's Mich., vol. 2, p. 901. 
 
 It is to be regretted that some of those eminent scholars 
 who were well qualified to treat this subject with great 
 accuracy and clearness, have only left us a few remarks 
 upon it. Bentley uses the words, Rp.tio hodie prepostera 
 atque perveisa Gracorum accentuum.—{Epist. ad MOIium, p. 
 82). He seems to have thought with Dawes, that the use 
 of them now would be wrong, because it would be difficult 
 to apply them without vitiating the, quantity of the syllables. 
 But whatever was his opinion in the passage we have cited, 
 in a later work, as Foster remarks, written professedly on 
 Metre and Rhythm, {de Terent. 7/ietns,) he considers the 
 Greek accents as differing from the Latin, without hinting 
 the least suspicion of their present visible system being vicious 
 or corrupted. 
 
 Valckenaer allowed that they were to be used, as being 
 necessary to " determine a diversity of signification in words,'* 
 but was of opinion that no one verse of a poet, or sentence 
 
 li 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. 189 
 
 of an orator, should be read according to them. — Vid. Dawes. 
 Misc. Crit. edit. Burgess, p. 369. 
 
 D'Orville thought they were formerly used, non qiianiitatis 
 indicand(B causa, sed ad pro?iwitiatio'nem ei rythmum regendum. 
 Crit. Vann. p. 333. 
 
 The remarks of Gerard Vossius (c. 10, 1. 2, de A. G.) 
 . show that he thought the Romans shortened and sharpened 
 the penultimate of cakfacis, tcpefacis, sajdng xaXscpccxjcr, tS'KZ- 
 cpaxis, but that the moderns either pronounce xoLks(poiy.iCj TScrij- 
 q>a\ig^ or JcaXs'ipaxic:, TS'jticpaxig ] similar errors, he saj's, pervade 
 cur pronu.nciation of Greek. Hodie quisquis Foetce alicujus 
 versus recilai, aut accentus iantum raiioncm hahdy out solum quan- 
 Jitaiis. Veleres, me judice, longe aliter., qui utriusque raiioncm 
 hahf^hant.. 
 
 ^ Markland, in a letter to Dr. Taylor, thinks they were 
 designed by those who left Greece to settle in a nation of a dif- 
 ferent tongue, and were desirous that their children or succes- 
 sors should continue in the knowledge or use of speaking the 
 Greek language. 
 
 Those who have directed their attention to the .=ubje€t of 
 accent, cannot have forgotten the two remarks made hy one of 
 the most judicious and accurate scholars of modern tim.es : — 
 Ou, the negative particle, was pronounced, in the age of Aris- 
 totle, o|iir6v6jc:, but we never find it acuied in the middle of a 
 sentence : again, the sam.e particle oy, and the adverb cu, aspe- 
 rate and circumflexed, were confounded in pronunciation in 
 Aristotle's time. — {Tyrwhitt in Aristot. Poet. sec. 46). As 
 nothing can be collected from the treatises on accent which we 
 have examined, we should be glad to see some solution of 
 these difhcidtles. 
 
 If, after all that has been written, we might venture to offer 
 an opinion, we should say that the pronunciation, according 
 to the marks invented by Aristophanes, was attended to by • 
 the Alexandrians and their successors ; that a gradual abuse 
 of tlie power of the acute was introduced, and at last prevailed 
 to a great degree. Part of the evidence which we should 
 bring to prove this, would be taken from many verses in 
 Greek, in which we find the acute lengthening the syllable 
 over which it is placed. That this tone, in the days of the 
 scholiast on Hephaestion, and of Eustathius, was considered 
 by some as affecting the metre, is evident from the passages' 
 we have referred to. We have no doubt, that if we were to 
 attempt to use the accents, the same erroneous pronunciation 
 would be adopted, which has been established among the 
 Greeks for many centuries. If a modern Greek was to recite 
 
190 GREEK EXERCISES. 
 
 the following verse of Archilochus, it would be impossible to 
 discover the second and fourth iambic feet: irsira.^p.svog 6i' ocrTiwv, 
 In alterutrum vit'mm incidehant o?nnes, qui^ me audiente^ accenfuum 
 vim in Gracoi^ linguae prorMntiatione exprimere conati sunt ; aut 
 enim, voce suhlaia et so no intentiore vocalem producehant ; aut ictu 
 vel impetu quodam vehemeniiore ariicuiandi, consonantem secutam 
 conduplicabani. — (Knight, Proleg. 88.) f 
 
 The abuse of the accents in their poetical compositions, is 
 one of long standing among the Greeks, and must have arisen 
 from a wrong application of them in common discourse. Mr. 
 Mitford remarks, " that we are no way positively assured 
 whether the Greek restorers of Grecian learning iii the West, 
 expressed exactly the ancient quantities of syllables ; but we 
 know that in poetical composition they were* justly attentive 
 to them." We cannot agree with him in this observation, 
 because instances of metrical inaccuracy may be found not 
 only in the writings of C. Lascaris and Philelphus, but in the 
 works of Greeks who preceded them more than a thousand 
 years. 
 
 R. W. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE GREEK SYNTAX. 
 
 1. GENITIVE. 
 
 The Greek language takes a much wider range in its use 
 of the genitive case than the Latin. In Greek, words of all 
 kinds may be followed by other words in the genitive, when 
 the latter class Hmit and show in what respect the meaning of 
 the former is to be taken. 
 
 In the case of Verbs : as k^r)vatoi 5;, ug 'ro($wv cf)(;ov, s/Scrj^eov, 
 " the Athenians brought relief, as they had themselves with 
 respect to their feei^'^ i. e. " as fast as they could run ;" xaXwg 
 £)(£iv fxefiirjc, " to have one's self well luith respect to intoxica- 
 tion,"' i. e. " to be pretty drimk :" wj sr.aTSPog rig suvojag v; fxvTj- 
 fX7]<r s)(oi, '= as each one had himself 7i'ith respect to Hivour or re- 
 membrance," i. e. " as each one wished well to a party, or re- 
 membered the past ;" hd f^xdjv tou /8»ou, "■ to have come on well 
 vjith respect to the means of subsistence," i. e. " to be in pros- 
 perous c ire umstarices ;" enrsiysc^^ai a^r,o<;, '' to urge one's self 
 on with respect to the fight," i. c. " to be eager for the fight ;" 
 aviivai TTjc; sqso^ou, " to slacken with respect to one's approach," 
 1. 8. " to slacken in one's approach ;" (TtpaXXso'^ai sXriJo^, " to 
 be deceived with respect to hope," i. e. " to be deceived in one's 
 hope ;" xaTSaya tr^g xs(pa\'/\g, " I am broken loith respect to my 
 head," i. e. " I have broken my head." s 
 
 In the case of Adjectives : as (^vyyv^ii'^M twv aM&^wjfvJuv apia^- 
 T7]|AaTwv, " forgiving wnth respect to human errors ;" aWj?, 
 £pffs\iog yovo'j, " cliildless with respect to male offspring ;" 
 
192 GREEK EXERCISES.— APPENDIX. 
 
 s-iiiris oiriiiog 'jfagr,g sdTu^ " let him be unlionoured iviik re- 
 spect to all honours," i. e. " let all respect be denied him ;" 
 Byy\}Z '■>;? -jroXsw^, near with respect to the city," i. e. " near 
 the city ;" ^jvstTjJ'ov sg. <rouro ava^xrjc:, " they fell into this 
 with respect to necessity," i. e. " they fell into such neces- 
 sity ;" 6b -rotTouro /xj(rc-jg -/jX^ov, " they came to so much with 
 respect to hatred," i. e. " thsy fell into so much hatred ;" 
 fc'v Tourw iroLoctdxB-oYig v^sav, " they were in this state with re- 
 spect to preparation," i. e. " they were in this state of pre- 
 paration ;" 77] crXsr/t xaxwv, " a land full with respect to evils," 
 i. e. " full of evils ;" a^jxa xjvov 7]viop(^ou, "a chariot empty with 
 respect to a driver," i. e. " without a driver ;" ftsj^^wv <ffarPoc:, 
 " greater with respect to his father," i. e. " greater than his fa- 
 ther." 
 
 The principles to be deduced from all this, are easy and 
 natural. 
 
 1. That all words which represent a situation or opera- 
 tion of the mind, which is directed to an object, but without 
 affecting it, are followed by a genitive ; such are, the verbij 
 *■ to remember," " to forget," " to concern one's self about any 
 thing," " to neglect," " to consider," " to reflect," " to under- 
 £Mnd," " to be desirous of," 6ic. ; the adjectives " experienc- 
 ed," " ignorant." " remembering," " desirous," &c. 
 
 2. All words which indicate fulness, to be full, defect, 
 emptiness, are followed by a genitive ; because the vronl 
 which expresses of what any thing is full, or empt}', indicates 
 the respect in which the signification of the governing word 
 is taken. Under this head fliil the adjectives "full," " rich," 
 *' abounding in," "empty," "deprived of," "destitute of;" 
 the verbs "to fill," "to want," J' to bereave," " to deliver,'* 
 " to desist from," " to cease from ;" adverbs denoting abund- 
 ance, want, sufficiency, deprivation. &c. 
 
 3. The same original signification of the geniiivc appears 
 to be the basis of the consU-uction of the comparative with 
 the genitive : thus iA£i^c;v cctr^oj signified, " greater unth 
 respect to his father." From this construction, all words 
 which involved a comparison, took the object of this com- 
 parison in the genitive : such are verbs which signify " to 
 surpass," or the contrary, " to be surpassed," " tp be infe- 
 rior to another j" as 'jre^iyivop^j 'JjT-ao/xa;, &c. ; those abo 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX. 19^ 
 
 r^'hicii signify '' to rule," or the opposite, together -with 
 many verbs which are derived from substantives, and are 
 equivalent to the primitive with the substantive verb ; as 
 
 '^Bivai) : — such again are adjectives and substantives in which 
 Ahe same idea of governing is implied; as sy^^ar^/is h^ovr,g^ 
 " master over pleasure ;" riTTu^v h^ovrig, "a slave to pleasure ;" 
 ^Tra 70V 'jroiJ^aros, " defeat by means of drinking," i. e. " in- 
 temperance in drinking ;" syx^areia, ^rovou, " mastery over la- 
 bour." 
 
 To this same head must be referred all words which im- 
 ply a comparison with respect to value, or require a defini- 
 tion of value ; as a|jo<:, which properly signifies " equiva- 
 lent," " equal in value ;" so that a^iov royrou, which we com- 
 monly render " worthy of this," strictly rendered Vv^ould be, 
 " equal in value with respect to this." Hence too the adjective 
 ava^ios, and the adverbial forms a^ius and avaho^s take the 
 genitive ; and hence moreover this case is joined with all words 
 in which a determination of value is contained ; as, for exam- 
 ple, verbs signifj-ing " to buj^," " to sell," " to exchange," &c. 
 On this is fotnided the general rule — " The price of a thing is 
 put in the genitive." , 
 
 And lastlj', to this head belong all words which express a 
 difference, and in which, of course, a comparison is implied, 
 as (5irx:poPoj:, '^ts^%, aXKo?, aXkoiog, aXkor^iog : as Siacpo^ov rourcv, 
 "different iviih respect to this," i. e. "different from this;" 
 ifrs^Qv TouTou, " other with respect to this," i. e. " other than 
 thl«." 
 
 4. From the meaning of the genitive ^^loith respect to" 
 •we deduce also the general meaning of the cause of any 
 thing's being done, in which case the genitive is to be ren- 
 dered by " on account of" Thus with verbs : Aavawv xep^o- 
 Xtjfxsvoj, " enraged on account of the Greeks," i. e. " with 
 the Greeks ;" crsv^jxw^ s^onrfa tou acSsXojoy Ts^vyjxorof , " melan- 
 choly on account of the death of her brother;" (p/)ov£iv tivi 
 •<fo<ptac, " to envy any one on account of wisdom ;" oveiJjtfai rw 
 Aaj Tou'Twv, "to upbraid the god on account of these things." 
 Hence the genitive is foimd with verbs signifying " to ac- 
 cuse," " to criminate," with verbs of praj'ing, with verbs of 
 ■beginning, the genitive being that of the person or tiling, on 
 ^accotmi of v/hich the accusation is m.ade, the prayer offered 
 ^up, or the affair begun. So too the genitive stands alone 
 in exclamations wiih and without an interjection, or a word 
 
 R 
 
194 GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX. 
 
 that expresses admiration, indignation, compassion, &c. ; as 
 A-roXXov, Tou p^acrixrjfxaro?, " Apollo ! what a swallow !" Q. Zey 
 /^affiXsu, Tfjc XS'XTOTYjTos Twv (p^svwv, " O king Jupiter ! the acute- 
 ness of his mind !" Tr]s rvxns, " the misfortune !" In all 
 the instances above enumerated under this head, however, 
 and in others of a similar nature, the gram^narians supplj 
 $-4Z)ca^ or some equivalent term. 
 
 '; ^^• 
 
 ' The second principal relation which is expressed by the 
 genitive, is that of the proportion of a whole to its parts, in 
 other w^ords, the genitive is put partitively. This use is 
 common to the Greek, the Latin, and other languages, ex- 
 cept that in Gretik it has a much more extensive range. 
 Thus in the latter language the genitive is put with verbs 
 of ail kinds^ even with those which govern the accusative, 
 when the action does not refer to the whole object, but only 
 to a part. This is expressed in English by the omission of 
 the article in the singular, or by the word " some ;" as 
 raifo's 5' iXoj, " ha sprinkled salt over it ;" otrrT^tfai xpsw, " to 
 roast some of the flesh ;" syu oiSa. tcjjv £,awv tjXjxjwt-wv, " I know 
 some of those of the eame age with myself;" avaosiv tcjv <rai- 
 ?;wv Tov 2w»rpar7), "tolDiiid Socrates with some of the fillets ;" 
 ^YiS y^iS £Tc/iov, ** ihey laid v/aste a part of the land." On the 
 hke principle the genitive is put with many other verbs which 
 fignify participation, or in which at least this idea is imphed ; 
 Jjiich are the verbs fierf^^ejv, xoivwveiv, CuXXapL^avsiv, jxe-rcO'Ti, 
 v^odrixsiv, |jtgTa(5i(5ova», a-roXdusjv, &c. 
 
 Upon tills principle of the reference to a part, is founded 
 the construction by wdiich, with the verbs " to take," " to 
 seize," " to touch," '* to carry," &c. the part by which any 
 thing is taken is put in the genitive^ while the la/iole is put 
 in the accusative; as £Xaoov<ro rv,s Jwvrjr <rov O^ovttjv, "they 
 took Orontes by the girdle." The same construction is re- 
 tained also with the verbs which signify , the opposite of to 
 take, or to seize, viz. " to let go," " to loose," " not to obtain 
 nny thing," " to miss," &c. ; as a^pisraj tou Soearoc, " he lets 
 go the spear ;" while a(pismi to (5opu, in the accusative, would 
 signify, " he hurls the spear ;" in the fixst, reference being made 
 to a pari — in the latter, to the whole. 
 
 Upon this principle also arises the construction of the su- 
 perlative with the genitive, that substantive being put in thia 
 ca.=?e which marks the class from which the superlative lakes 
 the chief est as a part. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX. 195 
 
 III. 
 
 The genitive is used also to mark the person or thing to 
 which any thing belongs,, whether it be a property or qualitj^, 
 habit, duty, &c. ; and those also ffom which any thing arises. 
 Probably here also an obscure idea of the relation of this qua- 
 lity, duty, &;c. to that which possesses it, as of a part to the 
 whole, is the basis of the construction. Hence the common 
 rules, that " verbs denoting possession^ prope/tij, duty, &c. go- 
 vern the genitive," and that the " material of which any thing 
 is made is pat in the genitive." 
 
 IV. 
 
 The genitive is also put with verbs compounded with pre- 
 positions 'which govern the genitive, that is to say, when these 
 prepositions ma,y be separated from the verb, and placed im- 
 mediately before the case, Avithout altering the signification of 
 the verb ; as avrj-rapep^^stv <ri 'nvo<;, for 'na^s-)(Siv n avrj tivos ; 
 wXd'iffi^cLV a^ixarog, for rfriScLv ap' a^iiaros ; £^SP-)(S(!&ai omctg, for 
 s^-)(5if6ai £^ omac: : not, however, avriXsysiv rivo^, " to contra- 
 dict any one," for tjv(, because Xsysi)! avn tjvoc: would give an 
 entirely diiferent sense, " to speak in the place of any one." 
 
 V. 
 
 The genitive serves also to determine place and time, in 
 answer to the questions, " where ?" " when ?" &c. Hence 
 the adverbs ou, tou, ottou, where ? which are in fact old ge- 
 mtives. 
 
 2. DATIVE. 
 
 The Dative in Greek expresses two senses, one that of the 
 dative in other languages, answering to the question, " to 
 whom ?" and one that of the Latin ablative. 
 
 1. The dative expresses the distant object of a transitive or 
 intransitive action, with reference to which this action takes 
 ^ place. It answers thus in most cases, as in Latin and Eng- 
 lish, to the question " to whom ?" as didovon ti <riv», " to give 
 any thing to any one ;" irsika&ai Tm, " to obey any one." 
 Thus also with adjectives : <p»Xo^ tjvj, i%^^oj tjvi, s-ovqus tjvi, &c. 
 A larger proportion of verbs, however, are joined with the 
 dative in Greek than in Latin. 
 
196 GREEK EXilRClSilE. AI'FEMDIX. 
 
 II. 
 
 The Greek dative also supplies the place of the Latin abla- 
 tive, and in this case expresses the relation of the connection 
 or companionship to the questions '- wherewith ?" of an instru- 
 ment or mean to the question '■ whereM^ ?" of an impulse or 
 excitement, " from what ?" of an external cause, " by what 
 means ?" " on what account V " for vdiat ?-" &c. 
 
 III. 
 
 Tlie dative expresses the relation of the measure^ degr?^, 
 &c. v.ith the comparative. Hence the datives cr&>.>.: 
 '^i^X-'i ^'i'^ ^^^6 comparative. 
 
 o/jr 
 
 IV. 
 
 It is put in definitions of time and place, in answer To the 
 question " when 1 and where 1" 
 
 3. ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The accusative, as in other languages, marks the person 
 or thing which is affected by the action of the accompanj^lng 
 verb, i. e. w^hich sufiers a change of any kind. The verba 
 which govern an accusative are hence called verbs active or 
 transitive, i. e. which show an action passing on to an object, 
 and ?,ffecting and determining it in any actual manner. Thefj^ 
 are, however, other verbs not properly transitive, which yet 
 govern an accusative in Greek ; this is particularly the case 
 in those verbs v/hich do not mark the passive object of the ac- 
 tion, but the object to wliich an action has only generally an 
 immediate reference ; as apotfxuvtiv, 5o^lt;op;iv, csttjv, crPoCiV^^^eiv, 
 <pdav£iv, scnr^oTasiv, jciXsjcrsiv, &c. In these and others of ci 
 similar nature, the construction with the dative vrould appear 
 to be the most natural one. 
 
 i 11. 
 
 Many verbs which signify an emotion, a feeling, with re- 
 gard to an object, as, " to be ashamed," " afraid," '• to 
 compassionate any one," are accompanied by an accusative, 
 which expresses the object, and at the same time the effec- 
 tive cause of this emotion ; as, aioj^uvo/xai rov 0£ov, " 1 revere 
 the Deity :" aid;»(?^a» tou^ af/jivTos, " fo respect rulers :" s^cut- 
 
r 
 
 GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX. 197 
 
 rciPw viv, " I compassionate him ;" viJ^as sX^w, " 1 pity you." 
 The same takes place with some neuter verbs which express 
 an emotion, although, even without indicating the object, 
 they convey a perfect idea ; such are aX^/eiv, 'yyi&siv^ s-ffip^ai- 
 §BIV, &c. 
 
 Many verbs have the accusative not only of the nearer 
 and more immediate object of the action, but also of the 
 more remote object of it, i. e. the person or thing to which 
 the action witlT^its immediate object passes, which in Eng- 
 lish is generally expressed by a dative ; as £u oi xayug cro/Eiv 
 •nva, " to do good or harm to any one ;" sv or xaxus Xsysiv Tiva, 
 " to speak well or ill of any one." Hence these verbs often 
 take two accusatives at the same time : such are iroisiv, if^ar- 
 TsiVj §^av, s^(5siv, " to do ;" Xe^sjv, siTfsjv, ayo^svsiv, " to speak of 
 or against ;" s^wrav, " to ask ;" aitaiTSiv^ " to ask ;" " to re- 
 quire," " to desire ;" a^ut^sKf&ai, acrorfrc^siv, &c. "to take away," 
 " to deprive of a thing ;" ^j^atfx^jv, " to teach ;" exdyCai, sv^wCai, 
 " to put off" or " on," &c. 
 
 Other uses of the accusative have been enumerated undei 
 the rules of syntax. 
 
APPENDIX II 
 
 NOTES ON THE RULES OF SYNTAX 
 
 Given in (he Commencement of the Volume. 
 
 The object of the following Notes is merelj to rcmovd 
 Buch little difficulties as might otherwise impede the pro- 
 gress of the learner. The doctrine of Ellipses, which was 
 resorted to in almost every instance by Dr. Neilson, ni the 
 edition of his Exercises from which the first American im- 
 pression was made, is here only retained in part. It appeared 
 far more advisable to refer the student as often as possible to 
 the principles of grammatical solution, which are laid down 
 in Appendix I. 
 
 Rule 1. 
 
 Krtxwv (flf^a^jjiarwv) rwv Tr'iPjv (ovrwv) f/.vsiav fycjv. — Ta (x^rjis.a- 
 ra) £^w. — Ev T(fj 9^ovs<v. It is from the infinitive, observer 
 Harris, {Hermes, p. 164, n,) thus participating m the na- 
 ture of a noun or substantive, that the best grammarians 
 have called it sometimes ovo/xa ^rttxanxov, a verbal noun ; some- 
 limes evo|aa ^rjaaroc:, the verb's nGiin. The reason of this ap- 
 pellation, he adds, is in Greek more evident from its taking the~ 
 Tirepositive article before it in all cases. The same construc- 
 ;ion is not unknown in English : thus Spenser — 
 
 For not to h.?t.\e been dipped in Lethe lake, 
 Could save the son of Thetis from to die." 
 
 A*o Tou fiavejv. In like manner we say, He did it. to he rkh ; 
 
GKEEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. }99 
 
 where we must supply hj an ellipsis, the preposiiion for : 
 He did it for to he rich, the same as if we had said, He did k 
 for gain: iii Greek, .hc>M tou -TrXouTSiv, Ivb-kcc tou xspSoi^g, in 
 French, pour s''enricher. Even in such sentences as the fol- 
 lo\^ing, / cIBose to philosophize^ rather than to he rich^ to cpi\o(fo- 
 <psiv f3o-j\oixa.i fxaXXov ^ <ro 'xXovthv, the infinitives are in nature 
 as much accusatives as if we were to say, / choose philosophy 
 rather than riches, tt^v cpi'ko(fo(pny.v ^ouXo^ai, /xaXXov r, rov 's'Xoutov. 
 Thus too Priscian, speaking of infinitives, observes ;f''*'C ur- 
 rere e?iim est cursus ; et scribere, scriptura ; et legere, 1-ectio ; 
 iiague frequenter et nominihus adjunguntur, et aliis casualihus^ 
 more nominum ;" and soon after, " cum enim dico, Bonum est 
 legere, nihil aliud significo^ nisi, Bona est lectio." Lib. 48, p. 
 1130. 
 
 'O (av^pwroj) e^x^asv:?. This may also be rendered more 
 iD accordance with the Greek idiom, by the person coming. 
 hi Latin, however, the relative and indicative are alwaj^s re- 
 quired in such expressions ; as, 6 s^-xp'^zvog, qui venit : 6 Tu-rTwv, 
 ^vi verherat. 
 
 T' avi)^:o7r5(ov ysvo: rrj jixsy (.at^^ioi) ayukv, rj} as (ixs^ioi) (pauXov. 
 The student must understand hy the term partly, as employed 
 ia the language of the rule, that a reference is alwaj'-s made 
 in this use of the article to a division. Thus, 6 fjtsv, o §s, the 
 one, the other^ or the former, the latter ; and so of the plural, 
 61 fisv, &j (5s. Tliis construction is based upon the original 
 pronominal meaning of the article ; thus, 6 fjusv a^ri^X^sv, 6 58 
 fjXEjvfy ; the one departed, the other remained ; literally, that cm 
 indeed departed^ hut this one remained ; as in the Latin ille — 
 hie. 
 
 3. 
 
 /S^cToij. This construction is often imitated by the Latin wri- 
 ters ; as, Triste lupus stabulis. supply negoiium—Variiim et mu- 
 tahile semper femhia — Tris'e maturis frugihus imhres — Huks 
 iBotis humor^ &c. 
 
 4. 
 
 h^&riS* Such is the grammatical mode of supplying these 
 
200 GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX H. 
 
 ellipses. I am inclined to think, however, that in all such 
 cases it is simpler to say, that the gender of the person^ and 
 not of the preceding noun, is considered. 
 
 6. • 
 
 For 010,'Xffvwv auroi sjvai tfo^wraroi, the nominative before the 
 infinitive, there being no change of person. 
 
 ^"^ 8. 
 
 This idiom is more observed by the Attics, than by the 
 older writers in the Ionic and Doric dialects. The latter often 
 join the neuter plural with a plural verb ; as, ours n vwiv 6^x»a 
 S(J(fovTatf II. 5^, 268 — afA,'>];^ava spya. ysvovTo, II. X. 310. The 
 scholiasts on these passages observe that they are constructed 
 ttp(_a::xus- The Attics also sometimes join the verb in the plu- 
 ral with the neuter plural, especially in two cases ; 1. When 
 the neuter plural signifies living persons ; 2. When the abstract 
 is put for the concrete, and animate creatures, not things, are 
 referred to. Perhaps the construction of neuters plural uith 
 singular verbs may be accounted for on the principle of the 
 association of ideas ; neuter and inanimate objects being con- 
 eidered generally, but animate agents individually. 
 
 12. 
 
 The construction of the nominative \vith the infinitive de- 
 pends upon the principle of attraction, that is, upon the asso- 
 ciation of ideas. 
 
 15. 
 
 For -r^oj Tovroig a "ksys: Hrvoqjwv — and oijtos stfriv av&^uifos ov 
 Xeystg. With regard, however, to the antecedent's being 
 attracted into the same case with the relative, it may be 
 considered as nothing more than the fall expression of what 
 is commonly uttered eliiptically ; for the relative is in fact a 
 species of adjective, having its substantive always under- 
 stood, if not expressed ; as outoj s^nv av^^wjrog, ov avd^uifov 
 Xsysi;. So also in the passage oiirog stf-rjv 6v a-TrsJcc^aXiCa Iwav- 
 »»)v, the fuU expression is, ovtos s(fTiv Iwavv*]^, 6v Iwavvyjv antsxS' 
 
 18. 
 
 See the observations of Ernesti, Gesner, and Gilbert Wake- 
 ield, on the dual used as a plural, refuted by Dalzel in th« 
 iK)tes of the second volume of the ColL Majora, pp. 36, 37. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. 201 
 
 19. 
 
 Eo'tiv ai^STa (p^^oi.aaTa). — Ta 5i>caia {^payii^oLroc). When two 
 or more substantives are united by '■/], or, v/hich reciprocally 
 exclude each other, the verb which is common to them is 
 sometime, in the plural; as, ifu<; m IlXarwv r) A7)f;.o<r6tvri5 
 ij-4/wff'av, 7) ev itf-TOPia^ouxu^j^Tjc:. Longin. 14. So in Cicero, 
 Or. 2. 4. 16. nc SidpMus — aut Cotta plus quani ego apud te va- 
 lere videanUir. 
 
 20. 
 
 - So in Latin ; ianta circ^ fuga afque trepidatio fuit: Liv. 21. 
 7. — figritia ei desperaiio in omnmn vultu emineret. Id. 21. 35. 
 
 22. 
 
 24. 
 
 Similar to these are expressions both in our own and 
 other languages ; as, sea-water, wine-glass, steam-hat. The 
 only difference between the English and the Greek languages 
 in this respect is, that the former requires the qualifying noun 
 immediately to precede that which it limits, and be joined to 
 it bj a hyphen, while the latter admits of their being uncon- 
 nected, and even separated hj other words. The principle on 
 which this construction depends, however, is the same in all 
 languages ; and proceeds from the great law of the human 
 mind, the association of ideas. The juxtaposition of two 
 terms suggests that one of them is a quality of the other ; 
 and hence the former losing its own independent meaning, as- 
 sumes the dependent character of an adjective. 
 
 26. 
 
 The grammarians commonly make a noun to be under- 
 stood in this construction, which governs the genitive : thus 
 tlie examples under the rule, when the ellipsis is thus sup- 
 plied, become, To Xw-rov (iji-spos) t-/^? *i,a?paj. — To x^aricf-Tov (|xs- 
 f og) (pjXoCotpiaj. A much more rational solution, however, is 
 given in Appendix I., in the remarks on the genitive. 
 
 27. 
 
 Hence ITa-s^ ^|/,wv in our Lord's Prayer, not Xlars^ r^ii-srs^s. 
 This last would be emphatic, and convey a meaning which 
 is not intended : it would signify, our Father, as if God were 
 a Father of only a part of his creatures. Uars^ -Jjayv, on 
 
202 GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. 
 
 the contrary, expresses the true idea. Father of us, or, our 
 Father, i. e. Father of us all. 
 
 28. 
 
 Aia^'n'a^ou(fi tdl siia. {^^riij.ara,) rou xaxo(5ai/xovo^, for 5<a^9ra^ou. 
 <fi TU ypri^aTO. s/JLou Tou xaxo(5a;^ovoj. 
 
 29. f 
 
 The grammarians supply the ellipses as follows : — E^^a 
 
 ir^o&vii^os y/rf^' as*. See however Appendix I., Remarks on the 
 Genitive. 
 
 30. 
 
 Avairioj (s-jr') a(p^o(fv\ir.g. — TlooKfrixog (•n'ePj) siriTr,§siuv, So the 
 grammarians supply the ellipses. See hov/ever Appendix I. 
 
 31. 
 
 01 rfakaioi [sx) <rwv <roiv]rwv. — Movog (5x) (S^orov. — 01 vsurs^oi 
 (eg) avS^u'ffu'j ; and so of the rest. It is somewhat surprising 
 that they who framed these ellipses, did not think of others 
 far simpler: thus, 01 TaXaioi (-Tror/jraj) <rwv croirjTwv. — Movog 
 (/S^oToc) (BeoTuv. — Oj vswts^oi (av^PWTroj) av^^wTTwv — dsc. That 
 is, " The old poets among the poets." — '• The only mortal 
 among mortals" — &c. The true principle, however, is laid 
 down in Appendix I. 
 
 32. 
 
 The preposition avri, or <^o, is said to be understood, and to 
 govern this genitive. See however Appendix I. 
 
 35, 36. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Dative. The gramma- 
 rians pretend, that with the dative of the measure of excess, 
 S's'i, or some preposition of equal force, is understood. 
 
 37. 
 
 'O AT* TT^ao'xoy.svo- sTS^ov (xTT,^4a) ywzTO.u See however Ap- 
 pendix I. 
 
 38, 39, 40, 41. 
 The principle on which each of these rules is based, has 
 already been explained in Appendix I. The remarks there 
 made, apply \vith peculiar force to verbs which indicate an 
 operation of the external senses.- Since the subject of theia 
 is not represented as affected by them, a genitive ir c^^f^*^ 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. 203 
 
 quence follows. The use of the accusative after verbs of see- 
 ing, has been supposed to arise from this circumstance, that 
 the Greeks considered the eye as deriving- its images from its 
 own operations on the presented objects, and not from the im- 
 pressions of these objects upon itself. The objective noun 
 therefore, as being thus an effect, is put in the accusative 
 
 42, 43, 44. 
 See Appendix I., Remarks upon the Dative. 
 
 47. 
 In this construction, if the verb be an active transitive one. 
 
 the government of the accusative is evident enough. If. 
 however, it be an active intransitive or a neuter verb, we must 
 ■'resort to an ellipsis of xara, or some equivalent preposition : 
 such is the opinion of Perizonius, in his Notes on the Minerva 
 of Sanctius, vol. ii. p. 21, ed. Baver. Perizonius understands 
 a preposition also in the corresponding Latin idiom, viverg 
 viiam^ cur r ere cur sum, 6ic. 
 
 48, 49, 50, 51, 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive and Dative. 
 With regard to the double accusative which follows some 
 verbs, Sanctius, Perizonius, and other grammarians, make 
 one of them to be always governed by a preposition under- 
 stood ; maintaining that no verb can govern, more than one 
 accusative. According to this opinion, the following ellipses 
 occur in the examples under the rule :-— X^ri airsiv Tcug hovs 
 (i'ttra or scrj) ret ajadix. — Ar'tiy'ra (sig) os ^i^ago.acj. — A':roo'T£- 
 . ^j /xe {xara) tk p^PTjaara. This ellipsis will indeed answ^ei 
 extremely well, and in fact may be considered as necessary', 
 in verbs of answering, using, dividing, and many others. It 
 will not hoY/ever suit all passages, but rrjakes the expression 
 in some cases stiff and awkward, especially in many of those, 
 where, besides jhc proper object, another accusative, com- 
 monly that of a pronoun, is added, wliich indicates the whole, 
 of which the proper object is a part. It is much more pro- 
 bable that in the?e a species of apposition takes place, by 
 means of which the vrhole is more accurately defined by tba 
 addition of a part. 
 
 53. 
 
204 aREEK EXERCISES, APPENDIX II. 
 
 54. 
 
 Many of the verbs which are called impersonals^ that is, 
 verbs belongino^ to no subject or person, are in strictness per- 
 sonal verbs, tliat is, have a real subject to which they belong. 
 The peculiarity connected with them is, that the action to 
 wliich they refer, whether expressed by an infinitive or other 
 dependent clause, is their true object ; thus, zlssn |xoj a^jsvai, 
 i. e. TO o-'K^BMOLi slsffTi ,a&i, " the going away is lawful to me." 
 So in the example under the rule ; ixeyjo'Tov aurw sSo^sv eivai, 
 i. e. TO Eivaj i^syKfroy soo^sv avru), " its being greatest appeared 
 to him." Of this kmd are ost, y^^r„ a-Tfo^^vj, -n'^S'ffsi, ev^s^srai, 
 &c. 
 
 57. 
 
 The infinitive is in fa^t a verbal noun, (see Remarks on 
 Rule 1,) hence, when governed by verbs, participles, or adjec- 
 tives, it is precisely the same construction as if a noun supplied 
 its place, and were governed by them. 
 
 5S. 
 
 Zeune, in his Notes on Viger, makes an ellipsis of some 
 verb in these and sirnilu.r constructions. When the particles 
 which are joined with the infinitive in such cases, have tho 
 meaning of after, lohen, before, utitil, &c., he supposes Cufjogaivsi, 
 or (J'uv£§)i, or (i\)[i.Qa.ir\, or o'u.ao;/?, (according as the context re- 
 quires a present or a past tense, the optative or the subjunctivo 
 mood,) to be understood. When, however, the particle has 
 the meaning of as or so, he understands s^stfri, 6'sf, sixag gtfTj, 
 or some equivalent term. Thus, w.? e^os sitsiv, is for clj s|j(?ti 
 «troj sj-TTsiv, [as it is allowed) so to speak : ir^iv 5yjXov fivaj, for •n'^jv 
 ((r"va§ajV5j) SrfKov sivai, before {it happens that) it is evident. So 
 also, w? J^sjv auTov, when he saw him, for w? (tfuv*?*]) ihiv aurov : 
 T^iv aXsxTo^a (pwvrjfl'ai, before the. cock crew, for -jt^iv (avvst-ri) cO^x. 
 ToPa (pwvi-J'aj— -&;c. 
 
 69. 
 
 Matthias (Gr. Gr. vol. ii. p. S24) thinks that this use of 
 the infinitive is proljably a remnant of the ancient simplicity 
 of the language, from which the action required was ex- 
 pressed by mean.^ of the verb absolute, or the mood of the 
 verb which of itself indicates the action v.dihout any refer- 
 ence, to other parts of speech. It seems much simpler, 
 however, to resort to an ellipsis of a verb ; as, Auto? (opa) 
 fvj T?'.*;rojcri ^.ayj<rliai, {Do thou see to) fight among the first. 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX II. 205 
 
 A similar usage, and it is presumed a similar ellipsis, occurs 
 in the subjunctive ; as Mt) itoijig tovto, Do not do this, for (*0^a) 
 ^11 "jro/rjg TouTo, {See thai thou) do not do this; like the Latin ne 
 facias,, with vide or. cave understood. .The use of the infinitive 
 as above mentioned, was very common in Ionic ; see especial- 
 ly the Aphorisms of Hippocrates. An infinitive and impera- 
 tive sometimes are coupled together in the same sentence, as 
 in the beautiful prayer cited by Plato, Alcib, 2. Zsu /3afl'jX£u, 
 TOL /xsv sd&Xa xcni eu^^ofx-evoig xai avguxroi? AfJi.(X» 8i5o\j* ra 6s Xuyga 
 
 60. 
 
 Thus, (xeXXw y^ctcpsiv, scripturus sum ; SfxsXXov y^acpsiv, scrip- 
 turus eram ; fx.sXXiio'w y^a(ps»v, scripturus ero ; gjxsXXiia'a y^a. 
 <psiv, scripturus fui. In English this is expressed by about to 
 do any thing, intending to do, &c. The student will observe 
 that the Greeks joined jxsXXw with all the tenses of the infini- 
 tive except the perfect, never with this. MsXXw, together 
 with ryyp^avw and others mentioned in Rule 62, are of singu- 
 lar use and beauty in the Greek language. By associating 
 fji-sXXoj with the infinitive, and Tuyx"^^* ^'M-'j ^c. with the 
 participles of other verbs, tlie time and circumstances of an 
 action are most accui'ately defined. They may with proprie- 
 ty be called auxiliaries, and they bear a remarkable analogy 
 to verbs of that kind in the English language. Instances of 
 their peculiar use are here added ; thus : — Inceptive present, 
 fjLsXXw 7^a(p£»v, scripturus sum, I am going to write. Middle or 
 extended present, Tuyp(avw y^acpwv, scriho, I am writing. In- 
 ceptive past, ai^sXXov y^acpsiv, scripturus eram, I was beginning 
 to write. Middle or extended past, sy^acpov or sruyp^avov y^a- 
 <pwv, scribebam, I was writing. Inceptive future, fxeXX^jCw y^a. 
 (peiv, scripturus ero, I shall be about to write. Middle or extend- 
 ed future, srfofxai y^a(puv, scribam, I shall be writing. Comple- 
 tive future, stfofAttj ysy^acpus, scripsero, I shall have done writing. 
 
 62. 
 
 '' Tvyxavu answers to the Latin forte, (p^avu to pr<£, Xav^avw 
 to clam. See also Remarks preceding. 
 
 63. 
 
 This construction constitutes a peculiar feature of the 
 Greek syntax, and as it is of frequent occm'rence, is well 
 worthy of the student's notice. If a verb is governed by an- 
 
a06 GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX II. 
 
 Other verb or an adjective, a double relation is established, 
 according to which the use of the infinitive or certain par- 
 ticles is determined. Either the verb or adjective conveys 
 in itself a perfect and independent idea ; or it has no perfect 
 idea, but expresses an action which first becomes perfect by 
 the addition of its reference. Thus the verbs I pray ^ Ipej-- 
 suade, I zvill, &c. always requke an addition which expresses 
 for i{;hai I pray, to lohat I persuade any one, lohat I will. Now 
 when such an imperfect verb or p.djective refers to a verb, this 
 reference expresses either the consequence in view, the end, 
 or merely the object of the first verb or adjective. Thus in 
 the propositions, 1 loill write, I command you to write^ 1 admo- 
 nish you to go^ &c. the English infinitive is the consequence in 
 view of the first verb, and is in most cases expressed in Latin 
 by ut. On the contrary, in the propositions, / saw him fall, I 
 heard him say — scio me esse mortalera^ intelligo me errasse, tlie 
 infinitive is merely the object, not the end, of the verbs to see, 
 to hear, &c. — Thus much having been premised, we deduce 
 the following rules :— , 
 
 1. \VTien an imperfect verb or adjective is followed by a 
 verb which expresses the object or the consequence of it, 
 the latter in Greek is put in the infi.nitive ; as Ssoixai Cou eX- 
 ^siv, I entreat thee to come ; ■rajaivw cfoi y^aqjstv, / exhort thee 
 to write. To this rule, however, there is a regular excep- 
 tion in 6<ffiiis'Ksii&ai, which is followed by Itog and the finite 
 verb. 
 
 2. When an imperfect verb is accompanied by another 
 which marks merely the object of the former, the latter is 
 put in the participle — sometimes where in Latin the parti- 
 ciple is used, as video ie scribentem, audio ie docentem, o^(^ (fs f^a. 
 cpovTu, oLxovu (fs ^j^aCxovra— sometimes after verbs which indi- 
 cate a perception by means of the external senses, or the un- 
 derstanding, where in Latin the accusative with the infinitive 
 is used, as scio me esse ?nortalem, sentio te iratum esse, ci5a ^vtjtos: 
 wv, ajfl'^avoftai cfe ^aXecraivovra. 
 
 3. The verbs to say^ to announce, to mean, to think, to hope, 
 constitute a regular exception to thu5 rule, and take the infini- 
 tive. The fii'st two also take on v/ith the finite verb ; Brikouv 
 however takes the participle. 
 
 4. If the former verb is of itself perfect, or be preceded 
 by a proposition entirely perfect, then the object of it is ex- 
 pressed by means of the conjunctions ha, o^cl, o-ttw? ; as ca- 
 ^ajvw Coi fxa^siv ^PafZ/ixara »vc4 c'o£wtcpo5 yzyii] ; but the conse- 
 quence not immediately in \dew is expressed by w^J'tc with the 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II, 207 
 
 infinitive ; this takes place especially after ro(fouTog, toiouto? , 
 
 65. 
 
 His TO cfT^ariuras (fvyayaysiv, ad congregandum vel congre- 
 gandos milites. Eus^/stwv, benefacienda. (Ejg to) "b-ovsiv ajtf- 
 p/^ov, turpefactu. 
 
 66. 
 
 r^a'n'TSov (xoi stfitfroXiiv, scribendum est rrdhi epistolam. Etfj- 
 |xeX7]Vcov Coi Tourou, /20c iiSi ciirandum est. So also Tau-ra (foi 
 ■jroj-i^-sa, ^cec tibifadenda sunt. 
 
 67. 
 
 The preposition is often OxTiitted, as 2ouv<ov i^ov a^jxofxsd' we 
 came to the sacred Suniiim ; Ai&s^i va<wv, dwelling in the upper 
 regions of the air. 
 
 69. 
 
 The adverbs in tfi were originally datives plural from the 
 Ionic dialect. After however that this tfi was once considered 
 merely as an adverbial termination, and no longer as a termi- 
 nation of the dative plural, it was amiexed also to other names 
 preceded hy a ; as OXuM.'r;afl'», nXaTajaCi, &c. 
 
 70. 
 
 E95(J'05 OL'KZ'XBl (XCC^') 65oV T^IOJV >3fJI/€^W>. 
 
 71. 
 
 The grammarians commonly understand (5/a to govern the 
 genitive in tliis rule : see however Appendix I., Remarks on 
 the Genitive. The other ellipses are, (sv) ^juig^a f^jop; o^y>i 
 ^jXouvtwv (xar') oXjyov id-^u X^°^°^' 
 
 72, 73. 
 
 See Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive. 
 
 74. 
 Ta (xg*lf*a'''a) n>saTwvo^. OXufJ^riag (-^ fArT*)^) AX€|av5^ov. 
 
 76. 
 
 The rule is given according to the usual mode of enun- 
 ciating it, and the passages cited as examples stand thus 
 ^vhen t])<; el]«x<ees aje siir-r»iiecl : — E^ajvw tfs (§vexa) t^ij (pfXo- 
 
20S GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX U. 
 
 fioutfiag. — AsiXais {svsxa) tou vou. — (Eig) rouTwv yjvoy ^oi. — Hrfav 
 (rivsg) Tijv tfrau^wv. The most rational explanation however 
 has been given in Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive 
 
 77. 
 Vid. Appendix I., Remarks on the Genitive. 
 
 81. 
 
 The grammarians understand by the term absolute, merely 
 that there is no governing word expressed. They make the 
 preposition etti to be understood with \\e genitive, Cuv or s-jti 
 with the dative, and xara or jxsra with the accusative. Thus, 
 (£9') e/xou cra^ovToj, upon my appearing ; (Cuv) ^ra^iovTj sviaurw, 
 together loith the departed year ; (fjt-cTa) osov stepu, after other 
 things were suitable. The genitive absolate seems to have 
 been in its origmal force an expression of ti7ne, and hence the 
 use of the genitive case. When this duration of time is ascer- 
 tained by an historical person, the preposition stj is often used 
 •with these genitives, as, £t» Kupou /^aCiXs-jov-o?, in the reign of 
 Cyrus. This circumstance no doubt led the grammarians to 
 imagine, that wherever e-Trt was not expressed with the geni- 
 tive absolute, it was to be understood. 
 
 As regards the genitive absolute, the Greek language dif- 
 fers from the Latin : for where the liatin, in the use of the 'ab- 
 lative absolute, is obliged, on account of the want of a parti- 
 ciple in the perfect active, to turn the sentence, and to use tlie 
 perfect participle passive ; the Greek, on the other hand, 
 whose prmcipal tenses all have -their own paiticiples, can re- 
 tain the active construction, and then their participle is refeiTed 
 to the subject of the principal proposition ; as, visa lupo dijfu- 
 geirunt oves^ is in Greek, i^outfa^ tov Xuxov, ai o'iss a^ecpuyov, not 
 o(r)&svT05 TOU Xuxou. Thus too TauTtt axoucToc, his auditis, and in 
 all similar cases. The nearest approach which the Latiii 
 language can make to this construction, omitting the ablative 
 absolute, is the use of a past participle of a deponent verb, 
 when they have one to employ, or else of qmim or cum with 
 the pluperfect subjunctive ; as conspicati lupwn ; qvMin hcee. 
 audisset. In Greek, tliis construction of the participle which 
 we loave just beeu mentioniKg, is universally admissible when 
 the accompanpng action, which is expressed by the partici- 
 ple, belongs definitively to the subject of the principal pro- 
 position ; whereas the passive construction obtams where the 
 action expressed by the participle does not refer, or does not 
 refei- entirely, to the subject oi the principal proposition ; thu5, 
 
GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX 11. 209 
 
 Twv -jfoXsixjwv o(p^£VTwv, Sipuyov 01 iToXiTai, lohen they (not the 
 citizens merely) saw the enemy ^ the citizens fled. 
 
 In the case of the nominative absolute, the grammarians 
 in general consider the construction as an elliptical one ; the 
 finite verb, with some conjunction preceding, being under- 
 stood ; as, ('Orav) aJ ^jfxs^ai SP-)(0[kZvaA (i^rfav), ivhen the days 
 toere come. — (E-rrtj^r]) oi dr^arK^iTCH xara to fAStfov 'n'sdiov {sTvyxa- 
 vov) ovrs^, lohen the soldiers were in the middle of the plain, &c. 
 It is certamlj far simpler, however, to view these construc- 
 tions as avaxoXou^;aj, v/here the writer considers the thing 
 which he is about to speak of, abstractedly or as a subject, 
 but takes occasion, by means of a parenthesis, or in some 
 other way, to change the construction. These avaxoXcu^iai 
 occur in the best writers in every language, and when used 
 sparingly and with caution, give a pleasing variety and ani- 
 mation to plain narrative, or didactic style. Our absolute case 
 in English is always a nominative ; and in Latin the nomina- 
 tive absolute often occurs. Thus in Cicero, de Fin. 2. 33. 
 " Hcsc leviora, poema, orationem. cum aut scribis aut legis — signum^ 
 tahula^ locus amoenus, ludi, venatio, villa Luculli (nam si tuam di- 
 cerem, latebram haheres ; ad corpus diceres pertinere) sed ea, qu(B 
 dizi, ad coipusne refers ?" 
 
 83, 84. 
 See Appendix I, Remarks on the Genitive. 
 85. 
 
 The writers on ellipsis supply the verb o^wyA with the par- 
 ticles of swearing ; as, jxa (o//A'ufxj) Ata ; v/j (o/xyu|a») Aia. I 
 cannot resist the temptation of mciking the student acquaint- 
 ed with another mode of resolving these constructions, which' 
 I have no doubt he will find exceedingly ingenious and plau- 
 sible, though it must be confessed that the foundation on which 
 It rests is none of the most stable. Hoogeveen first suggest- 
 ed, in his work on the Greek Particles, (c.,25, p. 630,)' that 
 ^a might be formed from af/.«., as |a from a^a ; and that the 
 root of af/-a might be the verb aiaaw, whence comes jxaw, I de- 
 sire with eagerness, I inquire, investigate. Everard Scheide, 
 the editor of Van Lennep's " Etymologicon Lingua: Greece," 
 seizes upon this hint, and supposes fjoa to be the imperative, 
 second person, contracted from fAas ; and hence the accusa- 
 tive Aja, for example, is governed by this imperfitive ; and the 
 expression, /xa A<a, is equivalent to, " ask Jupiter,'' i. e. " ask 
 Jtipitcr if I do not speak the truth ;" so vai im tov A'ToXXwya^ 
 
210 GREEK EXERCISES. — APPENDIX II. 
 
 " yes ! ask Apollo if I do not speak the tndh." The same wri- 
 ter makes vai or vrj to be an old dative form from vyj, firmatio^ 
 stahilitio ; so that, according to him, vaj (j.a Aia, or vri fjia J^ia, 
 or simplj vai or vtj Aia, {^.a being supposed to be miderstood,) 
 will properly signify, " in conjirmation" or, " as a strengthening 
 of what I have said^ ask Jupiter if I do not utter the truthP Vid. 
 Valckenaer de Analogia, L. Gr. ed. Scheide, p. 250. 
 
 It is a matter of more importance for the student to know 
 that the particle fxa neither affirms nor denies, but only strength- 
 ens or adds intensity to v; hat is affirmed or denied. Whether 
 the oath taken be one in affirmation. or denial of any thing, is 
 to be ascertained from the context. In general, however, vai 
 is added when an affirmation is intended to be conveyed, and 
 cu, or some other negative, or else adversative particle, when 
 a negation is implied. Vid. Hoogeveen Doctrina Particula- 
 rum L. G. ed. Schutz, p. 292. 
 
 86. 
 
 In Greek, after an entire proposition is negatived, it is al- 
 ways customary to negative again all other definitions of a 
 general nature which are to be attached ; such as any one^ 
 at any time, any lohere, &;c. Hence in this language two ne- 
 gatives do not, as in Latin and English, destroy, but, on the 
 contrary, strengthen each other. We sometimes find on the 
 part of the Latin writers, more especially the early ones, an 
 imitation of the Greek idiom in this respect : thus — Ennius, 
 (ap. Fest.) Lapideo corde sunt midti, quos non miseret neminis. 
 — Plautus, Mil. 5. 1. 18. Jura te non nocituram hominihacde 
 re nemini. — ^Id. Bacch. 4. 9. 114. Keque ego haud committam ut 
 fecisse dicas. — Id. Epid. 4, 1,6. JYegue ea nunc ubi sit nescio. — 
 ibid. 5, 1, 57. JS''€que ille haud objiciet mihi. And among later 
 writer's — Propertius, 2, 15, ult. Absenti nemo ne nocuisse velit. 
 — Ovid. Pont 1, 1, 66. JVd nonpeccarim^ mors quoque non fa- 
 eiet. 
 
 * 91. 
 
 Those prepositions which govern two cases, answer for the 
 most part to the question whzther with the accusative, arid to 
 the question where with the dative. The genitive admits of 
 various significations, though more or less connected with the 
 idea, out of from. The limits of the present work forbid en- 
 larging upon the meanings of the prepositions respectively ; 
 this falls more within the scope of grammatical treatises ; to 
 these the student is referred. 
 
 t 
 
CREEK EXERCISES. APPENDIX II. 211 
 
 92. 
 
 This rule is retained verbatim from the former edition of 
 this work. It may be as well to quote the words of Dr. Neil- 
 son ; — " Ila^a and ntpog are joined, in this rule, for the sake of 
 conciseness, as they may commonly be translated by the same 
 words : yet there is, a marked distinction in the ideas re- 
 spectively expressed by them : ifa^a m general implying dura- 
 tion or possession, and ir^cg contingency.'" To this may be 
 added, as a caution to the student, that the term beside, in the 
 language of the rule, does not mean besides, or in addition to, 
 (which is included in the meaning luith for the dative,) but by, 
 or along side of; and that this signification is confined exclu- 
 sively to 'jra^a. 
 
 99. 
 
 The student must not confound xav with the accent, which 
 is compounded of xa« av, with xav, for xai s-\>, which has no 
 accentual mark. 
 
 FINIS. 
 

Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Dnve 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
*#-^-'%